MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM BRISBANE VOLUME 25 OCTOBER, 1987 PART 1 MEMOIRS OF THE (QUEENSLAND MUSEUM BRISBANE © Queensland Museum PO Box 3300, South Brisbane 4101, Australia Phone 06 7 3840 7555 Fax 06 7 3846 1226 Email qmlib@qm.qld.gov.au Website www.qm.qld.gov.au National Library of Australia card number ISSN 0079-8835 NOTE Papers published in this volume and in all previous volumes of the Afemoirs of the Queensland Museum maybe teproduced for scientific research, individual study or other educational purposes. Properly acknowledged quotations may be made but queries regarding the republication of any papers should be addressed to the Editor in Chief. Copies of the journal can be purchased from the Queensland Museum Shop. A Guide to Authors is displayed at the Queensland Museum web site A Queensland Government Project Typeset at the Queensland Museum Mem. Qd Mus. 25(1): 1—44.[1987] THE DIARY OF WILLIAM FREDERIC BARNETT IN SEARCH OF LEICHHARDT J.C.H. GILL Queensland Museum ABSTRACT Sixteen years after the disappearance of Leichhardt’s fourth expedition, its fate was still a live issue. The eminent botanist Dr Ferdinand von Mueller could not accept that all members of the expedition had perished. In 1864 Duncan McIntyre of Glengower via Castlemaine, Victoria, accompanied by William Frederic Barnett of Sandhurst, was searching for a sheep run in northwest Queensland. He found two old horses on the Dugald River (not known to have been left by any more recent explorer) and a little later two trees marked ‘L’ on the western bank of the Flinders River. He supposed he had found traces of the lost Leichhardt. Dr Mueller was firmly convinced that he had, and persuaded the ladies of Melbourne to raise a sum of money to finance an expedition, led by McIntyre, to the locality. The expedition failed through no fault of McIntyre’s and he in fact died in the field of ‘gulf fever’ on 4 June 1866. Barnett, who had been with him for part of the expedition, was eventually appointed to command the expedition in December 1866 and between January and May 1867 carried on the search for Leichhardt, without success. His diary of proceedings in 1867 (hitherto unpublished) forms the principal subject matter of this paper. What follows also reveals that the diarist, William Frederic Barnett, is not undeserving of a place in the annals of exploration in Australia. A shadowy, virtually unknown figure, the research generated by his diary has revealed him as a man who possessed courage, powers of endurance, leadership, and loyalty. These qualities do not appear to have had the recognition they deserved, either in his lifetime or afterwards. INTRODUCTION Included in the manuscript collections of the Queensland Museum, under accession no. 67/ 6114, is a manuscript diary. The catalogue card reads — BARNETT, FRED. (Manuscript) Leichhardt Search Expedition sent out by the ladies of Victoria. After Duncan MclIntyre’s death 1866, Barnett formed a party and continued the search. Then follows a physical description of the diary, which includes the information that it commences on 20 January 1867 and concludes on 27 May 1867. No provenance of the diary can be located in Museum records. It appears, however, that it was received sometime prior to November 1933 whilst the late Heber A. Longman was director and at a time when the Museum was desperately short of staff and funds. It has been found that on 21 November 1933 Longman sent a type-script copy of the diary to the Mitchell Library in Sydney. He mentioned in his covering letter that Mr Arthur Jose (1), a mutual friend of the Mitchell Librarian (Miss Ida Leeson) and himself, had suggested that a copy of the diary should be made for the Mitchell Library. The relevant correspondence has been turned up, but unfortunately throws no light either on the provenance of the diary. In isolation the diary has little significance, but once the events which brought it into existence are led forward, it assumes importance as the terminal record of what appears to have been the last nineteenth century official effort to find traces of the lost Leichhardt expedition, which had been missing since 1848. There are a number of other factors also which have to be taken into account in assessing the significance of the diary. There are the foundation of a new colony and the search for new pastoral runs involved. Furthermore one sees the value of exploration, quite apart from any hopes of finding Leichhardt, as a medium to gain knowledge of the colony’s remote areas. This would assist materially in the colony’s development. Thus it was that after 1859 the new Colony of Queensland became the focus of attention of those seeking new pastoral runs. The Plains of Promise of Stokes, the first Leichhardt expedition, the tragic fate of Burke and Wills and the explorations of George Elphinstone Dalrymple all combined to bh al{ract attention to North Queensland and to the northwest of the Colony in particular. However, there was the matter of the western boundary of the Colony which was considered by Governor Bowen and the first Colonial Parliament to require adjustment, The letters patent of 6 June 1859 defined the boundary as ‘the I4Ist meridian of east longitude, which is the eastern boundary of South Australia’, A.C. Gregory the Surveyor- General had advised the ministry that ‘a boundary at the [41st meridian would just cut off from Queensland the greater portion of the only territory available for settlement, i.¢. the Plains of Promise, and the only safe harbour, i.e. Investigator Road, in the Gulf of Carpentaria’. The local legislature asked for an extension of the boundary to the 138th meridian of east longitude. After sotie lmportuning by Bowen, and evidently by certain gentlemen In Victoria who were desirous of forming a settlement in northern Australia (a phenomenon not unknown today), the Imperial Government acceded to the request. On 12 April 1862 the Duke of Newcastle, Secretary of State for Colonies advised Bowen that the Letters Patent had been issued annexing to Queensland that part of ‘New South Wales as lies to the northward of the 21st parallel of south latitude, and between the 14/st and 138th meridians of east ongitude, together with all and every the adjacent islands their members and appurtenances in the Gulf of Carpentaria’. Queensland gained 120,000 Square miles of tertltory, Which now comprises such centres as Birdsville, Boulia, Camooweal, Hurketown, Cloncurry and Mount Isa, (2) THE McINTYRES AND BARNETT With the extension of the jurisdiction of Queensland a surge of settlement around the rivers flowing in to the Gulf of Carpentaria ensued. Some interested parties from the southern colonies even sought to overland their stock. Among these were Donald and Duncan McIntyre, (or M‘Intyre or MacIntyre). The name was spelled variously, but | have adopted the spelling used in the Australian Dictionary of Biography, viz McIntyre. Duncan Mcintyre was born in Scotland in 1831 sou of James Melntyre, a farmer, .and his wife, Mary, nee MacDougall, He was probably otphaned when young and adopted by a relation, Archibald McIntyre, whose son Donald was often supposed to be Duncan's brother. Mcintyre arrived in Port Phillip with his foster parents about 1849 according to the Australian Dictionary of Biography, However, other evidence indicates that an Archibald McIntyre and family arrived in the MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM ship ‘David Clarke’ in 1839, There is no record of such a family arriving ren years laler, untess they were not assisted immygrants. (3) Ultimately Dunvan worked as station superintendent at Bullock Creek, Gleagowel near Castlemaine, with afother relation, Donald Campbell. On 5 March [862 al St. James’ Cathedral, Melbourne, he married Mary Clyde Morris, In mid-1863 Duncan and Donald Melntyre decided to seck a run in the new country around the Gulf of Carpentaria. (4) They left Victoria with sheep and work horses, On their arrival at the Upper Darling in January 1864 they found it to be in flood, Being unable to drive their sheep across they perforce had to halt. Duncan McIntyre, with a small party, proceeded north to find a good route to Coopers Creek, He found several new creeks and lakes and ascertained that stock could be taken without difficulty to Coopers Creek. On his return he learned that the Queensland Government had imposed an embargo on the entry of stock from other colonies, either by land or by sea. An application 1o bring, their stack into Queensland having been made, the McelIntyres explored extensively the country jo the worth of the Darling and in to Queensland. Good country was found to the west of the Paroo River. but no permanent water. Forced by this lack they returned to the Paroo, There they met, coming north along the river, William Frederic Barnett, a young man of about 22 years. of age, who had then been in Australia for four years. As he is the author of the diary to be examined in this paper, it is opportune here to study his antecedents and how he came to be travelling along the Parvo in 1564. As explained in my acknowledgements, Mr D.K, Muir of Balgowlah, New South Wales, has compiled a Barnett family tree, which | reproduce as Fig, 1. From this it will be seen thac W.F. Barnett was the third son and fourth) child of Dr Adolphus Barnett and his wife, Sarah, nee Newman. For some reason, nut yet ascertained, the family split up in 1853 when Dr Barnett and his son, Adolphus Robert, left the family home in Limehouse, London and came to Australia. After one month in Sydney, they went to Sandhurst (now Bendigo, Victoria) where Dr Barnett remained until his death on 14 February 1867 (5). I February 1860 his wife and three remaining children joined him. They had sailed from London on 22 November 1859 in the ship ‘Kent’ and arrived in Melbourne on 20 February 1860, The Ship's passenger list indicates the family had THE DIARY OF BARNETT ODIGNIg SuIUOW TT aay BL81°6'L1 “Cl LLB a AWW aOITV oo1anag syUOW 61 eV SLQlOl'7@% “Cl PL8l A SLEt9 WVITIA SNHd100v SAWVE wOolddadadd ADYOILS | T1812 “a OL8I 4 ANV! NST ANITHAD AUVA . ODIGNAG L6B1'S'6% “A 9/0781 “A ONOULSWNUV SANVE O} 11H Guay Sax] LS Je gORTZIET OW NAMTVA SLEUTE9 °C EPR12 a «VSSIMV19 HLAAVZITS 1881-2 "a NOLAd1 MOMs 81819 "A 9L81 “a VITAWY NI13H AUVW HLIGA PL8l od rae) ee | SAWVf AYNSH duavVHOIld GaYvMda 01g? "a 69819 HVavS WZITA HLadVZITE ANITOYWVO (b ——} I £061°L'9¢ “A 89819 “A sogrorle “a SNHdTOdv WK “YOHLYY NHOL ANUNOB IAW TR81 1 EZ °C 9819 SMAYONV NHOr 0] ODIGNAG $9819 “WW ANANOATAW GBBl "P97 “Cd OF81? “A sdNNV AYVIWN VZITA “SaTeAA YINOS MAN ‘YePMosyeg Jo Jn “W'd “IW Aq patiduiog -aen Apmey youreg ayy, *] Of uaspiyo dais & smd OOIGNag £0617’ PI “A 8819 a (XASSID) VZITS HVUVS oolanag ODIGNAg suo 9 ady 91819 “8 wel 'a O88 "a ANNVS VZI19 AUVWN d HLIdGa oolanag S161 OV 11 “G Lest “a VINNVOIAN EO6V TT EE °C Pr8 8 Pe “dVE AVUAWV) 224 SIYYVH FLLOTYWHO MOOD UAILSAAOd VSSTAVTO TH GIvwaW SIXT LS Je 69810161 (WH 0) ODIGNAg L98L"9 “W OOIGNAag 6L81'C'81 A 1p8l'S be A VINNVITIA ZI61°S'PL “Cl LERT 9 Ed sOVMACaad WVITIIA 4l4a8d0u SAHd100dV ‘qdo4q YNH.LAV SVWOHL “LOA Can’ W) Aydeudorg so Areuonsiq ueleusny aag -* €S81 9 oftpuag uayi (asnoyawry) uopuo7y wo (qiuow 7) AeUpAs paauiy | 0981'7'0Z . JUAN, Jad (asnoyaur]) UOpUO] WOIs aUINOg Paty « VITVaLsnv ANXONOH AW 8881660 CO 71st? a «NVAMAN HVUVS Test ir ez We # o16I-6181 oOolNag L9BI'e'rl “Cd e189 a / LLANYVa LIANYVa {LLANUVa SNHdTOdV faa NNV-AUVAN sSnisnony LuagoY (ua) | LLANUV8 YAGNVSAT (ad) NOGNOT adSNOHAWI OL81-06L1' LLANYVa WVITTIA SVINOHL (ad) = LLANYVE SVWOHL i] 4 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM travelled as cabin passengers; evidently funds were not lacking. Also it states that Frederic was 14 years of age, whereas his father’s death certificate and later documentary evidence indicate he was at least four years older (6). Barnett had an aunt, Eliza, his mother’s sister, of whom he seems to have been extraordinarily fond. In November 1864 he wrote a long letter to her from the River Paroo, New South Wales (7). This letter is a fruitful source of information about Barnett’s colonial career and also regarding his meeting with the McIntyres and some of his subsequent dealings with them; Duncan McIntyre (Fig. 2) in particular. All the factual information which follows is derived from Barnett’s letter to his aunt. He had worked as a clerk at a bank in Sandhurst for an uncertain period but resigned because he considered ‘the bank authorities treated me shamefully’, He stated he disliked desk work, had other (unstated) reasons for wishing to leave Bendigo and felt he would get on better in an occupation he liked. The letter refers elsewhere to his and family troubles without going into detail. Dr Adolphus Barnett became insolvent on 7 June 1861 (8). The problems created by this probably had their effect on Frederic. Probably from early 1862 Barnett worked at a Mr Lintott’s cattle station at Lake Bael Bael as a station hand, but was treated as one of the family. After eighteen months it was decided to put sheep on the run. Barnett was put in charge of a flock of 10,000 on the River Edwards in New South Wales and drove them safely to Bael Bael. Lintott advised Barnett he should go into new country, where he would have a better chance to get on. If he was unsuccessful he could return to Bael Bael. Barnett started up the Darling River to seek employment at the Bogan River Pastoral Company’s station at the junction of the Darling and Warrego Rivers. He had not gone far up the Darling when he was met by the greatest flood in that river in living memory — white or black. After battling through flooded areas (sometimes travelling thirty-five miles to cover five miles of forward progress) he arrived at Mount Murchison station. Here he was informed that he would not be able to go further as the flood waters were spreading ninety miles back from the river a little further upstream. J.H. Heaton’s Australian Dictionary of Dates (1879) confirms that there were floods in New South Wales during February to July 1864. Ross Reid, the owner of Mount Murchison, gave Barnett a caretaking job. The homestead had Fic 2. A portrait of Duncan McIntyre. to be abandoned temporarily so Reid could go to look after his stock, which had been moved away from the flooded area. Barnett lived in the homestead which was on a knoll turned into an island by the flood. He had for a companion a young missionary, who was flood bound also and who turned out to be a first rate cook. Barnett was able to obtain plenty of ducks and pigeons for the cooking pot, so they lived well. Being anxious to move on, Barnett considered closely the geography of the country to the north and decided it was possible to travel directly across to the Paroo River. He could go up this stream and then cross to the Warrego and thus come to the Bogan River Pastoral Company’s station, his original destination. His ‘mate’ (the missionary) accompanied him. They procured rations from Mount Murchison, packed them on a spare horse and set out for the Paroo. After 150 miles of travel they arrived at Putha Putha on the Paroo. The missionary learning that a gentleman, to whom he had introductions, had an out-station from the Darling about 60 miles away, decided he wanted to go there. Barnett saw him there safely and then returned to the Parao. He proceeded up the river and nearing the Queensland boundary he met and joined the MclIntyres and their party. This meeting was of great significance for Barnett. Duncan McIntyre’s influence on him was considerable and Barnett’s ambition thereafter was to be an explorer, THE DIARY OF BARNETT For the next several years his life was closely imerwoven with Melntyre’s and even after the death of the latter his influence on Barnett continued lo be strong, It is vecessary lo recount Melniyre'’s story because what he did and what happened to him, motivated Barnett to follow in his footsteps and to write the diary around which this paper has been written. The introduction which follows may seem long, but il enhances the diary by giving the reader a full knowledge of what brought into being Barnett’s record of ile final phase of the Leichhardt Search Expedition. NORTHWARDS TO THE GULF Barnett confirms that the Queensland Government would not allow the introduction of sheep or cattle for fear of disease and this had stopped the Meintyres from taking their sheep through to the Gulf of Carpentaria as orginally planned. They were compelled to wait for a permit to enter the colony with their sheep. However Barnett says— Dunean McIntyre was wishing very much to go on & explore the country to the Crulfs bis brother Donald being quite sufficient to look after the sheep — but he wanted someone to go with him. It was just the style of thing to suit me and had he not proposed for me to accampany him | should have volunteered. We al Ofice set to Work petting rations ready & packed & breaking horses for the journey. We determined our party should consist of — Duncan Melntyre, chief, Wm. Fred Barnett, second in command, & Albert, Charlie & Billy (blackfellows) our subordinates, 25 horses & | Kangaroo dog & our Tations to consist of tea, flour, sugar & w litle rice, | will now refer to my journal — 21 June 1864 We experienced much trouble getting the packs on, the horses being very fresh & a number of them lately broken. At lasi wé were all ready to start when unfortunately a fold (sic — ?foal) of one of the pack mares gol amongst our mob, not wishing to take {I McIntyre desired me to cut it out. In doing so I disturbed the pack horses who when they began to move about felt their girths and packs father disagreeable and thereupon they one & all commenced bucking shying & kicking & galloping until they had tid themselves of them; it was indeed a very deplorable yet most ludicrous sight which beggars description — We brought up the horses again, repaired the packs, got them on & at length started altho’ il only wanted an hour to sunset. Donald Melnryre & MeCloud come with us for a few days journey. Sunday 3 July. We are camped to day on a beautiful lake never before visited by white men; as Donald & MeCloud leave us tomorrow we have christemed it “‘Lake Farewell’. The horses are now moderately easy to manage having become used to the packs — Write to my brother & shoot ducks for supper. From Monday 4 July, Mcintyre and Barnett were on their own with the three aboriginals and began to make their way towards Coopers Creek. On this stage young Mr Barnett was brought face to face, albeit vicariously, with the perils of exploring and pioneering far from the haunts of one’s own kind, The Riverine Herald of Echuca reported, alter an interview with McIntyre on his return from the journey to the Gulf, in mournful detajl — .» Nothing new was discovered in passing through the country which had before been explored by them, for two or three hundred miles, as regards the features of the country. But it will be heard with satisfaction by the relatives and friends of the late Mr. Curlewis, that his remains, together with those of his companion, M’Culloch, were discovered by Mr. M'Intyre, and that his fate has been placed beyond all doubt. The blacks pointed out the grave in which they were laid together, and described how they had been murdered. The bones were disinterred, and the skulls of both these unfortunate young men were found to have been fractured by blows from some heavy weapons. They were undoubtedly the remains of white men, and part of a bridle rein was found tied round them, as if it had been used by the blacks Lo carry the bodies. A piece of guernsey shirt, very much blood-stained, was also found. They were killed, it appears, about a mile from where they were buried, in a dry billagong. The excuse given for the murder was that Mr. Curlewis had coerced a black-fellow to accompany him to show him the country, and that this man, not liking to go, persuaded four others to assist him im killing the two white men, One evening, after the party had camped, this black fellow asked permission from Mr. Curlewis to go out to look for ducks. The permission was granted him, and he went away to the other blacks, and arranged with them to come st a given signal during the night. Having removed the firearms and planted them, he gave the signal as soon as the two travellers were asleep, when his accomplices came up and speared them, after which they smashed their heads in with waddies and tomahawks. This Mr M'Intyre believes to be a correct account of the murder, The remains were carefully re-interred, and the spot marked. A special note of the locality was taken, as Mr. Curlewis was well known to Mr. M'Intyre, and he was desirous of doing all in his power to honor the memory of the unfortunate deceased. (9) Barnett did not recount this grisly tale to his aunt, His next journal extract i dated Friday 15 July — Camped on Coopers River. Yesterday we passed over immense plainy of roley poley (a very prickly hush); having mutch trouble in driving the horses ayer 6 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM them and continuing to travel long after dark for water we did not notice our dog had stayed behind, we shall have to go on without him tomorrow. Four blackfellows pass at some distance from our camp but do not pay any attention to our signs to come up. McIntyre and Charlie go out for game & return with a native companion, 3 ducks, 2 hawk & an owl. Coopers Creek was crossed at 26°10’ south and followed up for twenty miles. They then struck out northwesterly over indifferent country for several days, which they found to be waterless. (10) Barnett takes up the tale again — Sunday 24 July. Yesterday we left Charlie and Albert behind to find & bring up 4 horses which were missing the whole party not being able to remain as we had camped without water. They had not arrived this morning & as we haé camped again without water, McIntyre & Billy proceeded with the horses & I remain to bring up Charlie & Albert. I go on a Stony rise that I may the more readily see the horses, should they come up, & lie down with the bridle of my horse in my hand. Presently I see two black objects approaching & bye & bye make them out to be two blackfellows; not knowing but that there may be more I mount my horse & look to my revolver. When within 200 yds they see me & their astonishment is evident — I cooey to them but they will not come up but alter their course to avoid me & as soon as they get to a bush make a fire & one of them stepping out in front with a fire stick which he kept waving towards me whilst he cried out some incantation in a loud voice; this having been completed they pursued their way. About an hour before sunset Charlie & Albert came up with the lost horses & without delay we started to overtake Mcintyre; we had not proceeded more than 5 miles to a large dry creek of many channels when we met McIntyre and Billy returning with the horses. They had met a large party of blacks who surrounded them & by their gesticulations appeared to be hostile — tapping their shields with their boomerangs & then their heads; McIntyre fired a shot close to the foremost one which rather intimidated them & as he imagined they had already killed me he had returned to find out or give me warning of their presence, Having seen to all the firearms & slackened the fastenings of our knives and tomahawks we started for where McIntyre had turned intending to make our way through the darkies should they oppose our progress for we had now been two nights & nearly 3 days without water & that period in this latitude is fearful. We had crossed nearly all the channels of the creek when we observed 15 or 20 blacks stooping over something very busily; as soon as they saw us they gave a yell & disappeared amongst the timber. We found that they had been busy ripping open one of our flour packs which had been thrown off by one of the horses & not noticed by McIntyre & Billy in their hasty retreat. Of course we halted to repair the pack, as we could not afford to lose nearly a cwt of flour; whilst doing so 20 to 30 blacks made their appearance & pointed to their weapons which they had left by the pack; I carelessly threw them to them laughing at the same time, as well as my parched mouth would allow me, & made signs that we wanted water — they pointed the way we had come from, Being painfully convinced there was no water the way the blacks pointed we determined to follow them as they were sure to go to water. They kept amongst the timber some distance continually jabbering in a loud tone & pointing the way we had come from; at length seeing we would not leave them & all of us making signs for water, they struck across a plane (sic) & at length to our great delight & relief came upon a small lagoon & having quenched our thirst we unpacked the horses & prepared to have a yarn with our unwilling guides who were watching us evidently much interested. We beckoned for them to come up & being joined by some more from a large camp we could see about two miles off, they did : soon they were rubbing our hands & faces pointing significantly to the flour as if they thought they were painted but when I showed them my arms & breast their astonishment was immense. We explained to them that we should stay here one night & then go away a long way; to show our power McIntyre shot a hawk & after giving them a few trifles we bid them good night giving them to understand that should they make their appearance during the night we should cause them to tumble down like the hawk. They are a fine lot of men, wear no clothing & circumcise, are afraid of horses but only laugh when a loaded revolver is pointed at them. They have evidently never seen white men before. Barnett, despite his youth and comparative inexperience, was shaping up well to the exigencies of the explorer’s life. He had suffered the privations of thirst and had learned how an element of bluff could avert possible hostile confrontations with the natives. In McIntyre he had a cool headed, canny leader; but obviously he was good support material. For a while they enjoyed better travelling conditions, having reached another water system in which four new rivers were found. The first of these was named in honour of the Rev. Joseph Docker of Wangaratta, one of the most generous supporters of the original Victorian expedition. From the Docker River, on a northwesterly course, they reached the Mueller River of McKinlay, crossing this watercourse in 23° south. Continuing their northwestern direction, they met about a degree further west, and in about 22° south, the very faint tracks of animals, seemingly either goats or sheep, and horses, at a spot not known to have been traversed by any explorer. (11) From this location a system chiefly of granite mountains extends in two main lines, southwest and northwest. The Mountain range was most difficult THE DIARY OF BARNETT 1 to cross, as Witness a further extract from Barnett’s Journal as told to his aunt — Thursday 4 Aug. We have had @ dreadful day's work today over almost impassible (sic) mountains. The horses climbing up & when nearly reaching the tops having to £0 single file (hrough little gaps ..,the only possible places to gel over the mountains crown-like tops; when they came to the precipitous descents they snorted back with fear & it was with great difficulty we compelled them; often [ though they would be dashed to pieces by losing their footing or when they reached the bottom for in thelr way they dislodged large blocks of rock which descending carried all before them & reached the bottom with a deafening crash. At length we came (0 a dry sandy creek with almost perpendicular mountains on both sides ahout 500 ft. high: as the creek was coming from the direction we wanted to go we followed il up hoping to get water near its head & cross on to the ourthern drainage tomorrow, We had not proceeded far along the creek when the bed! was frequently of granite & boulders partially blocked it up; after much difficulty we gol up a ravine or glen & in a granite basin found plenty of water.. Mcintyre went further up and found the channel entirely blocked up with immense granite boulders suo that we shall have to turn back some distance tomorrow & try another pass. This is indeed a wild looking place; for about 20 yds width blocks of granite are heaped & strewed about in fantastic ways, then on either side there is a tugged incline for LOO yds from which the mountains go up nearly perpendicular for 400 to 500 yds. No feed for the horses who remain standing where we left them, They had been making for the headwaters of the Albert River, but the range described by Barnett was that which Burke had reported as giving such terrible work to the camels that they groaned and bled, McIntyre and Barnett found their horses’ feet got so much worn down by the rocks that it became necessary to follow a fall of water to the north, and afterwards to the northeast, in order to get down on to the low country, Barnett takes up the tale again — Saturday 6 Aug. Yesterday after much difficult travelling we succeeded in getting on the northern drainage: we followed down a creek which soon led us to a beautiful valley & at the first water we came to we camped. Today as we continued along the creek we surprised some blacks who with frightful yells ser fire to the grass & ran up the mountains which were nol far distant. Fifty or sixty of them kept up with us for about three miles running along the top of the mountains shouting and yelling hideously, About three miles further on we stopped Lo take an observation of the sun & we found that our axe had got away somehow. Thinking that perchance it had been torn fram the pack in some scrub we had passed through, land Charlie start back m quest of it, We had gone aboul 3 miles when Wwe heard a chopping over a small ridge & imagining that very likely that blackfellows had picked it up & were using it we rode over the ridge & saw a black fellow & his lubra busy getting a possum out of a tree. So busily were they engaged in their occupation Lhat we were not observed until close up & I cough. They instanily sprang to their feet and dropping everything they had, stood for a moment or two in mute bewilderment & then with yells that made the mountains ring again, scampered off. Seeing thar the blackfellow was using his own tomahawk (a sharpened stone fastencd between sticks) & hearing yells in all directions | deemed it advisable to give up the search & returned io the party. We kept on until after sundown without seeing water but observing the sund in the creek looked damp in one place we made a hole which was soon filled with water; having enlarged the hole to ger sutcient water for the horses, we shot two cockatoos & a pigeon for supper & camped. These extracts will give you an idea of our journey, On the 28th August we arrived af the Gall of Carpentaria but mangrove saltwater swamps & creeks prevented our reaching the sea beach & obtaining a sight of the Ocean tho* we were within 2 miles of it, It was impossible for horses to cross the creeks, the bank being almost perpendicular & the tide running out very strong. The presence of 204) or 300 Hostile black Rushing to the fierce attack (2) Bomerang (sic) & waddy wildly shaking (1) Reed spear in woomers firmly placing rendered it foolhardiness to swim across & proceed on foot to say nothing of the alligators. Barnert's essay into verse does not overstate the case as McIntyre states (hat when they were within a mile of the coast, having got in between two deep salt mangrove creeks, they were hemmed in by a Jaree number of blacks, whom they were obliged to charge in order to get out. As the Riverine Herald says — Happily, however, by preserving his presence of mind, he suceeeded in searing them so much that he had no occasion ty fire on them, bul he was deprived of the opportunity of getting a sight of the ocean, which he could only have obtained by shawing fight and shooting a mamber of them. He considered, however, that this gratification would have been too dearly bought at a sacrifice of human life . Ru neither on ihe journey out nor back was a single blackfellow shot, Once or twice an eneminter seemed inevitable, hut by showing a firm froni, and seeming to disregard their presence, the necessity was avoided, SOUTHWARD BOUND It seems desirable to repeat Barneti's coucluding remarks about the journey in his letter to his aunt before moving on to the matters which appear to have been rezarded as Meclfntyre's exclusive 8 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSELM province for publication to the world ar large. Barnett says — Having proceeded up the river Flinders about 200 Niles On Our homeward journey we came upon a newly farmed sheep station — the nearest settlement to the Gulf. We continued up the river calling ar the several stations thal have lately been formed: from thence along Walkers creek, Landsborough Creek & on to the river Thompson which we followed up some distance & then struck across Geepers Ree — rather the Barcoo, on to the head of Bulla which we followed down until we came lo a cattle station which hag been formed since we started; here we got on our Outward track & in a few days { was reading your letter & playing with our dog that we left at Cooper River going out & he had found his way home 300 miles, causing a good many to think we had perished. | have given you an idea of our homeward course— I can only give you our outward by saying thar it was generally N.W, as We Were endeavouring to make the Albert River (want of water prevented us). We crossed Mekinlay's track abour Lat.25 Burke & Wills Lat. 20, Landsborough’s Lat,19 & recrossed Burke & Wills 18.3050 if you get a lately published map of Australia with the routes of the explorers on it & take into comsideration that our journey was make(sic) ina dry season Whereas the explorers had good ones & yet we never carried water tho’ they did — that we travelled a greater disrance (less time then any of them & came back in good health, you will haye sume idea what a great Australian pioneer | have become. Who would have thought the delicate boy would have grown to the hardy back woodsman? Asit turned out, unhappily, he was not as hardy as he supposed. Generally Mclntyre and Barnett agree on all but the odd small detail, In amplification of what Barnett had to say about the ourward trip, it is noted that McIntyre says that once the northern coast range was crossed the Flinders River Was struck at a polit a little south of Donor's Hill (@hout 18°43'S, 140°33'E), from which it was followed for the first time to the sea (had the aboriginals not prevented their covering that last mile or so). The journey from the Paroo to Coopers Creek took 22 days and the stage from the latter to the sea took a further 34 days, this period being little over half the time caken by either Burke or McKinlay. McIntyre praised Barnett for his conduct during the trip, As already indicated in spire of his youth and previous inexperience in the bush le had shown a suprising aptitude for the work ef exploring. The Riverine Herald al 31 December [864 portentiously remarks that it will be gratifying to his Sandhurst friends to hear of Rarnett's being spoken of in terms of high praise by Mr. MeIntyre. (12) TRACES OF LEICHHARDT? Accounts as to when the incidents of note on this trip of McIntyre’s occurred vary greatly, Some say they happened, but do not say when; others say on the way to the Gulf and others, again, on the return from there. However,, a letter written jointly by Doctors David Wilkie and Ferdinand von Mueller to the Melbourne press on 21 December 1864 may be taken as authoritative as to the details and chronological order of the incidents, The learned gentlemen have this to say — From hence {the animal tracks in about 22° south}, a system chiefly of granite mountains sends its ramifications in two main lines south-west and north- west, On a new principal tributary of the Flinders River, elsing on the north-west Tank of this mountain tract, Mr. McIntyre passed to the main stream of the Flinders, observing in about 20 degress 40. minute South and aboul one degree westward of Burke and Will's track, two old horses, an event to which not too much importance can be attached, when it is remembered that neither (he Victorian explorers, nor Landsborough, nor A. Gregory, nor Leichhardt, in his first glorious expedition, abandoned any horses in any adjacent locality, Mr Walker's horses being left about 300 miles to the cast. A still more important discovery rewarded Mr Melntyre's exertions after having reached on the Flinders line, the Carpentaria Gull; for on his return journey whilst following up the main east branch of the Flinders River, he noticed on its western bank, In approximate latitude, 20 degrees south, two trees each bearing a large L, no number attached as a mark, indicating, as we, with Mr. Mctotyre feel convinced, a Leichhardtian camp. The tributary of the Flinders was named by McIntyre the Dugald River and that was where the horses had been found. On the return journey McIntyre by keeping to the Flinders found that the coast range consisted only of high undulating downs without any stones. The difficult terrain of the outward journey, where water could only be obtained from rocky basins in gorges and no feed was available for the horses, could thus be avoided in any future journey. He found that the Flinders was settled from its head to within 280 miles of the sea. One station, however, was 130 miles lower down, The squatters on the river had lost about thirty per cent of their sheep from the poison bush coming over the ranges fram east Queensland. Cattle losses had been considerable also from the poison bush and at least fifty per cent had been lost from the ravages of pleuro-pneumonia. A large percentage of horses bad died from snake bites. Landsborough had presented the Flinders as a ‘finely-watered” river, 120 yards wide and flowing. McIntyre found it dry THE DIARY OF BARNETT 9 20 miles from the sea and higher up it was often dry for ten miles at a stretch and the general width was found to be 30 or 40 yards. Most of the stations were completely out of provisions. They were cut off by the drought from all communication with Port Denison. McIntyre called at Bowen Downs Station at the head of the Thomson River and found the cattle there were all clean and in splendid condition, despite the dryness of the season. From there to Coopers Creek the country was well-watered but unstocked. McIntyre had planned to return near Landsborough’s tracks, to the source of the Bulloo and from that river to the Paroo and accomplished the whole journey in twenty weeks. (13) That McIntyre was convinced he had found traces of Leichhardt is evidenced by his hasty return to Victoria. As soon as he had reached the telegraphic line at Swan Hill on the Murray River he sent a telegram to the Secretary of the Royal Society of Victoria on the 15 December 1864 — Found between Burke and Sturt tracks about 200 miles from Carpentaria two old horses and saw very old tracks of a party going south west; also two trees marked L about fifteen years old. Duncan McIntyre Glengower by Castlemaine. Dr Robert L.J. Ellery of the Victorian Observatory the Secretary of the Royal Society, got in touch with Dr Mueller for his views as to whether McIntyre had come across some traces of Landsborough’s party. Mueller replied promptly that no horses had been lost by Landsborough in his South West expedition from the Gulf of Carpentaria. Hence if the two L’s were made by the party to which the horses belonged they could not be marks made by Landsborough. Mueller wondered if there might not be some mistake as to the distance from the Gulf of Carpentaria. He told Ellery that Mr Gregory had told Mr Giles of the discovery of other trees marked L at or about the Alice River. Mueller advised Ellery to publish the telegram. It appeared in the Argus with accompanying brief letters from Ellery and Mueller on 17 December 1864 and was republished in the Australasian on the following Saturday 24 December. The almost immediate follow up by Drs Wilkie and Mueller appeared as already stated in the Age on 21 December 1864. This was republished in the Australasian on 24 December. Apart from the detail about the location of horses and trees already covered, the letter had this to say after stating the conviction of those concerned that the two L trees indicated a Leichhardtian camp — With this position the traces of Leichhardt, recently found on the Alice River, can be brought into a line of contact. These L’s are clearly distinct from any marks of Landsborough’s camps, who in that latitude kept the eastern bank of the Flinders River and who, moreover, attached a consecutive number to his marked camp trees. If further proofs of distinction were wanting, we might add that the bark had encroached to the extent of four of five inches on the incision of the L’s, whereby a much greater age of the letters is established than that of Landsborough’s camps; and still further we have evidence of one of the natives, who served both Landsborough’s and Mclntyre’s expeditions, declaring the camp foreign to the expedition of the former gentleman. The position of these momentous trees being in flooded ground, it would have been in vain to search for further camp traces. Mr McIntyre, in carrying out a judiciously arranged plan, went homeward near Landsborough’s tracks, to the sources of the Bulla (sic! Bulloo?), and finally from this river to the Paroo, accomplishing in twenty weeks a journey, by which he has secured a prominent and honourable position amongst our explorers, and this by slender and entirely private means, accompanied only by one of his countrymen and five (sic) aborigines. Shall, whilst we can avail ourselves of the talents of tried and spirited travellers, like Mr. McIntyre and Mr. Giles, the fate of one of the most famed explorers which the world ever possessed, remain uncared for? Shall the destiny of him, who, in Australia, discovered the ‘North-west passage’, remain still for an indefinite period unascertained? And shall the revelation of the fate of this truly great man be any longer left to the chances of mere accident? A lengthy account, entitled ‘Late Explorations on the Shores of Carpentaria’, of the journey of Mclntyre and Barnett appeared in the Riverine Herald of Echuca on 31 December 1864. It was this article which was reproduced as a supplement in the Brisbane Courier of 12 January 1865. The L’s on the trees were described in detail; McIntyre expressed the opinion that the letters seen were evidently cut by a skilled hand and could not have been the work of the blacks. The horses, which McIntyre had brought back with him, were also described. One was a bay and the other a black. There were illegible brands on both of them and each had a blotched brand on the same part of the back. Both were old horses. McIntyre said he had horses in his mob fifteen or sixteen years of age, which performed the whole journey well, while the two picked up by him knocked up in a very short time. This indicated they must have been of great age indeed, for when found they were rolling fat. Wh MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM MUELLER AND THE LADIES OF MELBOURNE On ¥ February 1865 Dr Mueller gave a lecture at St, George’s Hall, Melbourne on ‘The Fate of Leichhardt’. In his own words — “some space of time has elapsed since Dr. Wilkie and myself drew public attention to the important bearings of Mr Mcintyre’s researches on Leichhardt's fale, without any champion appeariny for the lost explorers; and on consulting with my honourable friend, we felt that our call should not be suffered to die away, and resolved that it should be renewed in the present demonstration’. He then went on at great length to discuss the possible ends which Leichhardt and his party had met; murdered by the natives; destroyed in a terrible hailstorm; drowned in a flood or burned in a bushfire. On the other hand they might have lost their livestock to poison weed and be living marooned in an area, Which might be capable of sustaining them on a subsistence level, but from Which neither retreat nor advance was possible. It was a very dramatic presentation and ainied at the ladies of Victoria in an endeavour to enlist their support for a fund raising venture to finance a search for Leichhardt based on the seemingly new evidence found hy MeIntyre. He advocated the services of McIntyre should be secured. Mueller said — This traveller entertains a persuasion, in which | fully share, that Leichhardts fate can be discovered, and is inspired with an enthusiam for bearing the standard of geographic science still further through this continent. With calm jodgment be combines trained knowledge, travelling experience, an earnest will, and an unflinching perseverance; and above all he is willing to sacrifice private interest in the good cause. | am commissioned hy Mr McIntyre to state, that whosoever in Leichhardt’s search will take rhe field may unhesilatingly command from him every information calculated to secure success. At the end of the lecture several men addressed the meeting. A deputation was appointed, consisting of Drs Wilkie, Crooke, Eades, Embling, Bleasdale and Mueller and Messrs Summers, Bonwick and Kyte, to wait on the heads of the church sections to solicit (hat the measure suggested by Dr Mueller, to call the ladies together for delegating representatives to a central committee be carried our. The central committee would, when appointed, solicit Funds to finance a search tor Leichhardt. (14) The enterprise, needless to say, atcracted some attention. A Mr S, Deveson of Little Bendigo, Ballarat, came up With the suggestion that if an expedition was sent it should be supplied with materials for making a number of fire balloons. One should be sent up each evening when the relief party came to country considered by the leader ‘to afford a reasonable prospect of proving serviceable to the lost men’. Mr Deveson expressed the view that any survivor who sighted the fire balloon would at once conclude thai civilised beings were in their vicinity and would use every effort to come in contact with them, (15) John Roper, who had accompanied Leichhardt to Port Essington wrote, from the River Acheron in Victoria’s southern highlands, to Dr Mueller expressing his gratitude at the efforts being made to promote a search his old friend and leader, Leichhardt. He wished the endeavour every success and hoped that a last the world would find what had happened to Leichhardt. (16) A.W. Howitt also wrote to Dr Mueller. He said he had questioned the natives about parties of white men in the interior and had done this as far as latitude 25°30’ south. Because of his ability to speak the language of that part of the interior he could be sure of understanding and making himself understood, He found that the natives were acquainted with the movements of Sturt's party, Gregory and the later explorers. He could never gain the least intelligence about such a party as Leichhardt’s, In the circumstances Howitt considered that their traces must be sought considerably north of the latitude he had mentioned. This supported the hypotheses of Mueller and Mel{ntyre. (17) However, all was not sweetness and light, A diseordant note had been struck, about three weeks before Howitt’s letter, by a gentleman who signed himself ‘A Murray Squatter’. He wrote from Kasima on 28 April 1865 to the Riverine Herald as follows — Can you inform me and many others who really think that something should be done to learn Leichhardt's fate, what has been done or is to be done about this Leichhardt expedition. I have received a circular from the Ladies’ Committee, written with ureat taste and good feeling, as might be expected, but we want something more than taste, or even goad feeling, in fitting out such an expedition. There was enoueh of both and to spare in that most woeful Burke and Wills affairs, yet see what a miserable end they came fo, To initiate, and even carry on, such a benevolent movement, to enlist sympathy and collect funds, the ladies are admirably suitable; but imagine sixteen ladies selecting horses and bargaining for saddles in Bourke Street, OF course, they will leave all that to otliers but to whom? Who is to be the leader? Who have the ladies to consult and advise with as to the choice of a leader? And who is that leader to consuli with asio his general proceedings? A man must THE DIARY OF BARNETT i be chosen who may be entrusted with everything, but upon many points any prudent man would prefer being supported by other men’s opinions. There must be a pre-arranged route, for instance, and who is to lay it down? Certainly not the leader unrestricted; it would be unfair to him, for if, for one thing, he found good sheep country and applied for it, it would undoubtedly be said that he had paid much more attention to his own interest than the public object of his journey, as was freely enough said of more than one of disinterested searches after Burke and Wills; and the best man if unrestricted, might be biased by an anxiety to bring the expedition to a close, to secure some paradise he had discovered. This has been originated by Dr. Mueller and Dr. Wilkie’s report, and I would like to know if they are the ladies only advisers. They are both very good men — the first is a botantist of European reputation, and | believe thoroughly acquainted with the whole subject upon paper, but both too much mixed up with Burke and Wills failure to give entire confidence to this if placed under their auspices. In fact, not to make too fine a point of it, people wont have them, that is alone; associated with others their unfortunate experience might be useful. I am ready to subscribe £10 or £20 if I can see that it will be carried out practically and efficiently, but with the greatest respect for the ladies, I should like to know who they intend to appoint, and who are to assist them in arranging with him as to his proceedings before I subscribe, and I can say that almost everyone I have spoken to is of the same opinion. (18) Dr Mueller, three weeks later, replied to the Murray Squatter at considerable length, ostensibly to shield Dr Wilkie against an attack which, had the Kasima gentleman been acquainted with all the facts connected with the first Victorian expedition, he could never have ventured. The Doctor pointed out that neither Dr Wilkie nor himself were involved with the arrangements which led to the disasters of the Burke and Wills expedition; in fact they were both opposed to the decision which led to its sad fate. Now that he had entered ‘the arena’ Dr Mueller took the opportunity to repel the attacks against himself. He pointed out that since 1848 he had travelled about 24,000 miles within Australia and no one can say he had ever deviated from public duties for the sake of personal interests. He treasured his reputation and would not hazard it in promoting the ladies’ enterprise other than for altruistic motives. Murray Squatter should be aware from practical considerations that a safe and tried explorer like McIntyre should not be fettered in the details of his operations. Rather than seeking to impede the objects of the enterprise every right minded person should be seeking to assist the ladies. It had been stated months ago that the ladies, when the fund was obtained, would go to gentlemen for advice that might be needed and seek from them the counsel for practical initiation of their enterprise. (19) Mrs Eliza S. Bromby, the president and Mrs Ellen Tierney, the Honorary Secretary, of the Leichhardt Search Committee sent a telegram to Lady Bowen in Brisbane. It read: The Victorian Government will bear a share of the expenditure which may be incurred in prosecuting a search of Leichhardt if other Governments will assist. If Queensland will contribute liberally say £1,000 — the expedition can be organised immediately; otherwise the services of Mr M’Intyre (sic) and the advantages of instituting the search a year earlier will be lost. Private contributions will soon amount to £1,000. Pray send soon an answer; surety to be given that no squatting interest will be pursued. On 3 June 1865 Lady Bowen received a further telegram from Melbourne: South Australian Government announces its decision to recommend unconditionally a vote for the Leichhardt search to Parliament. Lady Bowen replied on the same day: The Queensland Government will recommend to Parliament a vote for the Leichhardt Search. I will form a Ladies Committee to receive contributions. The Brisbane Courier stated, after her return from Ipswich, Lady Bowen will call a public meeting of ladies with the object of forming the committee referred to. Meanwhile, contributions in aid of the ‘Leichhardt Search Fund’ will be received by Captain Pitt, R.A., Government House. Subscriptions already received:— Sir George and Lady Bowen £5; Hon. R.G.W. Herbert £2; C. Fitzsimmons Esq., M.L.A., £5. (20) On 20 June 1865 the Rev. W.B. Clarke, well known for his geological researches in Australia, wrote from Sydney to Dr Mueller expressing his strong support for the Leichhardt search. He said that in 1858 he had canvassed the New South Wales Government to prosecute a search for the lost expedition to clear up the mystery of Leichhardt’s disappearance and had recommended the search be concentrated upon the area between 25° and 28° south latitude and between 144° and 148° east longitude (an area of just on 100,000 square miles). The Rev. Clarke notes with satisfaction that McIntyre’s discoveries had been within that region, as the New South Wales Government had not given any support to his proposal. (21) The Australasian of 1 July 1865 also contained an item of topical interest — Mr. Donald Campbell, of Glengower, deserves much credit for the spirited and disinterested manner 2 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 0 Which fe completed jn the metropolis all arrangements for the Leichhardt search, acting on behalf of bis nephew, Mr. Melntyre, who takes command of the expedition. Those members of the party who are not yet with Mr. Mclnryre, on the Darling, are required to he at Glengower by the end of the week, from whence they will then start with the camels and horses for Mount Murchison without delay. Provisions will be brought from one af the Queensland ports to the sources af the Thontson River. For the long keeping of the dromedarjes the colony I indebted to the Messrs. Samuel and Charles Wilson of the Wimmera, THE SEARCH FOR LEICHHARDT On 3 July 1865 the Leichhardt search party left Glengower at mid-day [it was a Monday]. According to the Castlemaine Daily News all the men seemed accustomed to bush life and endurance and mostly of middle age. None of them, however, excepting che leader, Mr McIntyre and Dr Murray, the second in command and surgeon, had been in previous expedition parties, Mr MeIntyre was then supposed to be about 500 miles from the Gulf and was to meet the purty on 1 August on the Darling. In the meantime the party was to travel under the leadership of Dr Murray and Mr Gray, the latter being an experienced bustiman, A lengchy letter from William Landsborough to the Queensland Guardian was at his request republished in the Victorian press, It expressed some practical views on the nrodus operand? of the search for Leichhardt. Landsborough appears to have been under the impression that Howitt would be accompanying the expedition as surveyor and journalist; duties which should not devolve on McIntyre as leader. However, in a footnote to the letter Landsborough says Mr. Mueller has just ordered me to send a quantity of provisions to Cornish Creek, one of the heads of the Thomson; and has informed me thal the dromedaries are about to be taken ta the Darling, and that Dr. Murray (of Howitt's expedition in search of Burke) is to join the party, (22) Dr Murray will be discussed at length later on, but suffice it to say at this stage it was Mueller's and the Ladies Committee's fatal mistake when they appointed him as second in command of the expedition. A Queensland letter of | July 1865 which appeared in the Ausiralasian on 15 July 1865 indicated that Queensland, led by Lady Bowen, was putting its best foot forward to raise momey for the expedition. The Government of Queensland was expected to give at least £500. It was believed Queensland would bear a fair share of the expenses of the expedition. Then full of praise for the generosily of the Legislature and people of Queensland Dr Mueller published a letter he had received from Mr Gordon Sandeman, M.L.A. for Leichhardt (Q) which informed the Doctor that the Queensland ‘House of Assembly’ had voted £1,000, in aid of the ‘Leichhardt Search Fund', by a large majority. (23) Afier the Queensland parliament had voted £1,000 in sid of the search for Leichhardt Sir Geotge Bowen, the Governor, sent a very full report about the whole matter to the Secretary of State for the Colonies. From Bowen's despatch we Jearn that the Victorian and South Australian Parliaments had each voted £500. Private contributions amounting to about £1,500 had also been collected, mainly in Victoria and Queensland. The total collected being sufficient to maintain the expedition for two years, it had already started on itg journey. Bowen then gave an account of Leichhardt’s career as an explorer and of the search expeditions mounted for him after his disappearance. He went on to say, despite Hoyenden Hely’s report of a native account of a massacre of the whole party about 200 miles west of Mount Abundance, later explorers had found traces much to the north of the reported location of the massacre, Eventually, Duncan Mclntyre's discoveries of horses and marked trees in 1864 led to thase, particularly Dr Mueller, who had never ceased to urge the probability of Leichhardt or some of his party still being alive, lo espouse the cause of a renewed search for the lost explorer and members of his expedition. Bowen mentions Buckley in Victoria and Morrill in North Queensland as examples of survival among the aboriginals in the Australian bush. The Governor mentioned how the Victorian Ladies! Committee had enlisted the aid of Lady Bowen, who had obiained the assistance of Queensland ladies of social influence which had been successfully exercised in obtaining the liberal aid which had been received from the Colonial Parliament. Bowen expressed the view that whatever the outcome of the expedition it must add to the knowledge of the remoter portions of the colony and assist materially in its development. In conclusion the Governor informed the Colonial Office that Duncan MeIntyre had set out from Victoria some months before. The rest of the party was now moving to meet him and the expedition was to be finally organised in THE DIARY OF BARNETT 13 Queensland. It would consist of eight to twelve carefully selected ‘bushmen’, 14 camels and about 40 horses. It had the means to have supplies for two years. The expedition would proceed first to Flinders River where the last traces had been seen by McIntyre. From thence it would proceed towards the interior. Bowen said the expedition would receive every assistance. It will be able to procure fresh stores from time to time from Burketown, the new settlement recently established on Bowen's recommendation at the head of navigation of the Albert River flowing into the head of the Gulf of Carpentaria. (24) On 21 August 1865 near Mount Murchison McIntyre took charge of the expedition. On 23 August the party moved on and on 5 October was camped at Curracunaya Springs, BARNETT JOINS THE SEARCH When Barnett returned with Mcintyre from the Gulf of Carpentaria in November 1864. he intended at first to pay a visit to Bendigo, but, again quoting from his letter to his aunt: a journey of 1200 miles ("tis at least 600 to Bendigo) is a great loss of time and with me time is more valuable than money & tho’ it would be a great pleasure to me yet the pleasure to all parties will be greater the longer { stay away & the better lining I have to my pocket when | do go, so I will have another trip samewhere first, lam having a spell now for a little bit — living like an eastern king. On either side of me is black girl squatting down ready to fetch a light to my pipe or a drink or any thing else I may require. Don’t blush when | tell you they are as naked as the day they were born; its their fashion. Outside the gunyah my black boy is lying asleep ready to fetch my horse or whatever i order him & this morning | started half a dozen blackfellows & their Jubras the former to net ducks and the latter to catch fish, some of which I shall have for my supper. A young man’s boasting, perhaps. In any event he stayed in the Warrego area and took up employment there, probably with the Bogan River Pastoral Company, as he had intended to do much earlier. However, upon his receiving a letter from Duncan Mcintyre, which informed him of the Leichhardt Search Expedition, Barnett left his employment and hastened to Glengower, where he was mortified to find the Leichhardt Search Expedition had started off a few days before his arrival, Donald Campbell advised Barnett to go with the expedition and assured him he would have an equal command with Dr Murray. Returning up the Darling, Barnett met Duncan McIntyre only to be told by him thar on account of the arrangements already made, Barnett could only accompany the expedition as one of the men under Melntyre’s own leadership, Barnett said he was satisfied to do this. (25) This‘is a fair indication of his loyalty to Duncan Melntyre and the trust he reposed in him, Barnett was deemed to have joined the expedition on 10 September 1865. The remuneration he agreed to accept appears to have been £78 per annum, judging by the fact that when he left of his own accord on 24 March 1866 he received £35. In addition, of course, he received rations, These facts are revealed in a letter of Barnett’s which was published in the Melbourne Argus newspaper on 2 December 1867. Two reports both dated 30 March 1866 were sent to Dr Mueller and the Search Committee respectively by Melntyre from the Gelliot (Gilliat) Rivet covering the period from October 1865 to March 1866. The first (to Mueller) reads; in writing to you a full and particular account of everything of importance connected with the expedition from the time it left the Darling, New South Wales, until its arrival here, and especially of what took place in the neighbourhood of Cooper's Creek, we came nearly straight from the New South Wales boundary on the Pine River to Cooper's Creek, where it turns south, or from about 29°S, 144°30'E, to about 26°S, 142°E, and nearly in a direct line from there to the intersection of the tropical line and Mueller River, and afterwards almost direct to [Mount] Fort Bowen, Fig 3. Typical tree blaze to mark campsites, 4 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM or cle polur from where L was directed to commence Ue search, The search has been commenced, anid will be carried on while it is possible to go on with it. Along with our doctor and some other memibers of the expedition we lost some thermometers, &c., all of which T will wy and replace al the settlernent on the Albert [Burketown], and also a surveyor if there is one to be had. | haye kept a complete field book and journal from Cooper's creek to this point, all the important geographical features being ascertained as near as possible, und the position of the camps ascertained to 2 tenth part of a mile, five or six observations on cach side of the zenith being taken almust every night. We have still four thermometers and iwo barometers (such as were sent up with the expedition), Iwo large sextants, a mumber ot small ones, and eight compasses, so that, allowing none are to be had on the Albert, the expedition is prerty well supplied, | am doubtful aboul being able to gel a legally qualified surgeon; and a surveyor capable of making astronomical observations [Is still more difficull 10 procure; other men are plentiful enough, The other part of the expedition, except in horses (and | will arrange about geting enough), Is still all right; in fact, | believe the most complete that ever started. | expect you will get my other letter as soon as this, when you will know all about our movements, | have sent a hurried despatch to the committee along with this, You must excuse this scroll (sic), for Tam really very busy, but 1 suppose you will be glad to hear something of what we are dalng. The despaich lo the committee was addressed to the Hon. Sec. of the Ladies Leichharde Search Committee, Melbourne, Victoria. After dealing with the party’s movements (0 Curracunaya where they stayed: until the {1th November, when, although not quite ready, we were obliged to move on, as the water was nearly done, Leaving Curracunaya (he expedition cansisted of sixty five horses, twelve dromedaries, about five tons of stores and ten men:— Duncan M'Intyre (sic) (leader), James P, Murray (surgeon and second in command), John M'Calman, William F. M'Donald, Alexander Gray, Johy Barnes, Belooch (Indian camel-driver), Welbo and Myola (aborigines), On the 13th November, we crossed the Bulla [?Bulloo]. and on the 17th reached the Wilson, which was followed up for some days, Late on the night of the 26h we atrived al Couper'’s Creek and found it quite dry, As soon as day dawned Welbo and I started to look for water, We didn’t go far After a careful examination of the bed and banks of the channel, and old mative footpaths, we returned to the expedition camp, and soon afterwards the party slaried back along the expedition track Lowards the last water, This fetreat ended in the loss of all the horses but three, and the rerurn of 27, Murray, Gray, M'Doaald and Barnes (9 the settled districs. The whole of Devember was lost in finding permanent wafer in Cawper’s Creek and collecting stores, (ireariis, ammunilion, instruments and other valuables, which, owing to the expedition being declaréd at an end by the officers in charge, had been thrown anywhere and anyhow, or carried away on the horses. On New Year's Day we were camped on a Sine sheet of water on Cooper’s Creek. But as the dromedaries required 4 month of (wo's resi, and the natives troublesome, we moved a few miles up the oreck 10 where there was good feed and timber, By the 14th January we had a stockade up, and the annoyance from the natives was at an end. In a few weeks the horses and dromedaries got quite fresh, and on unlimited supply of the finest fish put us all to rights, On Friday, the 9th February, we packed up and staried, The expedition leaving Cooper's Creek consisted of twelve dromedaries, five horses, nearly two tons of stores and six men;— Duncan M'Intyre (leader), John M'Calman, William T. [?F] Barnett, Belooch (Indian), Welbo, Myola (aborigines). On Sunday, the 18th February, we were enjoying ourselves in the clear water of the Docker River, and on the Ist March we left the Mueller, and almost Immediately entered the tropies, On the 9th March the Coast rative was crossed, and the next day we came on the head of this river, which we traced down. On Sunday, the 18th March, the expedition was camped on the east side of the Gelliot [Gilliat] River nearly opposite (Mount) Fort Bowen. Welbo and | started to sec if there was a station in the neighbourhood; a few miles in an easterly direction brought vis to the Flinders River, which we crossed, and soon after we met a stockman looking for horses, who conducted us to Mr, Gibson's station near Mount Little, 1 was informed at this station that mo further traces of Leichhardt had been observed, and that natives were seldom seen in the neighbourhood. After resting a few hours we proceeded to Mr. Morresell's station, about twelve iniles up the Flinders and only a few miles below the LL trees, Leichhardt's supposed camp, We got to the stalion by sundown and remained all night. Mr. Morresell told me that the old camp near the station was the only trace of Leichhardt that he knew or had heard of on the rjver, | remained all Moriday with Mr. Morresell, and on Tuesday, the 20th March, returned to the expedition camp. Since then Welbo and I have been searching for marked trees. and other traces of Leichhardt down this river [Gilliat], up the Flinders, and across to the Cloncurry, but have not found any, neither have we been able to find any natives. The dromedaries, although in good condition, are leg-weary, and will require a few weeks’ rest before starting into the western interior, In the meantime the search will be going on, and, |! possible, the natives of the district found and interrogated, and, perhaps, some of them attached to the expedition. (26) DR MUELLER CONFIDES IN DR PETERMANN This is the longest surviving personal report from McIntyre to the Ladies! Committee which has beea located. Yet, wi the 1866 issue of Justus THE DIARY OF BARNETT 1 Petthes Geographical Institute Bulletin (Miltheilungen aus Justus Perthes Geographischer Aastalt 1866) edited by Dr A, Petermann and published at Gotha in Germany, there appeared an article entitled The Expedition in Search of Leichhardt in Australia, 1865 and 1866 (Die Expedition zur Aufsuchung Leichhardt's in Australien, 1865 und 1866), Dr Mueller is cited as the source. After briefly canvassing the beginning of the expedition, the misbehaviour of Dr Murray, who doled out brandy, while McIntyre was off in search of water, the subsequent reorganisation of the eapedition and ils inconclusive results due to Melntyre’s death, the main content of the article is a teport by McIntyre from the Gregory River dated 2 May 1866. The letter from Meclntyre (which is réferred to as incomplete) reads, in part, as follows; | wrote to you about 5 weeks ago from the Gilliot River, including with my letter reports and papers from the Expedition. The camels, horses and men needed a few weeks rest, | took on a man named McLeod and two black boys that niy brother had brought with the stock, along with 7 horses. On Lhe 2nd April I broke camp in order to Search for further (races of Leichhardt and in order to purchase some tiore provisions at a harbour.,,... We went up river and reached the so-called town [Burketown] or the harbour. Its inhabitants numbered about 60, and of these about 45 or 50 had the fever. People were sick everywhere. [ could not find 10 that were in any condition to work, | made camp by a lagoon about a mile from the town, anid believed by doing so that I was out of the area of infection, There were two tents near us, By the next morning one of the occupants of these tents was dead, and when | went up to the town J found that two others had died here during the morning. I took some provisions will me and made camp /6 miles further upstream, but even while we were loading up the horses, one of the black boys came down with the fever and this niorning McLeod has fallen ill with it, The boy will probably pull through, but MeLeod has given himself up for lost. I am ready to travel on and am only wailing for the men to recover, which will bein a few days, | hope, I, doesn’t last long—either you're in your grave within @ week, or else you're better. Before | came here, the town numbered about 80 people, 66 of whom got the fever, They tell me thar in all, 25 have died and at the moment they are making the coffins for two whose condition is hopeless, I hope | escape healthy. People are hurrying away as fast as they can by water and across country. There are wo storehouses here, plenty of flour, tea and sugar, bul the quality is. very poor. We can hardly eat the flour, which is quite sour. The town also has two hotels, I lies on a plain, a few feetabove sealevel. Perhaps there is something strange in Lie alr (his year, byl all the aborigines seem to be quite well. Up until now, we have come across no definite trace of Leichhardt, but we are quite sure that there are stl! white people living now among the aborigines, or they have been living with them within the last ten years. A boy and a girl, 10 to 32 years old, almost white, with blue eyes and red hair live there. In another lribe there is a girl of about 15 years old, in a thitd there is an adult female of sbout 18, and the rumour has it that a White man is living with a large ibe of about 200, a day's ride from here,,. Since leaving the depot camp oa the Gilliot, we have explored about 500 miles of new country, mostly along the northern slope of the coastal mountains. In the course of this we crossed over an area, which will undoubtedly prove ta be a rich goldfield in a short time. We did not, In fact, find any gold, but from the formation of the terrain | have no doubr of its presence, Should the search In this area prove to be fruitless, we will immediately cross aver the coastal range and continue our explorations in the area around the southern Or inlatid Water courses, i & southwesterly direction, perhaps towards the Swan River. The article continues with @ statement that soon after writing this incomplete letter McIntyre returned to the depot on the Gilliat, taking with him W.F. Sloman from Burketown, whom he had engaged to act ay second in charge of the expedition, On 20 May McIntyre was on the Dugald River (the McKinlay roure). He left there in haste on 23 May, alone, to cover the 50 miles to the Gilliat in order to pick up the rest of the expedition from there. He was unwell at the cme and arrived at the Gilliat depot completely exhausted. His condition worsened and he died on the morning of 4 June 1866. McIntyre had not kept a journal for the last part of his trip. He had trusted to his memory and notes written in his field book. Sloman expressed a desire to put these together, but pointed out thal complete notes, a field book and journal existed for the journey as far as the Gilliat River, locluding the geographical position of all camps. On 7 June Sloman hat written to the Committee nolilying them thar he had two men, 11 camels, 32 horses and considerable provistons, that he was in the Gilliat area and awaited orders from Melbourne. The Committee had made no decision by the end of July as to the expedision's future, other than instructing Sloman to be ready to continue on receipt of word to do so, Dr Peterman concludes the article with reflections on how this expedition reveals anew the gigantic difficulties facing all geographical expeditions. The English newspapers from Melbourne contain mary crilicisms of such expeditiuns and amay be right to same extent from 16 MEMUIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM the material point of view, However, the good doctor expresses the opinion it would be a sad day for humanity if all thought this way. He thanks providence for such enlightened and dedicated men as Dr Mueller, the Director of the Melbourne Botanical Gardens, who worked so hard to bring this expedition about. No trace of McIntyre’s letter of 2 May can be found in the Melbourne press. Its incompleteness may have been the reason why Mueller did not release it to either Committee or press. Again he could have been motivated by a wish to play down as much as possible what had happened to the expedition at Coopers Creek, which will be dealt with fully by me at @ later stage in this article. Despite everything Mueller could not resist sending MclIntyre's letter to Dr Petermann in far-off Germany for publication there. In setting out the composition of the party the Age and Weekly Herald omitted one member— William F. Barnett. It could be that Barnett and McDonald had similar initials and the scribe omitted the second person inadvertently. Barnett had accompanied McIntyre in his 1863-64 venture to the Gulf and could be counted on not to desert, as becomes apparent when M’Calman and Barnett are Mclntyre’s only white followers at and after Coopers Creek. The German Geographical Sulletin of 1866 does confirm Barnett’s presence in the expedition. THE POOR CONDUCT OF DR MURRAY Sir Geotge Bowen sent the Colonial Office a copy of McIntyre’s report of 30 March 1866 (which had appeared also in the Age on 30 May 1866 and the Brisbane Courier on 14 June 1866), Bowen comments that the Gellior [Gilllat) River where McIntyre had been encamped is supposed co be a tAbutary of the Cloncurry River, but may enter the Flinders higher up than the Cloncurry, The camp near Mount Bowen, named by Landsborough would be in the vicinity of 19°12'S, 140°SS'E. Mr A.C. Gregory believed the ‘Docker’ is a tributary of the Barcoo, which joins it from the north west in abour 26°S; the Mueller is probably a tributary of the Thomson River coming jn on the west side at about 24°S. [ think A.C. Gregory placed the Barcoo and the Thomson too far to the west, Bowen also had noted that the expedition had narrowly escaped perishing from want of water al or near Coopers Creek during the severe drought OF early 1866. The expedition was deserted by Dr Murray, the second in command and surgeon, and by others who had returned to the settled districts. The circumstances surrounding this had nor yet been fully explained. (27) The drought referred to by Bowen had in fact commenced in early 1865 and was at its worst in late 1865 in the Coopers Creek area. 1 was able to find one contemporary and two later accounts, apart from those of Mcintyre and Barnett, of the events surrounding the near disaster the party suffered at Coopers Creek. It is in regard to this that niy earlier remarks, about the fatal mistake made by Dr Mueller and the Ladies Committee, can be explained now, Dr James Patrick Murray, whom they appointed second in command and surgeon of the expedition, was a peculiar person to say the least, He had a comfortable social background, a manner that could win friends when he wanted them, and an erratic streak that often came close to madness. He showed brilliance at times whilst practising medicine in Melbourne, but all too soon he had involved himself in several disreputable incidents, Because of these his family disowned him. He was for a while on the Staff of the Victorian Benevolent Association and was found to be dosing his patients with morphia to keep them quiet whenever he felt like a few days off. He joined Howilt's expedition to search for Burke and Wills and apparently did nothing to blot his copy beok. However, the failure of McIntyre’s expedition is to be attributed largely to Murray’s gross musconduct. On 27 March 1866 the Age published some correspondence which had appeared in the Riverine Herald on the preceding Saturday, 24 March. On 8 March a Mr George McQillivrey of Killara on the Upper Darling had written to say he had received a copy of the Riverine Herald in which he had found a letter from Dr Murray. and the editor’s comments upon it in a leading article. As the doctor had said McIntyre had made.a faint attempt to find water and ag the editor had appeared to be grasping at something near a proper view of the affair, Mr MeGillivrey said he had no hesitation in sending the editor ‘a verbatim copy’ of a letter which he had received trom Mr MelIntyre and which would enlighten the editor on the subject of the disaster to the expedition. Mr MeGillivrey stated he had always found Mr Melntyre to be a man of honor and a man who speaks the truth and he had no reason to doubr him in anything on this occasion, Fram Wilson's River on 17 Decenvber 1865 Melntyre had writlen — 1 suppose you have been hearing news of the Leichhardt Search Expedition from (ite to Line since THE DIARY OF BARNETT 7 Cleft your quarter, and, no doubt, the last account tas astonished you a little, The total loss of sixty six liorses anid the lives of ren men in danger, all in one day, is something guite new in exploring. L will, however, in.as few words as possible, ell you all abour it, as gathered from the evidence of the blacks and Whites of the party, for | saw nothing of it myself. After leaving your place ... we arrived at the bead of this fiver all right — 71 horses, 12 camels, (0 white men and 4 blacks. My brother, Anderson and Static did not belong to the party; they came dawn to Bulloo from the Barcoo to see us star, and they intended ro follow the Thompson (sic) upto where their caltle were ., We camped where there was an abundance of green grass, and water. for nearly a week. I then started out ro look for water ,., leaying Dr Murray in charge ... wilt instructions to mové down the creek, if .., but noi until the water was done. | returned the third day .. to move... toa little water which I had found and Which would have done for a few days ... I found that Dr Murray had sent the horses and camels six or eight miles down the creek ... although there was still ,., water ... for three of four days longer. I was quite mud at this; all my plans were upset ... there wos nothing for it but to take the whole expedition with me whete ever [ went as there was no use Jeaving anything in charge of ... Dr Murray; and bad as he was, he was the best I had to leave in any charge: and you know » 8 person ... at the head of an exploring party ,.. often finds it necessary ... to go ahead and see ... [so fas} not to risk the whole party at once ... on 2Sth November we all started for ... Cooper's Creek .,, the distance being sixty six miles ... Found the creek quile dry, and no certainty of getting water for 100 miles further ... The horses had been thirty six hours without water and the men about six hours, [ then started to look for water and told the doctor to follow the tracks. back to the last water ... finding water within ten miles. of our former camp ... | immediately sent on fifty four quarts ... the main party reached the camp and the doctor ... fost all command of himselt; he opened the brandy, got quite drunk himself, and made everyone else the same, and .,. all went to sleep, About half the horses were unpacked, and the rest were left with their packs on. In the morning ... all ... were gone, packs and all, The doctor declared the expedition at an end, saying, ‘We may as well go the whole hog, boys; the Leichhardt expedition is ended’*. He again got quite drunk ... The end of it is—all lives saved, four horses only out of seventy ane, all the camels, nearly half rations saved, all instruments saved; but to do all this | have travelled 600 miles within the last two weeks .., The expedition is far from being at an end. | have now M'Calman, Barnett, Belooch (East Indian) and wo blacks _. with rations enough to take us to ... the North coast, and as soon as the camels are rested | will start on, Perhaps! am better — certainly safer —than before, for lam mot depending on any one. Six years on the roads is too little for the doctor (Mclntyre meant by this Murray deserved to be convicted and sentenced to this pe of hard labour]. The blacks proved themselves far better than the white men, Billy saved the lives of four men when Urey were exposed to @ glaring sun when in a state of helpless drunkenness. One of the black boys. was ninety hours without water, and then was got so helpless as the doctor when twenty four hours withow, Had it not been for the doctor and his confounded brandy all the mien and sixty of the horses would have been into water in thirty hours ar less ... | have found water about 25 miles NW from here ... and will remain there till the camels get all right, You need not show this to anybody as the less said about it the betier. ft will be all found in my journal when | return, You will, however, be able to tell anyone who contradicts what I have here stated that they are wrong. | have no doubt that the doctor will spread reports to my detriment, but if he does he may look out when [ return. M’Donald and Gray will no doubt support him. They no doubt will say they were not drunk, The doctor acknowledged to having taken three quarters of a pint. They, at all events, finished six bottles between them ... 1 send this hurried note by private hand up the Barcoo, It may reach You some time, and (fr may not, Lhave no writing material, only these leaves of my mote book. itis obvious that Mcintyre did not want hearsay reports about what happened at Coopers Creek to proliferate, He was looking forward to telling all the facts in person and damning Dr Murray beyond redemption. However, he realised he could be absent a long time and accordingly by way of a form of insurance placed his account of events in the hands of his friend MoGillivrey so any mischievous reports to his detriment could be answered; and that is just what happened, [n the following report Ihe person making It has located Anderson with the wrong Melntyre initially, Certainly the coming of Donald Melotyre, Anderson and Statue to see the expedition off, as Duncan Metntyre says in his letter, could cause someone like Kruger to garble the tale and place Anderson with the expeclition instead of merely visiting it. Mr Kruger wrote to his brother Bernhard of Rutherglen, Victoria, about April 1866 to say that whilst on his way back from the Warrego River he had met and talked to a Mr Anderson. The latter said he had heen looking for new country on the Paroo (Mitchell’s Victoria) and hearing that Mcintyre was on the road, he made up his mind to join him. He met Mctnryre at the Bulla (Bulloo), a creek between the Paroo and Coopers. Creek, Having seven horses of his own he succeeded in joining the expedition, The expedition moved on to a station occupied by a Dr Hutchinsen (from the Ovens district in Victoria) where all going well they moved to a waterhole 35 miles away. From this was a journey of seventy five miles to the next waterhole on Coopers Creek. The whole party set out, All the animals were beavily laden and is MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSELIM Miffered greatly, being three days without water, To Mclntyre’s ereat distress, on reaching Coopers Creek, it was found that the bed of the creek, eighteen months ago full of water, was now completely dry. There were only two courses of actlo open; to advance or retreat, The latter having been decided on, Mciotyre with either Belooch or one of the aboriginals (it is not clear which) returned with two camels in advance of the main party intending to rejoin it with a supply of water. Murray was to bring the rest of the party back to the last waterhole. McIntyre got to the watcrhole, loaded up, and returned to meet them. Meantime this Is what happened. Scarcely was MelIntyre out of sight when Murray called a halr, and knife in hand ripped up the bags of flour, in which were concealed several bottles of brandy. All excepting Barnes (according to one report), or Anderson on his own say so, drank of the spirit until they were delirious and then fell into a drunken stupor, The fifty or sixty horses were abandoned en masse and wandered away with their packs and saddles on to die in agonies of thirst, Only three were saved, Barnett says that it was owing to him thal the calamities which happened were not far greater, for though he could not prevent whal twok place, he did prevent Dr Murray from serving the men with spirits of wine, which would, in all human probability, have occasioned loss of life. Kruger said that MeIntyre dismissed Murray and Gray, McDonald and Barnes elected to go with him. McIntyre was said to have given them one packhorse and one of the aboriginals went with them as a guide ... They went first to Dr Hutchinson’s station and after a three day rest went on to Charleville on the Warrego River (28). tt should be noted again than McIntyre says thal Anderson had been with his brother Donald and neither of them were ever members of the expedition, MelIntyre’s statement about Murray, bad as he was, being the best he had to leave in charge might seem (o show a lack of confidence in Barnett, It must be remembered, however, Barnett held no office in che expedition, was in fact a supernumerary and finally he was only 24 years of age. His being placed in charge could have been resented by ofher members of the party, Not unexpectedly Murray began excusing himself and acyusing McIntyre for the debacle at Coopers Creek before he even gut back to Melbourne. What had prompted George McGilliyrey and the Riverine Herald to publish MeIntvre's letter on 24 March 1866 was a letter Wrillen by Murray from Wallumbilla in Queensland on 4 January 1866 to a Dr James which was first published in the Bendigo Advertiser and then on 7 February 1866 in the Riverine Herald. Murray infers that McIntyre had been tash in trying to reach Coopers Creek from Labrine Creek (Wilson River), Then he talks of Melntyre's ‘faint effert' to examine Coopers Creek for waterholes. The retreat to the last water supply is covered, but there is no mention of brandy. All the Victorian portion of the party resolved to go no further. Three returned with Murray, but one remained with McIntyre (at his urgent request) until he could get another hand. The men of the party were obliged to resort to the most horrible expedients to quench their burning thirst. The editor of the Riverine Herald felt this letter left many matters unexplained. The chief of these were whether Murray had left Melntyre to his fate and the circumstances surrounding the break-up of the expedition. On 28 February 1866 the Riverine Herald published an account of an interview the Benaigo Independent had had with an experienced bushman recently returned to Sandhurst from the Wilson River (or Lubina (sic) Creek) in Queensland. This man said he had met returning members of the Leichhardt’s Search Expedition; the circumstances relating to the break-up of the party were not at all creditable to those whom he hacl met. When the Riverine Herald published MoGillivrey’s and McIntyre’s letters on 24 March 1866 the editor in a scathing editorial soundly castigated Murray for his misconduct. In passing he expressed the opinion that i! must be highly satisfactory to the friends of Mr Barnett, a son of Dr Barnett of Sandhurst and who had accompanied Mr Melntyre in his (earlicr) gallant journey across the continent, to learn that Mr Barnett had remained true to his leader. On 27 March 1866 Murray, by then in Melbourne, wrote a leiter to the Melbourne Herald endeavouring to refute McIntyre’s accusations. He said there was a very minute consumption of brandy (barely a quarter of a bottle) and it only had been consumed, in his case, to give him strength to work at unpacking the loads of the camels. The Riverine Herald republished this letter on 30 March and the editor again castigated Murray for his desertion of McIntyre and asked also why the Committee should wish to conceal the break-up of the expedition from the public. On 29 March Murray wrote a further letter to the Melbourne Herald. He may have had help with THE DIARY OF BARNETT 19 this a4 itis a much better written missive and facts are better marshalled than in his earlier letters. Murray denied his moving animals trom where McIntyre had told him to keep them had caused undue delay (three hours only) in the moving off of the expedition. McIntyre was in a bad humour and his anger was responsible for him making rash moves, This letter was reprinted in the Niverine Herald on 4 April 1866 and accompanied by a copy of the editorial from the Melbourne Leader. This last expressed the opinion that it was a dreary and disgraceful story which had come to light. It had not been the ‘correct thing’ for Dr Murray to have consumed any brandy because of the demoralising effect his example had on the rest of the party, Had Mr Metntyre and the blacks also yielded to the fascinations of the bottle as the only possible source of strength, the expedition, if not the lives of the explorers, would have been brought to a ignominious end. The view was expressed that it was a pity the exposure had come before MelIntyre’s journal became available. The Riverine Herald pointed out that McIntyre knew nothing of Murray’s communications to newspapers. McGillivrey and the Riverine Herald alone were responsible for the publication of MeIntyre’s letter and subsequent comments. Murray's allusion to Barnett as the one Victorian who stayed with McIntyre only at his urgent request was an insult to Barnet. The Riverine Herald did not believe for one moment that Barnett required any urgent pressing, or pressing at all, to stay with his leader. The fiery editorial concludes by accusing Murray of incapacity and cowardice. If Murray does not like this, he Knows where to find his remedy. A classic example of “sue and be damned to you", Despite the lambasting Murray was receiving he was claiming it was he who had saved the expedition and that Mclatyre should never have been placed in charge of it, His persuasive powers were such that there were many people who belicved tim, Thus on JI April 1846 ‘A Subscriber’ wrote to the Riverine Herald expressing support for Murray as ‘a matt of high minded principles and upright character’ and claiming that he had been made a scapegoat, The Riverine Herald printed on 2 May 1866 an interview with a Mr McDonald who had just come in from the Wilson River. This is the Neil McDonald mentioned later with whom McIntyre was able to trade some surplus stores for four horses after the debacle at Cooper’s Creek. MeDonald corroborated what McIntyre had to say about Murray and expressed his indignation at the efforts of Murray to attempt to ‘throw the blame of his own cowardice and indiscretion on Mr McIntyre’. Murray had told Mcintyre he would leave the country, which was the only reason Mcintyre had not written to Melbourne ‘anything that would compromise the doctor’, Neil McDonald also revealed that Murray, W.F. McDonald and Barnes had caroused all day while Gray, McCalman and Donald McIntyre laboured at unloading the camels and stacking stores, Then when the three last-named, worn our by their labours, were sleeping Murray and his two confederates had moved off wth the camels leaving the three sleeping men (o their fate. This confirms the need for Barnett to have carried Donald McIntyre behind him on his horse during the retreat from Cooper's Creek. On 9 June 1866 the Riverine Herald printed an article from *A Darling Correspondent’ who reviewed the whole matter and concluded his summing up by saying there was no disaster till after the brandy was drank. There was nothing disastrous about having to wrn back. The only disaster was the loss of horses and stores, and |f Dr Murray had kept sober these could have been saved. Perhaps Dr Murray thinks. his returning to Melbourne “the disaster’. N was a pity that he ever left it, and 1 would advise him in the future to confine his explorations to the Richmond Paddock or Fitzroy Gardens. Subsequently Murray turned his hand to blackbirding and hecame @ partner in the recruiting ship Cerf. After kidnapping 70 natives in September 1871 a further &) Buka men were kidnapped and the ship was grossly overloaded. The main method of kidnapping was to run down fishing canoes and then sieze the men left floundering in the water. The natives in the crowded hold started fighting. Murray panicked and he and the crew started firing into the packed hold. Seventy natives were killed or badly wounded, The latter, although still living were thrown overboard with the corpses. Murray escaped the gallows by turning Queen's evidence, A letter his father wrote which the Spdney Morning Herald published on 23 May 1873 is a truly remarkable document, It reads; As regards Dr. Murray, the celebrated Caz/ mancaiching approver, whom I have for years cut off as a disgrace to creed, country and family — your condemnation of that cruel, unhappy being 1 fully endorse and add, although opposed ito capita! punishment on principle, that if any of the Car/ crew murderers ever ascend the gibbet for the seventy kidnapped and cruelly slaughtered poor Polynesians. Dr. Murray should be the first, as heagl, (29) 20 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM THE DEATH OF McINTYRE So much for Dr Murray; but a fresh and final disaster awaited McIntyre. The wanton loss of stores at Coopers Creek, as a result of Murray’s misconduct, led to certain replenishments being required before the remainder of the expedition set off for the western interior. From the base camp on the Gilliat River McIntyre went in to Burketown, towards the end of April 1866, to purchase the required stores. He could not have gone in at a worse time. It happened that in late March or early April the ship ‘Margaret and Mary’ sailed into Burketown with its crew mortally ill from unknown fever which had been caught in Java. The captain alone of the ship’s crew survived. The fever, assuming plague proportions, swept the town. It was the wet season, the climate oppressive, there was a want of proper provisions and medicines, and resistance to the disease was low. In April 60 persons fell ill and in May and June 1866 there were 40 deaths out of a population of 90. Of the survivors there were few who had not suffered an attack of the ‘‘Gulf fever’’ as it came to be called. For a while it looked as though Burketown might have to be abandoned, but the fever ran its course and by 1868 it had cleared up and the town site was no longer regarded as unhealthy. (30) Whilst McIntyre had camped about sixteen miles from Burketown, where he remained from 20 April to 4 May, he frequently visited the township on expedition business. He reported on 4 May that he was following rumours of a white man among the aboriginals, but as previously revealed, on 23 May he fell ill with the Gulf fever while on his way to the base camp on the Gilliat River. There he died on 4 June 1866 and was buried on the east bank of a billabong by the Gilliat River. (31) On 23 July 1866 Mueller released to the Age newspaper a communication from Mr John P. Sharkey, Queensland Crown Lands Commissioner for the Burke District with statements by Sloman and George Gracey as to the circumstances of MclIntyre’s death. Sharkey had written on 11 June. A sad fact emerges that although the expedition had a large medicine chest, McIntyre was unable to make use of it because all the labels were written in Latin. Having heard of this Sharkey set off for the camp on the Gilliat with some medicines which he thought might be of use, only to find on his arrival that McIntyre had died five days earlier. The ladies of Melbourne sent a handsome gravestone, inscribed in both English and Gaelic, to be erected over McIntyre’s grave. For many Fic 4. Gravestone sent by the ladies of Melbourne to mark the resting place of Duncan McIntyre. years it lay unnoticed on the beach at Thursday Island, whence it had been shipped from Melbourne en route to its final destination. It was finally brought in via Normanton and erected over the grave by the billagong, seven miles away from Dalgonally Station. (Fig. 4). (32) By the time Duncan McIntyre died Donald McIntyre, with 1000 head of cattle, had taken up arun on Julia Creek, which became the Dalgonally Station I have mentioned, Duncan McIntyre had examined this fine area in 1864 and had directed Donald to it. Donald was to remain in occupation of this run until his death in 1907. BARNETT JOURNEYS TO BURKETOWN On 17 September 1866 the Age published a letter which Barnett had sent to the Riverine Herald after his recent return to Victoria. He deals at length with the cowardice and villainy of Dr Murray. It is in this letter he first mentions what he repeated in his letter published in the Argus on 3 December 1867; namely he physically prevented Murray from serving out spirits of wine (i.e. absolute alcohol) to the party. He then covers the reorganisation of the party and the journey to the Gilliat River, about 150 miles south of Burketown. McIntyre expressed the intention of remaining there about a month to spell the camels and make up the deficiencies of the party. Barnett goes on to say — ... and I, with his consent, and I am happy to say a testimonial of his satisfaction of (sic) my conduct, left THE DIARY OF BARNETT 2i the party, as he could now easily 2ct.a man in my place. I started for Burketown, and when L arrived I.G. M'Donald, Esq., was just starting a boar party to endeavour Lo find the mouth of tie Leichhardt River, [ became one of the crew, and we were successful in finding the mouth only two miles east of Albert Heads fic. where the Albert River enters the Gulf of Carpentaria], We succeeded in getting up fifty miles to the crossing place, three miles below the falls, which are from fifty to sixty feet high, the water being under tidal influence below the falls. We returned to Burketown, Albert River, and 1 started overland for Port Denison, across the Fimders, the Norman, and the Gilbert, over the Gilbert Ranges, and on to the Lynd, down the Lynd and the Burdekin and thence to Por! Denison. [ think the Leichhardt navigable for about thirty miles. It possesses fine high banks, much (o be preferred to the low mangrove fringed banks of the Albert. The Flinders, Leichhardt, and Albert and vhe tributaries are all pretry well settled, but there is still splendid pastoral country to the westward, and also there is some good country between the Flinders and ihe settlements on the Lynd. Respecting the half castes mentioned by Mr Melntyre, 1 can support lus stajement of their existence amongst the blacks about the country he speaks of. There can be no doubt of whites having been amongsi them about ten or fifteen years ago, and it is likely enough there are sill some, I think the northern country is likely to become as valuable to the miner as it is undoubtedly to the squatter. Barnett had been released from the expedition ott 24 March 1866. He received £35 wages, which wert due to him. As it was necessary to conserve his funds he walked two hundred miles to Burketown, alone and unarmed at a time when artued horsemen made up parties of threes and fours for mutual protection. His eyesight was affected by ophthalmia, and semi-blind he travelled the last one hundred miles through the bush in three days without anything to eat. At no stage does he give a reason for leaving the expedition and any effort on my part to assign a reason could only be pure conjecture. There is no doubt he was resilienl, when so soon after fis arrival in Burketown he took the opportunity to augment his funds by taking employment with J.G. McDonald, This man, with a senall party, had visited the Plains of Promise in 1865. He discovered a more practicable route for cattle and sheep to the pastoral lands on the Flinders, He did not settle in the Gulf country, although he investigated much of that country, He had a run at Carpentaria Downs (nearly 400 kilometres ESE of the Gulf) and resided in the Lower Burdekin area. On the completion of McDonald's examination of the Leichhardt River Barmett was returned to Burketown as fre says. No steamer or other vessel being available at Burketown, aor the early arrival of one being anticipated, Barnett was forced to travel overland to Port Denison (Bowen). He took ship to Sydney. By this lime having used up his small financial resources he was compelled to walk to Echuca in Victoria. EVENTS AFTER McINTYRE'S DEATH After Duncan MecIntyre's death, Dalgonally became the base for the expedition, Donald McIntyre appears to have exercised the role of field supervisor, but does not seem to have participated actively in the exploration. McCalman was joined bya Mr W.F. Sloman (to aet as leader), Dr White, a medical man and G, Widish (sic — Wildish), Dr White had ‘performed great exertions’ to loak after the fever stricken population of Burketown. Landsborough, who filled the dual roles of magistrate and crown lands commissioner there, spoke highly of the service Dr White had rendered. We learn also from a report from him that Dr White hac not escaped the fever himself and that McCalman and Donald Melntyre also had suffered from it. On 22 November 1866, over five months after Duncan Metntyre's death, Dr Mueller forwarded, with a letter to the editor of the Age at the wish of the ladies of the Leichhardt Search Committee ..... a copy of the journal of the late Duncan McIntyre compiled by Mr. Sloman from the diary and field books of the lamented explorer, and very recently received through Donald Campbell, Esq., of Glengower. The compiled journal adds little to what has been said already about ihe expedition up to the time of McIntyre’s death. It confirms that Barnett joined the expedition on the Paroo on 10 September 1865. He had replaced a man named Steward, The Journal amply testifies what a valuable and useful part Barnett filled in the expedition. It does reyeal that Donald Meintyre was with the expedition until 4 December 1865. This substantiates Barmett’s claim in the Argus of 3 December 1867 that for one whole day, during the retreat from Coopers Creek to the nearest water, he carried Donald McIntyre behind him on his horse with the result that the horse “knocked up' and Barnett, himsel!, was cornpelled to walk many miles ‘under the scorching sun, with fearful agonies of thirst’ upon hin. Donald and Anderson Jef the expedition wher Dr Murray, Gray, McDonald and Barnes did. According to this accound (he four last mentioned we te were given two out of the three surviving horses ro help them get hack to the nearest centre; nut just one as stated in Kruger’s account. A reason is given for Duncan Mcintyre electing not to go on with anyone else but McCalman, Barnett and Belooch. He said he had no means of taking them due to the loss of so many of the horses at Coopers Creek. Thus the disaster is glossed over and no blame is attributed to anyone, On 26 March 1866 reference is made to Barnett — having left the expedition. That his departure must have been without hard feelings on either side is confirmed, because he accompanied Duncan McIntyre and Welbo to the Flinders on 26 March and then parted company with them so he could carry on to Burketown. Donald Metntyre must have wasted oo dime after leaving the expedition, because by 27 March 1866 the journal refers.to his station on a waterhole (Dalgonally) near the River Gilliat and about three and a half miles north of Duncan's depot camp. He must have had little gratitude in his makeup in the light of his later treatment of Barnett. Metntyre was able to make good same of his loss of horses in a small way on 16 December. A Mr Neil M’Donald who was in charge of sotne cattle and then camped on the Wilson River heard of the disaster from the returning party. He concluded McIntyre had more stores than he could take on without horses. He called at the camp at Safety Camp and offered ot 9 December to exchange four horses for some of the surplus stores. The exchange Was made on 16 December, The journal was long and occupied several columms in the issues of the Age on 23, 24 and 26 November and 1 December 1866. Dr Mueller carried his apelogia even further for in the 1867 issue of Justus Perthes Geographical Institure Bulletin (Mittheilungen aus Justus Perthes Geographischer Anstalt 1867) edited by Dr A, Petermann and published at Gotha in Germany there appeared an arlicle entitled “McIntyre’s Diary of his Journey from the Darling to the Gulf of Carpentaria L865-1866' (McIntyre's Tagebuch Seiner Reise vom Darling zum Golf von Carpentaria, 1865 bis 1866M)- Much is made of the fact that although an expedition may fail in the eyes of the public if its initial goal is not reached, it has always great usefulness for the geographer, even if this is in areas not expected originally, A number of examples are cited, but getting back t McIntyre it is said that although it had not been found what became of Leichhardt, yet Geography has been rendered a priceless service, in that if has received a list of height measurements for MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM the first time of the relief of the large region between the Barcoo and the Gulf of Carpeniaria ... A short synopsis of the Course of the McIntyre expedition, along with detailed statements abour its sad conclusion was carried in the previous issue of the Geographical Bulletin (pp. 365-368) [this would have been MeJntyre's own account as set out in his incomplete letter of 2 May 1866 to Dr, Mueller}, bul since then Dr. Ferd. Mueller, whose efforis have largely given the expedition some standing, has published the diary Jeft behind by Melntyre and edited for publication by his companion, Sloman, This diary was published in the 4ge (23rd. Nov,, 1866 and following issues), so that we could reconstruct the route and record it on the map (Fig, 5), The German article says no more than what was in the journal, published in the Age about what happened at Coopers Creek. Mclntyre’s version of the disaster to the expedition, published in the same newspaper on 27 March 1866 is blandly ignored by Dr Mueller in both the release to the Age and to the German Geographical Bulletin. Dr Mueller obviously would not have liked the full story to have been resurrected. Self-interest would have dictated this course, as well as chivalry towards the Ladies’ Committee. The matter having been put to rest in a ‘decent’ way, it was litrle wonder that Barnett, as will be seen, received short shrift When he advanced a claim for compensation in the latter part of 1867. In the latter part of 1866 Sloman died suddenly from the combined effects of sunstrake and an organic disease of the heart, after having followed several of the Gulf Streams, but not succeeding in discovering any further traces of Leichhardt. BARNETT AS LEADER Barnelt by then had been three weeks back in Victoria. He was requested by Donald Campbell Lo rejoin the expedition. Barnett was agreeable and feturned to the depot camp at Julia Creek overland from Rockhampton, where he had arrived by steamer, Donald McIntyre then called on Barnett to assume command of the expedition. Letters rom Barnett to the Ladies’ Committee (dated 21] December 1866) and Donald Melntyre to Dr Mueller and Donald Campbell (dated, it seemis, 22 December 1866) were taken by Belooch to Port Denison (Bowen) in the ship Black Prince. He lett Julia Creek on 23 December and arrived at Port Denison on 11 January 1867, Belooch reported that the party were all well. A press item in the Port Denison Times of 12 January (copied in the Australasian on 23 February 1867) stated: As to the party itself there appears lo be some difficulty in obtaining a competent leader, and THE DIARY OF BARNETT Fe Petre aan (reageuy titi bie Maltliedbin sean. hater genie 1807 "Tid'rd A xiii eee Lo " = = “ rane ee ee 7 — — a aoe = [ne ws ES ’ | | clqreaw a ns wineges hy a ae BN wre — i anon ile eS ergy sett hawt) vee evan : Rey, - ta akan nS LT Sand Vpn Sener | — Firebird ten eu roe _ eae Bs ‘ net oe Boy tee 4 Sirens terrane © | “Ex ae -oae t a rd : I ane i r Ay] eaten ‘ vt hn gd ( ‘ “ar L_ Sdeborgty” 2 i 7 ates a7 “- A Senay Toa s oe eee waA ay ry) - ar Vturdine inn a 2 wits wma tg Men Srl ay ACE BAL aie ar nad a ay te UTirwiit tialyy Dblotund Mex IK6S &1K66 Vuit A, Pete rimainn ai ible to 7 May aWeshanls | Tetveaeataneh rae ue Ff ogriph aleficn A. 4 her ty , J tur weasel we: We hn i ee cs -.. EAA Ae fem von Eicher ~ Vira ceoourt (Be Pas rset: - GOT TLA aS VERTLES Hat Fic 5. Map of the route taken by Mcintyre published in the 1867 issue of Justus Perthes Geographical Institute Bulletin. 24 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM considerable dissatisfaction amongst the men in consequence thereof. We are inclined to hope that Mr. Christieson, of whose competency there can be no question ... will become the leader. Belooch has, we understand, sent telegrams to Dr. Mueller and the Ladies’ Committee in Melbourne, and is awaiting the resull, There are at present but three white men in camp, the whole party consisting of eight, the five wha are not in camp being engaged in examining the surrounding country. The Port Denison Times hopes for Mr Christieson were not fulfilled as the Ladies’ Committee and Mr Donald Campbell confirmed the appointment of Barnett. (33) Before dealing with the final stages of the expedition under Barnett’s leadership, some consideration should be given to the public feeling prevailing at the time he undertook ihe task, An antivMelntyre school of thought grew up in some quarters die to the vilifications of Dr Murray and statements such as that of Mr Kruger in his letter to his brother Bernhard: He [Duncan McIntyre) purposely did nol accept any salary from the committee in case any mishap should befall the party; be only looked out for himself. He afterwards selected a run on the Bulla, but, having no stockmen to put on, a Mr. Sullivan jumped it. When he found he had lost his rum he pushed on to the Thomson River where he had no business to go, ax his path and duty lies due north across the Thomson and on to the Barcoo, and up the Barcoo on the Flinders River, where he would come across Leichhardt’s trail in 22 parallel, but never by going cast into the sertled districts, This is the second time that public money has been thrown away in such a shameful manner through bad management in not selecting propet leaders and men; it is ne wonder people begin to drop to it, and will not give It more money, .« Lam sure itis not the best way to get Leichhardr’s trail — travelling through the settled districts of Victoria and New South Wales for 1,200 miles. wearing oul man and beast to little or no purpose, (34) A substantially similar letter appeared in a newspaper called the 44.4. Mail from which it was reprinted by the Riverine Herald on 26 May 1866. It was claimed that Herman Kruger was a returned member of the Leichhardt Search Expedition. The Riverine Merald made short work of this claim, pointing out the only ones to return with Murray were McDonald, Gray and Barnes. David Blair, in his Cyclopaedia of Australia, already referred to, says the expedition was an ignominious failure, the result of want of judgment and experience. Blair considered the marked trees on the Flinders were done by Landsborough, and the horses had been left by McKinlay. Notwithstanding this Melntyre’s honesty and bushcraft must have received more than a modicum of support when the provision and trunsport of the handsonie gravestone by the Ladies’ Committee is considered. Also Dr Mueller does not appear ever to have launched any criticism of McIntyre, Perhaps Duncan Melntyre was one of those children of misfortune for whom any enterprise, once it commences to go wrong, despite all care taken and skill employed, can never be righted again. In his case the ultimate loss was his own life, Nevertheless Barnett was to suffer from the ill feeling about the expedition which was prevalent. BARNETT'S DIARY Before presenting the text of Barnett’s diary it is desirable that some anomalies should be cleared up, He refers to the Jenny River and William River of McKinlay. However, Barnett appears to have them in the wrong order; McKinlay finds and oames the Jeannie (not the Jenny) on 30 April 1862 between his Camps 47 and 48. Then between Camps 48 and 49 on | May he discovered and named the William (35). Therefore the William must lie to the north of the Jeannie, but Bamett refers to them in the reverse order, This has made even harder the preparation of a map of the area covered by the travels described in the diary. However, if the order of the William and the Jeannie is reversed it is possible to prepare a map which may describe the aréa traversed by Barnett and his party. McKinlay’s meridians are not accurate. He is up to 20 miles out with some of his locations. Bamett does not give any latitudes let alone longitudes. However, his bearings are some help. but his failure to give a total mileage for every day makes it harder to truly delineate the roule taken by his party and the area covered. Therefore the map {Fig. 6) must be regarded as largely conjectural. However, it does give an indication that the area searched could be circumscribed by latitudes 19°30’S to 21°S and longitudes 139°45°E to 141°30°E — 9500 square miles, It should be noted that the party was beset by sickness — fevers and agues and in Barneit’s case ophthalmia, which resulted in him having to be led by MeCalman for some days as he was too blinded to see where he was going, Vagaries of weather also played a part In inhibiting the progress of the expedition. Excessive summer temperatures, thunder storms, flash floods and resultant bogginess of flat areas slowed down the transport THE DIARY OF BARNETT LEICHHARDT Fic 6. Map showing the conjectured search area. 26 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM animals (i.e. the camels) and limited the speed of exploration activities. An example of this occurred between 11 and 13 March 1867. Barnett’s camp identifications LE over a Roman numeral over B are to be interpreted as ‘Leichhardt Expedition’ followed by the number of the camp and then ‘Barmert' as expedition leader. Names of topographical features allocated by Barnett have not survived. The non-publication of his journal could account for this, The names never came into current usage, as, say, did those given Io features by McKinlay which were published to the world at large in his journal and maps, The diary commences on 20 January 1867, when Barnett describes the depot camp, the flora and fauna of the surrounding area and outlines what may be described as the guidelines of the expedition in its search for traces of Leichhardt. He details also the party personnel and the transport and stores logistics. The dairy now commences; Sunday 20th January, 1867, Depot Camp situated on a deep water-hole about 3 miles long and 100 yards wide in Juha Creek, an eastern tributary of the Gilliott which is a western tributary of the Flinders, The creek is only timbered here and there with small patches of scrub or a little worthless box; below the water- hole the creeks runs out over low flat plains and above it, it becomes a very small creek occasionally breaking into several billibongs and then again forming large water holes, Its general course is E.S.B. and W.N.W, The country on either side of the creek is a gently rising well grassed plain of dark loamy soil for about 2 mls when there is a slight sandy rise lightly timbered beyond which are gently swelling, well grassed undulations relieved by scrubby and lightly timbered sandy rises, About 25 mis up the creek are several springs Which cover many acres of ground the waters of which are slightly impregnated with soda, there are also two large springs of the same kind about 20 miles to the west of us situated near the Gilliott. There was plenty of rain about a month ago so that the country is now looking its best and that is indeed beautiful. There is a fresh and wonderful exuberance al life. The whale country blooms in the magnificence of a tropical midsummer, creeping plants and many coloured flowers are plentiful over the plains which are covered with insects of every description. The flies and mosquitoes are very numerous making the horses and camels very restless, many of whose eyes show the disagreeable effecrs of these Insects, two of the camels are quite blind in consequence of them. There are several pelicans and ibis’ on the water- hole together with numbers of water-heng, ducks and other aquatic birds. Snakes, iguanas and lizards are very numerous in the adjacent country as well as flocks of Sturts flock pigeons. The max. temp has been I11°F, in the shade but light zephyrs relieved the oppressive heat. It is proposed that the party start tomorrow westward for these reasons ‘That all the other country has been well explored and most of it taken up by squatters who and whose men are continually riding over it and would most probably ere this have found traces of Leichardt did any exist. That, in consequence of the country becoming thus inhabited by white men the aboriginals have all receeded to the west and to discover if any traces of Leichardt are amongst them we must follow, That if Leichardt arrived all safe at his marked tree on the Flinders, his most probable route would then or shortly after have been to the west, and that by thus travelling we shall cross all the western tributaries of the Flinders and on arriving at any one that has not hitherto been followed a camp may be formed and the creek searched both above and below our track and if possible communication established with the aboriginals, after leaving the water-shed of the Flinders all other rivers and creeks that may be meet with may be searched in like manner." The party now consist of Wm. Fred Barnett (leader), J. McCalman (second in command) Dr. White (Medical officer) C. MelIntyre, George Wildish and Myola {an aboriginal). We shall take with us all the camels consisting of 9 capable of bearing packs and 6 young ones, 10 horses and stores sufficient for 5 months. Monday 2ist January, 1867. Started on a bearing of 230 over well grassed, gently swelling plains and in one hour and a half arrived at the middle creek, we continued on the same bearing over similar country crossing two flats subject to inundation and at 1.25 struck a blue bush flat below McIntyre Camp LI followed it up south for about a mile and arrived at the Camp | at 40 minutes past one. We travelled about JL miles and found that the camels suffered very much being so fat and the young ones were a great nuisance. The camp is on a billybong of the Gilliott and there is very little water at it. Large flocks of galars and cockatoos were flying about. THE DIARY OF BARNETT 27 Tuesday 22nd January, 1867. At 5 minutes past 8 on a bearing of 180 to avoid billybong and then 200 across the Gilliott, at 9.10 passed a spring Continued across creeks and billybong and to avoid water had to make more southey than desirable until about 12 o’clock when we struck over a low range running N.N.W. & S.S.E. beautifully grassed but covered with pudding stones. To the south the range is higher and thickly covered with gydia scrub. From the top of the range I observed about 2 mls W.S.W. a large belt scrub, over to the west a belt of timber which I believed to be a creek and I could see very high downs apparently on the other side. We arrived at the creek at 1.10 and camped on a billybong. There is not much water and as the rain appears not to have been so plentiful here I intend to go ahead tomorrow. We travelled 12 mls today. The max. temp has been 110°F. This country appears to be equal to any in the north as far as grazing capabilities are concerned and the creek we are now on most probably contains permanent water holes. Wednesday 23rd January, 1867. Leaving the party encamped at Camp II; which LE and B, I started with Mr. is branded Tl McCalman to examine the country to the west. We crossed several billybongs of the creek which has taken the name of Western, then over a fine high plain and in about a mile came on to a small channel sandy and the[n] crossed two sandy branches. We now could see a beautifully grassed rise before us the top of which is covered with patches of gydia scrub we continued in a west by north direction to the top of rise and could see that to the south by west it increased in height and the scrub became more dense, we observed a range running sou-west and nor-west about five miles distant. At about 4 mls from Camp II we arrived at a small dry creek running south which appears to continue into the range when it is thrown round into Western Creek. Continuing in a west by north course we crossed a small spinifex ridge and then for three miles over well grassed plains when we again came on to spinifex covered with decayed ant-hills and stunted apple leafed gums with occasional stunted bloodwood and bohemia trees. After travelling over this kind of country for about seven miles and seeing no prospect of a change ahead, we turned east and continued for 10 mls over similar desert country crossing several heads of the small creek we crossed in the morning when we came on to well grassed plains and gydia scrub and in five miles struck the Western Creek which has here no sandy channel. We crossed it and followed it up three miles to camp It was my intention to have travelled west from Camp II but the country I have seen today causes me not to attempt it as the camels are in no condition for hard work. I shall therefore follow down this creek a few miles and then strike about NNW for the Cloncurry waters Thursday 24th January, 1867. Started at 8.20 a little to the east of north over well grassed plains which run back from the creek about three miles and then rise to a low well grassed range running nearly parallel with the creek timbered with patches of gydia scrub. On the opposite side of the creek there is a scrubby ridge running along within a mile. As we proceeded the plains became wider and dotted with small lagoons filled by shallow billybongs out of the creek. At 11 a.m. we crossed a billybong and camped at a good water hole in it as I see there is apparently a break in the scrubby ridge on the other side of the creek There is scarcely any defined channel in the creek here, it running in a broad flat cut up by small channels. In the evening heavy rain clouds rose to the north and vivid lightning was observed in the same direction The max temp has been 115 F in the shade today Branded a tree LE Ill B Friday 25th January Started across the creek at 8 AM on a bearing of 330. Over break in range which open into well grassed stoney undulations intermixed with the patches of gydia scrub, Then crossed belts of gydia and well grassed stoney plains alternatively At 11 AM arrived at a spinifex ridge and followed down a small water course about same bearing to a blue bush swamp with water timbered with india- rubber trees. We made a little east to avoid swamp and then came through a small belt of gydia to a well grassed plain and in half a mile struck a branch of a large creek we can see farther to the north. The country travelled over today is very beautiful in appearance and if it proves to be well watered will be very valuable to squatters. I went over to the large creek and found that it is a large sandy channel in which there is at present water but it will not last long The timber consist of very fine gums and gum saplings together with box which runs back from the creek about half a mile on either side Heavy rain clouds are rising all round us and I observed a rainbow at 6 PM. 28 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM hearing 110, The max temp has been 116 today in the shade, Tree branded LE ay B Saturday 26th January 1367 Started at 8.20 on @ bearing of 340 over creek running south and in half an hour arrived at another running in a similar direction which we followed up into a creek coming from the west and running to the nor-east which [ think the Cloncurry and the creek we followed up merely an atabratich of it We crossed the creek coming from the west and travelled in a north by west course through a box forest crossing two sniall billybongs running west by south, At length we arrived at a well grassed stoney rise lightly timbered with gydia and acaciae which we travelled wp and crossed a little spinifex We struck the head of a small water course and followed it down to a blue-bush swamp and crossing a small gydia ridge arrived at a small creek running north. The max temp has been 117 F Toward sundown heavy rain clouds gathered to the N.S and E and about 8 PM the was a slight fall of rain Vivid lightning was observed to the S.W and N.E. Sunday 27th January 1867 Camped. The day has been fine with gusty breezes Max temp 113F. Heavy rain clouds are gathering all round us At about 7 PM there was a smart fall of rain but having received warning we were all prepared having one tent over the stores and in the other we all managed to make ourselves comfortable. Monday 28th January 1867 In consequence of the packs getting in disorder last night by reason of the rain we did not get started till 9 AM. After travelling for about a mile west over sandy ridges on which there was a sprinkling of spinifex, we came on to a blue bush swamp which contained water In order to avoid it we were obliged to make a little southing Continuing a little to the north of west we crossed a small dry creek running north and then passing through some gydia scrub in about two miles from camp came on to a small but very good erecek running NNE in which there was Jarge numbers of water-fowl of different descriptions and round the edge of the water heavy tracks of blacks We had io make to the east a little for a crossing, we then went through a belt of gydia and on to lightly timbered stoney undulations which soon became plaing and ther again undulations At 1,30 PM we came on to a small creek with water timbered with gydia which we crossed bearing N We then proceeded for two miles over stoney well grassed undulations lightly dinbered with blood wood and acacias and at past 2 PM, arrived at a small creek running about north timbered with box gydia and india-rubber trees called Whites Creek The max. temp. has been 115 and it threatens rain. Tuesday 29th January 1867 Having made all snug last night we had scareely turned in when it commenced to rain and continued until | AM this morning, During the storm a Very fierce stroke of lightning struck close up followed by a most terrific peal of thunder The state of the ground and our blankets causes me to spell today. Wednesday 30th January 1867 Started at about 8 O'clock across creek travelling west and to the north of it we passed through some gydia scrub and then on to stoney undulations with patches of scrub and acacias. Then over well grassed plain to a small water course running north and again plains to a small ridge timbered with acacias, Plains succeeded until ‘ past 10 we arrived at a creek running north generally running in a number of small billybongs but every few miles joining in a good water hole, We crossed the creek and a billybong of it and travelled over u rising plain on to high sandy flats timbered with blood-wood gums, box and acacias and covered thickly with portulac We found that the rain had been much heavier here and we made a very zig-zag way in order to avoid the boggy patches On arriving at a small creek running south about which there is a good deal of blue bush we camped at w water hole in it, The max temp has been 118 F and heavy white headed clouds foretold rain which commenced very heavily about 3 PM and continued till nearly sundown Thursday 31st January 1867 The ground being too boggy for the camels to travel the party encamped. With McCalman, I started west and in about five miles travelling over country at first similar to that about the camp and then open plains. We came.on to a small billybong which we crossed and in a few minutes caine on to a very large dry sandy channel which | believe to be the William of McKinlay. We crossed it and in aboul a mile came on to a billybong containing water we then returned to camp It threatens more rain, anyhow we shall be compelled to continue in camp in consequence of the state of the plains THE DIARY OF BARNETT 29 Friday Ist February 1867 The thermometer reached to 123°F and heavy rain clouds and thunder storms have been all round us today but the sky cleared towards the evening and the night was clear and starlight The everlasting ‘‘parquil poker’’ of the frogs and the musical wheel-like click of the locusts are heard throughout the night, Saturday 2nd February 1867 Started at half past 8 down the small creek on which we camped until we came to a crossing; we then travelled generally sou-west over lightly timbered sandy ridges and small plains At 11 AM. we arrived at the William, in which now a small stream of water is flowing The river possesses high banks timbered with gum box, cabbage palms and fig trees and a few small beef-wood trees. We followed up the river for about 3 miles passing a box flat and camped. As Leichardt might have travelled on this river we shall follow it up and then if possible cross on to another water course farther west which we will follow down. Sunday 3rd February, 1867. Camped as Camp VIII. The day is fine and clear with 2 cool breeze from the sou-sou west LE Tree branded VIII B Monday 4th Feb 1867. Travelling up the William a little to the east of south we passed several box flats and then on to the fine high banks of the river very well timbered. At about 3 mls a point of the river compelled us to make a little easting and then on our former bearing we passed over fine open well grassed glades with clumps of box running parrallel with them Two miles brought us on the lightly, timbered sandy undulations and we then changed course to the west of south and in a short time came on to some small billybongs of the river. Observing a blacks signal fire bearing 225 we made for it and struck the river and continued up jt until past 12 PM. Toward evening my head became very bad and [ soon found 1 had an attack of fever but | must endeavour to get out of this camp tomorrow LE Tree branded IX B Tuesday Sth Feb 1867 Generally south up creek for about 3 mls when L noticed a good waterhole in the William and came on to some most beautiful country much higher than that we had been previously travelling over composed of well grassed stoney abrupt undulations amongst which various small creeks make their way and small plains of red loom magnificiently grassed and rich with herbage, relieved by clumps of gydia and acaciae. We crossed several small creeks and changing bearing to the west of south again struck the river and after following it up a short distance came on to a deep narrow channel coming from the east and camped LE Tree branded X B Wednesday 6th Feb 1867 Feeling too unwell to travel I desire Mr. MeCalman to cross the river and examine the country about ‘*He informs me that up the river it bears SW There is a blood wood ridge running along about 2 mls back off the river and two dry broad shallow billybongs. About a mile up the creek on this side a billybong joins it containing some good water holes. Thursday 7th Feb 1867. I am still very weak and in much pain and consequently remain encamped Friday 8th Feb 1867 Camped. The creek commenced rising towards evening and heavy clouds threatened rain, It commenced raining lightly about 10 PM. Saturday 9th Feb 1867. Heavy rain from 3 10 5 AM. The day has been very close and oppressive, the sky is dark and wild all round By 12 noon the river had risen 9 ft The tain recommenced heavily about sundown and continued throughout the night. Sunday 10th Febry 1867 The day has been fine and the river commenced to fall rapidly Monday [lth Feb 1867 Started with Mr.McCalman up billybong to river about 6 mls. It is very much broken here and the main channel bears a good deal to the west becoming broader and shallower. A small branch comes in from the south On returning to camp Mr.McCalman started after the camels but was ad MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM unable to find one of the males for a considerable time At length falling in with some fresh blacks tracks he followed them and found that they had driven him into the river and very severely maltreated him They had only just left the camel when McCalman found him no doubt it was him who disturbed them This little incident shows that the blacks are both bold and hostile about here Tuesday 12th Feb 1867 Started about SE to avoid the deep narrow channel of the creek running WNW and on striking it up where it is broken and timbered with eydia we crossed it and travelled over a well grassed plain to a good water hole in the billybong of the William. Colin McIntyre brought word that there are some tracks of cattle up the river — 1 intend tomorrow for Mr.McCalman to examine them and seeif there is chance of getting a bullock and I will endeavour to overhaul the blacks. LE Branded tree XI B Wednesday 13th Febr 1867 Started with Myola down to Camp X and found there had been two blacks at it yesterday. We continued down the river and saw a great many fresh tracks of blacks After about nine miles travelling we arrived at a large camp where they had slept last night and about half a mile further came on to about ten men and a number of boys most of them busy gathering honey On perceiving us they all immediately precipitated themselves into the river and shortly disappeared not however untll had been able to show them that our camels were not to be maltreated with impunity. Having examined their camp and tools we returned to Camp XI. Mr.MecCalman informed me that the cattle tracks seen by Colin McIntyre were too old to lead him to expect cattle in the immediate vicinity Thursday 14th February 1867 Encamped, shooting ducks Friday 15th February 1867 Crossed billybong and proceeded up the river to where a deep creek joined jt coming from the south, the river coming from the sou-west We then tecrogsed the billybong on which we camped last night, it coming out of the river just below the deep creek, The grotind being very much cut up by deep narrow gutters we made out on the high downs on the east side of the river After five or six miles. travelling we crossed a creck timbered with gydia and box coming from the sou-sou east and I then observed two mounts one bearing 235 on the east side of the William and other bearing 260 which I have mamed after Mr.McCalman of the Expedition, I noticed these bearings at 11.6 AM; Bearing 260 for Mount McCalman over inferior plains. Over sandy sail timbered with Bloodwood, Bohemia and Apple leafed Gums at about 2 PM. struck the river which we crossed and camped. I proceeded 2 mls on a bearing of 260 to M..McCalman and observed another mount which Thave called after the late Mr. W.F. Sloman LE Tree branded XII B Saturday 16th February 1867 Passing over sandy soil country timbered with Bohemia Bloodwood and Gums to hard stoney plains at three miles bearing 280 we made Mount Sloman which [ ascended and observed a long heavy range about 25 mls distant the south end of which was bearing 290 which I will call McIntyre’s Range after our much lamented and talented leader Duncan Mcintyre, [ likewise observed a mount bearing 320 to which we proceeded and camped on a small creek running east-nor-east which | afterwards found to be the Jenny Sunday 17th February 1867 Camped. LE Tree branded XIII B Monday {8th February 1867 Leaving the party encamped f started with Dr. White on 4 general bearing of 290 over high broad stoney ridges, At 3 miles struck a creek» which-we ran down and found it rapidly increased in size running north and east, We travelled 280 over high stoney ridges to a small creek running N.N.E. Again over stoney ridges which soon became covered with quartz surfacing triodia and apple leafed Gums and passing over a quartz range we came on to a small creek. Crossing another Quartz range we came on to another small creek which we followed down until it meet the previous one on then we returned to Camp. Tuesday 19th February 1867 Removed the party to a water-hole on the first creek [ had struck yesterday and camped as it threatened heavy rain which luckily held off until THE DIARY OF BARNETT 31 we had made all snug when it commenced heavily and continued for about 2 hours. LE Tree branded XIV B Wednesday 20 February 1867 Travelled with the party over the first quartz range and followed the creek down nth & nor-east with much difficulty the ranges coming in abruptly and travelling on the top of which was rendered almost impossible by deep gutters running at right angles into the creek. Having followed down the creek some distance we were able to cross and make on to the stoney ridge and follow down creek until we meet another coming from the sou-west which we crossed Continuing down creek we struck another from the west-sou west which was so deep and narrow and whose banks were so precipitious that we were compelled to follow it up some distance until it broke into several small ones which we crossed Finding travelling along the creek most difficult I struck over a timbered flat for a rock bearing 290 which I ascended and observing nothing but frightfully broken and scrubby country to the westward I changed bearing to 320 on to a quartz reef from which I observed small plains to the nor-east Changing bearing to 60 we continued over a timbered flat to a small plain, Seeing there was a water course on the other side I travelled east until we struck it but finding it a confused mass of deep gutters timbered with gydia I continued along plain a little to the east of north and observing the gydia lose itself in gum | made a little more easting and struck the creek, the heads of which we had crossed in the morning, which had now became a large sandy channel and which I believe to be the Dougall of McKinlay LE Tree branded XV B Thursday 2Ist February 1867 Travelling about nor-east down river we crossed it and continued down over high sandy soil country lightly timbered with Bloodwood Beef wood Box and Gydia to a Lime stone ridge which ran abruptly into the river. Travelling along a large plain we struck the river at Duncan MclIntyre’s XLV Camp of his first expedition to the Gulf, the camp at which he found the two horses. LE Tree branded XVI B Friday 22nd February 1867 Leaving the party encamped I with Mr.McCalman followed along the bank of the river and in two miles came on to a lime stone ridge on which is the grave of Davy, one of Mr.MclIntyres black boys. There is a good water hole in the river here, We searched up and down the river and returned to camp Saturday 23rd February 1867 Started at half past seven over sandy soil timbered with Bloodwood Beefwood Gums and Bohemias on to a large plain at 9 AM we struck a point of timber and in a mile cross a small billybong Over hard sandy soil lightly timbered with acaciae; crossed a sand ridge timbered with box and acaciae and then again on a hard sandy soil and small rich loom plains with occasional small timbered ridges Recrossed billybong and followed it down to Camp 17 I started west by north and in a mile pulled the river which I found had decreased in size and making much easting I followed it down three miles without seeing any water nor does its appearance promise any ahead LE Tree branded XVII B Sunday 24th February 1867 Camped. We shot a good many ducks, There are numbers of emus about this country and I forgot to mention that about the country we travelled over from the William to the Dougall kangaroos are plentiful Monday 25th February 1867 Travelling about nor-east we passed over high lightly timbered plains and at a little more than a mile struck a large shallow water hole in billybong, Thence over well grassed plains entirely destitute of timber for three miles when they became lightly timbered and approaching the river the country became high and sandy timbered with box, gum and bohemia A large blue bush swamp compelled us to make a little to the east crossing a small billybong which we followed down along a sandridge passing two large recent camps of blacks. The billybong making in for the river we left it crossing the sandridge on to a low plain and in a mile and a half struck the river and camped as it had been raining a little and threatened more We had barely time to make all snug when we experienced such a wind storm that the pegs of our tent were torn from the ground and before we could set it again the rain came down as it were a sheet of water 32 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Tuesday 26th February 1867 Crossed the Dougall to its west side on to long well grassed plains gradually rising for 2 miles to a broad rather stoney ridge bearing 30 down river along plains in four miles they became dotted with small clumps of gydia scrub with a line of gydia to the right fringing the river. Making a little more to the east the plains became lightly timbered with acaciae and in about a mile we came on to a billybong of the river timbered with box and india rubber trees and camped. It rained shortly after arriving in camp. Wednesday 27th February 1867 The party encamped, Mr.McCalman and I started down the river and found that it is now cut up into many channels and has lost its former sandy nature its bed now being either quicksand or mud The timber is principally box, gydia and india rubber trees with a few bohemias, On the west side a gydia creek comes from the ridge while on the east side is a high long plain well grassed, In the afternoon I crossed the river and followed it up over plains crossing which to the east I found them cut up by small water courses timbered here and there with box, I observed a number of turkeys and several native companions. Thursday 28th February 1867 It having rained again yesterday the plains are too boggy for the camels we are therefore still camped, Mr.McCalman and McIntyre with Myola have started again down the river. Friday Ist March 1867 Camped, Mr.McCalman and McIntyre up the river Saturday 2nd March, 1867. Rode over to creek on the west side of river, crossing which I entered a gydia scrub which was about two mls wide, Keeping a west course for seven miles over spinifex ridges crossing several small creeks which flow into the Dougall Sunday 3rd March 1867 Camped at XIX. The river commenced to rise Monday 4th March 1867 Steady rain with a reef-top-sail breeze from the sou-sou-west which in the afternoon became gusty and shifted to all points of the compass and the rain became heavier and continued until midnight Tuesday 5th March 1867 A little rain in the morning, The country is in a frightfully boggy state. Wednesday 6th March 1867 Rain again at 1 AM. Cleared towards daybreak Creek falling rapidly Thursday 7th March 1867 Rode out in several directions to see if there was any chance of being able to travel but found the country in such a dreadfully boggy state that to attempt it would be useless. We had a few light showers in the evening Friday 8th March 1867 The day promises to be fine. I, sincerely hope it may prove so, for being cooped up in this manner is anything but pleasant especially when such a short time has been allowed me Saturday 9th March 1867 Fine during the day I rode over to the creek to the west and found it much flooded, managed to cross it and followed it about sou-west for five miles but could not find a crossing for the camels Travelling east I struck the Dougall and followed it down but could not find a crossing Sunday 10th March 1867 Camped Monday 11th March 1867 Finding it impossible to travel with the whole party on account of the boggy state of the country I determine to run down the river to find out into what it flows Accordingly started with Mr.McCalman across river with much difficulty and travelled down it about 15 miles general bearing 30. We now observed a spinifex ridge close in to the river on its west side and force it more to the east Travelling on a bearing of 90 at five miles we had crossed several small channel of a water course which I believe to be the Jenny of McKinlay and then came on to a large water course having at this point besides billybongs two large sandy channels, the one being a billybong of the other This must be the William, Having crossed we followed down bearing 60 for five miles and camped on a small billybong Tuesday 12th March 1867 On a bearing of 60 for six miles over well grassed plains Observing that the spinifex ridge on the west side of the Dougall appeared to force that river THE DIARY OF BARNETT 33 close into the William we recross the William the Jenny and the Dougall and found their waters meet about here while their main channels run parallel with one another Having travelled about eight miles general bearing 25 we crossed the point of the spinifex ridge and observed to the east a large water coutse running north and south whose Umber a little north of the point of the spinifex ridge joins the timber of the river we had just crossed This water course is the Cloncurry and Gilliott conjoined Bearing nearly north in about a mile and a half we came on to a camp of Mr Slomans situated about 4 of a mile south of Mr.Palmers sheep station on a billybong of the Cloncurry and Gilliott conjoined. We now proceeded to return to Camp XIXB recrossing the William to its east side and travelled over at first small plains to a great extent flooded and cut up by anabranches and small creeks coming off the rising acaciae timbered plains running between the William and the Cloncurry Then high and rather stoney plains, well grassed and on to hard sandy country to the billybong on which we camped last night, Wednesday 13th March 1867 Travelled over loomey plains on to the sandy bank of the William which we crossed and having passed over a similar sand bank and loomey plain on the west side we came on to high well grassed Stoney undulations until we arrived at the Jenny, Having crossed the Jenny we passed over rankly grassed gently swelling plains until we struck the Dougall three miles below our XIX Ga — Camp We crossed the river with some difficulty and arriving at the camp found all right Thursday 14th March 1867 Started out to endeavour to find a crossing on ihe river for the camels, Found good crossing on all the channels except the main one and over this ! determine to make a bridge which was made accordingly The bed of the river being principally quicksand to attempt crossing the camels through it would greatly endanger them Friday 15th March 1867 Crossed the Dougall to its east side and bearing a little to the south of west over well grassed plains in two miles crossed a west branch creek of the Jenny Two miles farther on the same bearing brought us to the Jenny which we crossed and observed the timber of the William about three miles to the east. We followed up the Jenny five miles over loomey plains covered with good grass and herbage and camped on a billybong From Camp XX I rode across the Jeny to its west site, its billybong stretching over about a mile of country Having recrossed about a mile ip T struck over the plain passing over a low stoncy rise in three miles I struck the William and followed it down to a Black's camp where I noticed they had beds raised fully five foot off the ground. | saw the tracks of a great many blacks but could [not] see the blacks. Saturday 16th March 1867 Travelling a little to the west of south up the Jenny at first over Joomey plains and with good herbage Then over a gently sloping hard sandy soil rise which soon became broken with small loomey plains and cut up by small creeks Ar about 6 mls ul a water hole in a small branch creek I observed some blacks, | rode up to them but they cleared out leaving their weapons etc behind them We camped at the water hole and I tracked the blacks about half a mile west to the Jenny. I followed up the Jenny about three miles south, It is timbered pdncipally with box with a little gydia and india rubber trees Travelling east about two miles crossed on a bloodwood ridge the head of small creek which | followed down to Camp XXI, Mr.McCalman and ! followed down the river a short distance crossing its billybongs on to the main channel f intend leaving the blacks weapons ete uninjured and shall also leave a small present for them in case they come back Sunday 17th March 1867 Camped, No appearance of the blacks There are large numbers of corillas, pigeons and a good many whistling ducks about. Monday 18th March 1867 Crossed the small branch creck on which we camped and continued up the Jenny over rankly grassed plains crossing here and there a low hard sandridge, spurs of the bloodwood ridge running parallel with Jenny After travelling about six miles the plains became very rotten covered with coarse herbage and grass At two miles farther we struck a billybong of the river and camped. During the atternoon | followed up the Jenny and found it came from the south for three quarters of a mile and then from the east by south for three quarters of a mile Continuing up it a mile farther over high sandy country timbered with bload wood bohemia, and apple leafed gums (for the ridge that had been tunning about parrallel comes close into the Jenny here) Lcame on to a black's camp which they had 34 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM lately left but found nothing interesting Crossing the Jenny I travelled west about three miles over a well grassed plain which then gently rises to a ridge timbered with patches of gydia Tuesday 19th March 1867 Crossed the plain on a bearing of 136 at one mile to the point where the Jenny and ridge are together and where there is a good water hole Then on a general bearing of 126 for 2 miles over sandy soil timbered with blood wood apple leafed gums and bohemia and dotted with decayed ant-hills Passing through about half a mile of gydia scrub we came on to a small plain and then again on to sandy timbered country Here and there where the soil is hard are a few shallow lagoons fringed with polygynum bushes on one of which we camped having travelled about nine miles After dinner I followed up the Jenny about five miles sou-west and saw a mount bearing 210 I then crossed the Jenny and followed down to camp The channel where we followed it up this morning was a deep and narrow but above the camp it became wider having good holes and several billybongs Wednesday 20th March 1867 Travelling about sou west we passed over rotten sandy country timbered with large gums and crossed a branch creek coming strangely from the east nor east In two miles the country improves it being red soil with clay-pans, timbered with gydia and then a plain dotted with acaciae and gydia bushes While travelling over this plain I observed a mount bearing 210 and shortly after another bearing 225 Crossing two small branch creeks we camped on the west side of the second having travelled nearly 12 miles After a spell I followed round the ridge from east to nearly west crossing the heads of a number of small water courses running from the mounts which bear from a point 200 yds 240 from marked tree commencing east 165.190.205.225.247.262 and 275. Noticed an eclipse of the moon Thursday 21 March 1867 Dr. White reporting Mr. Wildish not fit to travel in consequence of an attack of fever the party remain encamped. I crossed the Jenny to its west side and following the ridge struck it again at a point which bears 270 from camp and found it here a sandy well defined channel timbered with gums a stoney ridge timbered with gydia running close along side. The reason for my thus circling was that the Jenny has about here hardly any perceptible channel it spreading over a low plain subject to inundation tho’ occasionally there is a deep narrow gutter The number of small creek coming in also rendered it difficult to determine where the main channel came from Having found it I followed up and from its position description and its course where | left it believe that we shall find the head of the Jenny to be the small creek we camped upon after leaving the William There are innumerable Kyber about who seem to fancy a rather bare plain which much resembles a race course Friday 22 March 1867 Mr. Wildish being no better the party remained encamped. Mr.McCalman, McIntyre and Myola crossed on to the William and struck it between Camp XI & XII After following it down on its west side for some distance they recrossed on to the Jenny striking it where I turned back on Wednesday afternoon to camp and followed it up to our present camp On returning Mr.McCalman complained of not feeling well during his ride and ere long he was compelled to lay up. Dr White reporting it to be a severe attack of fever Saturday 23rd March 1867 Encamped in consequence of the sickness of Messrs McCalman and Wildish. I imagine they must have brought it from our 19th Camp where we hove to for the rain. I am glad to say. I should think this healthy country. Luckily both horses and camels seem to fancy our camp; most probably its being free from mosquitoes which were very troublesome down the rivers. Sunday, 24th March 1867 Camped. The water not being good at the camp Lhave been in the habit of fetching it from a water hole in a billybong of the Jenny situated where it would be imprudent to camp as the country is flooded at times. Mr.Mclntyre when out after the camels found a good water hole the good water hole about a mile to the north of this; I went over to and finding a good camp close handy and the country round about high and dry, deem it advisable to shift over tomorrow, Dr White agreeing with me that this is the best to do and is of opinion it will be attended with no bad results to the patients Monday 25th March 1867 Moved the party to a water hole in the Jenny about one mile north of Camp 24. The patients stood the journey bravely Tuesday 26th March 1867 Camped at 25 THE DIARY OF BARNETT 45 Wednesday 27th March 1867 Followed up the Jenny to Camp NIIL Thursday 28th March 1867 The Dr reporting that the patients tho’ doing well would not be able to travel for a week I thought it would be well for me to visit the depot camp and send a report of our progress to the Ladies, | therefore started at break of day and travelling a little to the north of west arrived at the depot camp at sundown having travelled about 60 miles Friday 29 March 1867 Saturday 30 Marck 1867 At the Depat Camp Sunday 31 March 1867 Monday Isi April 1867 Taking a course to the southward of my journey to the depot camp [ travelled back to the Jenny. When crossing the Cloncurry I observed a number of blacks the women scattered about collecting portulac When they noticed me they commenced howling like so many native dogs Being encumbered with a pack horse and the day drawing to a close I did not attempt to hold any communication with them, It was dark when | arrived at the Jenny and it being very troublesame riding I camped Tuesday 2nd April 1867 Followed up Jenny a mile to Camp 25 and found all right, McCalman recovered and Wildish much improved Wednesday 3rd April 1867 Getting packs in order for a start tomorrow Thursday 4th Apr 1867 Crossed the Jenny and travelling four miles over lightly timbered stoney ridges we arrived at the Creek on which is situated C14 and camped not being sure of water until we arrived on the Dougall and that journey being too far for our invalid Friday Sth April 1867 On a bearing of 300 over stoney well grassed ridges. At five miles arrived at sandy soil timbered with blood, bohemia and gums which continued for about a mile when crossing a small branch creek we struck the Dougall and crossed it, Following up the Dougall we crossed our track coming down it to camp 15, Passing over lightly timbered sandy country covered here and there with quartz surfacing, and a great deal broken by branch creeks Observed north end of range running S by E and N by W bearing 260; travelling for this as well as the country would allow we arrived at a smal! creek running south (a tributary of the Dougall) at which we camped, The end of range bears now 270 & another 180 Saturday 61h April 1867 Continuing up the Dougall our general course was 200; the range running parallel with the river to our right, The country is becoming very rough We crossed a spur of the range that came bluff into the river The best of our travelling was when we could follow the small sandy frontage of the Tiver Sunday 7th April 1867 Camped on the Dougall surrounded by mountains—! am suffering from a severe attack of opthalmia and in consequence | must give up the leading of the party to Mr, McCalman tomorrow as ] cannot. see where I am going Monday 8th April 1867 Continued up the Dougall being compelled by the roughness of the country to travel in its bed. The country is rapidly rising and low ranges come continually bluff into the river, where this happens there is a bar of blue rock across the river in which there are slight indications of copper, We managed with much difficulty to make six miles south and camped on a small sandy frontage of the river Tuesday 9th April 1867 Travelling generally in the bed of the river we made about eight miles sou west. We could only camp in the sandy bed of the river as it would be difficult to find a level piece of ground large enough for a camel to sit down elsewhere, The camels and horses have to content themselves with the small green fringe on the river bank Wednesday 10th April 1867 Continued nearly west up the bed of the Dougall, At half a mile from camp we passed a tributary coming from the north of west and at three miles entered a gorge where the bed is generally a blue rock and on either side the ranges come high and bluff on to the river Half a mile took us through the gorge and the high ranges then recede from the river tho’ they can be seen coming in again ahead forming a kind of basin Having proceeded about three miles from the gorge we camped again on the sandy bed of the river, Mr.McCalman rode up the river and at one mile dé MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM from camp came to a perpendicular rise in the bed of the river of about four feet. Three miles further he came on another similar rise He found the country on both sides of the river quite impassable for camels it being rocks of quartz, sharp iron stone ridges and parallel strata of slate standing on end with wondrous deep narrow crevices between them He saw what he believed to be the main range about ten miles ahead Thursday 1 ]th April 1867 From Mr.McCalman's description of the country and taking into consideration the state of the camels feet which have fately been getting very tender so much so that it is a question if | got on to the southern water-shed whether they would be able to come back without a spell of a month or two, Moreover not knowing of any water ! could depend upon for any length of time this side of Camp XXV together with my own blindness determines me to return and bearing in mind that the Ladies demand J shall always have @ safe retreat Colin Mcintyre prospected a small creek for gold and was successful in getting the colour, as it is called in gold diggers phraseology, twice but altogether 1 do not consider the prospect about here favourable for gold Bar 29 5%: Ther 92F shade Midday Friday 12th April 1867 Followed down Dougall to gorge about three miles east by north. From the top of the range which come bluff in here a mountain being peculiar from its having one single tree growing on its top bears 45, A conical hill 64 A flat topped mountain 70, A mountain with a small sugar-loaf- like hill on the top 130 and a high conical hill in the basin above the gorge 195 Saturday 13th April 1867 Passing through the gorge bearing generally nor- east we left the bed of the river and crossing some stoney ridges we were lucky enough to fall in with asmall strip of open stoney gydia which was much better travelling until we arrived at a creek timbered with box crossing which we were again on rough stoney ridges or sandy country with quartz surfacing and spinifex lightly timbered with stunted apple leafed gums and bloodwood until we arrived at Camp 29 which is now also 33 Sunday 14th April 1867 Camped Monday 15th April (867 Bearing a little to the east of nomh and passing over very similar to that travelled yesterday we came to Camp 28 which now also 34 Tuesday 16th April 1867 Followed along track to within one mile of Camp 27 and camped on a water hole in the Dougall The north end of MeIntyres Range bears 270 and is distant about four miles Wednesday 17th April 1867 Followed along track to Camp 25 which is now also Camp 36 Thursday 18th April 1867 Crossed on to the William to Camp 12 but there being now no water we followed down our old track to Camp 11 which is now also Camp 37 [ notice that although we were much put about by rain on the Dougall scarcely any has fallen on the country travelled to day since we passed over it before Friday 19th April 1867 Travelling a little to the south of east we passed over well grassed plains sometimes lightly timbered with acaciae At four miles we arrived at a billybong of the Cloncurry and another mile over sandy soil timbered with blood and gums brought us to the river which we crossed, it being here a broad dry sandy channel We followed down the river about three miles and camped Saturday 20th April 1867 Today we followed down the Cloncurry about three miles east and striking a deep creek from the south we recrossed the Cloncurry to get round it and camped on the west bank of the river Sunday 21st April 1867 Camped Monday 22nd April 1867 Re-crossed the Cloncurry and travelling generally east passed over about six miles of desert country (hard sandy soil with decayed ant-hills and spinifex lightly timbered with stunted apple leafed gums and occasional blood and bohemia trees) alternatively with loomey plains and arrived at a box creek having a good frontage generally of about two miles in width on both sides Crossing the creek and going over about five miles more of desert country wé came on to gydia scrub and crossing a small creek travelled over four miles of desert country when we again came on to gydia THE DIARY OF BARNETT 37 scrub which continued for about three miles at times being so dense that we had great difficulty in getting the camels through it Keeping our easterly course we followed down a water course the gydia receding on either side, The water course seemed to lose itself on a plain and four miles from where we emerged from the gydia we struck the Western Creek and camped about four miles below Camp 3 Tuesday 23rd April 1867 Travelled up the Western Creek five miles over well grassed plains a good deal subject to inundation, In the afternoon Mr.McCalman with Myola started after a bullock to kill and returned at sundown with the bullock and two of Mr.Donald MclIntyres black boys whom he had met being out for the same purpose Wednesday 24th April 1867 Jerking meat, I wrote to Mr Donald McIntyre of our whereabouts and intentions and send the letter to him by his black boys Thursday 25th April 1867 Camped at 41 jerking meat Friday 26th April 1867 Camped at 41 Mr Donald McIntyre arrived Saturday 27th April 1867 Dr. White started with Mr Donald McIntyre for that gentlemans station with instructions to return tomorrow as we make a fresh start on Monday Sunday 28th April 1867 Camped—Dr. White McIntyre returned from Mr Monday 29th April 1867 Travelling a little to the west of south up the west side of Western Creek for one mile when we crossed a tributary from the west Bearing then generally south in three miles we had crossed the Western Creek and its billybongs to the high well grassed plains on the east side Continuing the same course in four miles we arrived at Camp 2 and we camped on the creek about 500 yds 320 from that Camp Tuesday 30th April 1867 Crossing on a bearing of 160 the billybong on which is situated Camp 2 we travelled five miles south over gently undulating plains well-grassed and with an abundance of herbage but all getting dry The country gets much higher as we proceed, Camped on the east side of Western Creek and branded atree LE XLIII B Wednesday Ist May 1867 For about three miles we travelled a little to the east of south over high undulations covered to a great extent with lime stones and not possessing such good pasturage as the country passed over yesterday, Observing the creek was coming more from the west we changed bearing to the west of south After five miles travelling over similar country we struck a billybong of the creek and noticing the dry appearance of it we changed our bearing a little to the north of west to cross the creek and its billybong, At about one mile we arrived at the main channel and found it to be dry narrow sandy channel but we were encouraged to proceed but observing that blacks had lately been in the neighbourhood Desiring the party to halt, Mr McCalman Myola and myself started in search of water We soon found a large hole in a billybong with a small quantity of water but not considering it sufficient for us Mr McCalman crossed the creek to follow a western billybong whilst Myola and myself followed up an eastern one We shortly came on a large black’s camp recently left and a large hole in the billybong with sufficient water. I started Myola to fetch up the camels but before they arrived Mr McCalman returned and informing me he had found good water in the western billybong when the camels came up we proceeded there, camped and branded atree LE XLIV B Thursday 2nd May 1867 The party remained encamped, Mr McCalman Myola and myself started up the west side of the creek on a general bearing of 270 The creek is a narrow dry channel timbered with box and gum and having a bed of quicksand On both sides there are good billybongs generally timbered with box or gydia. Friday 3rd May 1867 Travelling generally west up the Western Creek over stoney well grassed undulations At four miles we passed some small lime stone hills of very picturesque description, Three miles farther we struck a billybong of the creek and camped From the high undulations running parallel with the creek on its west side the mountains are to be seen to the south and south east and the line of McIntyre’s track running north 38 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Further search should be made over the range on to the south western water shed but before we could arrive there the contract time would have expired and moreover the camels feet in consequence of their late trip in the mountains are so tender that it would be necessary to spell them some time before they would be fit for rough travelling Tree branded LE XLV B Saturday 4th May 1867 Leaving the party encamped, I accompanied by Dr White started for the depot camp prior to bringing in the party Sunday 5th May 1867 Leaving the Dr at the Depot Camp I returned to the party Monday 6th May 1867 Travelling nor east generally over high well grassed undulations sometimes stoney principally country that has elsewhere been described in twenty miles we struck the Gilliott and camped Tuesday 7 May 1867 Travelled 1 mile north and then nor nor east across the Gilliott and its billybongs and passing over a plain on the same bearing in three miles we arrived at the Eastern Creek. Over undulations for six miles and then we crossed the Middle Creek, six miles farther over similar country we arrived at the Depot Camp Since our return to the Depot Camp Mr.McCalman and Myola followed up Eastern Creek over high downs for about 60 miles S.S.E. I with another horse party crossed to Camp 1 situated on the Gilliott and followed down that watercourse to its junction with the Cloncurry We then followed down these rivers conjoined on its east side to opposite the junction of the William, we then crossed the Cloncurry and followed it up to camp 39. About the watercourses followed by the party I may mention that the Dougall is a large sandy channel timbered with large gums cabbage palms and teatrees having on its bank bohemia fig and bloodwood trees About our 18 Camp it breaks into a number of small channels and before long looses its sandy bed having one of loamy quicksand and loam and is timbered with box indiarubber trees & gydia which continue to its junction with the William The Jenny is a small sandy channel timbered with from Camp 13 to Camp 25 when it breaks into many channels, the beds becomes loamy and it is timbered with box and gydia & indiarubber trees to its junction with the William The William is a large sandy channel timbered with large gums cabbage palms tea trees having on its banks bohemia fig and a few beef wood trees it retains its sandy bed & character to its junction with the Cloncurry & Gilliott (conjoined The Cloncurry is a similar channel rather larger The Eastern Creek is a loamy channel having scarcely any timber; what there is, is a little worthless box The Western Creek at Camp 45 has one channel timbered with box possessing a bed of loamy quicksand together with with good billybong it loses its sandy channel between Camp 2 & 3. The Gilliott from Camp | to its junction with the Cloncurry is a creek of many channel principally timbered with box The water courses mentioned are confluent streams but the junction of any does not increase the size of the recipient, the sandy channel near Palmers Sheep Station not being so large as either of the channels of the William the Cloncurry or the Dougall fifty miles up. (sgd) Wm. Fred Barnett Leader 27th May 1867. The names of the William and Jeannie Rivers have not survived. Barnett speaks of the junction of the Dougall (sic) and the William, but it is hard to reconcile this with the text of the diary. The William appears to join the Cloncurry River south of where the Dugald joins it and not to be connected with the Dugald at all. If however the William is the Corella River of today, then it might be so. The text of the diary has been left unaltered; for example the spelling of Leichhardt with one ‘h’ and a few other incorrect spellings. Also distances have been left in imperial measurements and temperatures in the fahrenheit scale. It has not been sought to alter the punctuation, particularly in regard to the absence of full stops, but inadvertently some may have crept in. On Saturday 16 February Barnett pays tribute to ‘our much lamented and talented leader Duncan McIntyre’. He was a loyal soul. On 28 March with Wildish and McCalman sick and unable to travel, Barnett rode in about 60 miles to the depot camp so he could send in a progress report to the Ladies’ Committee. Another reference to the Ladies is on 11 April, where he says that they demand he shall always have a safe THE DIARY OF BARNETT 39 retreat; that is to say he should not go beyond a point of no return. Lastly on 3 May he decided not to progress further to the southwest, as before he could arrive at the watershed the contract time would have expired. He did not seem to have any doubts about his accountability to the Ladies’ Committee. In the period between 7 and 27 May Barnett and McCalman examined the watercourses in the vicinity of the depot camp both to the north and the south, covering several hundred miles in the process. The final result was that no further traces of Leichhardt were to be found in the area of the search. The expedition was at an end. FATE’S LAST BLOWS Once the expedition was officially terminated Barnett began to find out who really were his friends and supporters. In the first place when acceding to Donald Campbell’s .request to return to Carpentaria, Barnett understood that his ultimate appointment was to rest with Donald McIntyre in Dalgonally. However, his consent to go back was on the following conditions: (i) In the event of his not taking charge of the party, he should receive his expenses to Carpentaria and back to Victoria, with fair remuneration for his loss of time; but (ii) If he was appointed leader he was to be paid his expenses ‘going and returning’ and the compensation for his services, although left an open question until his return, was to be ‘ample and satisfactory’. Barnett arrived at the depot camp on 29 November 1866. Donald McIntyre was absent and did not return until 22 December, when he acquiesced in the appointment of Barnett as leader. On Barnett’s return with the party to the depot camp on 7 May 1867 he received a letter from Dr Mueller requesting him to continue the expedition for a longer period than that which had been contracted for. With this request he could not comply as Donald McIntyre was not agreeable. On Barnett requesting Donald McIntyre to give him £50 to pay his expenses to Victoria this request was refused. McIntyre told Barnett he would pay him only from the time he was appointed (22 December 1866) at the rate of £200 per annum. Also, and this was, perhaps, the unkindest cut of all, McIntyre said that he supposed Barnett ‘had come over, like any other man, for the job’. He then proceeded to debit Barnett £25 for a horse and £10 for tobacco for which Barnett had chosen not to charge the members of the party considering they were entitled to be supplied with that item. As a result Barnett was left with £37.15s. He had to borrow £12.5s from McIntyre, for which he had to give his note of hand, to enable him to get back to Victoria. On his return to Melbourne Barnett immediately visited Donald Campbell and requested a settlement. Campbell told him he could do nothing until he had seen the Ladies’ Committee, but at Barnett’s request advanced him £20. Campbell asked Barnett to call on Dr Mueller, but the doctor was too unwell to see him. However, Mueller sent a message to Barnett to call on Mrs Tierney, the honorary secretary of the Ladies’ Committee, who told Barnett that the ladies had nothing to do with Mr Campbell’s arrangements. Barnett saw Campbell again; the latter said that any moneys paid would be out of his own pocket and he could not think of giving Barnett more than £25, which, with the £20 already advanced, would pay his expenses from Carpentaria. That was all Barnett received. He had returned to the family home at Rowan Street, Sandhurst. From there he wrote on 12 August 1867 to the Ladies’ Committee seeking a just settlement, as he had failed to receive one from Donald Campbell and Donald McIntyre on whose honour he had relied. Mrs Tierney responded on 20 August. She said she would place his letter before the next meeting of the committee in mid- September, but did not think that it would interfere in any monetary transaction between Messrs. Campbell and Barnett. After some procrastination on the part of the ladies, they, in a letter (18 October 1867) signed by Mrs Tierney told Barnett they could not entertain his claim as they had contracted out the management of the expedition to Donald Campbell, who alone was responsible to Barnett. In any event the ladies no longer had any funds at their disposal. Barnett’s gullibility seems to have stemmed from his hero worship of Duncan Mclntyre. Campbell and Donald McIntyre would have known of the admiration he had for Duncan and seem to have taken advantage of this. Barnett does not appear to have been informed until after the expedition was completed and he had returned to Victoria that the ladies had contracted out the balance of the expedition to Donald Campbell. He seems to have been under the impression that Campbell and Donald McIntyre were acting as advisors to the ladies, whereas they were in fact sub-contractors who had taken over the 40 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM responsibility of the ladies’ committee towards the expedition and its members. Obviously they did not want to lose money from their contract. The ladies were remiss also in that when confirming his appointment as leader of the remainder of the expedition they did not tell Barnett that he was not their financial responsibility. On 21 September 1867 Mr Thomas Dicker of St. Kilda wrote to the Argus about circumstances which had recently come to his knowledge through an acquaintanceship with the family of the late Dr Barnett (Adolphus had died on 14 February 1867 aged 54 years). (36) Dicker, after setting out the terms of Barnett’s appointment as already related, strongly put forward Barnett’s claims and enclosed all the correspondence between him and the ladies. He also made the point that any reports sent in by Barnett had been ‘suppressed’. When publishing the correspondence the Argus added an editorial mote saying all the correspondence had been received some weeks before, but had been held over in consequence of Dr Mueller being absent at King George Sound. As a result of the holdover Barnett’s letter of 1 October to the ladies requesting a reply to his earlier letters and the ladies’ reply of 18 October, already referred to, were published as well. (37) The day after Dicker’s letter with all enclosures was published a lengthy letter from Dr Mueller appeared. The doctor reiterated that the Ladies’ Committee had entered into an agreement with Duncan McIntyre for a two year search for Leichhardt. Before a year elapsed McIntyre was dead of fever in an area not previously known to be unhealthy. Mr Sloman, who was unknown to the committee, but McIntyre’s appointee as second in command, then became leader of the party, but died soon after from sunstroke in the vicinity of Burketown, an area where traces of Leichhardt were not likely to be found. The Ladies’ Committee, to keep faith with supporters, decided to keep the search party in the field for the remainder of the two years. They contracted out to Mr Donald Campbell of Glengower the balance of the time. It was Campbell’s sole responsibility that Barnett was entrusted with the leadership for the remaining time and this arrangement met with the concurrence of Donald McIntyre who, from his Gulf Station, supervised the expedition. Mueller says Sloman’s post easily could have been filled before Barnett ever arrived at Carpentaria. By reason of the contract process the Ladies’ Committee had no responsibility, monetary or otherwise, towards any member of the party. They felt on the other hand they were entitled to some real field work during the winter of 1867 to compensate for all the delays at the Gulf camps. They had hoped for an examination of all the Gulf rivers and not merely some eastern waters. There had been deep disappointment when the search party returned after ‘two months of easy travel’. The reports from an area so limited and already so well known were documents so devoid of importance that it would have been unfair to have sought newspaper space for them. Mueller had kept them so that they might be used in some final report, but would recommend now that they be returned. Dr Mueller asserted that the ladies had dealt most generously with the contracting gentlemen. Thus the severe loss 60 horses resulting from an incautious but very courageous movement during an extended drought, a movement over which the committee had no control and which ruined the expedition, nevertheless resulted in a £500 supplement of the contract sum being granted. The doctor lamented that after two years exertions of the ladies, ‘maintained bravely under great difficulties and discouragements’, their operations were now being made the subject of public controversy. He promised a full accounting of the expedition expenditure would be made to the public. He also expressed anxiety that the ill-starred enterprise might become the topic of public discussion to an extent which could discourage reorganisation of the expedition, seeing that the camels were now available at Carpentaria. This would subdue a chivalrous spirit for exploration and, above all, poor Leichhardt again would be abandoned to his fate. (38) Dicker had said: Tt would almost appear that mismanagement and blundering are fated to attend every exploring expedition equipped from this colony of Victoria ..... the proposition to enlist the services of a leader in Victoria for such an expedition and then to offer to pay him off in that heartless huckstering fashion at one of the ends of the earth is certainly as preposterous as one can well conceive, But this does not appear to be the only point on which the management of the expedition had blundered. Mr. Barnett ..... recopied Mr. Slowman’s (sic) journal and forwarded it to head quarters— that has been suppressed. On another occasion he rode in seventy miles to send a report; and on a third occasion, on the return of the expedition to the depot, he journeyed 130 miles in three days to catch the Burdekin mail to forward another report, both of which reports were also suppressed. .. It might be said of Dr Mueller’s letter, in which he sought to reply to Dicker’s allegations, THE DIARY OF BARNETT at that he did protest too much and was inclined to fog clear-cut issues with emotive statements. The Argus seems to have had his measure, though; in a leading article on the following Friday it was said that the correspondence published on the previous Monday (Dicker with enclosures) and Tuesday (Mueller) showed, if it did nothing else, the relative value attached by some people to a live Englishman and a dead German. The leader writer Iraversed the whole sorry story. He praised Barnett's courage and endurance: they seem to indicate that Mr. Barnett is made of the right stuff, and possesses the hardihood and endurance so essential to. success in ihe work of exploration. He went on to say that the laying of the affair before the public had resulted in a reply from Dr Mucller, but not a confutation. The doctor seemed to be of the opinion that Barnett was fortunate that the leadership of the expedition, with its munificent stipend, was not filled up hetore Barnett could arrive at Carpentaria. The doctor was taken to task for deprecating the labours of the search party (as “two months easy travel’), suppressing the journals forwarded to him and not allowing the newspaper editors to form their own opinions as to their worth. As regards the £500 so generously awarded to the contractor for the loss of sixty horses, might not a similar sympathetic feeling have been extended to the leader who brought back his party intact, whose sight was irreparably injured by the hardships he had undergone and who was incapacitated from obtaining any employment in consequence? The Argus no less than Dr Mueller had a genuine anxiety about the fate of “poor Leichhardt’, bul it also felt some anxiety for the health and safety of living men and for the just recompense of those who had already engaged in the search for Leichhardt. The leading article concluded on a note of inquiry — We are far trom agreeing with the Government Botanist, ‘thal this ill-starred enterprise should nor become the topic of public discussion, because it is only by such discussion that the public wre likely to arrive at 4 satisfactory conclusion as to the wisdom and propriety of persevering in these disastrous expeditions. The time is arriving when we should ask ourselves this question — Is if expedient to continue explorations of which other colonies reap the solid advantages, and from which we obtain nothing but barren honour? At the sacrifice of theiy own lives, and al an enormous cost to Victoria, Burke and Wills opened up a tract of magnificent coumery rom Cooper's Creek to the Gulf of Carpentaria. Il was shortly afterwards incorporated with Queensland, and is now being rapidly occupied by the squatters of thal colony. We pull the chestnuts out of the fire, and they eat them; and we may reasonably ask ourselves whether we cannot find more profitable employment for our surplus cash and superfluous energies. (39) This was hardly conducive to the encouragement of further searches being mounted for Leichhardt and no doubt thoroughly mortified Dr Mueller, However, he had been less than pragmatic in his approach to the whole Leichhardt Search Expedition and its aftermath and was not undeserving of the criticisms levelled by Dicker and the Argus, W.E.P. Giles wrote from Mount Murchison on 23 December 1847 deploring the implied accusation that the affairs of the expedition had been mismanaged by Dr Mueller. he felt if Dr Mueller accused Mr Barnett of having failed in his duties, the doctor would have good grounds for so doing, or he would not have made the accusation. Mr Giles, ‘as a personal friend’ of Dr Mueller requested the publication this letter, especially as | know, and doubtless you are as well aware, thal sitive the committee first agreed with Mr. McIntyre, Dr. Mueller's self-imposed duties with Tegard to the expedition have produced to him no mental sinecure. (40) Giles, on his own admission, was hardly an unbiassed commentator! As is not unusual, the sound and the fury seem to have died down after each protagonist had had his say. No record can be found, after Giles’ letter to the Australasian, of any other reference to the controversy in any other 1868 newspaper. There is no evidence that Barnett gained any pecuniary satisfaction, although his honour and his leadership capabilities had been defended by the Argus. He is not on tecord as having undertaken any further journies of exploration; no doubt his health prevented that. Barnett, in his twenties, was an unsettled type of person. His dislike of a desk job was made obvious in his letter to his Aunt Eliza Newman in 1864, The outdoor life seemed to suit him. Yet he had to assume the role of a knight errant. The combination of idealism and nalivetie made him fair game for the dour, hard headed entrepreneurism of the McIntyres and Campbells of this world. He ruined his health and his economic prospects because of his loyalty to Duncan Melntyre, both before and after the latter's death. Barnett’s disregard for his own material interests in comparison with honour and devotion make him a quixotic figure in the 42 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM immediate aftermath of the expedition; his tilting at windmills was no more successful than that of Don Quixote. On 19 October 1869 at St. Lukes Church of England, Emerald Hill, South Melbourne, at the age of 28 years he married Charlotte Harris (a widow since 22 January 1868) aged 32 years. The bride was the mother of three surviving children, a fourth having died before her second marriage. Mrs Harris was a licensed victualler and like her bridegroom normally resided at Sandhurst. Barnett gave his occupation as ‘explorer’, but he roamed no more. (41) He settled down as landlord of the Crown Hotel, Hargreaves Street, Bendigo (as Sandhurst now came to be called). His privations between 1864 and 1867 continued to tell on his health. The delicate boy may have grown into the hardy backwoodsman, but even the latter had limits to the extent to which he could punish his body with poor diet, untreated fevers, eye disease and alternately roasting and steaming in the unrelenting climate of the lands below the Gulf of Carpentaria. A combination of liver disease (acute hepatitis) and epilepsy carried him off, at the age of 37 years, on 18 March 1879 and he was buried at Back Creek Cemetery, Bendigo on 19 March. (Fig. 7). It will be noted that under his name on the tombstone the words ‘(late explorer)’ appear. He was survived by his widow and two of the three children of their marriage. The third had predeceased him in her infancy. The remaining two Fic 7. The tombstone of William Frederic Barnett in the Back Creek Cemetery, Bendigo. Under his name appear the words ‘late explorer’. children were both daughters, so he left no male issue. (42) His obituary recounted his exploring trips and quoting from a Riverine Herald report (43) on the end result of the Leichhardt Search Expedition said: We believe that a greater mistake was never made by any leader [Duncan McIntyre]. Had Mr. Barnett been given a command, the frightful disaster at Cooper’s Creek might have been averted. At all events it was due to his exertions in a great measure that worse results did not follow. (44) Among those who knew him his reputation was not diminished by death; his judgment again was vindicated by contemporary opinion, but the recognition he deserved still eluded him. REFERENCES (1) Jose, Arthur Wilberforce (1863-1934), journalist and historian (See ‘Australian Dictionary of Biography’ Vol. 9). He recognised the historical significance of the diary. Miss Ida Leeson, the Mitchell Librarian, also had a considerable reputation as an Australian historian. (2) ‘Our First Half Century’. Government of Queensland, Brisbane 1909. pp. xxi-xxiv, 162-163. (3) ‘Australian Dictionary of Biography’ (ADB) Vol. 5; State Archives of New South Wales — Index to Assisted Migrants Arriving Port Phillip 1839-1851, Shelf Location 4/4813 p. 4a. (4) ADB Vol. 5. (5) Government Statist, Victoria. Death Entry 3556/ 1867. (6) Government Statist, Victoria. Marriage Entry-F.W. Barnett to C. Harris 3603/1869. Death Entry-F.W. Barnett 2971/1879. Unassisted Shipping Records Series VPRS 3501 MF Reel 14. (7) West Sussex Record Office, Chichester, U.K., Corfield Papers (Accession No. 5533). Not currently catalogued. (8) Victorian Government Gazette 1861 p. 1139. (9) Riverine Herald, Echuca, Vic. 31 December 1864. See also supplement to Brisbane Courier 12 January 1865 and Favenc, Ernest. ‘The History of Australian Exploration for 1788 to 1888’, Sydney 1888 (xv + 474) p. 246. (10) Riverine Herald 31 December 1864, Brisbane Courier (Supp.) 12 January 1865. (11) Australasian (Melb.) 31 December 1864. (12) Riverine Herald 31 December 1864, Brisbane Courier (Supp.) 12 January 1865. (13) Age (Melb.) 23 December 1864, Australasian 31 December 1864. (14) Australasian 18 February 1865. (15) Australasian 4 March 1865. (16) Australasian 15 April 1865. Leichhardt, Dr. Ludwig. ‘Journal of an Overland Expedition in Australia’ (London 1847) p. xiv et passim. (17) Australasian 27 May 1865. THE DIARY OF BARNETT 43 included some more Barnett material. One of the photographs, undated and simply marked Australia on the reverse, shows what is obviously an exploring party. The second European from the right resembles closely the photograph of Duncan McIntyre. The young man on his right, holding a camel halter, could be Barnett who was the most junior member of the party. Lacking positive evidence the identification of atly person in the photograph must be treated as pure conjecture. (18) Reprinted in the Australasian 6 May 1865. (19) Australasian 27 May 1865. (20) Australasian 12 June 1865. (21) Australasian | July 1865. (22) Australasian 8 July 1865. (23) Australasian 5 August 1865. (24) Queensland State Archives (QSA) Gov/24 p. 333. Despatch 52 8/8/1865. (25) The Argus (Melb.) 2 December 1867. (26) Age 30 May 1866, The Weekly Herald (Brisbane) 9 June 1866. (27) QSA Gov/24 p. 497. Despatch 34 17/6/1866. (28) Age 21 May 1866, The Weekly Herald 2 June 1866. Blair, David. ‘Cyclopaedia of Australia’ (Melbourne 1881) p. 230. Argus 2 December 1867. (29) Holthouse, Hector. ‘Cannibal Cargoes’ (Adelaide 1969) pp. 106 ef. seq. (30) Blainey, Geoffrey. ‘Mines in the Spinifex’ (Sydney 1960) p. 9. Pughs Almanac 1867 and 1868. QSA Gov/24 p. 654. Despatch 68 17/12/1866. (31) ADB Vol. 5. Palmer, Edward. ‘Early Days in North Queensland’ (Sydney 1903) p. 79. Fysh, Hudson. ‘Taming the North’ (Sydney 1864 reprint) p. 21. Australasian 21 July 1866. QSA Gov/24 p. 522 Despatch 46 3/8/1866. (32) Palmer, op. cit. p. 80. Fysh, op. cit. p. 22. Blainey, op. cit. p. 9. Black J. (Comp.) ‘North Queensland Pioneers’ (Charters Towers n.d. 71934) p. 74. Age 24 July 1866. (33) Australasian 2 March 1867. McIntyre, J.N. ‘White Australia: The Empty North’ (Sydney 1920) p. 8. Black, op. cit. p. 74. Argus 2 December 1867. (34) The Weekly Herald 2 June 1866. (35) McKinlay, John. ‘McKinlay’s Journal of Exploration in the Interior of Australia’. (Melbourne n.d. 71862) pp. 85-86. (36) Government Statist, Victoria, Death Entry 3556/ 1867. (37) The Argus (Melb.) 2 December 1867. (38) The Argus 3 December 1867. (39) The Argus 6 December 1867. (40) Australasian 11 January 1868. (41)Government Statist, Victoria Marriage Entry 3603/ 1869. (42) Government Statist, Victoria Death Entry 2971/ 1879. (43) Riverine Herald 7 December 1867. (44) Bendigo Advertiser 19 March 1879. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS That I was able to complete this paper to something approaching my own satisfaction was due to the help of a number of people. First of all, Dr W.E. Savige of Camberwell, Victoria, who carried out research for me and who investigated W.F. Barnett successfully from the somewhat sparse details I was able to give him. It was Dr Savige who put me in touch with Mr. D.K. Muir of Balgowlah, N.S.W., who has been researching the Barnett family for his friend, Mr K.C, Leslie, Education Officer at the West Sussex Records Office, Chichester, England and a Barnett 44 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM descendant. As a result I had put at my disposal the Barnett family tree compiled by Mr Muir with much other information. This included the copy of the invaluable letter from Barnett to his aunt, Eliza Newman, which Mr Leslie kindly gave permission to be used. Mr. Leslie also furnished the interesting photograph reproduced here as Fig. 8. The Director and staff of the Queensland Museum and the State Librarian, New South Wales and his Mitchell Librarian and staff all endeavoured to find the provenance of the W.F. Barnett diary, held by the Queensland Museum, which provided the basis for this paper. The John Oxley Librarian made a valuable contribution, when, by chance, he purchased a map showing McIntyre’s route from the Darling to the Gilliatt River. From notations on this we found it had been torn out of a copy of Justus Perthes Geographical Bulletin for 1867 and this in turn led me to the relevant issues of the Age in which MclIntyre’s posthumously compiled and edited journal had appeared. My thanks are extended to all of them. Mem. Qd Mus. 25(1): 45—70.[1987] COMMUNITY PATTERNS REVEALED BY TRAWLING IN THE INTER-REEF REGIONS OF THE GREAT BARRIER REEF CANNON, L.R.G.*, GOEDEN, G.B.+, CAMPBELL, P.t *Queensland Museum. +Fisheries Research Branch, Queensland Department of Primary Industries. tZoology Department, University of Queensland. ABSTRACT Several series of exploratory trawls on and adjacent to the Great Barrier Reef produced approximately 15,000 specimens of fish and macro-invertebrates representing some 700 species. Classification and ordination analyses of the catch from the principal trawl series made over easily trawlable grounds showed no clearly definable community assemblages — rather a gross continuum with a tendency to depth descrimination — a discrimination revealed most sharply by the fishes. More rigorous sampling in a smaller area, but including ‘foul ground’, reinforced this depth related patterning (again most evident from the fishes) which, in turn, correlated well with sediment type and distance from shore. This study supports others which suggest the trawlable regions of the tropical continental shelf may be biologically separable into few continua. Complete faunal/station lists are given. INTRODUCTION Despite extensive commercial trawling activity along the Queensland coast we have a relatively poor knowledge of the animal assemblages that inhabit trawlable areas. From September 1979 to May 1982 several series of trawls were conducted by both Commonwealth and State Fisheries to explore for new trawl areas, especially in the more difficult inter-reef regions. Although not designed to systematically sample the Queensland shelf, the trawls did produce a great quantity of demersal and macrobenthic animals which were made available to the Queensland Museum. This paper attempts to interpret and summarize these data. Although Frankel (1978) listed some 4500 citations for the Great Barrier Reef Region, most of these relate to the coral environs. Literature dealing with the structure of the trawl fish community and its distribution in this geographical area is limited to Kailola and Wilson (1978) and Watson (1984) for the Gulf of Papua, Liu (1976), Lui, Lai and Yeh (1978) and Lee (1979) for the northern Gulf of Carpentaria, and Rainer and Munro (1982) for the southern Gulf of Carpentaria. Our trawl data are for the Great Barrier Reef Region especially between Cape York Peninsula and Townsville and our intention was to determine the nature and limits of the assemblages or of community types that occupy the trawlable soft- bottom environment between coral reefs. 45 Differences in collection methods and data handling techniques has meant that final analyses were limited to subsets of the original material. Available data suggest that commercial trawling beyond the established trawl zones in inter-reef areas of the Great Barrier Reef Region currently is quite limited, but increasing as a result of economic pressures on the large, coastal prawn- trawl fishery (Hundloe, 1985). It can be assumed, therefore, that the data sets for such areas are descriptive of the original unexploited demersal communities and thus have considerable value as base-line information from which longer term management decisions can be formulated. Rainer and Munro (1982) confined their study to fishes and cephalopods, both relatively easy to identify and highly mobile within the environment. This study included most macrofauna collected by the trawls, viz. fish, echinoderms, crustacea, molluscs, cnidarians and sponges. While trawling undoubtedly may not be the favoured collection technique to sample all these groups most effectively, in practical terms trawling does yield large quantities of all the groups mentioned. We included the six major groups (but excluded ‘minor’ groups such as ascidians, bryozoans and various worm groups) because we believed that they were likely to increase the resolution of community types and because they seemed most likely to show the effects of increased trawling effort in the future. 46 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM STUDY AREA The Great Barrier Reef Region is a vast area of diverse and complex geological and hydrological features (Maxwell, 1968) dominated by coral reefs and lying along the Queensland coast north from approximately 25°S. To the north the Region tends to disperse through the Torres Strait (9°S-11°S) and merge with the huge coastal estuaries of the Papuan Gulf. To the west of the Torres Strait the Region merges with the Gulf of Carpentaria which is an expansive shallow gulf with relatively little hydrographic variation (Munro, 1972) and an almost complete lack of coral reefs. Seven series of trawls (0 through VI) were undertaken in the Great Barrier Reef Region (Fig. 1). While the vast majority of these trawls were completed on the soft-bottom inter-reef areas of the continental shelf, most of the Series III trawls were on the continental slope. A summary of station data for each trawl series including dates, locations, depths and bottom characteristics is presented in Appendix I. METHODS From February 1979 to May 1982 a total of 229 sites in seven series of trawls were sampled: more than 15,000 specimens representing approximately 700 species were obtained. Because the rationale of each trawl series varied, there has been corresponding variation in the methods of obtaining and handling the biological material that forms the basis of these analyses. Biological Data — Trawled material was generally frozen in bulk aboard the survey vessel. The frozen samples were then returned to the laboratory and thawed, where practicable in preservative, and sorted to phylum. These preserved specimens were transported to the Queensland Museum for identification. Species were identified from available literature. In many cases (especially for the lower groups) identification to the species level could not be determined with confidence because the fauna is in need of considerable taxonomic research. Where names could not be applied, and more than one species was believed present, they were listed as spp. Every attempt has been made to make names and classifications follow the most current available literature. Appendix II gives a checklist of the fauna related to stations. Physical Data — Only physical data relating to depth and some subjective classifications of bottom type derived from the trawl logs are presented (see Appendix I). Other data were inconsistently gathered or reported. Sediment carbonate content was derived from Maxwell (1968). Data Analysis — No attempt was made to analyse all the data because of the disparate nature in which they were collected. Two series (I and V), however, were analysed. In the larger (series I) data set only binary (presence, absence) data were collected. The series V cruise was made specifically to investigate potential patterning and numerical data were obtained. Stephenson (1973) summarized the earlier attempts to understand and quantify the nature of marine benthic communities or assemblages. Community analysis in recent times has commonly used either ordination or classification techniques. These strategies are not considered mutually exclusive (McIntosh, 1967) and can be gainfully combined in a single analysis (Lambert and Dale, 1964). Ordination techniques attempt to reduce data dimensionally while retaining maximum information on inter-entity relationships. At least in marine benthic work, however, classification has been more commonly employed in community analysis (e.g. Rainer and Munro, 1982). It places entities in classes based upon shared attributes. In the present study both ordination and classification were used in interpreting results by highlighting complementary facets of the data patterns. In particular the ordinations allowed interpretation of the classificatory dendrograms by providing a means of observing group overlap. The analyses made use of the TAXON programme package (CSIRO computer network). We used the Canberra metric dissimilarity measure to generate the classifications and as input into the principal coordinate analysis used for ordinations. For classification the ‘flexible’ sorting strategy of Lance and Williams (1967) was used. This follows the successful precedents of Stephenson and Williams (1971), Williams and Stephenson (1973) and Stephenson, Williams and Cook (1974). The ‘cluster intensity coefficient’, Beta, was set at —0.25 which means it is a slightly space dilating strategy less likely to show ‘chaining’ tendencies. In addition we employed the Cramer measure to provide an insight into which attributes (i.e. Fic 1. Locality of trawls. . Distribution of trawl series along Queensland coast. . Series I stations . Series IT (A) and III (@) stations . Series 0 stations . Series IV stations . Series V stations . Series VI stations mmonnagep COMMUNITY PATTERNS 47 AR MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM species) contributed most significantly to the determination of classificatory groups (Lance and Williams, 1977). In series [,. apart from a small group of stations in Princess Charlotte Bay where large nets were deployed, material was collected with a commercial ‘try’ net, i.e. one with only a 2m gape, Quantitative measures were not obtained, thus analyses were confined to binary attributes, The large number of species (> 700), many of which were Tare ocurrences, suggested truncation of the data set; thus single species and/or site occurrences were eliminated. We restricted the data set further by analysing attributes at both the Family and genus level separately rather than at the species level (which was used only for the fish), This served several purposess it eliminated some of the taxonomic uncertainty, it increased the coarseness of the analysis to one more in keeping with the area surveyed and measures used in collecting while retaining biological reality and, not insignificantly, it greatly simplified the data matrix. : In series V the small ‘try’ nets were again used, but numerical counts of the species were made, These data were analysed by the same methods: because of the relatively small area and greater rigor of the trawling procedure there was no truncation of the data, Before analysis, this data set was transformed (square root) in an attempt to normalise the data. The other trawl series were not analysed because we felt the disparity in collection methods precluded useful conclusions, Series 0 trawls which gave some very preliminary results from simple statistical tests were undertaken as a ancillary to trials of underwater video gear (Goeden and Cannon, 1980).-Series I were designed specifically to investigate scallop grounds, Lil were conducted with large fish trawls in deep water towards the edge of the continental shelf, [V were specifically to search for Crown-of-Thorns starfish and VI employed both main gear trawls and a small dredge in a exercise to trial a new boat and its gear. The station species lists are included in Appendix U1, however, for they may be considered ro fulfill a useful role in their own right. RESULTS TRAWL SERIES 1 PRIMARY ANALYSIS Initially analyses were directed at the six major groups; Fish, Echinodermata, Crustacea, Mollusca, Cnidaria and Porifera,. Family Level) When analysed at the family level the classifactory programme generated ten clusters, but the level at which these clusters were discriminated suggests only three biologically valid (meaningful) groups (Figure 2a): I A,B,C,D,E fl F,G,H Wt i, J Of these three groups none showed any strong correlations with the abiotic factors geographic position or bottom type, but depth did show a weak influence. From examination of the Cramer discrimination values, the invertebrates showed strongly in group I (Echinoderms ; Comasteridae, Laganidae) and fish in groups II (Leiognathidae) and [11 (Bothidae). The ordination analysis (Figure 2b) showed sites grouped by the classification were not discretly differentiated, but rather the site groups overlapped strongly. The family most strongly influencing the ordination was the Penaeidae (prawns) found predominantly in one of the subgroups of group I). This particular subgroup corresponded to collection sites in Princess Charlotte Bay, The families influencing the ordination positively included the fish families Leiognathidae, Hemipteridae, Scorpaenidae and Apogonidae, In contrast, the echinoderm families: Comasteridae, Temnopleuridae and Goniasteridae were inversely associated with the pattern. Thus these data produce no convincing patterns. Genus Level The classificatory programme was run a second time on the six major groups using taxa at the generic level. Once again ten clusters were formed which were best discriminated again into three groups (Fig 2c): I A,B,C,D I! E,F,G,H,I lit J In iwo groups, we found the genera Minous (Scorpaenidae: Fish), Avmusium (Pectinidae: Mollusca), Leiognathus (Leiognathidae;: Fish), Nempterus (Nemipteridae: Fish) and Comarula (Comasteridae; Echinoderm) were the most influential taxa. being relatively well presented in group [], but not, or poorly in group I, 1-e., in group ! jnvertebrates dominated and in group II fish dominated. The ordination of site groups determined at the generic level (Fig, 2c), although overlapping in some cases, differed from those found at the family level. The major exception to COMMUNITY PATTERNS 49 this was again the strong isolation of the Princess Charlotte Bay sites (Group III). Both analyses of the six major groups produced a similar pattern: an invertebrate rich group of sites and one rich in fish, plus the Princess Charlotte Bay sites. The composition of the groups, however, differed in the two analyses. SECONDARY ANALYSIS Both analyses involving all the groups implied that taxa in the groups Mollusca, Cnidaria and Porifera had little effect upon the classification. The data set was therefore restricted to Fish, Echinodermata and Crustacea i.e., removing all sedentary sponges and cnidarians and also the molluscs — predominatly animals living in the sediments. Although such fauna is collected by trawls, they are perhaps more ably sampled by other techniques. = * ! r 1 i r ' ' a i r ! sd oo p>-—-—-----—-- Q------——---—— Moan seas m----—-——-- G-=—=--==5 pe Ae Le Family Level The classification at the family level (Fig. 3a) created four groups, one of which containing only 2 stations was considered inconsequential (Group IV/J). The important groups were: I A,B,C,D,E,F — rich in all three’ groups of organisms and including a subset from Pincess Charlotte Bay, II G— with some crustacea, but generally poor in fauna, and lil H,1 — rich in fish and echinoderms, but relatively poor in crustacea. The ordination of these data did not produce any clearly defined axes of variation. This lack of strong pattern was emphasized by the diffuse spread of the classification site groups over the major ordination axes (Fig. 3b). 1 o-------—! eee 0.6 Fic 2. Analysis of sites from series I (Fish, Echinoderms, Crustacea, Molluscs, Porifera and Cnidaria). a. Classification — Family level b. Ordination — Family level I= A,U = 0, Il = @. (Groups from 2a). ce. Classification — Genus level d. Ordination — Genus level 1 = @, 1 = 0, UI = A. (Groups from 2c). 50 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM = o -——-==-t 2 fo) ' ' ' 1 ! ad ! | 1 1 | J 9 ee Fic 3. Analysis of sites from series I (Fish, Echinoderms and Crustacea). Group IV points have been omitted as insignificant. a. Classification — Family level b. Ordination — Family level [= A, I] = A, WI = CO, (Groups from 3a). c. Classification — Genus level d. Ordination — Genus level [= 0,1 = @, 1 = A. (Groups from 3c). Genus Level In Fig. 3c we see some chaining of the site groups occurs at the generic level. Ignoring the clearly aberrant group (IV/J) we again see three groups: I A,B,C,D,E,F — rich in some genera of crustaceans and echinoderms, II G— a small group containing Saurida and Comatula and Il H,I — a large group rich in crustacea and fish (this group includes the Princess Charlotte Bay sites among others). Once again ordination of these data (Fig. 3d) revealed overlapping groups and, as occurred when all groups were considered, it was not easy to directly relate the analyses to one another. Certainly the Princess Charlotte Bay sites were discriminated, but overall analyses of the series I trawls using higher taxonomic levels failed to reveal discrete assemblages and, at best, presented only a weak depth related pattern. TERTIARY ANALYSIS In all the analyses so far presented fish appeared to be the most influential taxa in determining what separations did occur. Thus a further analysis of the fish alone was performed and at the species level. Species Level Fig. 4a shows the pattern of the classification with four groups revealed: I A —A group of shallow water sites largely from Princess Charlotte Bay. The most significant representative fish were Psettodes erumei, Saurida tumbil and Pseudorhombus elevatus. I] B,C,D, and E— Also a cluster of shallow sites lacking the above species but characterised by Engyprosopon grandisquamma. Ill F and G — A number of slightly deeper sites with the fish Euristhmus elongatus and Arnoglossus spp. COMMUNITY PATTERNS 51 I I @f WwW 10 ' ( \ : | aa I CTT pb ota ore ee | ne ryt tot Keb hit, o 1 ob he ta? Yh fy Wot fea} of het bet Ig sf 06 ABCDEFGHI b 2 , ac e . o 5 oP . e 2 a® . se a ; é a é o © |e 64 actee Vata ght ® . s6 * _ Hy . o oleh 3 =e © é i . . . . Fic 4, Analysis of sites from series I (Fish only) a. Classification — Species level b. Ordination — Species level I= e, Il= 8, Ill = o, r¥.=-0). (Groups from 4a) IV H and I — Also deeper sites, though lacking the Arnoglossus spp. they did have Pristotis (Daya) jerdoni. An examination of the Cramer values revealed that sites in groups I and II were discriminated by Pomadasys spp. while those of groups III and IV had several influential fish species, viz. Pseudorhombus elevatus, P. diplospilus, Grammatobothus polyophthalmus and Paramonocanthus sp. The ordination analysis (Fig. 4b) reinforces the separation of four groups and emphasises the similarity of I with II and III with IV. Indeed, compared with the earlier analyses, the overlap of sites between site groups is not at all marked. The most influential species in this analysis were as follows: Group I Pomadasys argyreus, Nemipterus sp., Upeneus sundiacus. Group II Apogon fasciata and Rogadius sp. Group III Pseudorhombus _ spp., Saurida undosquamus and Grammatobothus polyophthalmus. Group IV again Apogon fasciata. The mean depth of the groups I and II was 25.7m while that of III and IV was 35.5m. This analysis showed more clearly that a separation related to depth (or distance from shore) was apparent. These presence/absence data reveal that distinctions were based often on the absence of certain species in an otherwise similar mix as well as the presence of significant species e.g. Apogon fasciata in more than one group. All the analyses tended to reinforce the importance of certain taxa, most notably flatfishes, grinners and nemipterids, but at each level groups were not always consistent (with the exception of the suite of sites from Princess Charlotte Bay). Nevertheless, the analysis of the fish data at the species level provided the most convincing evidence of site separation, albeit slight. TRAWL SERIES V This series was undertaken to enable more critical assessment of the community structure than was afforded by the binary data of series I and consisted of a tight grid of stations consistently sampled. Quantitative counts of species numbers were made. From the dendrogram (Fig. 5a) three site groups were accepted from the classification after transformation of the data (square root), thus: I 1,5,6,8,10 and 11 II 2and7 III 3,4,9,12,13 and 14 The results of ordination (Fig. 5b) support these three groups. The Cramer measure provided evidence of which species contributed to the groupings; this together with the dissimilarity measure indicated that group I was characterised by the fish Upenaeus sulphureus and Pomadasys argyreus and to a lesser extent Priacanthus tayenus and Apogon fasciata as well as the crab Portunus gracilimanus. Overall, however, this region shares most of its fauna with the group III sites differing mainly in being considerably less diverse. The group II sites lacked much of the fauna of the other sites (especially site 7 which was quite depauperate), but contained several sponges and echinoderms not found elswhere. By contrast the group III sites were rich in fauna: again fish appeared the dominant influence and the more important taxa were Trachinocephalus myops, Synodus variegatus, Saurida undosquamis, 52 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Engyprosopon grandisquama and Pristotis (Daya) Jerdoni. A few other invertebrate taxa contributed to the group separation, viz. Comatula spp. (Echinodermata), Portunus spp. (Crustacea) and some sponges. Examination of influences upon ordination showed that fish again were dominant notably Saurida tumbil, Nemipterus sp. Upeneus sulphureus, Priacanthus tayenus, Apogon fasciata and Pomadasys argyreus which as well as the crab Portunus gracilis strongly influenced the pattern positively (i.e. contributed to group I sites). In contrast the fish Synodus variegatus, Trachinocephalus myops, Saurida undosquamis, the crabs Portunus tenuipes and P. argentatus together with the cephalopod Sepia pharaonis showed a strong negative influence (i.e. contributed to the group III sites). All three site goups were considered in relation to depth, distance from shore and carbonate oe at hase el acl eo ee a eee | ee eo | O ap seeeseeed = Fic 5. Analysis of sites from series V. a. Classification b. Ordination I=o, TN=A,IIl = 0. ao . Interpreted ‘zonation’ of reef in Cairns area. concentration of their sediments. These parameters are clearly correlated with one another. Table 1 shows data for depth and distance from shore and Fig. 4c shows the distribution of carbonates. TABLE 1. The depth, distance from shore in nautical miles, and zone of site groups from series V. Depth (m) Distance Zone (n. miles) Inshore 12.5 Transitional 11-14 42.8 23 30.6-57.6 12.5-32 It can be seen that mean depth is reflected in distance from shore and that carbonate concentrations largely parallel these parameters (Fig. 4c). Sites 1,5 and 10 are shallow inshore sites high in terrigenous sediments, sites 6 and 11 are Offshore sites 1-4 Inshore Transitional Offshore . Distribution of sites in relation to carbonate content of sediments (after Maxwell, 1968). COMMUNITY PATTERNS 53 slightly farther out with intermediate carbonate levels. Sites 2 and 7 also lie in the intermediate carbonate region. Sites 3,4,9,12,13 and 14 all clearly lie in the high carbonate region and are also farther out and deeper. Site 8 is somewhat anomalous: it is on the outer edge of Arlington Reef, is one of the deepest sites and lies in a high carbonate zone. Nevertheless, examination of Fig. 4c shows it lies just at the edge of an inshore extrusion through the Grafton Passage. In the analysis sites 9 and 12 showed a close affinity; these lie on the approximate southern edge of the Grafton Passage. We conclude from these data that a broad inshore/offshore pattern occurs in the Cairns region, It is one related to depth and distance from shore, but appears influenced by sediment type and presumably currents. A ‘zonation’ is presented in Fig. 4d where a broad inshore component extends as a tongue through the Grafton Passage reflecting sediment type rather than depth or distance from shore. The reality of the transitional zone is questionable. Perhaps there are odd pockets of peculiar habitat or perhaps further sampling wauld blur these distinctions. Finally, earlier analysis of the untransformed data revealed a simpler chaining of sites from inshore to offshore with little discrimination, i.e. a relatively homogenous pattern with diversity attenuating towards the shore. DISCUSSION Central to the process of establishing the presence of biological zonation within the Great Barrier Reef Region is the debate over the structure of communities. There have been two schools of thought surrounding communities: one considers them structured, rigid groupings with well defined boundaries maintained by competition, the other as a variety of species spread along environmental continua — their individual abundances determined by environmental suitability. In work on marine benthos the debate arose when the classification of benthic fauna in shallow, tropical waters failed to completely support the definitive work of Peterson (1914, 1915, 1924) and Thorson (1957). Stephenson (1973) presented a thorough appraisal of methods and arguements concerning marine benthic community analysis and, furthermore, re-analysis of Petersen’s original data by Stephenson, Williams and Cook (1972) only supported some of Petersen’s original interpretations. As a consequence the more traditional concept of a structured community must be weakened. A similar debate has been pursued in the botanical literature with the strong phytosociology school of the Europeans countered by the advocacy of the Americans for the continuum concept (see McIntosh, 1967 for a review). In all the analyses of series I we see evidence of a great deal of homogeneity. Furthermore, there is little consistency between analyses regarding specific site groupings. The exception is the Princess Charlotte Bay sites which, because most of the trawls were conducted with different gear, may be justifiably excluded from further consideration. Nevertheless, analyses involving just the fish, but conducted at the species level, did indicate a broad inshore/offshore (shallow/deep) pattern. Our results from the smaller scale series V sampling, which was carried out in a systematic and quantitative manner, do suggest the continental shelf in the Cairns area has two broad zones (inshore/offshore) related to sediment type and the correlated factors of depth and distance from shore. The taxa that best differentiated these zones were the ‘errant’ taxa of which fish are dominant. Indeed, in the various analyses certain taxa consistently appeared to strongly influence the results. Rainer and Munro (1982) used only fish and cephalopods in their study of the Gulf of Carpentaria in which they concluded similarly that a broad depth related (inshore/offshore) pattern existed. It could be argued that the fish alone are sufficient to determine patterns. Trawling, however, is designed to collect demersal fauna, notably fish and prawns, and not to collect the epibenthic fauna. That it does catch this fauna is undeniable, but it is not designed to sample them accurately. Our conclusions that these components of the fauna are not as definitive as the fish in determining patterns reflects method rather than necessarily biological reality. No doubt rigorous sampling of the bottom with dredge and grab would reveal increased resolution of assemblages within the benthos. It could be argued that if clearly definable discontinuities existed in epibenthic fauna a reflection would be expected to occur in the associated demersal fauna. Emus are found on plains, cassowaries in forests. Our analysis based upon fauna sampled effectively with a trawl net (i.e. fish) suggests such clear discontinuities do not exist, at least in the inter- reef regions of the northern part of the Great Barrier Reef. We believe the analyses have some important practical implications: they are that since fish (and 54 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM selected other species &.2. prawns) are effectiviey sampled they are likely the only ones worth sampling. Also fish are relatively easily sampled by trawling and are certainly more reliably identified than most invertebrates, Depending upon the geographical scale of the survey, the fishes alone may provide sufficient evidence of bottam type and faunal assemblages. Certainly McKay (1970) found thar in Exmouth Gulf, Western Australia, catches of banana prawns were generally associated with the presence of the fish Polydaetylus specularis. Ordinations of the large Series [ data set revealed vast areas of ‘likeness’ in terms of taxonomic composition. It was not possible to define a unique community type comprised of taxa which were generally absent or rare outside it’s boundaries. Instead, classifications were based on often subtle differences between large and diverse taxonomic suites which were geographically widely distributed (see Appendix 2), i.e. collections were indicative of a continuum although some confidence might be placed upon the fish. Rainer (1984), after further examination of the data of Rainer and Munro (1982), concluded that although a basic depth related pattern existed it did show some seasonal shift (to deeper regions in September compared to March). He suggested the entire fish (and cephalopod) population was in a continual !lux. Poiner and Harris (1985) reported on further trawling in the Gulf of Carpentaria in 1983. Their analyses of similar assemblages of fish and cephalopods revealed ‘The site groups for cach month make @ coherent (inshore, offshore) topographical picture and confaurm reasonably well with the patterns detected by Rainer (1984) for the 1963/4 data set’ MS p. 11. Thus there appears a basic agreement between both recent and past patterns within the Gulf of Carpentaria. Furthermore, our east coast date appear co conform to this same pattern. It may be that an inshore/offshore pattern is stable despite slight seasonal changes or others created by the advent of commercial trawling. The absence of clearly delineated assemblages, i.e. the presence of a continuuin, we believe reflects a true biological phenomonen. Differentiation of the Gulf of Carpentaria data was only achieved at a relatively high level of dissimilarity and this may have been aided by the ability to trawl over larger areas less restricted by ‘foul ground’. Should it become possible 10 carry out broader based sampling over much of the Great Barrier Reef Region including ‘foul’ ground, then we would expect to find an extension of our depth related zonation pattern norh and south from the Cairns area. In conclusion, if the assumption is correct that demersal fauna, predominantly fish, should refelect any major patterning of bottom communities, then, where conditions allow trawling, a fairly homogeneous assemblage occurs throughout large areas of the Great Barrier Reef. This continuum is broadly separable intro a relatively cich offshore fauna and an inner, shallower component which is relatively depauperate, but has some characteristic species, Such a pattern may characterise much of the shallow tropical shelf of northern Australia. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS We are pleased to acknowledge the suppor! of the Commonwealth of Australia Fisheries Branch (D.P.1,), the Fisheries Research Branch (Q.D,P,!.) and the Queensland Museum all of which made available logistic support and persannel, especially M. Dredge, M. Potter, J. O’Brien, R.McKay, P_Davie and J.Stanisic. We thank also Prof J, Kikkawa, Zoology Dept., University of Queensland for allowing computer analyses to be pursued through his department. In preliminary analyses we were greatly assisted by Dr M. Williams (Queensland Fishenes) and Prot, W. Stephenson (University of Queenslan¢l); and in the assembly and checking of appendices and the Preparation of figures we thank Dr C.8. Cannon and Mr S. Francis respectively. For the onerous task of sorting and cataloguing the bulk of the specimens handled We are deeply indebted to Drs Alice Kay and Neil Bruce and to Mr Clive Jones. Mr J. Hooper, Museum of Arts and Sciences, Darwin checked many of the sponge designations, Finally the study was only made possible through the generous support of the Australian Marine Science and Technology Advisory Committee. LITERATURE CITED FraskeL, E. 1978. Bibliography of the Grear Barrier Reef Province. Great Barrier Bee (Marine Park Authority. 204pp, Goepen, G.B. and CANNON, L.R,G: i980. The north Queensland continental shelf survey using T.K.LP Unpublished Report to the Fishing Industries Research Trust Account. . Hunotor, T. 1985. Fisheries of rhe Creat Barrier Reet. Special Publication Series 2, G.ALR.M.PLA, Townsville. 158pp, Kawwola, Po. and Witsonw, M.A. 1978. The trawl fishes of the Gulf of Papua. Res. Bull. 120. Dept. of Primary Industries, Port Moresby, LamMsent, JM. and Dane, M.B. (980. The use of statisties ja phytosociology, Ady. Ecol, Res, 12:59- S49, COMMUNITY PATTERNS 55 Lance, G.N. and WILLIAMS, W.T. 1967. A general theory of classificatory sorting strategies. I. Heirarchical systems. Comput, J. 9:373-80. LANCE, G.N. and WILLIAMS, W.T. 1977. Attribute contributions to a classification. Aust. Comp. J. 9:128-129. Lee, T.J. 1979. Demersal fish resources investigation on trawl grounds off the northwest coast of Australia. Bull. Tiawan Fish, Res. Inst. 131, Liu, H.C. 1976. The demersal fish stocks of the waters of north and northwest Australia. Acta Oceanogr. Taiwan. 16:128-34. Liu, H.C., Lal, H.L. and Yen, S.Y. 1978. General review of demersal fish resources in the Sunda Shelf and the Australian waters. Acta Oceanogr. Taiwan. 18:109-40, Mckay, R.J. 1970. Additions to the fish fauna of Western Australia — 5. Dept. of Fisheries and Fauna, W.A, Fish. Bull. 9:1-24. MAXWELL, W.G.H. 1968. Atlas of the Great Barrier Reef. Elsevier Publishing Co., Amsterdam, 258pp. McINTOSH, R.P. 1967. The continuum concept of vegetation. Bot. Rev. 133:130-187. Munro, I.S.R. 1972. The fauna of the Gulf of Carpentaria. No. 1. Introduction and station lists. Fish. Notes Queensl. (N.S.) No. 2. PETERSON, C.G.J. 1914. Valuation of the sea. Hl. The animal communities of the sea bottom and their importance for marine zoogeography. Rep. Dan biol. Stn. 21: 44pp. PETERSON, C.G.J. 1915. On the animal communities of the sea bottom in the Skaggerak, the Christiania Fjord and Danish waters. Rep. Dan. biol. Stn. 23:3- 28. PETERSON, C.G.J. 1924. A brief survey of the animal communities in Danish waters. Am. J. Sci. 17:343- 354. Porner, I.R. and Harris, A. 1985. The effect of commercial prawn trawling on the demersal fish communities of the south-eastern Gulf of Carpentaria. Torres Strait Fisheries Seminar, Port Moresby, February 1985. Dept. of Primary Industries, Canberra. RAINER, S.F. 1984 Temporal changes in a demersal fish and cephalopod community of an unexploited coastal environment in northern Australia. Aust, J. mar. Freshwat. Res. 35:747-768. RAINER, S.F. and Munro, I.S.R. 1982. Demersal fish and cephalopod communities of an unexploited coastal environment in Northern Australia. Aust. J. mar. Freshwat, Res. 33:1039-55. STEPHENSON, W. 1973. The validity of the community concept in marine biology. Proc. R. Soc. Od. 84:73- 86. STEPHENSON, W. and WILLIAMS, W.T, 1971, A study of the benthos of soft bottoms, Sek Harbour, New Guinea, using numerical analysis. Aust. J. mar. Freshwat. Res, 22:11-34. STEPHENSON, W., WILLIAMS, W.T. and Cook, S.D. 1972. Computer analysis of Petersen’s original data on bottom communities. Ecol. Monogr. 42:387- 415. STEPHENSON, W, WILLIAMS, W.T. and Cook, S.D. 1974. The benthic fauna of soft bottoms, southern Moreton Bay. Mem. Qd Mus. 17:73-123. THORSON, G. Bottom communities (sublittoral or shallow shelf). In ‘Treatise on Marine Ecology and Paleoecology I. Ecology’ Mem. geol. Soc. Am. 167:461-534. WATSON, R.A. 1984, Trawl fish composition and harvest estimates for the Gulf of Papua. Report No. 84-01. Dept. Primary Industry, Port Moresby. WILLIAMS, W.T. and STEPHENSON, W. 1973. The analysis of three dimensional data (sites x species x times) in marine ecology. J. exp. mar. Biol. Ecol. 11:207-27. APPENDIX I SUMMARY OF STATION DATA FOR TRAWL SERIES O — VI (NA = Not available) TRAWL SERIES O (19 Feb to 21 Feb 1979) Stn Lat. (S) Long. (E) Depth (m) Bottom Type A 16°36.2' —-:145°44.5" 32.4 Mud B 16°37.5’ =: 145°44.8’ 27.0 Mud CC 16°47,4" —-145°52.2’ 27.0 Mud D 16°44.6’ = 145°53.9’ 36.0 Mud E 16°43.7’ = 145°49.0’ 43.2 Sand, mud F 16°45.0° 146°02.1° 54.0 Sand, mud G 16°51,9" 146°07.1’ 43.2 Mud H 16°47.4’ =: 146°07.5" 48.6 Shell I 16°44.5’ = 146°12.2’ 63.0 Sand, mud J 16°39,9" 146°10.8’ 92.0 Sand, sponge, coral K 16°34.6’ 146°12.4’ 81.0 Sand, shell, Halimeda TRAWL SERIES I (9 Oct to 4 Novy 1979) Sin Lat. (S) Long. (E) Depth (m) Bottom Type 1 18°35.0’ 145°49.5’ 45.0 NA 2 18°19.0’ 147°04.0’ 75.6 NA 3 18°17.0’ 146°31.0’ 30.6 Coral rubble 4 17°43.8’ 146°26.7’ 41.4 NA 5 17°38.47 =146°34.0’ 57.6 NA 6 17°38.0’ 146°33.0’ 59.4 Shell, weed 7 17°37,0° 146°34.0° 63.0 NA 8 17°36.8’ 146°36.8' 64.8 NA 9 17°34.0° = 146°27.5’ 59.4 Shell, coral rubble 10 17°33.0’ 146°26.0’ 46.8 Coral rubble 11 =17°31.0° =: 146° 19.5’ 41.4 NA 12 17°14.0’ =: 146°27.0’ 39.6 NA 13. 17°13.5’ = 146°22.5’ 48.6 Coral rubble 14 17°13.5’ = 146°17.0" 37.8 Coral rubble 15 17°11.0’ ~=146°29.0’ 66.6 Coral rubble 16 17°09.8’ 146°23.5’ 50.4 NA 17. 17°08.0’ =: 146° 15.0" 41.4 Clean sand 18 17°08.7’ =146°15.2’ 43.2 NA 19 17°05.5’ 146°16.0" 52.2 NA 20 =17°05.0’ 146°23.0’ 50.4 NA 21 = =17°02.0’ 146°25.2’ 64.8 Coral rubble 22 17°01.5’ 146°19.0’ 48.6 NA 23 =17°01.0° 146°20.0’ 48.6 NA 24 = =17°00.5’ 146°01.5’ 22.5 Sandy, clean MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 16°59.5' = 146°06,2' 37.8 Hard bottam 94 13°58.9° — 144°14.9" 97K Mud, shell 16°57.3' 146°I8,7' 57.6 Mud 95 (13°5S.4" 143°48,6' 21.6 Clean, hard 16°53.5' 146° FR." 68,4 Coral rubble 96 13°52.2' 143°51.6" 30.6 Mud 16°53,2' =: 146°08.6" 43,2 Hard bottom 97 «13°45.1" — 143°48.2' 18.0 Mud, shell 16°50.0" =: 146°11,5" 46.8 NA OR 13°44.3')—143°4R 0 1R0 Shell 16°48.2’ 146°07.5' 49.5 Clean bottom 99° -13°38.6" =: 143°42.6' 25,2 Mud, shell 16°46.6" 146°07,0? 55,8 Coral rubble, mud 100) 13°37,0" 193°44,9" 19.8 Clean 16°46.0" 146°03.8' 39.6 Clean sand 101 12°45.6' = 143°32,2' 19.8 Mud 16°44.4' 146°12.0" $4.0 Mud 102 =12°42.5' 143°28.8 144 Clean 16°al.o° 146°11,2" 64,8 Clean 103 12°40.2' 143°28,8' 21.6 Soft, shell 16°34.6' 145°S2.6' 37.8 Coral rubble 104 12°45.0' 143°25,.7' 21.6 Clean, hard 16°34,5' 145°46.6" 30.5 Clean 105 12°34.5" = 143°24.6" 16.2 Clean 16°33.3" = 145°39 4" 22.5 Clean, hard 106 12°34.1" 143°23,.4" 14.4 Mud 16°30.2' —-145°5S6.4" 45.0 Clean sand 107 12°34.0" —-143°24.7" 18.9 Mud, shell 16°30.4 —-145°S§2.4' 42.3 Clean sand WOR = 12°33.1' — 143°22.5' 144 Hard, clean, shell 16°25.2° 145°31,8" 171 NA 109 12°31,3" 143°25,8° 28.8 Mud, shell 16°15.2' — 145°37.6' 39.6 NA 11M 12°29,7" — 143°20.3" 18.0 Hard, shell 16°08.0' 145°37.0° 43.2 NA 11 12°26.5" 143°22.6' 24.3 Clean, hard 16°04,2" 145°37.5° 30.6 NA V2 12°26,2' 143°22.4' 24.3 Hard, sand 15°59,3° 145°32.4' 28.8 NA 113 12°26.3’ 143°19.7" 18.0 Sand 15°46.6" = 145°42.1' 48.6 NA 114 12°20,1" 143°16.6' 15,3 Mud, shell 15°46.3" 145*35.8' 27.0 NA 115 12°16.8' 143°10.2" 12.6 Clean, hard 15°46.2' 14§°34.2' 27.0 NA 116 12°11.6" 143°10.1' 18.0 Mud 15°45.4’ 145°40.2' 43.2 Clay, mud 117 12°06.4" 143°10.1" 15.3 Shell 15°44,9° 145°40.9" 46.8 Clay, mud 1ik = 12°06.4' 143°17.6' 37.8 Hard 15°44.8" 145°34.2' 39.6 NA 119 12°05,6' 143°13,3' 29.7 Hard 1§°42,7' 145°28.5" 27.0 Coral rubble 120) 12°0).8" 143°13,3" 15,3 Mud 15°36.2' — 145°26.8" 21.6 NA 12) 11°53,8" = 143°12.2' 30.6 Hard, weed 15°23,3” 145°29.0" 28.8 Clean, hard 122) 11"47,2" 143°11.4" 34.2 Mud 15°13,3' — 145°27,1" 30.6 Clean 123 11°45.2" = 143°03.0° 19.8 Clean, hard 15°06.0° 145°29.4' 34.2 Clean, hard 124 11"41.8" 143°08.3" 32.4 Hard, smooth 14°48.0" — 145°25.0" 28.8 NA 14°42.0° 145°04.5" 9.0 NA 14°40.0° — 145°07.5" 10.8 NA TRAWL SERIES II (20 Sune to 28 June 1980) 14°39," 145°20.0' 19.8 Mud, shell 14°35" 145°13.0" 13.5 NA Stn Lat.(S) Long. (E) Depth (m) Bottom Type 14°36,0° — 145°03.0° 12.6 NA oye MALE 26 4 . = 7 i 22°15.5 152°43,5" 346.0 Flat, clean 14°35,3 145°23.0" 27.0 Mud, shell 7 , x30 4 Fs é ta , 2 22°15.7 152°41,1" 61.2 Rubble 14°32,2 145°07,5" 19.8 NA wu ’ e510 : re wi. 2 3 22°46.8 1520.5" 50.4 Flat, clean 14°27.8 144°51.0" 12.6 Clean, hard . . ent . 094 69 oA ni 4 — 22°08,4 152°35.5' 50.4 NA 14°26,5° 144°44.0"° 12.6 Mud, weed on7.{* 094 9! ® , a , 5 22°02. 152°27.7' $7.6 NA 14°23.9" 144°42.1° 18.0 Mud ee paved ae ° 4 ° 3 6 21°53.2 152"19.7" 37.6 NA 14°20,2 144°51.0" 23.4 Rubble , Sud > ' a , 7 21°40.2 52°14 7' 54.0 NA 14712.0 144°03.0" 18.9 NA Gan nt cid ; spo ond 3! 8B .21°40.0 152°10.3" 61,2 NA 14°12,.0 144°04.3' 18.9 NA Ben ps " Sea tir che pi, 9 = 21°38.3 152°04.5" 57.6 Sand, weed 14°12,0 144°05.8" 21.6 NA ° ’ =90, . ° ) one-ar 10, -21°40.2 152°04.2" 63.0 NA lars 144°06.9" 21.6 NA ead nr , at i 06.9" 1 21°44.0" —152°04.0" $4.0 NA 14° il 144°02," 19.8 Clean 74°46 9 =70 , 8 ‘ x . 12) 21°46.9 132°50.0' 54.0 NA 14° 11.0 144°25.4° 6.3 Mud ° . =0, ' bine? 8n7 OF 13) 21°45.2 152°01.2' 49.6 NA 14°10.8 144°02." 18,9 Shell 5 ‘ FA . 210.8" ans 6} 14 21°50.1 152°02.5' 59,4 NA 14°10.8 144°05.9° 21.6 Clean e H ‘ . Senay ane ae : 15 -21°50.2 152'09.6" 43.0 NA 14°10.8" — 144204.2" 23.4 Clean ened Sahat a A 4 4 16 -21°52.4 152°12,6" 52.0 NA 14°10,7 144°02,7" 21.6 Clean, shell 17 21°58.6' —-152°16.2' 50.4 NA 14°10.6" 144°08,6" 21.6 Clean . haa alah 14°10,4°—:144°01,3' 216 Clean, shell 14°10.4 = 144°09.4" 21,6 Clean 4°04" 144°08.4" 21.6 Clean TRAWL SERIES HI (13 Sept to 4 Ocr 1980) 14°70.0° (44°O1.2' 21.6 Clean ; 14210.0" 144°0],2" 22.5 Mud, shell Sin Lat, (8) Long. (E) Depth (m) Bottom Type 14°09,6' = 144°02.0" 21.6 NA | 26°31" 153°48' = 480 = 14°09,6" 144°05,3" 21.6 Rubble 2 26°20" 153°53' = 300 = 14°09,3° 144°03,3" 22.5 Rubble 3 25°27’ 53°46 330 a 14°08.8" 144°24,5' 18,9 Hard, lean 4 STE 153°45" 330 _ 14°O7.1" 144°26.4" 22.5 Clean 4 23°59" 152°47° 320 = 14°05,3" 144°04,7" 25.2 Coral 6 23°28" 15319562 _ 14°04." 144°26.1" 30.6 Mud 7 23°30" 13°04’ = 540 — 14°O1.0" — (43°S6.6" 27.0 Mud 8 23"1' a0" 420 _ 14°01,0" 144°10.4" 34.2 NA 9 22°10" 14°10" 570 ~ 14°00,9" 143°54.5° 25.2 Shell 1 22°09" 33°55" 400 — Cama bhUN wartnun fun = ee ee Buw=-o Sin ADUWUsewWNhe 21°30" » 21°41" 24°05" 23°58" 23°50.6 23°42.5’ 23°36.6" 23°26" 23°36.3° 23°10.6" 22°56.1" 22°51.7? 22°54.5° 23°00.3’ 22°36.7° 23°15.3° TRAWL SERIES FV (8 Oct to Lat. (S) 16°48.8" 16°46.3' 16°44,5° 16°42,8" 16°44,3° 16°44,0° 16°43,9" 16°44.8" 16°45.6" 16°47.0° 16°48.5° 16°48.9" 16°48.8" 16°48,5° 16°48.1’ 16°46.8" TRAWL SERIES V (21 Jan to Lat. (S) 16°23.0° 16°23.0° 16°23.0° 16°23.0° 16°43.0° 16°43.0° 16°43.0° 16°43.0° 16°43.0° 17°03.0° 17°03,0" 17°03.0° 17°03.0° 17°03.0° 152°56° 12°51" 152°53° 152°45° 152°36.2' 152°24.8" 152°22.9° 152°16° 152°43.2° 152°12,3° 152°32.2’ 152°45,7’ 152°12.5’ 153°18.8" 154°14.0' 154°21.7" Long. (E) 145°58.4" 145°57.9" 145°56.5° 145°56.3" 145°59.4" 145°59.6" 146°00.7’ 146°02.1' 146°01.5° 145°58.9" 145°59.6' 146°00.4" 146°01.2° 146°02.5" 146°03,7" 146°04.9° Long. (E) 145°30.8" 145°37.0° 145°55.6° 146°01.6’ 145°43.0° 145°49,2’ 145°55.4° 146°07.8" 146°13.8" 145°55.6" 146°01.7° 146°07.8" 146°14.0° 146° 20.0" 240 150 315 212 270 216 205 205 360 135 144 261 351 387 522 549 Depth (m) 41.0 40.0 30.0 39.0 45.0 47.0 51.0 50.0 40,0 45.0 50.0 50.0 36.5 36,5 40.0 41.0 Depth (m) 14.4 27.0 50.4 57.6 10.8 19.8 30.6 55.8 42.5 9.0 21.6 30.6 36.0 39.6 COMMUNITY PATTERNS 10 Oct 1980) Bottom Type 28 Jan 1981) Bottom Type Clean, hard, sandy Clean NA Silt, shell debris Some weed Clean Some weed Clean Weed Clean Clean NA Clean Clean TRAWL SERIES VI (25 April to 5 May 1982) Lat. (S) 17°00" 17°00" 17°00" 17°00" 17°00" 17°00" 17°00" Long. (E) 145°55.0" 145°57.0° 146°00.0° 146°03.0" 146°05.8" 146°21.1" 146°24.5" Depth (m) 10.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 55.0 55.0 Bottom Type 8 17°00" 145°58.0" 9 17°00" 146°01.0° 10 17°" 146°04.5" ll 17°00" 146°07.0" 12 17°00’ 146°08.0° 13. 17°00" 146°08.5" 14 17°00" 146°17.5° 15 17°00" 146°18.4" 16 Nosample 17 16°59.0° = 146° 19.0" 18 17°00" 146°26.0° 19 17°00" 146°27.0° 20 =16745,0" =—-:146° 18.5" 21 16°45.0" = 146°12.5° 22.0 23.0 34.0 35.0 42.0 30.0 58.0 55.0 53.0 52.0 35.0 50.5 31.0 APPENDIX II CHECKLIST OF FAUNA FROM TRAWL SERIES O — VI PORIFERA Adociidae Adocia sp. Sigmadocia sp. Anchinoidae Anchinoidae sp. Aplysillidae Aplysilla sp, Darwinella sp. Darwinellopsis sp. Aplysillidae sp. Aplysinellidae Aplysina sp. Psammaplysilla sp. Pseudoceratina sp. Aplysinellidae sp. Axinellidae Acanthella sp. Axiamon folium Axinella sp. Axinectya mariana Raphoxya pallida Axinellidae spp. Biemnidae ?Biemna sp. Callyspongiidae Callyspongia ?confederata C. subarmigera C. 2subarmigera Callyspongia spp. 1Euplacella sp. Siphonochalina spp. ?Siphonochalina spp. Toxochalina sp. Callyspongiidae sp. Chondrosiidae Chondrilla australiensis Chondrilla sp, Chondrosiidae sp. Clionidae Clionidae sp. Coelosphaeridae Histoderma sp. Desmacellidae Kerasemna horrida TI 15, 18) HI(26) 1(52) V(2,9) (41) 1(14) 113) V2) 1(5) V(2) T(2, 5) 1(50) 37 1(51, 60, 61, 115) LV(7) V9) (63) VA(7) TV(1) v(5) \-) O(1) 135, 63) TV1) V9) 1(52) 1(4, 42, 44) V(12) 1(97, 115, 117) V(2) (2,4, 5, 14, 26, 58) 14,5, 11) 1(2, 4,5, 14) (115) 14, 114) IS) V(2, 4,9) v(2,4,9) W4, 14) O(E) 1(27,97, 115,116) 1V(5) VI(7) ¥(2) TI(2) 1(13, 80, 102) I(T, 8) ¥(7) 1(63) ¥(2) VI(7) TH(18) 1(44) 58 Desmacidonidae Desmapsamma sp. Forcepia sp. Liosina sp. Desmoxyidae Higginsia sp. Dictyodendrillidae )Dictyodendrilla spp. Dictyodendrillidae spp. Dysideidae Dysidea spp. Spongionella spp. Dysideidae spp. Geodiidae Geodia cf. regina Geodia spp, Halichondridae ?Ciocalypta sp. Halichondria spp. Rhaphisia sp. ? Trachyopsis sp. Halichondridae spp, Haliclonidae Haliclona spp. ? Reniera sp. ‘1 Sigmadocia sp. Haliclonidae spp. Halisarcidae Halisarcidae sp. Hemiastrellidae Vibulinus sp. Heterocoelidae ? Aphrocerus sp. Leucettusa sp. ?Leucettusa sp. Heterocoelidae spp. Homocoelidae Leucosolenia sp. Hyalonematidae Hyalonema sp. Pheronema spp. Hyalonematidae sp. Hymeniacidonidae Hymeniacidon sp. Hymeniacidonidae spp. lanthellidae ?Bajalus sp. lanthella basta Tanthella sp. Ianthellidae sp, Jaspidae Jaspis sp. Leucettidae Leucettidae spp. Microcionidae Acarnus erithacus A, topsenti Clathria hartmeyeri C. rotunda Clathria spp. Echinochalina anomala Echinochalina intermedian 1Echinochalina spp. Echinoclathria sp. Tsociona tuberosa Microcionidae sp. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM v(9) v(2) 1(56) 1(63) V(3) O(I, K) (4,21, 27,51, 56) 11(3) VI(L1, 14) 1(44, 51, 56, 58, 100) V(3, 7) V(2, 9) O(K) V(3) Ti(8, 13) TH(8, 19) ¥(9, 12) 1m(19) O(E, F, J) 1(43, 52, 66) TV(4,9,) V(12) V(2, 12) v(9) 1(41, 51, 52, 113) 1(4, 5, 56, 60) TI1(4) V(6, 9) 1(69) 1(4, 5,37, 51, 52, 53) O(D) 1(27, 63) VI(7) vi(i4) (51) 1(103) 1(35) EV(2, 26, 7) IVv(4) 1V(2) v9) T1(25) 111(10, 19) TI1(19) 1T(19) M11, 49, 59) V(9, 12) md 1) IN(15) I(—) m4) 1(25, 35) V(2) 12, 7,8, 10, 11,14) 19) 1(57) 1(14) 1(4) 1(14, 52, 55, 119) TV(6) V(2) v(4) 114) 1(29, 72) 1(72) HC) 1(4, 14,55) V(12) Mycalidae Mycale tylstronevla Mycalidae sp. Myxillidae Ectomyxilla sp. Lissodendaryx spp. Myxillidae sp. Nepheliospongidae Nepheliospondiae sp. Niphatidae Amphimedon spp. Cribrochalina spp. Gelliodes fibulata Niphates spp. Niphatidae sp. Oceanapiidae Biminia sp. Calyx sp. Pachypellina sp. Oceanapiidae sp. Petrosiidae Xestospongia sp, Phorbasidae Echinodictyum carolinoides Myrmekioderma sp. Pollacidae Semperella ct. schultzei Pollacidae sp. Psammascidae ?Holopsamma sp. Psammascus chaliniformis ? Psamimopemma spp. Psammascidae sp. Raspailiidae Raspailia sp. Sigmaxinellidae Sigmaxinellidae sp. Spirastrellidae Spirastrella ?montiformis Spirastrella sp, Spirastrellidae spp, Spongiidae Cacospongia spp. ?Carteriaspongia sp. Coscinaderma spp. Duaetylospongia sp. Hippospongia aphroditella Hippospongia sp. ) Hippospongia sp, 2 Hyattella spp. ? Leiosella sp. Spongia spp, Spongiidae spp. Stellidae Myriastra sp. Stelletta cf. maxima Stelletta spp. Stellettidae spp. Suberitidae Aaptos sp. 1 Laxosuberites sp. °Terpios sp. Tedaniidae Jotrochota baculifera 1(52) 11(5) (41) 1(20) (8, 13) (41) TH(10) 1(2, 4, 44, 53, 63) TI(5, 6, 13) 1(43) I) 1(97) 1(38) M(5, 14, 17) V(9) O(C, D) (51,97) 1V(1) VIU(7, 13) (122) 1(51) (6) V(12) 1113) (él) 1(11, 60, 63) TIN(7, 10, 11, 26) TII(19) (4,41) 1(10, 26, 35) 1(26) V(9, 12) 11(8, 10, 11) TV(12) (51) 1(61) TV(4) ¥(2) 1(52, 64) 1(41, 43) ¥(2, 9) V(2) II(1, 6, 7, 13, 14, 15) TV(6) V(9, 12) V(2, 12) 1(61) V(2) VI(18) 1(52) 1(58, 79) V(12) 111) 1(26, 46) 115) THI(10, 19) v(9) O(D, 1) 1(21, 43) THI(4, 10) 1V¥(—) ¥(9) VIC7) 1(97) IM(19) IM(8, 13, 15, 18, 19, 25) O(E, J) 1(42) TV(i2) I(-) 1115) 1(61, 89) I. coccinea Tedania sp. Tethyidae Tethya sp. Tethyidae sp. Tetillidae Cinachyra sp. ?Cinachyra sp. Craniella simillima Craniella sp. Raphidotethya enigmata Raphidotethya spp. Tetillidae spp. Thorectidae ?Fascaplysinopsis sp. ? Fasciospongia sp. Hyrtios spp. Ircinia spp. Psammocinia spp. Sarcotragus spp. ?Sarcotragus sp. Smenospongia sp. Thorecta sp. Thorectidae spp. CNIDARIA Acanthogorgiidae Acalycigorgia sp. Acanthogorgia sp. Muricella sp. 2? Acanthogorgiidae sp. Acroporidae Acropora spp. Montipora sp. Agariciidae Leptoseris sp. Alcyoniidae Sarcophyton sp. ?Sinularia sp. Sinularia sp. Anthothelidae Alertigorgia orientalis VIciligorgia sp. Solenocaulon sp. Antipathidae Antipathes spp. Cirripathes spp. Parantipathes sp. Antipathidae sp. Briareidae Briareidae sp. Caryophyllidae Euphyllia sp. Stephanotrochus sp. Caryophyllidae sp. Chrysogorgidae Chrysogorgia spp. Clavulariidae ?Clavularia sp. Coralliidae Coralliidae sp. Dendrophylliidae Balanophylilia sp. Dendrophyllia cf. miniscula COMMUNITY PATTERNS 1(35) Vv(4) 11(17) (7) v9) 1119) I(-) II(8, 19) TV, 12) V9) v(9) 1(9, 14) 1V(2) O(K) IV(4,8) 1113) 1(14) 1(35, 51, 52, 62, 115) HI(10, 11) 1(4, 14, 35, 60, 62, 72, 76, 89, 92) HHN(11) V(8) I1(2, 10, 11, 13, 14) 1(9) 11(13) V(4) 111(14) 1(35) 1(55) V(2) O(D, E) 1(27, 51, 52, 60, 86) 11(2, 11, 12) V(4) VI(6, 7) 1(97) 111(26) T11(22) 1(122) 1(43) IV(1, 2) 1(42) 1(43) 1(43) V(9) 1(63, 103, 112) 1(43) 1(107, 111, 114, 116, 120) OJ) O(B, I) 1(38, 77) IV(1) 1(2, 14, 38, 43) O(J) 1(3, 14, 70, 72, 74, 86, 89, 90,97, 98, 101, 110, 112) 1(2, 31, 42) 1(121) v9) 1(58) 11(26) I1I(8) III(6, 8, 25) 1(97) 111(22) 1(119) TH(21) Dendrophyllia spp. Turbinaria spp. Ellisellidae Ellisella sp. Junceella ?gemmacea Nicella sp. Epizoanthidae Epizoanthus sp. Faviidae Caulastrea furcata Favites sp. Plesiastrea sp. Flabellidae Flabellum sp. ?Gardineria sp. Placotrochus sp. Fungiidae Cycloseris ?cyclolites Cycloseris sp. Diaseris sp. Gorgoniidae Lophogorgia sp. Isididae Keratoisis sp. Lafoeidae Acryptolaria sp. ?Zygophlax sp. Melithaeidae Melithaeidae sp. Milleporidae Milleporidae sp. Nephtheidae Capnella sp. Dendronephthya ? brevirama D. mollis D. 2 mollis Dendronephthya spp. ?Dendronephthya sp. Nephthea sp. Umbellulifera sp. Nephtheidae spp. Nidaliidae Siphonogorgia sp. Paralcyoniidae Studeriotes sp. Paramuricidae Muricella sp. Pennatulidae Pennatula sp. Pennatulidae sp. Plexauridae Echinogorgia sp. Eunicea sp. Euplexaura ? robusta Pseudoplumarella echidna Plexauridae sp. Plumulariidae Aglaophenia sp. 2? Aglaophenia sp. Gymnangium cf. gracicaule G. longicornus G. cf. longirostre Lytocarpus sp. Thecocarpus sp. 1(20, 29) IN(—) 1(43, 64) O(J) 1114) 1(31) 1(42) 11(8) IN1(25, 26) O(K) (7) 1(51, 103) 11(7) 111(23, 25, 26) 1(4, 18, 41, 42, 51, 56, 58, 107, 115) IV(1, 12) IV(1, 2, 6, 12) 1(52, 57, 60, 64, 103) 1(51, 101) O(K) OW) 11110) 111(26) (1) V(2) IV(1) TI(8, 13) 59 1(7, 18, 42, 45, 52, 61, 89, 92, 112, 119) 11(12) II(2, 8, 19, 22, 28, 43, 45, 52, 112) O(J) 1(29) IV(4, 5,7, 12, 16) 11(8) Vv(9) 1(74) 1(34, 43) IV(1) HI(11) Ov) 1(58) TIL(22) TH(10) THK(1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 23, 26) 1(26) 111(20) 1(97, 122) 1(43) 11(2) 111(25, 26) 11(6, 12) TV(12) 11(7) I(111, 118) V(3) 11(8) O(B, F, I, J, K) (87,91, 120) V(5) 1118) 60 Poritidae Alveopora martenst Alveopora sp. Primnoeidae Callogorgia spp. Narella sp. Plumarella sp. Thouarella cf. hilgendorfi Thouarella sp. Primnoeidae sp. Pteroeididae Pteroeides spp. Sertulariidae 7Salacia sp. Sertulareila diaphana S. ?diaphana ?Sertulariidae sp. F.Subergorgiidae Subergorgia verriculata Subergorgia sp. Subergorgiidae sp. Synthectidae Syathecium ?patulum Synthecium spp- Telestidae Telesto rubra Telesto sp, 1Telesto sp. Trachyphylliidae Trachyphyllia geoffroyi Veretillidae Lituaria australasiae Virgulariidae Scytalium spp. Xeniidae Xenia spp. Zoanthidae Sphenopus marsupialis Undetermined Actinaria spp. MOLLUSCA Anomiidae 1 Patre australis ?Anomiidae sp. Aplysiidae Aplysiidae sp. ?Aplysiidae sp. Arcidae Arca subnavicularis Arca sp. Cucullaea labiata Opularca tennella Trisidos semitorta Argonautidae Argonauta sp. Arminidae 2Armina sp. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM O(K) 1(51) 111(6) TII(10) 111(6.7) 1116) TH(10) TII(6, 22, 25) 1(90, 111,112) 11(2) 11(2) 1(72, 101) 1(112) 1(26, 114) V(9) IV(1) (92) O(F, I, K) 1(41, 97, 101) VQ) oO) ov) 131) 1(58, 61,63, 64, 101) 10, 15, 16) O(B) 1(44, 48, 116) V(9) O(B, F, J) 111, 2,4, 6, 10,11, 22, 32,42, 45, 56, 58, 63, 112, 118, 119) ¥(12, 13) 1(101) M1(6, 7, 15, 17, 22, 25, 26) 1(5,49) 1(10!) 135) 11) 1(93, 96, 97, 101, 102, 113, 118, 119) 11(8) IV(16) 1(96) 1(59, 92, 93,97, 110, 119, 121) IV(8) 1(93, 119) 111(25) THC) Bursidae Bursa rana Bursa sp. Cardiidae Fragum fragum Fragum sp. Hemicardium ?subretusum Nemocardium probatum Plagiocardium setosum Cassidae Phalium bisulcatum Chamidae Chama pulchella C. reflexa Chama spp. Conidae Conus cancellata C. planorbis Corbulidae Aloidis hydropica Cymatiidae Cymatium pfeifferianus Distorsio reticulata Gyrineum sp. ?Linatella sp. Ranularia caudata Cypraeidae Cypraea labrolineata C. I miliaris C. pyriformis Dentaliidae Dentalium Djavanum Dorididae Dorididae sp. Enoploteuthidae Abralia sp. Enoploteuthis galaxius Enoploteuthis sp. Fasciolariidae Fusinus colus Fusinus sp. Ficidae Ficus subintermedia Fissurellidae Scutus sp. Glycymeridae Melaxinaea labyrintha Haminoeidae Atys naucum Isognomontidae Jsognomon isognomon Limopsidae Circlimopa woodwardi Loliginidae Loligo chinensis Loliga sp. Malleidae Malleus albus Vulsella vulsella Muricidae Bedeva paivae Chicoreus axicornus 1(9, 13, 22,48, 56, 79, 89, 97, 104) VI(6, 8, 12, 16) O(H) 1V(16) 1(22) 1(124) 1(4) 1V(6) 1(14) TV(8) 1(52, 93,97, 98, 101, 119) 1(103) 4(55, 117) 1(14) 1(3) 1(66, 90) V(5, 14) 1(10, 41, 56, 64, 64, 102, 111, 115) 1V(5, 6, 12, 16) VI(4, 6) 1(9, 11, 22, 26, 48, 49, 96, 97, 112) IV(9, 12) V(1) VIG, 6) 1V(8) 1(115) 1(2, 11,28) IV(8) 1V(12) 1V(6) 1(42, 94) v9) IH(2, 14) TI(1, 6, 26) Hi) TV(5, 16) VI(—) O(T) M15) 1(9, 86, 96) FV(6) 1(50, 97) 1(49, 90, 101, 107) ¥(4) 1(64) 1(97, 119) 1(94) IM(11, 15,22) VI(1, 2, 3, 5, 6,7) O(B, J) VU, 2,3, 5,6, 11, 12) 1(1, 2, 19, 85, 93, 94, 100, 101, 103, 104, 110,113, 115, 119) 1(14, 15, 17) TV(2) vi(4) (121) 1(121) 1(61, 98) II(7) C. cervicornis Haustellum sp. Murex nigrospinous M. tribulus Mytilidae Modiolus ?elongatus Musculus sp. Septifer bilocularis Stavelia horrida Nassariidae Nassarius dorsatus Naticidae ?Polinices melanostomus Octopodidae Eledone sp. Haplochlaena lunulata Octopus spp. Ommastrephidae Nototodarus gouldi Todaropsis eblanae Ostreidae Ostrea trapezina ?Pycnodonte hyotis Ovulidae Volva volva Pectinidae Amusium balloti A, pleuronectes Annachlamys leopardus Chlamys gloriosa C. ?gloriosa Chlamys sp. Decatopecten ?strangei Pectinidae spp. Philinidae Philine sp. Pleurobranchidae ? Euselenops sp. Pleurobranchidae sp. Pleurophyllidae Pleurophyllidia sp. Plicatulidae Plicatula essingtonensis Pteriidae Pinctada panasesae Pinctada sp. Pteriidae spp. Sepiadariidae Sepioloidea lineolata 2 Sepioloidea lineolata Sepiidae Sepia cultrata S. elliptica COMMUNITY PATTERNS 1(119) 1(7) VI(11) 1(2, 4, 7, 8,9, 13, 29, 42, 50) TV(8) V(4, 6) VI(4) 1(96) 1(5, 96) 1(97) 1(97, 98) 1V(12) 1(61) INI(4, 14, 15) 1(62) 1(86, 92, 97) H1(10, 12) IG, 7, 22, 23,26, ) W(5) 113, 5, 6,7, 19, 22, 23) HH(5, 15) 1(34, 44, 52, 55, 89, 93, 101, 113,115, 121) V(12) II(8) I(11, 29, 64) VI(4) O(A, B,C, D) I(2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 13, 18, 19, 22, 25, 29, 34) (4, 16) TV(12) VI(7) 1(5,9, 10, 17, 18, 19, 22, 23, 30, 32, 37, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 67, 68, 70, 71, 72, 74, 76, 77, 79, 80, 82, 84, 85, 86, 92, 94, 95,96, 97, 101, 102, 104, 105, 106, 107, 111, 112, 117, 119, 120, 122, 123, 124) V1, 5,6, 8, 11, 12, 14) VI(2, 3, 4, 5,6,7) 1(86, 101, 119) V3) 1(92, 93, 97, 98, 111) IV(12) 1(113) 1(64) I1(7, 8, 12, 14, 17) I11(6, 26) 1(110) v9) 1(8) 1(45) 1(55, 89, 100, 101, 117) 1(115) 1(1, 93, 98) 1(98) IV(1) TH(14) V(4) I(7) TIT(2, 5, 14, 19, 23) I(11, 22, 25, 36, 44, 45, 46, S. ?novaehollandiae S. papuensis S. 2papuensis S. pfefferi S. pharaonis S. ?pharaonis S. plangon S. rex S. smithi S. whitleyana Sepia spp. Sepiolidae Euprymna sp. ?Euprymna sp. Rossia sp. Siliquariidae Siliquaria sp. Spondylidae Spondylus ? barbatus . ?ducalis . tenellus . cf. tenellus wrightianus AnnAN S. ?wrightianus Spondylus spp. Spondylidae sp. Strombidae Strombus campbelli S. dilatatus S. erythrinus S. vittatus Trochidae Angaria sp. ?Clanculus sp. Vasidae Tudicula armigera Veneridae Antigona lamellaris Callanaitis sp. Dosinia sp. Volutidae Cymbiola sophia Melo sp. Xenophoridae Xenophora australis X. cf. australis X. helvocea Xenophora spp. 61 53, 66, 69, 72, 79, 83, 85, 87, 88, 90, 102, 106, 119) V(5) VI(2, 3) 11(8, 11, 13, 16) V(9, 12) 1(58, 102) IV(1, 2) 1(2, 5, 47, 103) II(13) IV(6, 12) V(13) VI(4) V(3, 12, 13, 14) VI(2, 3, 4) V(41, 47, 91, 102, 119) VI(1, 3) 1(9, 47, 61) V(2,9, 12) IH1(3, 11, 14, 15, 18) 1(7) V(12) (2,7, 18, 19, 24, 30, 41, 53) V(13, 14) VI(3) O(B) 1(46) INC, 2, 5, 18) 114) 1(24) I11(6, 7, 23, 25) 1(14, 26, 103) IV(6, 8) 1(115) 1(119) IV(8) VI(4) II(10, 12) IV(1,7) VG, 4, 12) VI(5, 7) 1(4, 6, 14, 34, 66, 96, 101) 1(34, 93, 101) V(3) OW) 1(57) 1(29, 41, 42, 43, 48, 51, 56, 59, 61, 63, 64, 85) II(11) IV(1, 6, 16) O(H) 1(8, 9, 11, 18, 19, 26, 34, 41, 43, 45, 64, 89, 113, 124) IV(1, 5, 6,8, 16) VI(3, 4, 5, 6) VI(14) 1(51, 110, 121) 1(3, 11) IV(12) VI(4) 1(96, 103) IV(16) VI(4) 1(94, 104, 107, 112) 1(28, 49, 67, 101) V(4, 8) IV(6) IV(8) I(11, 29, 35, 42, 48, 94) IV(6, 8, 12, 16) V(9, 14) II(11, 15) VI(4, 3, 5, 7, 13) 1(2) O(H) H(2, 7, 13, 15) HHH(25) 62 CRUSTACEA Alpheidae Alpheus sp. Synalpheus sp. Aristaeidae Aristaeomorpha foliacea Calappidae Calappa gallus C. terrdereginae Matuta inermis Chirostylidae Eumunida sp, Cirolanidae Bathynomus sp. Cymothoidae Anilocra sp. Diogenidae Dardanus arrasor Trizopagurus cf. strigimanus Dorippidae Dorippe frascone Dromiidae Cryptodromia sp, Dromia intermedia Dromidiopsis edwardsi Eryonidae Stereomastis phosphorus Galatheidae Galathea elegans Munida incerta M. japonica M, squamosa Glyphocrangonidae Glyphocrangon cf. regalis Goneplacidae Carcinoplax sp. Rhizopa gracilipes Hippolytidae Hippolysmata sp. Homolidae Latriellopsis petterdi Leucosiidae Arcania undecimspinosa ” Arcunia sp. Iphiculus sp. Ixa inermis Leucosia haswelli L. ocellata Myra laffinis Majidae Anacinetops stimpsoni Chlorinvides aculeatus Chlorinoides sp. Crytomaia Tmaccullochi Ayastenus diacanthus Hyastenus sp. Leptomithrax wattei Leptomithrax sp. Micippa sp. Naxioides taurus Paranaxia serpulifera Phalangipus australiensis MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 1V(6) TV(6) V(12) TH(2) W118) (4, 18,49, 57,64, 67, 77,97, 104, 105, 106, 107, 120, 122, 123) H1(11, 14) ¥(13) V4, 7) 11(6) 111(8, 25) TH(7, 8, 24) 111(6) TH(14, 15,21) 11(23) 1(58, 97) 11(9, 10) T¥(6) VI(5) T¥(8) 118, 10, 11, 14) 1(51, 59, 63, 92) IT1(9, 26) 1V(2, 6) TH(6, 9) 111(6, 7, 24) 111(7, 8,9) ITI(6, 7, 25) 1H(21) 1(13, 16) V(12) TL) 1(49, 59, 79) II1(21) 1(22) 118) 1(62, 115, 120) 1V(6) 1(96, 103, 104, 112) 1(42, 107) 1113) 1(97, 118) 1V(8, 12) I11(16, 25, 26) 1(4,9, 35, 46, 63, 111, 113) IV(1,7) 11(17) 12, 7) U(3) 1(57) V7) 1(55, 98, 113, 120) 1(9, 31, 45, 52, 58, 97) 11/6, 8) V6) P. Vhystrix P. longipes Picrocerus armatus Platymaia wyvillethomsoni P. fimbriata Tarinia sp. Majidae sp. Pachylasmidae Pachylasma cf. scutistriata Paguridae Clibanarius spp. Pagurus Vimbricatus Pylopagurus sp. Spiropagurus spiriger Troglopagurus jousseaumit Palinuridae Linuparus trigonus Puerulus sp. Pandalidae Heterocarpus sibogae H, woodmasoni Heterocarpus sp. Parapandalus spinipes Parapandalus sp. Plesionika ensis P. Tongirostis P. martia Parapaguridae Parapagurus diogenes P. pilosimanus Parapagurus sp. Parthenopidae Cryptopodia queenslandi Parthenope contrarius P, curvispinus P. Zcurvispinus P. harpax P. longimanus P. longispinus Penaeidae ? Macropelasma sp. Metapenaeopsis lamellata M. ?rosea Metapenaeopsis spp. Metapenaeus endeavourt M. ensis Metapenaeus sp. Penaeus esculentus P. latisuleatus (7) 1(28, 49, 120) V(9) H(9) TH(7, 25, 26) HI(25, 26) 1(67) Tv(4) THI(25, 26) 1(9, 10, 13, 18, 36, 41, 42, 43, 49, 51, 52, 63, 89,97, 101) IV(1,6,7,8, 9, 12, 14, 16) VI(5, 6,7) 13) 1(19, 20) 1(4, 19, 28, 35, 42) 1(10, 22) 111(2, 7, 23) 111(23) TII(1, 6,7, 9, 25, 26) 111(6, 24) 111(7) 1(8, 15, 19, 22) 1K(21) 1116, 7) TH(2) TH(2, 6,7, 8,9, 19, 25, 26) 114) 111(25, 26) 11(21) O(B) 1(93, 101, 104, 109, 119, 120, 122) 1(29, 45, 51, 64, 105) TI(1, 6, 7,11) 1(45, 100) V(2) 1(61, 63,67, 92, 113, 118) IV(, 12) 1(1,9, 41,45, 49, 64, 98, 113) 1(45) IV(1) TH(22) 1(7, 76) 11,7, 9, 10, 13, 16, 18, 19, 22,28, 30, 31, 32,35, 36, 38, 39, 42, 44, 45,51, 56, 58, 65, 67, 71, 76, 94, 95, 97, 99, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 113) ['V(1,9) V9, 12, 14) ¥(6) 11,7) 1(18, 37, 38, 39, 40, 69, 75, 16, 77, 78, 79, 80, 82, 83, 84,85, 86, 100, 104, 106, 109, 110) 1(100, 104) ¥(1, 5) VI(2) V(10) 1(36, 44, 48, 58, 69, 75, 76, 77,78, 79, 80, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 93, 97, 104, 106, 108, 115, 120, 124) V(10) VI(3) 1(84) P. longistylus P. plebejus P. semisulcatus Sicyonia Vlancifer Trachypenaeopsis spp. Trachypenaeus anchoralis T. curvirostris T. granulosus Poecilasmatidae Poecilasmatidae sp. Porcellanidae Pachycheles sculptus Porcellana furcillata P. suluensis Porcellanidae sp. Portunidae Benthochascon hemingi Charybdis bimaculata C. callianassa C. cruciata C. feriatus C. jaubertensis C. miles C. truncata Lupocyclus philippinensis L. rotundatus Podophthalmus vigil Portunus argentatus P. gracilimanus P. hastatoides P. orbitosinus P. pelagicus P. rubromarginatus P. sanguinolentus P. tenuipes Portunus spp. COMMUNITY PATTERNS 1(3, 7, 35, 38, 41, 47, 50, 59, 95, 105, 106) VI(4) 1(3, 25, 28, 86) HIH(9, 11, 14, : 15) O(B, C) 1(36, 37, 65, 66, 68, 73,75, 77, 80, 85, 88, 91,97, 100, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 108, 110, 120) V(6) VI(2, 3) 1(7, 63) II1(7, 25, 26) 1(68, 105, 106, 113) 1(1,7, 34) 1(7, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34, 35, 39, 47, 68, 74, 89, 97, 105, 106, 107, 109, 120) TI(6) 1(92) V(12) VC) V(12) VI(4) III(6, 25, 26) TMI(11, 22) 1(68, 71, 72, 87, 98, 104) VI(2) 1(72, 83) 1(74, 79) 1(5) 111(20) 1(7, 18, 22, 30, 34, 68, 69, 70, 71,72, 73, 74, 75, 81, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 90, 96, 102, 104, 107, 112) IV(16) V(5, 6,10, 11, 12, 14) VIC, 2,3, 6) 1(7,9, 19, 34) IV(6) 1(18, 79, 86, 97, 103, 118) VI(6) 1(72, 76, 85, 119) V(6, 10) VI(2, 3) O(E) 1(4, 5,7, 8,9, 10, 13, 18, 19, 21, 22, 23, 28, 29, 30, 31, 34, 38, 42,45, 103) IV(6, 14) V(9, 13, 14) 1(47, 64, 69, 72, 76, 77, 80, 81, 85,95, 97, 101, 102, 105, 106, 107, 111, 112, 120) V(5, 6, 10) VI(3) V(10) IV(8, 14) V(12) O(K) I(22, 63, 71, 72, 80, 81, 83, 89, 91, 92, 95,97, 104, 113, 115) V(10) O(E) 1(58, 106, 119) 11(8, 10, 11) IV(2) V(12) VI(4, 5) V(10, 11, 12) O(B, E, G, H) 13,9, 18, 19, 20, 22, 23, 28, 31, 32, 35, 36, 38, 39, 41, 42, 46, 51, 59, 63, 74, 95,97, 98, 99, 107, 111, 120) 1(5) IV(6, 14) V(3,9, 11, 12, 13, 14) VI(1, 3,4, 5,6,7) 1(16, 18, 42, 45, 91) IV(14) (14) Thalamita sexlobata T. sima Thalamita sp. Processidae Nikoides sp. Raninidae Ranina ranina Scalpellidae 2? Anandaleum sp. Arcoscalpellum pedunculatum Arcoscalpellum sp. Scyllaridae Tbacus alticrenatus I. brucei Ibacus sp. Scyllarus ?rubens S. tuberculatus Scyllarus spp. Thenus orientalis Solenoceridae Haliporoides sp. Hymenopenaeus sibogae Solenoceridae sp. Squillidae Alima laevis Carinosquilla multicarinata Chlorida ?depressa C. granti Gonodactylus falcatus G. graphurus Harpiosquilla raphidea Kempina cf. mikado Lysiosquilla cf. maculata Odontodactylus cultrifer Oratosquilla ?gonypetes O. woodmasoni Squilla perpensa Stenopodidae Stenopus hispidus Stylodactylidae Stylodactylus sp. Xanthidae Actaea savignyi Actaea sp. Actumnus pugilator Liagore rubromaculata Liomera ?venosa Lophozozymus pictor Parapilumnus? sp. Pilumnopeus sp. Pilumnus semilanatus Pilumnus spp. Zalasius dromiaeformis Xanthidae sp. 63 IV(12) 1(92, 113, 115) V(12) V1, 6) 1(18) II(1) 111(6) III(6, 7, 8, 24, 25, 26) II1(6) IHI(1, 2, 8, 9, 10, 15, 18, 19, 23) IN(2, 4, 5, 14, 15) 1114) IV(6) 1(41, 61, 67, 76, 77, 80, 83, 84, 86, 93, 102, 104, 105, 106) IV(6) V(12) 1(9, 18, 19, 28, 34, 39, 42) VI(7) O(A, B, E) 1(27, 36, 37, 40, 51,57, 73, 78, 83, 91, 93, 94, 100, 102, 103, 104, 106, 110, 111, 119, 124) 11(5, 6) IV(15) V(J, 2,6, 11, 12) VI(2, 3, 5,7) IIL(7, 8, 24, 25, 26) TIE(1) III(6, 7) VI(2) 1(7, 25,47) 1(7) IV(4, 6) IV(2) V(2) 1(52, 61, 67) I1(6) VI(5) 1(83) V(5) VI(2) TH(2, 9, 11) VI(7) VIG) 1(22) O(B) 1(7, 71, 72, 74, 76, 81, 82, 83, 85, 86, 87) VI(10) 1(31) TH(24) 1(104, 113, 121) IV(12) IV(1, 7, 12) Vv(12) 1(76, 87, 97) V(2) V(2) IV(1) V(12) 1(50, 55,92, 97, 121) IV(8) 1(4, 50, 63, 89, 92) II(1, 3, 6, 7,8, 11) IV(5, 6, 8) V(12) VI(4) 1(97) 1(92) V(2) VI(1) 64 ECHINODERMATA Acanthasteridae Acanthaster brevispinus A, planci Amphiuridae Amphiura sp. Antedonidae 2 Euantedon tahitiensis Toxometra paupera Asteriidae Pedicellaster sp. Asterinidae Anseropoda rosacea Nepanthia belcheri N. brevis N. ?variablis ?Nepanthia sp. ?Parasterina sp. Asteroschematidae Ophiocreas sibogae Astrometridae Pterometra venusta Astropectinidae Astropecten monacanthus A. ?phragmorus A, pulcherrimus A. cf. schayeri A. zebra A. cf. zebra Astropecten sp. Psilaster acuminatus Bathycrinidae Metacrinus cf. nobilis Caudinidae ?Acaudina spp. Charitometridae Charitometridae sp. Chiridotidae Chiridotidae sp. Cidaridae Eucidaris ?metularia Goniocidaris mikado Histocidaris australiae H, elegans Histocidaris sp. Prionocidaris baculosa P. bispinosa Stereocidaris cf. microtuberculata Stylocidaris bracteata S. conferta Stylocidaris sp. Clypeasteridae Clypeaster cf. fervens C. reticulatus C. telurus Clypeaster sp. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 11(14) IV(2) VI(6) 111(26) 1(113, 118) VI(3) TI(—) Iv(4) 1(2) VI) V(3) 111(26) 111(25) 111(20) 1(10, 16, 18, 36, 45, 52, 66, 90,97, 100, 113, 118) (15, 17) VI(5, 6,7) VI(8) v(9) 1(51, 107) III(1, 26) O(B, H) I(4, 6,7, 8, 18, 26, 29, 31, 32, 35, 43, 44, 45, 46, 51, 52, 89, 94, 97, 101, 102, 107, 123) II(2, 14) IV(, 6, 7, 12, 14) V(3, 4, 12) VI(4, 6,7, 4) 11(6) I11(25, 26) TH(1, 24) 1119) V1, 10) I(-) TN(1) v9) 111(10) 111(25) T11(26) TI1(25, 26) v(9) 19, 11, 24, 70, 86, 89, 94, 101, 103, 109, 113, 118) II(7, 12, 14, 17) IV(1, 2,4, 5, 6, 7) V(2, 12, 13) VI(5, 13) 111(26) 111(14, 23, 25, 26) IM(5, 15, 19) V(2) TH(1) 1(2, 43) V(9) 11(3, 6, 11, 12, 13, 14) 11(6, 12) Colobometridae Colobometra bella Iconometra anisa Comasteridae Capillaster multiradiatus C. sentosus Comantheria cf. grandicalyx C. rotula C. ef. rotula Comantheria sp. Comanthina belli C. schlegeli Comanthus bennetti C. parvicirrus C. samoanus Comaster sp. Comatella maculata C. nigra C. pectinata C. purpurea C. cf. purpurea C. rotalaria C. solaris C. stelligera C. ?stelligera Comissia hartmeyeri Comissia sp. Cucumariidae Orbithyone megapodia Pentacta anceps P. cf. anceps P. australis P. crassa P. quadrangularis Pentacta sp. Pseudocolochirus axiologus Pseudocholochirus sp. Stolus buccalis S. cf. buccalis Thyone okeni Thyone sp. Cucumariidae sp. Diadematidae Astropyga radiata Chaetodiadema granulatum Echinothrix calamaris Echinasteridae Echinaster acanthodes E. luzonicus E. cf. purpureus ? Echinaster spp. Ov) v9) VI(7) 1(120) I(11) OE, F) I(5, 7, 11, 13) 1V(4, 7) V(2) I1(5, 14) I(11, 56, 58, 60) 1(97, 118) 113, 7) IVC) 1(14) 1(22) I1(3, 5, 11, 15) v9) oO, 1D 1(27) 1(56, 58, 60, 61, 63) II(7, 14, 17) IV(7) VI(S) 11(4, 5,7, 11, 12, 14, 15, 17) V(2) VI(6) O(E, F) 1(14, 35, 51, 60, 85, 86, 94, 102) IN(4, 5,7, 11, 12, 13, 14, 17) IV(4, 5, 6) V(2,9) VI(5,7) II(2, 7, 12, 13, 14, 17) V(3, 4, 9) O(E, F) 1(2, 4, 5, 7,9, 10, 11, 13, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 25, 28, 29, 32, 34, 42, 44, 45, 46, 52, 54, 66, 90, 92, 94, 118) IV(2, 3, 16) V(12) VI(3, 4, 5, 6, 7) 1(2, 8,9, 11, 16, 35, 42, 45, 52, 53, 60, 85, 118) VI(—) 11(6, 11, 17) VI(5) v9) 11(7) 1(5) IV(1,7, 12) VI(4, 5) 1(46, 56, 58, 61, 63, 92, 97, 101, 104, 105, 106, 107, 113, 117, 118) EV(7, 12) VI(5) T(2, 11) V(2) 11(2) 1(63, 74, 103, 104, 105, 113) IV(1) 1(25, 104, 106) IV(1) V(5) VI(4, 5) V(2) VI(5) 1(105) IV(2) 11(13) OE) 1(2, 22, 26, 29, 46, 51, 69, 72, 83) IV(14) V(4, 13) VIG, 5, 6,7, 13) (7) 11) v(4) 11(12, 13) THI(10, 14) Echinothuriidae Araeosoma cf. owstoni Asthenosoma intermedium A. varium Hygrosoma cf, hoplocantha Phormosoma cf. rigidum Euryalidae Euryale aspera Goniasteridae Anthenea crassa A. Merassa A. cf. crassa A. cf, elegans A. mertoni ?Anthenea sp. Goniodiscuster australiae G. pleyadella G. rugosus Iconaster longimanus Mediaster australiensis Mediaster spp. Nymphaster moebj N, pentagonus Nymphaster sp. Pseudogoniodiscaster wardi Stellaster equestris S. cf, incei S. cf. inspinosus Stellaster sp. Goniasteridae spp. Himerometridae Amphimetra ensifera Heterometra cf. crenulata HA, quinduplicava H. variipinna Himerometra magnipinna Holothuriidae Aclinopyga echinites A. cf. evhinites A. cf, miliaris Bohadschia cf. argus B. cf. marmorata Bohadschia sp. 1 Bohadschia sp. Holothuria edulis H. ef, leucospilota H. martensi Al, ocellata Aolothuria ct. pervieax Holothuria spp. Laganidae Laganum depressum Peronella lesueuri P. orbicularis - COMMUNITY PATTERNS IN(5, 14, 26) (11) 1(5) V(3, 9, 12) 11(23) TM(14, 25, 26) 1(46, 98) 1I(4, 5,7, 11, 13, 14,15, 17) 1(51,61, 120) V(2, 12) 11(12, 13) (7) O(F) U5) 1(83) 1(9) IVC, 12) (14, 15, 17) 1(6) 1N(3, 6, 11,12, 13, 14) TV(1, 2, 12) V4(5) 111(25) L(7, 24, 26) 111(26) IIN(7, 26) TH(24) n(2) O(B) 1(1, 2,4, 9, 24, 33, 42, 43,44, 45, 46, 50, 52, 56, 57, 58, 63,71, 74, 81, 85, 86, 92, 97,98, 101, 102, 119, 124) II(11) IV(2,3, 7, 14) V@2, 13) VI(4, 5,7) 112, 6, 14, 15, 16) IH(8, 10, 25, 26) 1H1(20, 22) I1(3, 10) 1V(2) 17,71) TV(2) O(E, F,G, K) FV(1, 2,3, 6) v9) 1(56, 62) VI(4) TH(16) (4, 11,12) T(3) £1(5, 15) 1V(14) O(5) V(9) T¥(1) VI(5) (12) 1(49, 52, 56, 61, 64, 74, 81, 82, 83,84, 101, 107, 109) TV(1, 3,12) 1(7, 13, 24, 28, 36, 49, 84, 85, 91,97, 107, 110,113) EV4) VI(4, 5, 7, 2,3, 8) 1(2, 101) HI(11, 12) V4(S5) 11(13) MICS) ¥(3, 9) 1(85) H(15) VI(14) O(D) 12, 4,9, 24, 46, 51, 56, 57, 62, 84, 90, 94, 113, 124) IV(1, 4, 14) V(3) V3, 4) TV(1, 6, 7,8, 14, 16) ¥(4, 13) VI(4, 11) Peronella Vorbicularis Loveniidae Lovenia doederleini L. elongata Luidiidae Luidia hardwicki L. maculata Mariametridae Lamprometra klunzingeri Liparometra articulata Oxymetra erinaceus Stephanometra indica Mariametridae sp. Metrodiridae Metrodira subulata Molpadiidae Molpadiidae sp. Ophiaetidae Ophiodaphne materna Ophidiasteridae Certonardoa carinata Leiaster glaber cf_ Linkia sp, Nardoa gomophia Nardoa sp. Tamaria dubiosa T. fusca T. megaloplax 1 Tamaria sp. Ophiodermatidae Cryptopelia granulifera Ophiarachnella gorgonia O. infernalis O, similis O. sphenisci Ophiochasma stellatum Ophiopsammus yoldii Ophiotrichidae Macrophiothrix koelheri M. megapoma Macrophiothrix sp. ? Ophiocnemis marmorata 2 Ophiocnemis sp, Ophiomaza cacaotica Ophiopteron elegans Ophiothrix ciliaris O. foveolaia O. melanostica O, martensi QO, miles O. nereidina O. Inereidina QO. propinqua O. cf. proteus Q. purpurea O. cf. scotiosa O. Ivigelandi Placophiorhrix melanosticata 65 1(2, 28, 43, 46, 56, 57, 58, 63, 89) v(9) v(9) 1(45, 52, 89,99, 102, 119) 4(9, 43, 57, 107, 122) M(8) 1V(7) VI(5) Vv(9) IV(1,3) (3) V(9) H1(8) 1(9, 44, 51,56, 61, 64, 83, 97, 98, 101,103,105, 111) 1VQ, 4, 6,8) VI(5) 111(23) 11(12) 1(2) 1V(12) V(9) 1i(14) TV(1) 1V(4) V(9) 11(6) IV(1) 1(2) 11(7, 13, 14) TV(1, 12) VI(5, 7) 1(51, 118) EV(, 12) TH(11) 1V(6) IV(5, 6) v(9) 1(27) 1(74, 96, 97, 105, 110) 1(10, 24, 46, 51, 85, 92, 94, 105, 118, 119) ¥I(4, 5) 1(101) IV(6) 1(89, 97) 1V(7) (1) 197) 1G) TI(21) 1(4,8, 10, 11, 16, 17, 18,25, 29, 32,38, 44, 45, 49, 52, 72, 91, 94, 100, 118) 11(4) IV(1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 12, 14, 16) V(12) V1(3, 4, 6,7) 115) FV(5, 12) 1(89) IV, 12) OF) O(J) 1(64, 89, 92) ICS) IV(12, 16) V(2) GU) O() TV(1) 1(102) 1V(4) t(12) 1(45) V1(10) 11(12) 1(94, 113) OF) Ophiotrichidae sp. Ophiuridae Ophiomusium spp. Oreasteridae Asterodiscus elegans A. helonotus Culcita schmideliana Pentaceraster gracilis P. cf. mammillatus P. regulus P. tuberculatus 1 Pentaster sp. Poraster superbus Paleopneustidae Linopneustes cf. fragilis L. cf, murrayt Phyllophoridae Actinocucumis ?iypicus A. cf. typicus Cladolabes sp. Mensamaria intercedens Phyllophorus holothurioides Phyllophorus sp. Phyllophoridae sp. Pterasteridae Euretaster cribrosus £. of. cribrosus E. insignis Schizasteridae 1 Protenaster rostratus Spatangidae Maretia carinata M. planulata Stichopodidae Stichopus horrens S. cf. naso S. variegatus S. of. variegatus Thelenota anax Synaptidae Synaptula sp. Temnopleuridae Salmaciella dussumteri Salmacis belli S. ?belli S. 2aligopora 5. sphaeroides S. 2 virgulata Salmacis sp. Temnopleurus alexandri T. reevesi Temnotrema bathryoides Temnotrema spp. Toxopneustidae Gymnechinus epistichus Nudechinus inconspicuus Tripneustes gratilla MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 1¥(3) TIL(24, 26) (1) v(9) Tq) O(C, D) EV(2, 3) 11(7, 11, 16) 1(56, 60, 62, 63) M1(2, 13) ¥(9) VI(4, 5) Iv(1) 1I(6) 1(6, 46) II1(6, 7, 8, 19, 25, 26) I1I(7) 1(56, 119, 120) 11(5) 1(107) 1(101, 110) OF) 1(79, 101) 1(94, 109) IV(1, 2, 12) 12, 11) 1(2, 9,25, 51, 52, 61, 81, 83, 89, 92, 94, 105, 113) MMU, 2, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16) FV, 4, 12) VI(5, 12) 1(34, 66, 87, 90, 95) (14) VI(14) 1(24, 35,91, 100, 104, 105, 110, 111,113,117, 124) 11, 3,4, 15) ¥(4, 9) 1(4, 58, 60,61, 64) M1, 11, 13, 15) V(12, 13) VI(4, 6) V5) V(12) Iv, 14) ¥(9) V1(3) 111, 101, 104, 110) 114) IV(1,5, 7,8) VI(4, 5) 11(3, 11) TV(2, 7) V(9) 1(92, 103, 109) 1(2) 17, 11) ¥(12) VIS) 1(113, 118) (61) v(9) 1(2, 57, 60) 1(56, 62, 63) I1(15) IV(1, 2, 4,5, 6,7) V(7,9, 12) 15, 7) IV, 4, 6, 8, 12) v(9) 1(57, 118) 17) EV(1, 2, 3) V(9, 12) 1V(1) O(K) Zygometridae Zygometra comata Z. elegans Z. microdiscus Z. punctata PISCES Aluteridae Alutera monoceros Paramonacanthus oblongus Scobinichthys granulatus Anacanthidae Anacanthus barbatus Antennariidae Phrynelox cunninghami Tathicarpus butleri T. muscosus Tetrabranchium ocellatum Apogonidae Apogon albimaculosus A, atripes A, brevicaudata A. ellioti A, fasciata A, frenatus Apogon sp. Apogonichthys paecilopterus Apogonichthys sp. Apogonops anomalus Malakichthys sp. Siphamia sp. Synagrops sp. Apogonidae sp. Aracanidae Kenirocapros flavofasciatus Argentidae Glossandon sp. Astronesthidae Astronesthes lucifer Ateleopodidae Aleleopus sp. Aulopidae Aulopus sp. Berycidae Centroberyx affinis Blenniidae Meiacanthus grammistes O(B) 1I(16, 17) 11(4, 7, 15) O(E, F) 4,6, 7, 1, 29, 32, 45, 49, 52, 72, 89, 97, 103, 113, 120) H1(3, 7, 13, 14, 16) [V(1,3) V1, 5, 6, 12, 13) VI(4, 5, 6,7) 1(5) M115) VI(3) VI(4,7) O(E) 1(40) 1(81,92) 1(3, 63, 93, 102) (2, 13) Iv(-) O(E) VI(7) 1(16) 1(40, 105) 451) 1Vi-) (61) I(1, 19, 25,30, 35, 39, 62, 75, 78) ¥(9, 10) VI(2, 3, 6) O(D, G, 1) 16, 9, 10. 15, 16, 19,22, 23,25, 29, 30, 32, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49, 51, 52, 56, 67, 68, 75, 78, 84, 88, 90, 100, 102, 105, 107, 112, 113, 115, 124) 11G, 5) IV(—) VU, 3,4, 5,6,8,9, 10, 11, 12,13, 14) VIC, 2,3, 4,5) 1(112) IV(-) Iv(-) 1(14, 22, 25, 30, 32, 34, 39, 42, 45,71, 77, 78, 79, 80, 85, 88, 106) HI(2, 12) V(3, 5) VI(2, 3) v9) WH, 2,4) TH(2, 23) Im —) TH(1, 6,7, 8,9, 10, 19,23, 25) T(2, 23) TH(S, 14, 15) ICO, 19) TH(6) THM(21) 111(3, 4,7, 10.11, 26) 111(3, 4) 1(104) TV(~) Bothidae Arnoglossus intermedius A, tapeinosoma COMMUNITY PATTERNS O(B, E, G, I) 1(29, 32, 35, 46, 58, 59,.60, 114) IV(—) V(9, 12) VI(1, 5,7) 1(9, 18, 19, 22, 29) V(4, 13) C. humerosus Megalaspis cordyla Scomberoides tala S. tol Selar crumenophthalmus 67 1(81, 83) V(6, 10) VI(1) Vv(9) VI(1, 2) VIS) A, waitei 1(88, 99) Selaroides leptolepis 1(83, 100, 123) V(5, 10) Arnoglossus spp. 1(10, 18) Seriolina nigrofasciata VI(7) Chascanopsetta lugubris TH(6, 8, 23, 24) Carapidae Citharoides sp. TM(11) Pyramodon ventralis TI1(8) Engyprosopon 1(1,3, 6,7, 8, 10, 11,17, Carcharinidae grandisquama 29, 32, 41, 53, 56, 57, 58, Mustelus antarcticus I1I(10, 14) 60, 62, 64, 67, 92, 94, 112) Centriscidae 11(3, 5, 12, 13) IV(—) V9, Centriscus scutatus 1(58, 83, 89, 96, 113) V(5, 12, 13) VI(3, 4, 5) 10) VI(5) Grammatobothus pennatus 0, I) (1, 2, 5, 11, Chaetodontidae 12) VI(5) Parachaetodon ocellatus VI(3) G. polyophthalmus 1(2, 11, 17, 18, 19, 29, 30, 32, Chauliodontidae 35,41, 42, 44, 46, 50, 54, Chauliodus sp. T11(25) 67, 92, 94, 101, 109) IV(—) Chaunacidae V(12) VI(3, 5) Chaunax sp. III(6, 7, 8,9, 19, 23, 26) Poecilopsetta sp. THI(10) Chimaeridae Pseudorhombus argus 1(60, 113, 114) Hydrolagus sp. THI(1, 2, 6, 19, 25, 26) P. diplospilus 1(4, 10, 11, 14, 17, 18, 19, 30, Chirocentridae 32, 41, 42, 46, 47, 49, 50, Chirocentrus dorab 1(40, 72) 67, 92) IV(—) V(3, 6, 12, 13, Chlorophthalmidae 14) VI(2, 3, 5) Chlorophthalmus spp. THI(1, 2, 6,7, 8, 9, 10, 15, P. dupliciocellatus 1(5, 20) I1(5, 12, 16, 17) 19, 23, 25, 26) III(21, 22) VI(7) Congridae P. elevatus O(B, E, F, G, I) 1(4, 9, Ariosoma sp. TII(10) 10, 11, 13, 17, 18, 19, 20, Cynoglossidae 22, 23, 29, 30, 31, 32, 35, Cynoglossus sp. 1(16, 71, 72, 75, 87, 88) 36, 41, 42, 44, 46, 47, 49, Dactylopteridae 50, 52, 62, 65, 67, 72, 73, Dactyloptena orientalis 11(11) I'V(—) VI(5, 7) 78, 87,94, 95,99, 100, D. papilo I(1, 17, 36, 42, 92) II(7, 13) 104, 106, 115, 122, 124) VU, THI(11) VI(G3, 4) 5,8, 10, 13, 14) VICI, 2, 3,5, Dasyatidae 6,7) Gymnura australis VI(2) P. spinosus 1(4, 9, 10, 11, 18, 67, 69, 78, Urolophus sp. TH(2, 14, 15) 86, 89, 94, 113, 123, 124) Diodontidae IV(—) V(5, 13) VIG, 5) Tragulichthys jaculiferus 1(22, 50, 72, 74, 77) I1(10) Pseudorhombus sp. 1(57, 60, 89, 113) Dussumieriidae Branchiostegidae Dussumieria hasselti 1(40) Branchiostegus serratus TH1(3, 11) Fistulariidae Callionymidae Fistularia commersonii 1(40, 72, 78, 81) TN(14) V(1, Bathycallionymus 6, 11, 12, 13, 14) VI(2, 4) mortonensis TII(11) F, petimba O(A, B) Calliurichthys grossi 1(32, 67, 72, 92, 104, 107, Gerridae 115, 117, 123) V(12) V1(3, 4) Gerres filamentosus 1(40) Chascanopsetta sp. II1(6, 8, 23, 24) G. macracanthus 1(40) Citharoides ?macrolepis (1, —) Pentaprion longimanus V(1, 3,5, 10, 11, 13, 14) Dactylopus dactylopus 1(41, 67, 92) V(4, 12, 14) VI(1, 2, 3, 4) VI(3) Gobiidae Orbonnymus rameus 1(57) 11(10, 17) Acentrogobius ornatus 1(35) Repomucenus belcheri 1(98, 105) Ctenogobius criniger 1(76) R. calcaratus 1(45, 120) Oxyurichthys sp. 1(66, 87, 88, 116, 120) Caproidae Grammicolepidae Antigonia rubicunda THI(2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 22) Xenolepidichthys dalgleishi I1(6, 7, 9, 25) Antigonia sp. T1I(8, 10) Hemiramphidae Carangidae Hemiramphus sp. 1(83) Alepes apercna VI(3) Hexanchidae A, mate VI(—) Heptranchias perlo IIL(S, 6,7, 8, 10) Carangoides armatus 1(83) Holocentridae C. chrysophrys 1(40) V(6) Ostichthys cf. japonicus TII(—) C. diversa V(10) VI(2) Hoplichthyidae C. equula III(3, 11) Hoplichthys citrinus I1I(6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 25, 26) C. hedlandensis VI(1) Labridae C. malabaricus V(5, 10) VIC, 2) Choerodon cephalotes 1(67, 81, 89, 96, 98, 123) Carangoides sp. VI(2) C. vitta 1(113) Caranx bucculentus 1(68) Choerodon spp. 1(1, 7, 8, 10, 18, 20, 21, 23, 68 Pseudolabrus gracilis Leiognathidae Leiognathus bindus L. leuciscus L. cf. leuciscus L. splendens Leiognathus sp. Lethrinidae Lethrinella nematacantha Lophiidae Lophiodes cf. mutilus Lophiomus setigerus Lutjanidae Lutjanus sanguineus L, sebae Macrorhamphosidae Macrorhamphosus molleri Macrouridae Coelorhynchus cf, mirus Coelorhynchus sp. Coryphaenoides sp. Hymenocephalus cf. longiceps Malacocephalus laevis Neuzumia sp. Monocanthidae Brachaleuteres sp. Chaetoderma penicilligera Paramonocanthus oblongus Paramonocanthus sp. Pseudomonocanthus peroni Thamnoconus hypargyreus T. tessellatus Monocentridae Cleidopus gloriamaris Moridae Euclichthys polynemus Physiculus cf. nigrescens Musgiloididae Parapercis emeryana Mullidae Upeneus filifer U. sulphureus U. sundiacus U. tragula U. vittatus Upeneus spp. Muraenesocidae Muraenesox bagio M. cinereus Muraenidae Lycodontis undulatus Myctophidae Diaphus sp. Myrideae Muraenichthys sp. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 29, 51,67, 89, 110) M1, 4, 5) IV(—) VU, 3,4,8,9, 12, 13, 14) VI(3, 4, 6) 1(6) 1(40, 104) V(3, 5, 6, 10, 12, 13) VIC, 2, 3, 4) 1(40, 72, 104) V(1, 12) 1(69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 87, 88) O(A, B, C) V(14) O(B) 1(14, 61, 112) T1(13) Vv(12) III(6, 7, 8,9, 26) TM(5, 15) v(1, 5) VI(—) I11(3, 4, 10) TH(1, 2, 8, 19) I1I(6,7, 8, 19, 23, 25) 11110) I11(6, 7, 26) I11(6, 26) I11(6, 7, 9, 25, 26) IV(-) V(12) 11(14) 1(3, 41, 68, 89, 100, 104, 117, 120) V(12, 13) 1(2, 6, 7, 28, 59, 67, 82, 83, 86, 89, 92, 94, 104, 117, 120, 122, 123, 124) TI, 3,11, 14, 15, 16) V(5, 8, 9, 10) 1(51) THH(5, 14) 1HI(11) 1(7) INI(19) I11(8, 23) IV(—) V(9, 12) VI(7) IV(-) 1(40) V(1, 5,6, 10) VIC, 2) 1(74, 76, 78, 80, 83, 85, 87, 92, 104) V(1, 6) VI(3) 1(78, 92) O(A, B, C, D, E) 1(46, 57, 61, 84, 89) IV(—) VI(4) V(9, 12, 13) Il(-) 1(80, 83) ¥(10) 1(81, 92) I11(6, 8) 1(72) Nemipteridae Nemipterus ?aurifilum N. hexodon N. peronii Nemipterus spp. Pentapodus paradiseus Scolopsis taeniopterus Ogcocephalidae Halicmetus reticulatus Halieutaea sp. Malthopsis sp. Ophidiidae Glyptophidium sp. Hoplobrotula sp. Ostraciontidae Lactoria cornuta Rhinesomus gibbosus Rhynchostracion nasus Pegasidae Zalises draconis Platacidae Platax sp. Platycephalidae Bambradon laevis Bembras ? japonicus Elates thompsoni Onigocia sp. Platycephalus indicus Rogadius asper Rogadius sp. Suggrundus diversidens S. isacanthus S. macracanthus S. tuberculatus Suggrundus sp. Plectorhynchidae Diagramma pictum Plesiopidae Plesiops sp. Pleuronectidae ?Paralichthys sp. Samaris cacatuae Plotosidae Euristhmus elongatus Polymixidae Polymixia cf. japonicus Polynemidae Polynemus multiradiatus Pomacanthidae Chaetodontoplus personifer Pomacentridae Pristotis jerdoni 1(104) VI(3) O(B) 1(7, 18, 19, 22, 36, 39, 40, 68, 69, 72, 73, 74, 75, 77, 78, 80, 83, 86, 87, 104, 105) V(1, 3,4, 5,6, 10, 12, 11, 13, 14) VI(1, 3) 1(57, 89) IV(—) 1(36, 84, 104, 120) V(4, 12) VI(2, 3) TH(25) IM(2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 14, 23) TII(1, 22) I11(6, 8) INI(1, 8, 23) 1(83, 86) 1(3) VI(-) 1(78, 81, 83, 84, 105, 106) 11(10) VI(3, 4) 11(14) VI(3, 4, 6) I11(8) TH(15, 23) 1(40, 72, 88, 90) V(6, 10) VI(2) IV(—) VI(7) O(C, E) IV(—) V(12) VI) 1(7, 8,9, 18, 19, 22, 29) IHI(1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 15) 1(22, 29, 32, 45, 58, 70, 71, 78,79, 105, 112) I1V(—) V(12) VI(7) 1(1, 4, 16, 19, 25, 36, 67, 70, 78, 80, 94)V(1, 3, 5, 6, 8, 10, 13, 14) VIG) 1(7, 18, 25, 30, 32, 34, 39, 45, 61, 62, 112) 11(16) IV(—) V(9, 12) VI(—) O(E) 1(36) H1(8, 11, 15, 19, 22, 23) IV(—) V(9, 12) VI(7) V(11, 13) T1(5, 12, 16, 17) TII(6, 7, 8, 25, 26) 1(7, 9) H11) V(8, 12) VI(S) 1(18, 19, 22, 70, 71, 72, 82, 106, 107) 111(10) 1(72) IV(-) 1(22, 89) 11(3, 7, 11, 12, 13, 15) V(3,4,9, 12, 13) VI(—) Pomadasyidae Pomadusys argyreus P. maculatus Priacanthidae Priavanthus tayenus Pristiophoridae Pristiophorus nudipinnis Psettodidae Psettodes erumet Pseudochromidae Pseudochromis quinquedentatus Pseudochromis sp. Rajidae Raja sp. Psammobatis waitit Rhinobatidae Rhina ancylosiomus Sciaenidae Austronibea oedogenys Johnius vogleri Scorpaenidae Advenior elongatus Apistops caloundra Brachirus miles Brachirus sp. Dendrochirus brachypterus D, zebra Erosa erosa Helicolenus papillasus Hypodytes carinatus Inimicus caledonicus Liecranium scorpio Lioscorpius spp. Minous trachycephalus M. versicolor Neosebastes incisipinnis N. ef, nigropunctatus Parucentropogon vespa Paraploactis sp. Pterois volituns Scorpuena ergastulorum Scorpaenopsis spp, Setarches guentheri Scorpaenidae sp, Scyliorhinidae Halaelurus analis Cephaloseylltum tsabella Galeus boardmani Serranidae Cephalopholis pachycentran Chelidoperva sp. Epinephelus sexfascialus Sillaginidae Sillago maculata Soleidae Aseraggodes sp. Synaptura muelleri S. quagga Solenichthyidae Solenastomus sp. COMMUNITY PATTERNS 1(68, 72,83) ¥(1,5, 10) VI(2) (71, 74, 82) O(B) (40, 76, 79, 81,83) V(1,5, 10, 11, 13) VE(2, 3, 4) iil(—) O(B) 1(13, 36, 40, 70, 72, 73,77, 81,87) V5. 10) V2, 3,5) 1(40, 58, 64, 89) 11(5) HC, 3, 5,7, 9, 11, 14,15, 19, 25, 26) 111(7, 25) Vi-) 1(73) 1(68) (74) VI(3) 1(18, 60) v(9) 1(3) VIU5) IVv(—) TI(10, 13, 14) I11(2) 1(25, 69, 70, 74, 75, 80, 83, 85,92, 106) 1V(—)VI(3) 1(1) (7, 10) 1V(—) 1(124) TH(10, 19) 1(7, 18, 19, 22, 30, 81) 1(25, 68, 76, 79, LOS) WIU5) 1(4, 7) 11(8, 11, 14, 15) 1(68, 72, 76, 78, 80, 85, 92, 118) Iv(-) 1(18) 11,3, 8) 1(64, 66, 84,92) IV(—) 1116, 7,9) M10) UI(10) tI —) 111(8, 10, 19, 25) W-) 1(2) 1(47, 67, 81, 88, 89, 104, 117,118) V1) WK —) VI(2, 3, 4) TH(19, —) 1(49,74, 75,90, 107) 1(72) Iv(—) Sphyraenidae Sphyraena forsteri Squalidae Centrophorus scalpratus Etmopterus lucifer Squalus megalops Squalus sp. Squatinidae Squatina australis 5S. tergocellata Syngnathidae Halicampus grayi Hippocampus whitei Synodontidae Saurida filamentosus S. micropectoralis 5, tumbil S. undasquamis Synodus houlti S. similis 5, variegatus Trachinocephalus myops Tetraodontidae Amblyrhynchotes spinosissimus Anchisomus multistriatus A, pachygaster Canthigaster bennetti Cc. rivulata C. valentini Canthigaster spp. Gastrophysus sceleratus G. spadiceus Lagocephalus sp. Torquigener pallimaculatus T. tuberculiferus T. whilleyi Teraponidae Pelates quadrilineatus Terapon theraps Torpedinidae Narcine tasmaniensis Narcine sp. Torpedo macneilli Triancanthidae Tripodichthys angustifrons Triacanthodidae Bathyphylax bombifrons B, omen HAalimochirurgus alcocki Macrorhamphosodes uradoi Paratriacanthodes cf, kerrei P. cf. retraspinis 69 Vi(3) Tit(1,2 (2) in(—) T(7, 10, 19,23, 26) TH(3, 19) Ti(—) 1(59, 61,63, 113) 1(28) 110) VI —) Ti!) v(10) O(B) 1(2, 17, 18, 20, 47, 50, 51, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 78, 87, 104, 106) V(1, 5,6, 8, 10,11, 12, 13, 14) VIC) O(A, B, C, 2 1(2, 4,5, 10, 11, 13, 14, 17,20, 22, 23, 25, 36, 37, 41,47, 50, 51, 53, 54, 64, 67, 68, 72, 75, 80, 87, 100, 104, 110,115, 117, 118, 124) V(4, 5,6, 8, 10, 12, 13, 14) VI(1, 2,3,4,5) v9) 1(5, 6, 10, 17, 23, 54, 55, 89) 11(13, 16) 1V(—) ¥(4) VIQ3, 4,5) 1(92) V(9, 12, 13, 14) VI(3) 1(7) V(9, 12, 13, 14) IM(10, 11) (12, 13) V4) (2, 3.4.5, 14, 15) 1(112) m1(2) IV(-) 1(7) V(4) VI(7) (7, 39, 112) V(5, 10) V1(2, 3,4) O(A) 1(83) V(10) VIC) TI( 15) IV(-) TV(—) VI(4) 1(2, 50, 74, 82, 83, 102, 106, 110) TIW(5) V1(2) 1(78, 81) 1(40, 71, 72, 83, 87, 104) V(1, 6, 10, 12) VIC, 2) 111(8, 23) TH(8, 11) 11, 2,7) 1(72, 78, 81, 83, 86, 87) V(10) VI1(2, 3,4) TI(18, 19) HI(7, 8) HII(6, 8, 9, 25, 26) 111(6, 7, 8, 10, 25, 26) 1f1(10, 19) 11(6) 70 Triacanthodes sp. Triglidae Chelidonichthys kumu Lepidotrigla calodactyla L. cf. calodactyla Lepidotrigla sp. Peristedion sp. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM TWI(11, 15, 22) T(5) 1(11, 17, 19, 25, 36, 41, 4: 47,54, 58, 92,94) V(12) I1(3, 4, 11) IIN(3, 4, 6, 11, 14, 15, 23) H(1,2,3, 7, 859, 10, H, 14, 23, 25, 26, 19) Pterygotrigla picta Pterygotrigla sp. Uranoscopidae Uranoscopus cognatus Zeidae Cyttopsis roseus Zenion cf. japonicus Zenopsis nebulosus Zeus faber T(1, 3, 10, 25) III(S, 7) TI(12) To TH(S, 24, 25) III(3, 5) TII(S) Mem. Gd Mus, 25(1): 71—105,[1987] NEW RECORDS OF ACARNUS GRAY (PORIFERA : DEMOSPONGIAE ; POECILOSCLERIDA) FROM AUSTRALIA, WITH A SYNOPSIS OF THE GENUS JOHN N,A. Hooper Division of Natural Science, Northern Territory Museum of Arts and Sciences, PO Box 4646 Darwin, NT, 5794 Australia ABSTRACT Five species of Acarnus are now known for Australian waters. Acarnus thielei, A. innominatus, A. tortilis, and A. fernatus are redescribed from recent northern Australian material, three of Which represent new locality records for this region. Acarnus tenuis. from southern Australia is poorly known, and apparently the type-specimens no longer exist. A redescription of .4. /ernatus and A. topsenti based on type-material, and a synopsis of other species is given, including diagnoses from the literature, Twelve species are recognised. A cladistic analysis of Acarnus species supports the abandonment of a generic subdivision based mainly on the presence or absence of acanthostyles (subgenus Acanthacarnus), in fayour of a taxonomy based mainly on cladotylote morphology. Four species groups are recognized on that basis: fernatus, tortilis, souriej and innominatus groups. The zoogeography of species is discussed. INTRODUCTION The marine sponge genus Acarnus is easily diagnosed on account of the unique cladotylote megascleres, but specific identifications based on morphological characters are less easily made The present study redescribes material collected recently from northern Australian waters, including three new records for the region, and provides a synopsis from the literature of all species currently placed in the genus. The genus is cosmopolitan, with records from most oceans and seas, although species of the nominal subgenus Acanthacarnus have been recorded mainly from the northern hemisphere. Species are found predominantly in shallow-water, but one species from California has an extensive bathymetric distribution extending from the intertidal zone to a depth of 700 meires (de Laubenfels 1932), Previous records of the genus from Australia are restricted to 4. tenuis Dendy from Port Phillip, Victoria and A. ternutus Ridley from Torres Strait, northern Queensland, METHODS Methods of collection, preservation and preparation of specimens for light microscopy are described elsewhere (Hooper 1984), The following abbreviations are used in the text, and refer to specimen holding institutions: AM — Australian Museum, Sydney; BM — British Museum (Natural History), London; NMV — Museum of Victoria, Melbourne; NTM — 71 Northern Territory Museum, Darwin; QM — Queensland Museum, Brisbane. SYSTEMATICS Order POECILOSCLERIDA Topsent, 1928 Family MYXILLIDAE Topsent, 1928 Genus Acarnus Gray, 1867 Acarnus Gray, 1867, p. 544. [type-species; 4carnus innominatus Gray by monotypy]. Fonieia Gray, 1867, p. 544. [type-species; Fonteia dnomala Gray by monotypy. Gray (1867, p. 544) established this genus for a sponge figured by Bowerbank (1864, figs 73-76), and he attributed the specific name to Bowerbank also. No record of that name was found in any of Bowerbank’s monographs on British Sponges, and furthermore the figures referred to by Gray (viz. 73-76) are those of Acarnus innominatus (which has page prioriry)]. ? Trefortia Dezsd, 1880. [according to de Laubenfels (1936, p. 92); neither the genus nor the type-species were gazetted by the Zoological Record]. Acanthacarnus Levi, 1952, p. 54, [iype-species: Acanthacarnus souriey Levi by monotypy, The genus was placed into synonymy with Acarnus by Van Soest (1984), on the basis that the acanthostyles of Acanihucurnus represent. the retention of an ancestral character, which therefore cannot he used as a character to separate genera. Van Soest retains the taxon al the subgeneric level]. 72 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM DIAGNOSIS The most recent definition of Acarnus (Van Soest 1984, p. 60) is here expanded. Ectosomal skeleton with a tangential layer of amphitylotes, and with a more-or-less hispid surface produced by styles from ascending fibres and cladotylotes poking through the surface. Choanosomal skeleton with a renieroid reticulation of spongin fibres cored by styles, or with a reduced plumo-reticulate skeleton, or further reduced to a plumose-halichondroid skeleton in encrusting forms. Fibres composed of moderate to very light spongin, and echinated by smooth and/or spined cladotylotes, and sometimes by small acanthostyles. Light spongin with or without auxiliary styles strewn between fibres. Microscleres palmate isochelae and diverse forms of toxas. REMARKS The genus Acarnus was established by Gray (1867, p. 544) for Acarnus innominatus, based on figures of an unidentified sponge of Bowerbank (1864). These figures were also used to erect Fonteia anomala Gray (1867, p. 544), which becomes nomina nuda. Originally included with the Tethyadae by Gray (1867) on the basis that cladotylotes were related to tetraxonid spicules, Ridley (1884) placed the genus in the family Ectyonidae, because he considered that the cladotylotes of Acarnus resemble acanthostyles of Clathria Schmidt and Echinodictyum Ridley. Various minor reorganizations occurred in the taxonomic placement of Acarnus, such as with the old family Desmacidonidae, subfamily Ectyoninae (e.g. Dendy 1905; Hentschel 1912), but Thiele (1903) adopted Topsent’s (1894) system of classification in placing the genus with the family Poeciloscleridae, later to become the order Poecilosclerida. Several more recent schemes have been proposed for the placement of Acarnus. (1) Dendy (1922) established the section Acarneae for this genus as distinct from his subdivisions Clathreae and Myxilleae, to include species having echinating cladotylotes (which he suggested were merely modified acanthostyles), ectosomal amphitylotes, palmate isochelae and toxas., In his opinion, Acarnus did not fit with either the Myxilleae (which have arcuate isochelae), or the Clathreae (which have monactinal ectosomal megascleres), Topsent (1928) raised Dendy’s groups to family level, and several other authors have since used that system (de Laubenfels 1932; Lévi 1952, 1963; Sara 1960; Ruetzler 1965). Boury-Esnault (1971, 1973) placed Acarnus in the Acarnidae also, but attributed the family to de Laubenfels (1936). The family Acarniidae de Laubenfels was erected for Gray’s genus Acarnia, and several other small or poorly known genera (de Laubenfels 1936, p. 79), and is characterized by the presence of spiny megascleres only, which may be entirely diactinal, or a combination of diactinal and monactinal. Acarniidae de Laubenfels is neither a valid taxon (containing some freshwater Spongillidae together with marine axinellids) nor closely related to Acarnidae Topsent. (2) Burton (1959) placed Acarnus with genera such as Clathria, Plocamilla Topsent, and Echinodictyum in a subfamily Clathriinae. Lévi (1973) and Vacelet e7 a/. (1976) follow this system, and include the genus with the Family Clathriidae Hentschel (= Microcionidae Carter) on the basis that the microsclere complement of Acarnus, and the acanthostyles of Acanthacarnus are similar to those of clathriid genera. (3) de Laubenfels (1936) included Acarnus with the family Tedaniidae Ridley and Dendy, placing emphasis on the presence of ectosomal diactinal megascleres, and he was followed by Tanita (1963), Hechtel (1965), Thomas (1970, 1973) and Hoshino (1981). De Laubenfels (1936) notes also that the Tedaniidae are closely related to the Myxillidae Hentschel, both of which have ectosomal diactinal megascleres, but he retains the families as separate. He suggests that the Tedaniidae have mainly smooth choanosomal megascleres and a higher degree of skeletal and fibre organization than the Myxillidae. (4) Bakus (1966) and Van Soest (1984) consider that the ectosomal characteristics are of greater systematic importance than the megasclere or microsclere complement at the familial level of classification, and accordingly adopt de Laubenfels (1935) scheme. Both authors place Acarnus with the family Myxillidae, which includes the Tedaniidae as a subfamily only (after Topsent 1928). In support of this scheme, Van Soest (1984) notes that apart from the ectosomal characters shown by Acarnus, the reticulate skeletal architecture is close to other myxillids such as Lissodendoryx Topsent. He suggests further that the presence of acanthostyles does not necessarily confer a close affinity between taxa which possess them, because they are probably an unstable taxonomic character, and moreover they occur (independently) in several other families also. The use of ectosomal characters in sponge ACARNUS FROM AUSTRALIA 73 taxonomy is consistent with the current differentiation of a large number of genera, particularly poecilosclerids, and even within the family Microcionidae (e.g. Clathria, Dendrocia and Rhaphidophlus). AUSTRALIAN SPECIES Acarnus thielei Lévi, 1958 (Figs 1-9, 40-43, Table 1) Acarnus thielei Lévi, 1958, p. 35, text-fig. 33. Thomas, 1970, p. 43-6, text-figs 3a-g, 4. Acarnus ternatus (in part): Thiele, 1903, pp. 960-61, fig. 27. Hentschel, 1912, pp. 372-73. MATERIAL EXAMINED NTM Z855, Z876: Channel Island, Middle Arm, Darwin, NT, 12°32.7’S, 130°52.5’E, 12-13 m depth, 20 August 1982, P. Alderslade, SCUBA. DESCRIPTION (2 specimens) SHAPE: Semi-vasiform to fan-shaped, 100-130 mm high, 110-200 mm wide (edge-to-edge), 3-20 mm thick. Basal attachment discoid, 45 mm in diameter, 10 mm thick. CoLour: Light yellow-brown alive (Munsell 2.5Y 8/4). A similar colour is maintained upon preservation. SurFACE DetTAILs: The external surface (exterior of ‘vase’) is roughened, with corrugations, ridges and _— semi-papillate projections, 4-10 mm high, pointed apically, usually bifurcate, occasionally rejoined (reticulated) and forming a more-or-less longitudinal array of raised ridges (appearing net- like). The entire external surface is optically hispid. The apical edge has a serrated appearance. The inner surface (interior of ‘vase’) is relatively optically smooth, with occasional folding, and bearing numerous oscula, 0.8-4.0 mm in diameter. Overall external appearance of these sponges is relatively thin but cavernous. EctosoMeE: Microscopically the surface is moderately hispid, with cladotylotes extending beyond the surface (with clads pointing outwards), and with styles from the ascending fibres poking through the surface (mainly on the apices of ridges and corrugations). Occasionally smaller cladotylotes appear on the ectosome, at right angles to the surface, but these are confined mainly to the choanosome, Lying on or just below the surface are amphitylotes, occurring in bundles or singly, sometimes absent from areas of the ectosome. Ectosomal spongin is moderate to light, slightly granular and containing numerous microscleres interdispersed with the amphitylotes. Ectosomal layer varies from 25 to 90 ym in thickness. CHOANOSOME: Skeletal architecture is clearly reticulate, consisting of ascending plumose multispicular tracts, ending blindly at the surface, and interconnected by a sub-renieroid reticulation of uni- or paucispicular tracts. Occasionally large multispicular tracts run parallel to the surface in some sections. Fibres are lightly invested with. spongin, but heavily cored by styles (2-10 spicule widths in major tracts, 1-4 spicule widths in minor tracts). The sub-renieroid reticulation forms ovoid chambers, 80-550 ym in diameter; containing abundant interfibril spongin, and heavily invested with microscleres, smaller cladotylotes and auxiliary (smaller, thinner) styles. The fibres are echinated by cladotylotes in moderate numbers, with their clads projecting into the chambers. The smaller category of cladotylote is more abundant within the choanosome than is the larger variety. MEGASCLERES: Principal styles — moderately long, thick, hastate, sharply pointed, with rounded bases. Styles are often slightly bent near the base, but sometimes straight. Dimensions (N=50): 407.1 um long (mean) (range 319-464 pm), 21.6 pm wide (14-30 ym). Auxiliary styles — moderately long, thin hastate to very faintly subtylote, slightly bent near the base, or straight. Dimensions (N = 50): 321.3 wm long (mean) (range 178-401 ym), 7.5 wm wide (2- 11 wm). Amphitylotes — moderately short, thin, straight, tylote ends rounded, slightly swollen, with microspined tips. Dimensions (N = 50): 250.1 pm long (mean) (range 194-313 ym), 4.4 wm wide (3-9 pm), Cladotylotes I — moderately long, thick, straight, mostly smooth shaft, occasionally with few large spines on shaft; tylote base rounded, swollen; 3 clads on apical end, Dimensions (N =50); 233.6 wm shaft length (mean) (range 85- 270 um), 9.5 wm shaft width (3-15 wm), 41.7 pm clad chord length (5-70 um), 47.9 wm wide at clad end (10-70 pm). Cladotylotes I] — small, thin, straight, moderately but consistently spined shaft; tylote bases rounded or obtuse, often bearing small spines (giving the appearance of double ended cladotylotes); 3 clads on apical end, occasionally 4. Dimensions (N=50); 86.3 pm shaft length (mean) (range 75-97 pm), 3.4 wm shaft width (2- 4 um), 3.3 um clad chord length (2-5 ym), 7.4 wm wide at clad end (4-11 ym). 74 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Fics 1-8: Acarnus thielei; 1. smooth cladotylotes (I); 2. spined cladotylotes (II); 3. principal style (inset: enlarged view of extremities); 4. auxiliary choanosomal style (inset: enlarged view of extremities); 5. ectosomal amphitylote; 6. toxas (I); 7. toxas (II), 8. isochelae. wr OL wr 00l Le) a i ¢* ) wr OL AS wrt OOL ) [a - — ACARNUS FROM AUSTRALIA 75 9 1000 um / al}, Fic. 9: Acarnus thielei, perpendicular section of peripheral skeleton. MICROSCLERES: Toxas I — relatively small and thick, generous central bend, tricurvate with reflexed tips. Dimensions (N = 50): 76.6 um chord length (mean) (range 33-151 ym), 4.9 ym wide at centre (1-9 um). Toxas II — small to very large, always thin, slightly bowed to almost straight (oxeote), tips not reflexed. Dimensions (N=50): 341.6 wm chord length (mean) (range 34-960 ym), 2.4 um wide at centre (0.5-7 um). Isochelae — small palmate. Dimensions (N = 50): 21.1 um long (mean) (range 18-25 ym). EcoLocy Both specimens were found on a rock reef which was covered completely by mud and sand, and in an area of high turbidity, with currents of up to 6 knots. There is some morphological variation between the two specimens described here. In particular, Z876 has a strikingly reticulated appearance due to the prominence of regular longitudinal striations on the surface (Fig. 41), whereas Z855 has an irregular raised surface (Fig. 40), and closely resembles Echinodictyum mesenterinum (Lamarck) in external appearance. Specimen Z876 has fewer echinating cladotylotes of either variety than does Z855. From the present observations and published records, it appears that A. thielei is a shallow-water species, with bathymetric distribution extending from the intertidal zone to 13 metres depth. TABLE 1. Comparison between published records of Acarnus thielei. All measurements are given in micrometres, and denoted as length x width. CHARACTER Lévi (1958) ; Thomas (1970) type-specimen Colour alive: orange orange digitate on broad base massive, volumous, irregular Shape: sub-renieroid reticulation renieroid reticulation Skeleton: Styles: 260-270 x 6 301-452 x 13-24 30-375 x? Toxas II: 84-584 x 3 Isochelae: 8-9 8-10 (scarse) Amphitylotes: 230x1 207-283 x 2-4 230x4 220-304 x ? 194-290 x 3-9 Cladotylotes I: 150x4 188-245 x 8-12 160x2 160-272 x? 85-270 x 3-15 (smooth) Cladotylotes II: | 90x2 75-96 x 3-4 90x? 95x? 75-97 x 2-4 (spined) Toxas I: 25-155 x8 72-176x? 33-151 x 1-9 AUTHOR Thiele (1903) | Hentschel (1912) Present study light yellow brown ? light brown ? bulky, cylindrical or plate-like fan-like to semi-vasiform sub-renieroid reticulation 350 15 300-384 x ? 178-464 x 2-30 125x? 658-948 x ? 34-960 x 0.5-7 Abulat, Red Palk Bay, Bay Sea of Bengal, Indian Ocean Locality: Darwin, Australia Ternate, Aru I., Arafura Banda Sea, Sea, Indonesia '™donesia 76 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM DISTRIBUTION This species is restricted to the Indian Ocean (Indo-Australian) region. Localities are: Darwin, Australia (present study), Aru Island and Ternate, Molluccas, Indonesia (Thiele 1903, Hentschel 1912), Palk Bay, Bay of Bengal, India (Thomas 1970), and Abulat, Red Sea (Lévi 1958). REMARKS This species is diagnosed as A. thielei in having 2 different forms of cladotylote megascleres, the larger (mostly) smooth, the smaller invariably spined, at least two distinct forms of toxas, in specific details of spicule measurements, and in overall habit. There are certain details of spicule dimensions found in the present material which differ from published records of A. thielei (Table 1). In particular, the Darwin specimens have a smaller category of style, here denoted as the auxiliary styles, which is mainly found outside the fibres. These are probably young forms of the larger, or principal styles, and both forms are combined and considered together in the following Tables. Acarnus thielei sensu lato has a broad range of isochelae sizes. Specimens from the western Indian Ocean (Lévi 1958; Thomas 1970) have small isochelae (8-10 xm long), whereas eastern Indian Ocean specimens (Thiele 1903; Hentschel 1912; present study) have larger isochelae (19-29 pm long). It is probable that this difference between the two populations is of little taxonomic significance, and indeed Lévi (1958, p. 36) in synonymizing Thiele’s (1903) and Hentschel’s (1912) specimens of A. ternatus with A, thielei considers that cladotylote morphology and size are more important diagnostic characters than the size of isochelae. Thomas (1970) notes that the smaller cladotylotes of the Indian specimen have smooth bases whereas those of the Darwin specimens are frequently spined, occasionally resembling double- ended cladotylotes. Acarnus thielei has close affinities with two other species, A. erithacus and A. innominatus in having both larger smooth and smaller spined varieties of cladotylotes. On that basis Lévi (1963) assigned all 3 species to his group III Acarnus. It is difficult to separate these 3 species by their spicule dimensions alone. All show considerable intraspecific variability and consequently overlap in their ranges of spicule measurements (Table 5). Generally, A. thielei may be differentiated from the other 2 species by its habit (massive, flabellate, plate-like or digitate, versus encrusting, sometimes massively encrusting, respectively). Acarnus erithacus has predominantly acanthose cladotylotes, which differentiates it from A. innominatus (see below) (Van Soest 1984). Acarnus innominatus Gray, 1867 (Figs 10-18, 44, Table 2) unidentified sponge, Bowerbank, 1864, pp. 23, 33, 122, 239, pl. 3, figs 73-76, pl. 18, fig. 292. Acarnus innominatus Gray, 1867, p. 544. Carter, 1871, pp. 269, 273-4. Arndt, 1927, pp. 133-53, pl. 3, fig. 5. de Laubenfels, 1936, pp. 92-93, pl. 12, fig. 2. Lévi, 1963, pp. 48-49, text-fig. 55, pl. 7G. Alcolado, 1976, p. 5, Randall and Hartman, 1968, pp. 218, 219, 223. Van Soest, 1984, pp. 61-3, text-fig. 22, pl. 5, figs 6-9. ? Fonteia anomala Gray, 1867, p. 544. Acarnus carteri Ridley, 1884, pp. 453-4 (footnote). MATERIAL EXAMINED NTM Z2234: Dudley Point Reef, East Point Fish Reserve, Darwin, NT, 12°25.0’S, 130°49.1’E, intertidal, 8 March 1985, J.N.A. Hooper. DESCRIPTION SHAPE: Thickly encrusting, sprawling across dead coral substrate, covering an area of approximately 45 cm’, Co.our: Bright orange-red alive (Munsell 5R 5/12), yellow-brown in ethanol (SYR 7/10). SurFAce Detais: Surface is of variable thickness, shaggy, with irregular papillose projections up to 3 mm high and 3 mm in diameter, which are optically hispid. Longitudinal grooves meander across the surface, often with a membraneous ectosomal covering, approximately 1.6 mm wide and of variable depth. Oscula are abundant, scattered, slightly raised above the surface, 1.1-3.4 mm in diameter, sometimes with a trace of silt around the margins of the lip. EctosoMe: Microscopically the surface is microconulose and hispid, with the clad-ends of the large cladotylotes extending beyond the surface. Few principal styles poke through the ectosome. The ectosome has a prominent but often confused tangential layer of amphitylotes lying mainly parallel with the surface, occasionally at right angles to it. Amphitylotes predominantly occur in bundles of up to 5 spicules abreast, sometimes lying singly. Ectosomal spongin is light, yellow-brown, granular and contains numerous microscleres, often arranged in tracts just below the surface. Small particles of detritus (silt, sand grains) are included in parts of the ectosome, but generally the area is clear of inorganic debris. Ectosomal layer varies from 15 to 40yum in thickness. ACARNUS FROM AUSTRALIA 13 ool 16 wnt 40 i 1 12 ( 17 — | 10 pm 15 14 Fics 10-17. Acarnus innominatus. 10. smooth cladotylotes (I); 11. spined cladotylotes (II); 12. choanosomal styles (inset: enlarged view of extremities); 13. ecotosomal amphitylote (inset: enlarged view of extremity); 14. thick toxas (I); 15. short, thin toxa (II); 16. long, thin toxa (III); 17. isochelae. 77 78 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Cnoanosome: Skeletal architecture consists of a confused renieroid reticulation of spicule tracts or single spicules. No spongin fibres are visible, but it is possible they are extremely light and cannal be differentiated from the abundant type B mesohyl spongin. Tracts containing 1-4 principal styles abreast are bound together by abundant, loose interfibril spongin at their nodes, and surrounded by relatively heavy deposits of type B spongin. Smooth (I) and spined (II) gladotylotes echinate tracts, particularly at the nodes. Choanosomal renieroid reticulation becomes semi-plumose in the subectosomal region, with single spicule tracts ascending lo the surface, ending blindly in microconules, and producing radiating tufts of cladotylotes protruding through the eclosome. Choanosomal spongin is mainly clear of detritus, and meandering tracts of granular spongin, collagenous spongin and microscleres form chambers and canals of variable size (range 70-150 wm in diameter). MEGASCLERES: Principal styles — moderately long, thick, mostly hastate, occasionally slightly fusiform or even subtylote, usually slightly curved near the basal end, sometimes straight; bases smooth. Dimensions (N=25): 391.5 pm long (mean) (range 267-453 pm), 16.8 pm wide (6- 21m). Amphitylotes — moderately short, thin, straight, tylote ends swollen, with tnierospined lips. Dimensions (N=25):2465,5um lone (mean) (range 247-283 um), 3.7um wide (3-4ym). Cladotylotes [| — moderately long, thick, straight shaft, always smooth; tylote ends with rounded or slightly asymmetrical bases; 3=4 cluds on apical end. Dimensions (N = 25): 258.94m shaft length (mean) (range 222-283nm), 11.0um shaft width (6-14ym), 41.Q4m clad chord length (18- 49uimn), 38.3 um wide at clad end (19-46y4m). Cladotylotes 1I— small, thin, straight, with lightly spined shafts and large spines) rounded or asymmetrical bases: 4 clads on apical end. Not conimon; rare ot absent in areas of very thitt encrustation. Dimensions (N=25): 99.6um shaft length (mean) (range 72-l41um), 3.94m shaft width (3-5um), 13.7um clad chord length (9- 22m), 14.3um wide at clad end (11-18um). MicroscLeres: Toxas | — relatively small, thick, generously rounded at centre, sometimes almost straight, with reflexed tips. Moderately common. Dimensions (N=25): 90,64m chord length (mean) (range 45-249um), 3.2um\ wide at centre (2~5um). Toxas If — small, thin, of similar morphology as previous category; possibly a developmental Pic, 1B: Acarnus inmominatus, transverse section of peripheral skeleton. stage of that category. Very common. Dimensions ({N=25): 39.74m chord length (mean) (range 21- 79um), 1.3um wide at centre (1-2m). Toxas Ul — long, moderately thick, mostly straight with small-angled central curvajure, and with reflexed tips, Moderately common. Dimensions (N=25); 430.34m chord length {mean) {range 192-586ym), 2.2m wide at centre (1,5-3 pm). lsochelae — very small, palmate. Abundant, Dimensions (N = 25): 8.6nm long (mean) (range 6- 10um). EcoLoay Found on the undersurface of a dead coral boulder, on an intertidal coral platform, close to the shoreline, and in an area of high sedimentation (mud, silt), Associaled with (growing next to) sponges (Rhaphidophius and Haliclona spp.), an encrusting coralline algae, and colonial ascidians (possibly Pycnoclavellu). Previous records of A, innominalus suggest that the species is probably restricted to dead corals, with 4 bathymetric distribution extending from the intertidal zone to 29 metres depth (de Laubenfels 1936; Lévi 1963; Van Soest 1984). DIsTRIBUTION The present record considerably extends the known distribution of A. innominatus. Further studies may show that the species is cosmopolitan, but current records indicate a patchy distribution: Gulf of Mexico and Caribbean Sea (Curacao, ACARNUS FROM AUSTRALIA 79 TABLE 2. Comparison between published records of Acarnus innominatus. All measurements are given in micrometres, and denoted as length x width. Cuba, Florida, West Indies) (Gray 1867; Carter 1871; Ridley 1884; Arndt 1927; de Laubenfels 1936; Alcolado 1976; Randall and Hartman 1968; Van Soest 1984), South Atlantic-Indian Oceans (Cape Town and Mossel Bay, South Africa) (Lévi 1963), and Arafura Sea, Indo-Pacific (Darwin, Northern Territory). REMARKS This specimen is easily placed in Levi’s group III Acarnus in having both smooth and spined cladotylotes, and on the basis of published descriptions the specimen is diagnosed as A. innominatus (refer to Table 2). The species is closest to A. erithacus, which has predominately acanthose cladotylotes, but which are rare in A. innominatus (Van Soest 1984). Records of A. erithacus show a large size range for all spicule categories, and on that basis alone the two species cannot be separated reliably. Details such as the AUTHOR CHARACTER i byi Carter Ridley deLaubenfels Lévi Van Soest Present study (1871) (1884) (1936) (1963) (1984) Colour alive: ? ? bright orange to | scarlet and red bright orange- red reddish red Shape: encrusting, | ? massive, massive thinly to thickly flat, amorphous, encrusting massively encrusting spiculous encrusting encrusting Skeleton: polyhedral |? ascending anastomosing | renieroid confused (renieroid) plumose, rarely | paucispicular | reticulation, renieroid anastomosing fibres plumose tracts | reticulation and semi-plumose tracts Styles: 340.3 x? present 280-300 x 12-13 | 175-340 x 6-20 | 340-459 x 11-22 | 267-453 x 6-21 Amphitylotes: |? 280 x 4.5 180 x2 130-230 x 3-4 | 217-262 x 2.5-4 | 247-283 x 3-4 Cladotylotes I: | 244.9x? present 200 x 6 180-230 x 8 217-294 x 7-12 | 222-283 x 6-14 (smooth) Cladotylotes II: | 95.3 x? absent? 80x2 85-90 x2 110-115 x3 72-141 x 3-5 (spined) not common not common T Toxas I: 70-80 x 3-5 | 57-158 x 2-4 45-249 x 2-5 Toxas II: 81.7x? 130 x 4.2 40-400 x 1-3 38-68 x? 21-79 x 1-2 Toxas III: present 200-402 x ? 192-586 x 1.5-3 Isochelae: 13.6 | 16-24 12-15 11 9-18 6-10 Locality: West Indies | West Indies | Tortugas, South Africa | Curacao Darwin Florida ere proportion of smooth and spined cladotylotes, and the form of the longer variety of toxa offer a tentative basis for differentiating these closely related species. Similarly, A. innominatus is difficult to distinguish from A. thielei on the sole basis of spicule size, and a tentative character used for the separation of those two species is growth form (see above). On that basis I have little hesitation in separating the Darwin specimens of A. innominatus and A. thielei, which have quite distinct gross morphologies. However, a study on the ecophenotypic variability of all three species (A. innominatus, A. erithacus, and A. thielei) may show them to be conspecific. Acarnus tortilis Topsent, 1892 (Figs 19-27, 45, Table 3) Acarnus tortilis Topsent, 1892, pp. 24-5. Topsent, 1897, p. 450. Topsent, 1904, p. 171, pl. 14, fig. 8. Dendy, 80 001 wit MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 19 100) pm nah 100 um 100 pm a 23 wrt QO{ 100 um 10 um 25 ae ne a> ae 26 a Fics 19-26: Acarnus tortilis. 19. spined cladotylotes (I); 20. spined cladotylotes (II); 21. principal choanosomal styles; 22. auxiliary choanosomal styles; 23. ectosomal amphitylote; 24. toxas (I); 25. toxas (II); 26. isochelae. 1916, pp. 130-31. Topsent, 1925, pp. 661-2. Topsent, 1929, pp. 19-20, text-figs 1-2. Topsent, 1934, p. 72. Topsent and Olivier, 1943, p. 2. Sara, 1960, p. 461. Ruetzler, 1965, p. 32. Boury-Esnault, 1971, p. 323. Vacelet et al., 1976, pp. 74-5, text-fig. 50. Desqueyroux-Faundez, 1981, p. 758, Table 2. MATERIAL EXAMINED QM GL706 (fragment NTM Z1538): Outer Barrier, East of Lizard Island, Northeast Queensland, 14°42.0’S, 145°45.0’E, 10 m depth, September 1979, Queensland Fisheries Service, trawl. DESCRIPTION SHAPE: Flat, thick, sprawling, plate-like encrustation; fragmented; rounded smooth margins, 43 x 75 mm, approximately 4mm thick. CoLour: Grey-brown in ethanol (Munsell 7.5YR 6/2). ACARNUS FROM AUSTRALIA 8) SurkfACE Deraics: Surface is rough, where intact, and mostly obscured by detritus incorporated into sponge. The texture is easily crumbled in the preserved state. EctosomMe: Microscopically the surface is rough, slightly hispid due to the presence of large cladotylotes projecting outWards, and mainly encrusted with detritus. Amphitylotes are found in loose bundles lying parallel to the surface, lying on or just below the ectosome and in no apparent order, occuring haphazardly throughout the choanosome also. Ectosomal spongin is light brown, non-fibrous, granular, and mostly encrusted with debris, CHOANOSOME: Skeletal architecture is loosely reticulate, verging on halichondroid due to the reduced, encrusting habit of the sponge. The distinctive feature of the choanosome is the presence of large quantities of detritus incorporated into the skeleton. The size of inorganic particles varies considerably, and particles are bonded together by light spongin. Where visible, spongin fibres are light, forming a loose reticulation containing ovoid chambers, 100- 180m in diameter, Spongin fibres are 50-804m thick, clearly lamellated, yellow-beige in colour, and cored with principal styles in paucispicular tracts, lying 1-4 spicules abreast. Spongin between the fibres is light, slightly granular, abundant in places, and contains microscleres and smaller (auxiliary) styles. Isochelac are found scattered throughout the choanosome, in association with interfibril spongin, but oceur in extremely heavy concentrations in places, particularly lying just below the ectosome. Spongin fibres are echinated by cladotylotes of both varieties. Cladotylotes are seen in interfibril spongin, and adhering to the surface of detrital particles also. MEGASCLERES: Principal styles — nboderately long and thin, mostly straight or very shghtly curved near the apical end, hastate, sharply pointed, with evenly rounded bases, Bases are smooth or have numerous microspines on basal extremities. Dimensions (N= 25): 293.8um long (mnean) (range 214-334um), 114m wide (9- \6um), Auxiliary styles — moderately long, thin, hastate, sharply pointed, with evenly rounded smooth bases. Dimensions (N = 25); 248.64m long (mean) (range 215-279ym), 5.2«m wide (3-7um), Amphitylotes — long, thin straight, slightly swollen tylote ends, with numerous microspines covering eXtremities, or occasionally smooth, Dimensions (N = 25); 288.4m long (mean) (range 222-363 um), 5.3m wide (4-7ym), Cladotylores | — moderately small, thin with straight shafts. Shaft is invariably echinated by moderately large spines (3-!Oum in length), Clads occur on one or both ends. Principal clads are variable in size and 4 in number, The basal end has small clads (1-4ym long if present), or has a rounded bulbous smooth tylote base. Dimensions (N=25): 175.9am shaft length (mean) (range 151- 212m). 6.2um shatt width (4-8m), 16.0um clad chord length (12-224m), 18.2um wide at clad end (12-22um), Cladotylotes II — straight, short, thin, mostly heavily echinated with small spines along the shaft, Spines 1-3um long. Clads occur on | or both ends, and are similar in morphology to those of the larger variety. Main clads are variable in length, and 4 in number, Dimensions (N = 25): 80.7um shaft length (mean) (range 58-J094m), 3.8m shaft width (3-5um), 8.2um clad chord length (4- J2um), 11,2am wide at clad end (8-1 7m). MicroscLeres: Toxas [| — relatively thick, generously curved, tricurvate, with feflexed tips: moderately uncommon, Dimensions (N= 25); 68,4um chord length (mean) (range 44-110.m), 2.4um wide at centre (J-4nm), Toxas Il — thin, long, almost oxeote or only slightly curved, with a slight central bend; lips nol reflexed. Very rare. Dimensions (N= 5): 162.54m Fig, 27: Aaresus (artilis, perpendicular section through choanosnme. D: Deposits of heavy Joose spongin, cored by microscleres; F; foreign particles incorporated into skeleiun, 82 chord length (mean) (range 150-265um), 1.5um wide at centre (1-2um). Isochelae — small, palmate, very abundant. Dimensions (N = 25): 11.1um long (mean) (range 7-13um). EcOoLoGy This specimen was apparently associated with a dead coral and sand substrate. From published records and present observations, the bathymetric distribution of A. fortilis extends from the intertidal zone to 54 metres depth. DISTRIBUTION Acarnus tortilis is a widely distributed, almost cosmopolitan species, recorded from the North Atlantic and Indian Oceans (Topsent 1904, 1929; Vacelet et al. 1976), Mediterranean, Adriatic, Arabian, Banda, Biban and Oman Seas (Boury- Esnault 1971; Dendy 1916; Ruetzler 1965; Sara 1960; Topsent 1892, 1897, 1925, 1929, 1934; Topsent and Olivier 1943). The specimen described MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM above is the first record for the species in the Pacific Ocean. REMARKS This species is easily diagnosed as A. fortilis in having two varieties of cladotylotes, both of which have profusely spined shafts, an encrusting habit incorporating foreign particles into the skeleton, and in specific details of spicule dimensions (Table 3). Lévi (1963) placed A. tortilis in his group II Acarnus on the basis of having spined cladotylotes only. Acarnus tortilis is closest to A. topsenti in this respect, and differs from that species mainly by its habit (encrusting versus flabellate-digitate, respectively), in having two categories of cladotylotes, and by the specific dimensions of spicules (Table 4). The stability of those diagnostic characters is presently unknown, particularly with regard to known intraspecific geographic variation in spicule dimensions, with some spicule categories overlapping between the species (Table 5). TABLE 3. Comparison between published records of Acarnus tortilis. All measurements are given in micrometres, and denoted as length x width. CHARACTER | Topsent (1892) type-specimen Topsent (1904) Colour alive: brown blackish AUTHOR Vacelet et al. Topsent (1925) (1976) Present Study reddish red (grey-brown in ethanaol) Shape: thinly encrusting encrusting encrusting encrusting encrusting a Skeleton: loosely ? ? ? loosely reticulate reticulate to halichondroid =——————7 Styles: 500 x 10 400-450 x 8-10 | 515-550? 300-450 x 5-10 214-334 x 3-16 Amphitylotes: 400 x ? 370-440 x 4-5 307-360 x ? 250-350 x 3.5-6 | 222-363 x 4-7 Cladotylotes I: | 151-212 x 4-8 (spined) up to 220x 5 125-170 x 4-5 75-160 x? 65-225 x 2.5-5 Cladotylotes II: 58-109 x 3-5 (spined) (SS ee eee ee Toxas I: present 100x 4 130x? 60-80 x 4-5 44-110 x 1-4 Toxas II: present 220 1 210x? 15-160 x? 150-265 x 1-2 Isochelae: 15 15 22 8-10 7-13 SS ee { Locality: Cape Abeille, Terceira I., Nisida, Gulf Tuléar, East of Lizard I., Gulf of Lyon Azores, North of Naples, Mozambique GBR, NE Mediterranean Atlantic Mediterranean | Channel, Indian | Queensland Ocean el ee | ee ee | ACARNUS FROM AUSTRALIA 83 Another character which differentiates these allied species is the degree of development of the fibrous skeleton. Acernus lopsenti has strongly developed horny fibres, whereas those of A. rortilis are reduced and are invested with light spongin only. The taxonomic value and stability of that character remains lo be determined, as itis possible that the reduction of horny fibres in A. torrilis is related ta its reduction in growth form. As an indication of their close affinities, and supporting a possible combination of the two species, is the fact that the bases of the principal styles in both species frequently have a light cOvermg of microspines. This character is consistent throughout the entire geographic range uf 4, sortilis (Topsent 1892, 1897, 1904, 1925; Dendy 1916: Vacelet ef a/. 1976; present study), and Dendy (1922) records it for A. topsenti also. No other species of Acarnus (Acarnus) have this characteristic, although it is present in Acermus (Aconthacarnus) species. tt is clear chat the relationship between A, rortilis and A. fopsent? is closely analogous to that of A. ielgi and A. innominatus, as discussed above, Unfortunately rhe type-specimen of A. fortilis is presently unavailable [or re-examination, requiring a visit to the Paris Museum (Levi pers. comm.), Consequenily it is nol possible to make a firm decision on whether or not the two species are conspecific. Vacelet et al. (1976) recommended that the two specics should be maintained as separate, and his decision is supported here on a tentative basis through comparison between the Queensland specimen of A, fertilis and the syntype of A. fopsenti (see below), De Laubenfels (1927) and Bakus (1966) suggest that A. erithacus is closely related to 4. rortilis in skeletal architecture, but this affinity may be a result of a reduced skeletal architecture of both species, owing to their encrusting habits. Acarnus erlthacus is casily differentiated fram 4. tortilis by the presence al a larger category of smooth cladotylote megasclere, and in having a heavier fibrous skeleton, Acarnus toxeatus should be included in Lévi’s (1963) group Il Acarnyus also, in having spined sladotylotes only, but differs from A, fortilis in having larger spicules of most categories (except isochelae), and chree distinct calegories of toxas (Table 5). Acarnus terpatus Ridley, 1884 (Figs 28-36, 46-48, Table 4) Acarnus ternatus Ridley, (BB4, pp. 453, 615, pl. 42, figs bb’. Ridley and Dendy, 1887, , 149, Dendy, 1905, p. 177, pl. 8 fig, 4, Levi, 1958, p, 35, text-fig. 32. Bruce, 1976, p. 128. nun Acarnus ternatus: Thiele, 1903, pp. 960-61, fig. 27. Hentschel, 1912, pp. 372-3, Acarnus wolffgangi Keller, 1889, pp. 399-400, pl. 24, figs 53-54. Kieschnick, 1896, p. $33. Thiele, 1903, pp. 960-61, fig. 26. MATERIAL EXAMINED Syntype: BM 1882.2.23.248: West Island, Torres Strait, North Queensland, 10°22'S, 142°04E, 14 mn depth, ? April-Qctober, 1881. H.M.S. ‘Alert’, dredge. OTHER MATERIAL! OM GL2773 (fragment NTM Z1584), OM GL2777 (fragment NTM Z1590): 20 kilometres Northeast of Green Island, off Cairns, Great Barrier Reef, northeast Queensland, 16°43.0'S, 146°03,0'E, 80 m depth, 21 February 1979, L. Cannon and B, Goeden (sin. W5 Cairns preliminary inter-reef survey), dredge. OM GL715 (fragment NTM Z1532): Hall-Thompson Reet, East of Innisfail, Great Barrier Reef. Northeast Queensland, 17°34.0'S, 146°27,5°E, 66 m depth, date of collection unknown, Queensland Fisheries Service, dredge or trawl REDESCRIPTION OF TYPE-SPECIMEN DeTsILs OF EXTERNAL, MORPHOLOGY: refer to Ridley (1884, p. 453). Ectosome: The ectosomal region has a multispicular, sometimes confused, but mastly tangential layer of amphitylotes lying on or just below the surface, The surface is raised into conules in places, and is lightly hispid from the tips of cladotylotes and occasionally styles poking through the ectosome. CHoanosomfi: The skeletal architecture is a heavy renieroid to sub-renieroid reticulation of thick fibres (35-120 um in diameter), cored by uni- to multi-spicular tracts which do not occupy the entire diameter of fibres.. Major tracts appear to run longitudinally, cored by 5-10 spicules abreast, and are interconnected by smaller ascending tracts, containing 1-5 spicules abreast. There is only slight plumose divergence of fibres in the subectosomal region, and fibres are predominantly anastomosing. Chambers formed by the fibre reticulation are subrectangular to ovoid, 112-435 pm in diameter. Cladotylotes are not abundant, variable in size, and echinate fibres at right angles to spicule tracts. The mesohyl matrix has heavy deposits of debris scattered between the fibres, but there are also many large cavernous chambers farmed by fibre anastomoses clear of debris and spicules. Loose, granular spongin between the fibres is mostly paucispicular, Meaasc_Leres (N=25): Principal styles — robust, hastate, slightly curved at the centre, entirely smooth shafted, and with evenly rounded bases having Little or no tylote swelling; tips taper 84 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM -|28 =| |/30|| 2) 34 U ae 330 3 ee a oe Fics 28-34: Acarnus ternatus. 28. smooth and occasionally-spined cladotylotes (I); 29. principal choanosomal style (inset: enlarged view of extremities); 30. auxiliary choanosomal style (inset: enlarged view of extremities); 31. ectosomal amphitylote (inset: enlarged view of spined and smooth ends); 32. toxas (I); 33. toxas (II): 34. isochelae. ACARNUS FROM AUSTRALIA 85 to sharp points, or are sometimes blunt or rounded. 325.8 pm long (mean) (range 265-419 nm), 11.8 um wide (7-14 pm). Auxiliary styles — not abundant; of thinner and shorter dimensions than the previous category, and probably young forms of those spicules. 201.4 pm long (mean) (range 128-285 um), 2.4 zm wide (2-4 pm). Amphitylotes — thin, moderately long, straight, with only slightly tylote bases, and with very few or no microspines on apices. 248.4 4m long (mean) (range 224-268 ym), 3,5 wm wide (3-4,5 «m). Cladotylotes — variable in size, and not abundant; straight or slightly curved shaft, mostly smooth, but some spicules have occasional, isolated spines on the shaft; bases are prominently tylote, mostly smooth and evenly rounded, or sometimes with apical spines or tuberculate; 3 clads on apical end, which are of variable length; the apex of the clad end is mostly smooth and evenly rounded. 182.2 um shaft length (mean) (range 63-233 pm), 7.0 zm shaft width (2-11 «m), 21.8 wm clad chord Jength (2-34 pm), 23,7 nm wide at clad end (5-36 um). Microsc_Leres (N=25): Toxas | — short to moderately long, variable in thickness, mostly generously curved at the centre, and reflexed at the tips. 112.9 um long (mean) (range 12-233 ym). 3,5 wm wide (0.8-6 pm). Toxas I] — short to very long, moderately thin, only slightly curved at the centre, and only slightly reflexed, sometimes oxeote. 262.2 um long (mean) (range 19-708 pm), 2.0 wm wide (0,5-5 jm). Isochelae — palmate, variable in size. 16.4 wm long (mean) (range 8-22ym). DESCRIPTION OF OTHER SPECIMENS Shape; plate-like, thickly flabellate, probably semi-vasiform, fragmented, basal attachment not collected, 50-110 mm wide edge-to-edge, 55-83 mm high, 3.5-5 mm thick. One smaller atypical specimen (QM GL715) has solid tubulo-digitate projections arising fram a semi-encrusting, bulbous base, and is growing on a bivalve shell and pebbles. Base 35 mm wide, 54 mm high at highest point; digits short, twisted, 10-18 mm high, 4-13 mm in diameter, Corour: light brown (Munsell 2.5Y 8/4) to brown-grey in ethanol (1OR 6/2). Surface Detaits: External surface of sponge (exterior of ‘vase’ or ‘plate’) is roughened, with numerous surface projections, which are mostly low and rounded, extending not more than 20 mm from the sponge surface, and forming irregular wrt 9004 00S unt Pics 35-36; Acarnus ternatus. 35. perpendicular section of peripheral skeleton; 36. enlarged view of choanosomal fibres. meandering tracts. The internal surface (interior of ‘vase’ or ‘plate’) is optically smooth, and contains many oscula of 1-6 mm in diameter. The entire surface is optically hispid, and the overall flabellate/vasiform habit resembles closely that of Acarnus thielei from Darwin. The smaller specimen has a dusty appearance due to sand debris embedded in the ectosome. Ectosome; The ecotosome is mostly even microscopically, with few conules formed by fibre endings from the choanosomal skeleton poking through the surface, and with the tips of styles rendering the surface hispid. Few cladotylotes were observed poking through the ectosome. The ectosome has a thin tangential layer of amphitylotes lying on or just below the surface. The ectosome also has a thin layer of detritus 86 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM TABLE 4. Comparison between published records of Acarnus ternatus. All measurements are given in micrometres, and denoted as length x width. CHARACTER Colour alive: reddish-brown | matt blue (preserved) massive, rounded rough exterior surface clathrous, rounded, anastomosing tubes Skeleton: heavy renieroid to sub- renieroid reticulation reticulate, strongly developed fibres Amphitylotes: | 224-268 x 3-4.5 | approx. 220 x? Cladotylotes I: | 63-233 x 2-11 (smooth) 200-220 x 10 12-233 x 0.8-6 19-708 x 0.5-5 Toxas I: to 6! Toxas II: laa Isochelae: Locality: Torres Strait, Sudan, Red Amirante Is.) Ridley (1884)* | i ener (1889) | Thiele (1903) | Dendy (1905) type-specimen 275 x 12 60-250 x ? 900 x ? Ternate, Australia. Sea Banda Sea, Manaar, Sea Reef, (Also Indonesia Indian Queensland ?Bombay, Ocean India, and 4 AUTHOR Lévi (1958) | Present Study brown (dry) | red light brown- grey brown (preserved) thickly massive flabellate- flabellate, irregular, vasiform to lobed folded tubulo-digitate margins, to surface semi- irregularly branched encrusting rough surface renieroid to sub-renieroid reticulation strongly reticulate developed fibres 275-310 x6 139-281 x 2-14 220 x 3.5 240 x 1.5 200-280 x 2-5 210 x 12 180-200 x 5 85-205 x 2-6 35-130 x 1-3 375-600 x ? up to 152 x8 740 x4 41-266 x 1-6 80-770 x 0.5-5 Gulf of Abulat, Red | Great Barrier *Morphology cited by Ridley (1884, p. 453) as close to A. innominatus. Values given here are from the redescription of the syntype B.M. 1882.2.23.248. overlaying the skeleton, consisting of non-contort spined spiraster-like spicules, large quantities of sand and shell debris. CHOANOSOME: The overall skeletal architecture is a renieroid to sub-renieroid reticulation of relatively heavy, pale yellow spongin fibres, 20- 130 wm in diameter, moderately cored by bi- or multispicular tracts of principal styles. Major spicule tracts run longitudinally through sections, are cored with 3-8 spicules abreast, and are connected by vertical, ascending spicule-spongin tracts, with 1-3 spicules abreast. The reticulation in deeper parts of the choanosome is regular, renieroid, whereas closer to the surface the ascending (secondary) spicule tracts become plumose. The fibre reticulation forms ovoid to subrectangular chambers, 120-450 wm in diameter. Fibres are echinated by cladotylotes of 1 variety only, which vary in abundance between specimens (few in larger specimens, common in the smaller specimen). Spongin between the fibres is scarce, and where present, is cored with auxiliary styles and microscleres. Amphitylotes also occur in loose bundles in the choanosome, lying mainly at right angles to the surface. Moderate quantities of detritus, mostly sand grains occur in the choanosome also, particularly in the smaller specimen, ACARNUS FROM AUSTRALIA 87 MEGASCLERES: Principal styles — moderately stout, straight or slightly curved at midsection, hastate, tapering to a sharp point; smooth rounded base with very little or no tylote swelling. Dimensions (N = 75): 248.2 um long (mean) (range 203-281 um), 10.3 wm wide (mean) (7-14 pm). Auxiliary styles — abundant, relatively short, thin, hastate, tapering to a sharp point, smooth rounded base, some slightly subtylote. Dimensions (N=75): 218.1 wm long (mean) (range 139-252 pm), 4.9 ~m wide (2-7 um). Amphitylotes — moderately long, thin, straight, evenly rounded (only slightly swollen) tylote ends; few microspines on apical ends, occasionally smooth. Dimensions (N=75): 235.2 um long (mean) (range 200-280 ym), 3.6 um wide (2-5 um). Cladotylotes I — relatively short, thin, straight, mostly with smooth shafts, some with occasional (isolated) spines along stem (1-4 um long); 3 clads, occasionally 4 on the apex; clads recurved or only slightly curved, variable in length, and sometimes bearing 1 or more spines on apex. Bases tylote, smooth, sometimes tuberculate or with small clads. Dimensions (N = 100): 133.3 um shaft length (mean) (range 85-205 pm), 4.5 wm shaft width (2- 6 um), 12.1 wm clad chord length (4-22 wm), 15.4 pm wide at clad end (5-23 ym). MICROSCLERES: Toxas I — short, relatively thick, tricurvate, generously curved at midsection and with reflexed tips. Dimensions (N = 75): 79.3 um chord length (mean) (range 41-266 ym), 2.9 um wide at centre (1-6 um). Toxas II — long, thin, only slightly curved at midsection, some entirely oxeote, tips not reflexed. Dimensions (N=75): 359.7 um chord length (mean) (range 80-770 um), 2.5 wm wide at centre (0.5-5 pm). Isochelae — palmate. Dimensions (N= 100): 17.0 um long (mean) (range 9-22 ym). EcoLoGy The present specimens were collected from a sand-gravel substrate. Previous records indicate that A. fernatus is generally found associated with sand and coral (Ridley 1884; Ridley and Dendy 1887; Keller 1889). The bathymetric distribution of this species extends from the intertidal zone (Lévi 1958) to a maximum depth of 80 metres (present study). DISTRIBUTION Acarnus ternatus appears to be widespread throughout the Indo-Pacific region, extending from the Red Sea (Keller 1889; Lévi 1958), Amirante Islands (Ridley 1884) and Kenya (Bruce 1976), to India and Sri Lanka (Ridley 1884; Dendy 1905), Indonesia and northeastern Australia (Ridley 1884; Kieschnick 1896; Thiele 1903; present study), to Tahiti (Ridley and Dendy 1887). REMARKS The specimens from Queensland are identified as Acarnus ternatus on the basis of having smooth cladotylotes of one category only. There is a close correspondence between that material and Ridley’s syntype. Although several cladotylotes were observed with occasional scattered or single large spines on the shaft, this character was certainly unusual, and the majority of these spicules had smooth shafts. That condition was observed in the syntype also, although not recorded by Ridley (1884). Cladotylotes of the Queensland specimens were also unusual in sometimes having one or more small spines on the apex of clads, resembling multiple-clad spicules, and many having small clads only. These atypical characters were most evident in the smaller specimen (QM GL715), which also differed from the larger examples in shape (Fig. 47) (tubulo-digitate on a semi- encrusting base, versus flabellate semi-vasiform respectively), in having larger quantities of detritus on the ectosome and in the choanosome, and in the relative abundance of cladotylotes. The peculiar characteristics of the cladotylotes, the incorporation of numerous foreign particles into the skeleton and the atypical habit of specimen QM GL715 is probably of small consequence only, and on the basis of comparison with the type- specimen does not justify the separation of these 2 forms into distinct taxa. The details of skeletal architecture and fibre development, and the dimensions of spicules in all 3 specimens from the Great Barrier Reef correspond with details of the type-specimen and other records of A. fernatus within a reasonable range of variation (Table 4). In having only one category of cladotylote, which is predominantly unspined, A. ternatus is placed in Lévi’s (1963) group I Acarnus, to which may be added A. tenuis (see below). Acarnus tenuis Dendy, 1896 (Table 5) Acarnus tenuis Dendy, 1896, pp. 50-51. MATERIAL EXAMINED NMV G2456 (Dendy’s RN 974), G2457 (RN 991): vicinity of Port Phillip Heads, Melbourne, Victoria, 38°20’S, 144°42’E; date of collection unknown, J.B. Wilson, dredge, (NMV G2456, encrusting on Plumohalichondria arenacea; G2457, encrusting on MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 88 BOLIOUY YION qsvog o1y19ed L-TX SP9-0b yeys pourds L-€ X 781-08 yeys yIOoWS 9E-8 X TLb-O8T BIIOIOIA ‘did Hod quasqe quasqe quasqe yeys yOOUIS 7X O9T 8-€ X PEP-OLT quasqe aseq yOOWS €b-L X 06L-077 d1B[NINI9I A[ISOO] sunsnioua 98ZU01q O} pol sjayuaqne yap snovy)isa “Y juasqe ¢ quasqe 7X 081 aieynonel AJasoo] sunsnious AqUIYy (Mo]]aA aed) Apusg sinuaj ‘yy JO S9OINOS IO} 1X9} 0} JaJay “suUOIsUSUTIP aNdIds Jo sasueI dWI11xe SUIMOYS oyloed-Opuy s-$°0 X 006-61 8-8°0 X 997-71 quasqe yeys yOoUIS 71-7 X SLZ-€9 ue200 UPIPU] UI91SAM quasqe p-1 X 161-7 yeys pourds 8-€ X L6O-ES quasqe sueadQ uRIpU] pur o1yloed ‘onuepy 7-1 X $97-ST S-1 XOEI-bh yeys pourds b-S°T X 601-85 yeys pourds S-€ X STZ-IST uelyensny -OpU] 0} Uka9Q UeIPU] WI91S9 A, 67-8 L-$'0 X 096-PE 6-1 X 9LI-SZ yeys pourds b-7 X L6-SL yeys yloours SI-@ X TL7-S8 S-S' 1 X087-Z6I quasqe aseq yOOUIS S@-7 X OS P-87I uone[nonel plosatuel-qns 0} plosoruas aseq Sulsni9ue-1Was uo poyouerig 0} 21e]]2qe]J papuno “QAISSBUL S°€-7 X Z9Z-SOT qjuasqe saseq poutds pue yjoous TI-€ X L8Z—-POT L-G€ X OPb-77T quasqe saseq poulds pure yoous 9I-€ X OSS-FIT ayepnonas ayeynonel-ournyd AJaso0} areyfeqeyy 0} 91e113Ip sunsnsoua UMOIQ 0} pol ‘an[q (Aoi3 [[Np) appre Apusg SNIDULA] “YW quasdo] *y SaloddS paz 01 Yystyoryq quasdo |, SUN4O1 OV :AVTBIOT TORTAYOOST 2] SBxO.L 2] SPXOL, ‘]] Sa10;AOpR[D 2] SaJO[AIOpR[D 6-1 X pOE-P61 ssajopAnydury quasqe :so]AlsoyUROYy aseq yOoUIS O€-7 X p9P-BLI :Sa]AIS plosaruai-qns 0} prlosatuar 2U0123[24S UWLIOJISBA /2 Ve] [OUIe] 0] 918113 Ip “‘QAISSBUL sodeys asuvi0 :(pearasoid) 0} UMOIQ 1431] /2Ae INOJOD ——— 9T a1 “V YALOVAVHO Ea || “‘WIpPIM X YIBUET se palouap puUe ‘sa@WIOIONU UI UDAIZ Ie SJUDWOINSvOUL [[Y “WONPULIOJUT ‘snuswoy Jo satoads [ye Jo sp10da1 payst{qnd usemjoq uostIedWIOD *¢ ATAVL 89 ACARNUS FROM AUSTRALIA onuepy yinog ‘TIze1g JO 1seOoD ueder jo Bag ‘e[nsuIusg O1ON aroydstwiepy UIOYIION ‘peoidsopiy, C61 ST X 60€-OE7 quasqe b-7 X OF E-SP €-S' TX pOC-EPT “9 9-€ X POI-8L “2 7X OLT-OL quasqe quesqe quasqe qeys pourds 9-S'b X 8IT-OIT yeys pourds 9-S X 06T-0ET p-€ X ELP-OSE aseq pourds S-S°T X OZE-O8T 9-F X O€T-08 aseq poutds 6-€ X €TZ-08 OI-8 x OvE-097 9}e[NdTe1 t -oun|d sunsnious SSBUI [BAO (Qajora deep) yneusq-AInog 1upaopps “py (UMOIQ-pel) equey, 4aua} *W yeys poutds 9-7 X 9ET-PS L-@X LSE-611 S-T X SPI-9 aseq poutds OI-€ X I8€-OLT plospuoyorey ‘gsounyd sutjsnious Ayuryy pel 0} asuelo 1Y4S1Iq lag] 1al{nos “VW BIS BUIYD Ise ‘ueder ‘nysniy €-@ X OIZ-OET 7-1 X OLT-09 yeys pourds 9-7 X OLT-08 qeys pourds L-€ X O8I-OF1 9-€ X OTE-S07 S-€ X $6-08 aseq pourds onuepy yinos ‘jIze1g Jo ise0D vI-Zl ZX SP6-O0S °4 elyelsny YON “BOLIyV YINOS “SoIpuy ISOM, 7-9 :AV][BIO'T OB[AYOOS] &X S9T-8IZ “B €-S° 1 X 98S-76l *]] SWxoL & X SL-8T S-T X 6h2-17 :] SBxXOL, qyeys qyeus pourds AyIAvay poutds ‘ares € xX T9T-9S S-TX IpI-@L ‘TI SaqopAJopeyD poutds Apysty qeys yoous 6-€ X S6E-OST vI-9 X $6Z-08T “J Sa10]AIOPR[D 6-€ X TLP-EIT quasqe aseq yOoWS €°9-Z X E87-OET quasqe aseq YyJoours soq0]Alydury isafAJsoyIURIy 71-9 X POE-S6T 9I-ZI X L7L-8LE 2-9 X 6SP-SLI :S9]A1S uone[nonel uonjenonyes Ie[nsoLi é plossruar 20013]94S sunsnisue ATUTYI sunsnious sursni9ue rodeys :(poarasaid) asuvl0-pol uooleul pol 0] o3ue10 /eate INOJOD oulysoy, yneusq-Ainog Kein SnjojAjopvjjig *y ‘(WOD) § ATAVL snjpaxo] ‘WY snjpuluouul "vy SdHIOddS YALOVAVHO 90 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Tedania digitata), These specimens were noted as syntypes by Ayling ef a/. (1982) (see below). Missing from collection; RN 1072, encrusting on Clathria ivpica (Ayling ef al, 1982, p. 106; personal observation), EBco.ocy Unknown, DisTRIBUTION This species has been recorded only once, fram Port Phillip Bay, Vicroria- REMARKS Extensive examinatian of the two specimens held at the Museum of Victoria failed ca discover any trace of the encrusiing type specimens of Acarnus lenuis, Dendy. (1896) notes that 4. renuis occurs as a small, thin, pale yellow crust on the surface of three sponges. Crusts do exist in quite extensive patches on the surface of G2456 and 2457 (Crell@ incrustans and Tedania digitata, respectively), but in all cases these encrustations consist of usual ectosomal spicules for these species (viz, oxeas, acanthoxeas and arcuate isochelae, and erect amphitylotes, respectively), It is apparent therefore that ihe type-specimens of A. ienwis no longer exist, at the Museum of Victoria. Ayling ef al, (1982) note that the British Museum (Natural History) holds three microscope slide preparations of each syntype (1902:10:18:62, 323, 375). Until these spicule mounts are re-examined. a definition of A, tenuis can be drawn from Dendy's (1896) description only (Table 5), This species may be differentiated from other Acarnus in having no microscleres, no fibres, a very loose irregular reticulation of styles or subtylostyles (189 x 2 pm), and seattered or loose bundles of cladotylotes (160 * 2 yum), bearing 5 clads (approximately 4 ym in length) with unspined shafts. Amphitylotes are apparently absent also. Leévi (1963) omits_4, fenuis from his subdivision of the genus, bul on the basis of the cladotylote morphology it would fit with his group LAcarnus, together with 4. ternatus. Dendy (1922) suggests that the absence of chelate microscleres in this species may be cause (Oo erect a Separate genus for A, tenuis, but such a move cauld not be justified for such a poorly Known species. SYNOPSIS OF OTHER SPECIES Brief diagnoses are given below of other species of Acarnus not found in the Australian region. Table 5 provides a summary of the main diagnostic characters for each. Acarnus erithacus de Laubeniels, 1927 (Table 3) Acarnus erithacus de Laubenfels, 1927, pp. 258-60, 262, text-figs 1,2,9,10,11. de Laubenfels, 1930, p. 104, de Laubenfels, 1932, pp. 104-7, text-fig. 63. Dickinson, 1945, p. 20. Bakus, 1966, pp. 468-71, text-ligs 1da-j. Schwab and Shore, 1971, pp. 125- 36. Shore, 1972, pp. 689-98. Carter and Rinehart, 1978, pp. 4302-4, Hofknecht, 1978, pp. 53-4. DIAGNOSIS Brilliant red to bronze, thinly to massively encrusting sponge with an irregular, microconulose, hispid surface and an irregular, loosely reticulate skeleton of ascending spicule tracts, Spongin fibres are light, cored by styles (200-790 x 7-43 pm), and echinated by cladotylotes of 2 varieties: [— (180-472 x 8-36 pm) have 3-4 clads and smooth shaftss 1[— (80- 182 * 3-7 um) have spined shafts. Tangential ectosomal amphitylotes (170-434 3-8 um) with microspined lips. Toxas of 2 sizes: I— small, thick and reflexed; 1]— long, thin and mostly straight or only slightly curved (both 40-645 x 2-7 ym), Palmate isochelae (12-26 pm) core light spongin between the fibres. Source: dé Laubenlels (1927, 1932), Bakus (1966). Eco.oGy Associated with rock, dead corals, and living or dead barnacles; extensive bathymetric range from the intertidal zone to 700 metres depth, DISTRIBUTION Pacific coast to North America (California. Washington). REMARKS Acarnus erithacus was placed in group UI Acarnus, together with A. thielei and A. innominatus on the basis of its smooth and spined cladotylotes (Lévi 1963). Itis close to A, foriifis in skeletal architecture, but differs from that species in cladotylote morphology and spongin content (Bakus 1966) (Table 5). The affinities of this species, and arguments for a possible combination of Levi's group [11 species have been. presented earlier, Acarnus topsenti Dendy, 1922 (Fig, 37, Table 5) Acarnus topseari Dendy, 1922, pp. 98-9, pl. 4, fig. 3a—- b, pl. 15, fie, 8a-e. Burton 1959, p. 253. ACARNUS FROM AUSTRALIA 91 MATERIAL EXAMINED SYNTYPE: BM 1921.11.7.84: Cargados Carajos, north of Mauritius, Indian Ocean, 16°25’S, 59°36’E, 60 m depth, 29 August 1905, H.M.S. ‘Sealark’, dredge. REDESCRIPTION OF TYPE-SPECIMEN DETAILS OF EXTERNAL MorPHOLOGY: Digitate to flabellate sponge with digitiform processes and microconules on the surface. Surface is roughened and microscopically hispid. Ectosome has a thin, translucent membraneous covering, and small oscula on the margins of branches. Texture is compressible, fibrous and fairly tough. Colour in ethanol ranges from dull grey to reddish or purplish (Dendy 1922, p. 98). EctosomMe: Choanosomal fibres ascend to the ectosomal region and form erect microconulose projections. Ascending fibres are cored by plumose tracts of styles, with the ultimate brushes poking through the surface and forming an irregular, erect palisade of spicules. In addition to a hispid ectosomal layer of styles, there is a fine tangential ectosomal layer of amphitylotes, in bundles of up to 10 spicules abreast or scattered singly. The tangential ectosomal layer is conspicuous in some areas, but difficult to observe in other areas due to the presence of relatively heavy deposits of detritus on the ectosome. Amphitylotes are scattered throughout the mesohyl of the choanosome also. CHOANOSOME: The overall choanosomal skeletal architecture is plumo-reticulate, with distinctive ascending fibre tracts (30-50 um in diameter), which diverge in plumose fashion towards the subectosomal region (Fig. 37). Fibres consist of relatively heavy spongin, resembling those of the Spongiidae. Ascending fibres are céred by plumose tracts of principal styles, 4-10 spicules abreast, occasionally singly, which ultimately protrude through the ectosome, and are echinated by cladotylotes in moderate concentrations. Ascending (cored) fibres are connected in a loose reticulation by transverse uncored fibres of similar diameter. Transverse fibres are only lightly echinated by cladotylotes or not at all. The mesohyl matrix contains relatively heavy deposits of granular spongin bearing microscleres and scattered amphitylotes. No styles were observed outside spongin fibres, Meshes formed by anastomosing fibres are variable in diameter, 90-290 ym, Detritus is moderately abundant between fibres, and consists mainly of sand grains. MEGASCLERES (N=25): Principal styles — hastate, tapering to a sharp point, relatively straight or only slightly curved at the centre, with Fic. 37: Acarnus topsenti, syntype; perpendicular section of peripheral skeleton. evenly rounded or only slightly subtylote bases; bases smooth or very lightly microspined, 223.7 pm long (mean) (range 204-287 um), 7.8 wm wide (3-12 pm). Amphitylotes — relatively long, thin, straight, with slightly swollen tylote bases bearing microspines on their tips. 227.4 um long (mean) (range 205-262 pm), 2.5 pm wide (2-3.5 um). Cladotylotes — relatively small, thin, straight, thicker near base than on clad end, with profusely microspined shafts and a bare anterior area immediately below clads; clads are relatively short, and number 4 to 5; bases are slightly subtylote, with 3-4 large recurved spines, 76.7 um shaft length (mean) (range 53-97 um), 5.1 wm shaft width (3-8 ym), 6.3 wm clad chord length (3-11 pm), 8.9 wm wide at clad end (5-14 um). MICROSCLERES (N =25): Toxas | — short to long and thick, generously curved at the centre, with recurved tips, 112.2 um long (mean) (range 32-191 wm), 2.3 wm wide (1-4 wm). Isochelae— small, thin, palmate, 10.7 wm long (mean) (range 9-12 pm). EcOLoGy A moderately deeper-water species, with a bathymetric distribution of 38-165 metres; apparently associated with a red algae (Lithothamnion) (Burton 1959). DISTRIBUTION Western Indian Ocean (Coast of Oman, Arabian Sea; Cargados Carajos, north of Mauritius, Indian Ocean). 92 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM REMARKS Dendy (1922, p. 15, fig. 8) provides adequate drawings of the spicule morphology of A. topsenti, and those do not need to be repeated here. Fig. 37 shows the skeletal architecture of this species, which has not been illustrated previously. The supposed absence of a tangential ectosomal skeleton of amphitylotes, reported by Dendy (1922) was not supported by the re-examination of the type-specimen, and in that respect A. topsenti does not differ from other Acarnus species. Acarnus topsenti is placed in Lévi’s (1963) group Il Acarnus by the presence of spined cladotylotes only, and in this respect the species has affinities with A. tortilis and A. toxeatus. Arguments have been presented above in support of maintaining A. topsenti and A. tortilis as distinct species, despite their very close similarities. Acarnus toxeatus Boury-Esnault, 1973 (Table 5) Acarnus toxeata Boury-Esnault, 1973, p. 285, text-fig. 44, DIAGNOSIS Maroon, thinly encrusting sponge with a delicate detachable ectosomal crust. Surface is hispid. Choanosomal skeletal architecture is unknown, but presumably greatly reduced as a result of its thin habit. Styles have slightly swollen, smooth bases (378-727 x 12-16 um). Ectosomal amphitylotes (213-472 x 3-9 um) with spined extremities. Cladotylotes of 2 varieties: I— (250- 395 x 3-9 um) have 6 clads and a lightly spined shaft; II— (56-162 x 3 wm) have a heavily spined shaft. Toxas of 3 varieties: I— (28-75 um) short, relatively thick, with reflexed tips and generously curved centrally; I1— (218-265 nm) moderately long, slightly reflexed and curved at centre; III— (500-945 ym) relatively thin, long, straight, not reflexed at tips. Palmate isochelae 12-14 um long. Source: Boury-Esnault (1973). EcoLocy Habitat unknown. Collected from 50 depth. DISTRIBUTION Single locality, off Governador Valadares, Brazil, South Atlantic. REMARKS Acarnus toxeatus is placed in Lévi’s (1963) group II Acarnus in having spined cladotylotes only. The species is distinctive in the extreme size of toxas (Table 5), but the division of toxas into three varieties may be artificial. Toxa I] probably represents an intermediate between the smaller, curved form and the long, straight form. Acarnus bicladotylotus Hoshino, 1981 (Table 5) Acarnus bicladotylota Hoshino, 1981, pp. 142-3, text- fig. 60, pl. 6, fig. 4. DIAGNOSIS Thinly encrusting, red-orange sponge, with a smooth surface containing foreign particles. Ectosome with a confused tangential layer of amphitylotes (205-310 x 3-6 wm) bearing spines on extremities. Choanosomal skeletal architecture irregularly reticulate with ascending spicule tracts cored by styles (195-394 x 6-12 ym), and echinated by cladotylotes of 2 varieties: I— (140- 180 x 3-7 um); II— (80-110 x 2-6 wm), both with spined shafts. Acanthostyles (80-95 x 3-5 pm) erect on basal membrane of sponge. Toxas of 2 varieties, both thin and reflexed: I— (60-100 x 1-2 wm); II— (130-210 x 2-3 pm). Arcuate (?) isochelae (15 um) coring abundant spongin between the fibres. Source: Hoshino (1981). EcoLoGy Associated with barnacles (Acasta); located in the intertidal zone to shallow subtidal regions. DISTRIBUTION East China Sea (Matsushima Maeshima, Ariake Sea, Kyushu, Japan). REMARKS In habit and skeletal structure (ascending plumose tracts), A. bicladotylotus resembles A. erithacus, but differs from that species and other Acarnus by the dimensions and composition of the skeletal components (Table 5). This species is a member of the nominal subgenus Acanthacarnus by virtue of a basal layer of acanthostyles in the skeleton, acanthose cladotylotes only, and thin styles. Although Hoshino (1981) records the isochelae as arcuate, his figure (60f) suggests that they are probably palmate, which is consistent with other species of Acarnus. Acarnus souriei (Lévi, 1952) (Table 5) Acanthacarnus souriei Lévi, 1952, p. 54, text-figs 18-19. Lévi, 1959, pp. 132-3, text-fig. 25. Vacelet, 1961, p. 42. Hechtel, 1965, p. 40. Thomas, 1970, pp. 46- 50, text-figs 1-2a-h. Thomas, 1973, p. 30, pl. 2, fig. 2. ACARNUS FROM AUSTRALIA ¥ Avanthacarnus levii Vacelet, 1960, pp. 267-9, text-fig. 5 Avurnus souriei: Van Soest, 1984, pp. 63-5, text-fig. 23. DIAGNOSIS Bright orange to red, thinly encrusting sponge, with an optically smooth, microscopically hispid surface. Ectosome with an irregular tangential layer of amphitylotes (119-357 » 2-7 pm) bearing terminal spines. Choanosome skeletal architecture lightly reticulate only and more markedly halichondroid, with ascending plumose spiculo- spongin fibres. Spongin fibres are light, cored by styles (170-381 x 3-10 wm) and echinated by acanthostyles (60-145 « 2-5 um) and cladotylotes of | variety only, with 4 clads and spined shafts (54-236 * 2-6 pm). Toxas of at least 2 varieties: I— with reflexed tips, generously curved, and of variable thickness; II— thin, angular central curyature, long (both: 45-330 x 2-4 pm). Palmate isochelae (12-21 pm). Source: Lévi (1952, 1959), Hechtel (1965), Thomas (1970, 1973), Van Soest (1984). EcoLtoay Apparently restricted to dead coral and rock substrate; bathymetric distribution from the intertidal zone to 10 metres depth. DISTRIBUTION Predominantly northern hemisphere, widespread; Mediterrean (Corsica), North Atlantic Ocean, West Africa (Senegal, Gulf of Guinea), Indian Ocean (Seychelles, Palk Bay, Gulf of Manaar), Caribbean (Curacao, Barbados, Puerto Rico, Jamaica). REMARKS Acarnus souriei s.1, has a wide range of spicule measurements, particularly for the cladotylotes. Vacelet (1960) and Thomas (1970, 1973) divide cladotylotes of specimens from the Mediterranean and Indian Ocean (respectively) into two size categories, both of which are spined (I— 80-210 45-6 wm; I— $4-]40 & 2-4 um), but other authors group these spicules into a single {albeit variable) calegory (Vacelet 1961, Hechtel 1965; Van Soest 1984), Van Soest (1984) notes other differences in skeletal components between the various populations of 4. souriei. [tis evident that the species is highly variable over its large geographical range, and consequently itis difficult Lo isolate any single character which separates this species from others (Table 5). Van Soest (1984) suggests that 4. bicladotylofus may be distinguished from, serie’ in having 2 sizes of cladorylotes (see Table 4), but both forms fall well within the range of those of 4. sourie/. The same tee argument applies for all spicule components of 4. fener, Acarnus radovani is maintained here as a separate species, with question, in having larger amphitylotes with only slightly swollen ends, although Van Soes! (1984) suggests (hat it is close to, and probably synonymous with A. souriel. That distincuion is tenuous, and probably artificial, but the combination of 4. radovani and A. sourier would provide sufficient reason to synonymize all Acarnus (Acan/hacarnus) species on the basis of similarities in spicule morphology and size. This problem of clearly and objectively differentiating Acarnus species has been encountered earlier (A- innominatus and A. thielei, A. topsenti and A. tortilis), and on the basis of morphological characters alone no easy solution is presently available. Combinations of specific characters, such as habit, architecture and spicule morphology must be used together in distingushing species, taking into account known ecophenotypic differences between populations, and in some cases subjective criteria are as equally important (e.g. colour, texture, gross morphology and the appearance of the ectosome). Acarnus radovani (Boury-Esnault, 1973) (Table 5) Acanthacarnus radovant Boury-Esnault, 1973, p. 284, text-fig. 43, DIAGNOSIS Deep violet (in preserved state), encrusting sponge, with hispid surface. Ectosomal and choanosomal skeletal structure is unknown. Ectosomal amphitylotes with only slightly swollen ends which are terminally spined (350-473 % 3-4 um). Styles with spined bases, slightly subtylote acanthostyles abundant with numerous small spines on shaft (both styles and acanthostyles: 80- 213 x 3-9 um). Cladotylotes of 1 variety, with spinied shalts (210-218 x 4.5-6 ym). Toxas of at least 2 varieties: |— with reflexed tips, a generous central curvature and relatively thick (78-104 x 3-6 wm); [I— thin, oxeote, with slight central arch (230-309 x 1.5 um), A third variety of toxa, probably an intermediate stage is recorded (143- 204 x 1.5-3 pm). Palmate isochelae abundant in heavy deposits of spongin (19-22 um). Source; Boury-Esnault (1973). Ecotoay Habitat unknown; collected trom SI metres depth. DISTRIBUTION Tropical Atlantic Ocean (off Recife, Brazil, South Adantic). 94 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM REMARKS Boury-Esnault (1973) differentiates this species from other Acarnus (Acanthacarnus) by the large size of the spicules and by the presence of 3 sizes of toxas. A comparison with other species (Table 5) shows that most spicule forms fall within the upper size range of most other species, particularly the widespread A. souriei. Van Soest (1984) records A. souriei with similar categories of toxas as A. radovani, which supports his suggestion that the two may be synonymous, but they are presently maintained as distinct species for reasons discussed above. In general, A. radovani has larger amphitylotes and cladotylotes than does A. souriel. Acarnus tener Tanita, 1963 (Table 5) Acarnus tenerus Tanita, 1963, pp. 123-4, pl. 4, fig. 2, text-fig. 2. Hoshino, 1981, p. 144. DIAGNOSIS Dull reddish-brown (in preserved state), oval sponge, more-or-less ‘dorso-ventrally’ compressed, with a lightly hispid surface. Surface is rough; ectosome with a tangential layer of amphitylotes, with terminal swellings and spines on apices (180-320 x 2.5-5 wm). Choanosomal skeletal architecture is plumo-reticulate, and slender fibres are cored by styles with basal spination (260-340 x 8-10 um). Fibres echinated by numerous acanthostyles (80-130 x 4-6 um) and cladotylotes of 1 variety, with spined shafts and 4 clads (130-190 x 5-6 um). Toxas generously curved at cente with reflexed tips (70-110 x 2 um). Palmate isochelae 12-14 um long. Source: Tanita (1963), EcoLoay Growing amongst seaweed (Laurencia); depth recorded as shallow to moderately shallow water. DISTRIBUTION Japan (Noto Peninsula, Sea of Japan). REMARKS Tanita (1963) erected this species on the basis of its shape and the presence of echinating acanthostyles. Those characters are now of little value in separating species, but A. tener can be differentiated from A. bicladotylotus in having only a single category of cladotylote and toxa (Table 5). It is close to A. souriei s.1. but differs from that species in skeletal architecture. DISCUSSION The intraspecific variability in morphological characters shown by some Acarnus makes the specific taxonomy of this group difficult and unreliable. Limited studies have shown that some characters in some species are unstable. Most significantly, de Laubenfels (1932), Thomas (1970) and Van Soest (1984) found that cladotylotes were sometimes absent from specimens of A. erithacus and A. souriei. Furthermore, Van Soest (1984) noted that acanthostyles were absent from one Caribbean specimen of A. souriei. Those authors were able to assign aberrant specimens to a specific taxon through morphological comparisions with other material from the same localities. Although atypical specimens are reportedly not abundant, there exists the possibility that records of single specimens from isolated localities, such as A. innominatus from Darwin, represent specimens with reduced characteristics. Unfortunately there is no solution to this problem on the basis of known material, and in using a limited number of morphological characters of undetermined stability. Populations of Acarnus species are not abundant in any locality, with the possible exception of A. erithacus from the Pacific coast of North America, so it is unlikely that a study of intraspecific variability, would be successful for this group. Nevertheless, accepting the limitations of the data, it is possible to speculate further on species relationships and the zoogeography of Acarnus. Conclusions derived from these analyses cannot be fully corroborated because conspecificity has been assumed from the literature, and not in comparison with type-specimens (e.g. Wiedenmayer 1977). That material was not available to the author. In following with current taxonomic procedures, the important diagnostic characters for the genus are the size, morphology and distribution of the echinating cladotylotes, toxas, and ectosomal amphitylotes, the basal feature of choanosomal styles, the presence or absence of echinating acanthostyles, the overall skeletal architecture, and the gross morphology of the sponge. Other more subjective criteria, such as the colour alive, the macroscopic appearance of the ectosome, and the degree of infiltration of detritus into the choanosome are also important in distinguishing allied species. On this basis, it is possible to separate 12 species. However, many of those species are encrusting in habit, with a concomitant reduction in skeletal architecture, and consequently the value of some diagnostic AGCARNUS FROM AUSTRALIA US characters 1s diminished. As a result, the morphology of the cladotylote megasclere remains the principal characteristic for differentiating species, Levi's (1963) proposal for subdividing Acarnus on the basis of cladotylote form offers a convenient and practical method to faciliate identificatians. He omits .4. Jertuwis from his scheme, possibly with good reason due to the poorly known characteristics of that species, but it is included here on a provisional basis, as it represents the only record of the group fram temperate Australian waters. Group 1: with only smooth shafts on cladotylotes A. ternatus Ridley A. tenuis Dendy Group I; with only spined shafts.on cladotylotes HLA without echinaling acanthostyles A. rortilis Topsent A. topsent! Dendy A, toxeatus Boury-Esnault [IB— with echinating acanthostyles (subgenus Acanthacarnus) A. bicladotylotus Hoshino A, souriei (Lévi) A. radovani (Boury-Esnault) A, tener Tanita Group Il: with both smooth and spined cladotylotes A. erithacus de Laubenfels A. innominatus Gray A. thielei Levi Ii is clear that some species are more closely related than others, Using a restricted set of morphological characters (Table 6), it ig possible to construct a cladogram to illustrate these relationships (Fig. 38). Each number on the cladogram indicates an evolutionary change of the corresponding character from 4 relatively plesiomorphic to a relatively apomorphic state. The apomorphie character states were judged on a number of enteria (Table 6, mainly after Van Soest 1984, pp. 65, 151), the most significant of which are the reduction of cladotylote and acanthostyle megascleres, From Fig. 38, the basic separation of the three groups is indicated (characters 1,2), which corresponds to Lévi's (1963) subdiyision of the genus. From this particular analysis, it is suggested that species formerly included in the genus Acanthaecarnus are more closely related to. Acarnus geoup ITA species than previously recognized when using the presence or absence of acanthostyles as ihe primary characteristic for subdividing the genus. Supporting evidence for this opinion is suggested by the synplesiomorphy of basal spinalion of choanosomal styles, and the synapomorphy through reduction of the smooth cladotylote megascleres. Group ID] species are subdivided on the basis of growth form (No, 3; 4 character of undetermined stability arid questionable importance), and the proportion of acanthase and smooth cladotylote megascleres (No. 4). Acarnus erithacus and A. innominatus are more plesiomorphic than A. thielei. Synplesiomorphic characters which unite Group IIB species (viz. the possession of acanthostyles, spined oladorylotes only, and the basal spination of styles) are more obvious than any apomorphic separation of that group. Synapomorphy for 4, fener and 4. radovani is the possession of one category of spined cladotylote spicule only (No. 6). No derived characters are presently known to separate those two species in this analysis, because the ectosomal and choanosomal charattenstics of A, radovani are unknown, Acarnus topsenti and A, rortilis(Group IIA) are related to Group IEB species by the retention of ancestral characters (Nos, 2,8), which is not clear from this analysis, whereas A. foxeatius seems to have lost the basal spination on styles, That condition may have arisen independently, as it is synapomorphie for Acarnus Groups.1 and IIL. Five Acurnus species are now known from Australian waters, three of which represent new locality records (A, ihielei, A. innominatus, and A. tortilis), Acarnus ternaius is well known throughout the [Indo-Pacific region, but its distribution in Australia is resiricted to the tropics. Acarnus tenuis was recorded from the Tasman Sea, but the species is poorly known. Until redescriptions are made of the presently missing type-specimens, or more preferably, redescriptions based on fresh material, A, fenuis becomes a species inquirenda. Several zoogeographical patterns are indicated for Acarnus species (Fig, 39), Of Graup | species,, A. lernaius shows a separation into two disjunet populations: Western Indian Ocean, and Indo- Pacific, but conspecificity of the two populations seems to be clear an the basis of morphological characteristics. In following with standard taxonomic procedures, Group Ll species should be referred to as the fernatus species group. The major component of Group ILA species. 4. iortilis has three discontinuous populations, 96 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM TABLE 6. Characters used in the construction of Fig. 38. Criteria for judging apomorphy are listed below. i PLESIOMORPHIC STATE APOMORPHIC STATE 1. At least one category of cladotylote megascleres 1. with spined shafts A single category of cladotylote megascleres with smooth shafts only 2. Two varieties of cladotylotes (spined and 2. smooth) Smooth cladotylotes not present 3. Growth from encrusting 3. Digitate, flabellate, or vasiform habit 4. Cladotylote megascleres are predominantly acanthose : 4. Acanthose cladotylotes are rare 5. Acanthostyles present 5. Acanthostyles absent 6. Two size-categories of acanthose cladotylotes 6. One size-category of acanthose cladotylotes 7. Toxa microscleres are diverse in form and size, 7, Reduced complement of toxas, and relatively with at least 3 categories thin 8. Choanosomal styles or subtylostyles with 8. Styles or subtylostyles with smooth bases microspined bases 9. Strongly developed (horny) spongin fibres 9, Fibres reduced, lightly invested with spongin only 10. Ectosomal amphitylotes form a more-or-less tangential layer 10. Amphitylotes absent Cladotylotes: In the plesiomorphic state, cladotylotes have both smooth and spined shafts, representing 2 separate categories of megascleres, and in the apomorphic state one of the varieties is lost. A reduction in the proportion of spined versus smooth cladotylotes, and the number of varieties of spined cladotylotes is considered here as a further derived condition. Acanthostyles: The retention of acanthostyles echinating a layer of basal spongin and/or spiculo-spongin tracts is interpreted as an ancestral condition (Van Soest 1984). Styles: The presence of microspines on bases of choanosomal styles or subtylostyles is considered here as a plesiomorphic condition. Amphitylotes: The possession of a tangential ectosomal skeleton of tylote megascleres is shared with other myxillids, and at least one other family of Poecilosclerida (Van Soest 1984), and is probably an ancestral character. Synapomorphy is the secondary reduction or loss of amphitylotes. Habit: An encrusting growth form is considered here as plesiomorphic, and development of digitate, flabelliform or vasiform habit is probably a derived condition. This distinction may be illusory, as the stability of this character has not been determined in any study, and ecophenotypic factors and individual maturation must be considered (see text). Skeletal architecture and fibre development: Van Soest (1984, p. 151) suggests that a reticulate or plumo-reticulate skeletal architecture is probably an ancestral condition, shared with several outgroups of the Poecilosclerida. Similarly, skeletal fibres which are heavily invested with type B spongin is interpreted here as the plesiomorphic state. The importance of this character is debatable (see text), as ecophenotypic factors influencing growth form and the consequent skeletal development are probably critical. Microscleres: Synapomorphy for the Poecilosclerida s.s. are the chelate microscleres, but synplesiomorphy is probably a full and diverse complement of other microscleres, including toxas (Van Soest 1984, p. 151). A reduction in heterogeneity of non-chelate microscleres is considered here as an apomorphic condition. extending into both northern and southern hemispheres: North Atlantic-Mediterranean, Western Indian Ocean, and _ Indo-Pacific populations. It is difficult to determine any characteristics (see Table 3). There appears to be a trend in size reduction of styles from the Mediterranean to Indo-Pacific populations (400- 515, 300-450, 214-334 um long respectively for the intraspecific variability corresponding to these zoogeographical populations, on the basis of known material, because only few published accounts of A. fortilis describe morphological three populations), but that pattern requires confirmation from additional data. The distribution of A. fopsenti is sympatric with the Western Indian Ocean population of A. ACARNUS FROM AUSTRALIA r GROUP II] 7 [=p] 3 4 <— mo) ss _| A.enithacus A. (unnominatus A. thieked A. bicladotylotu A. scUNLeL A.nadcvant A. tener 97 f— GROUP iP GROUP I> A.topsenta A. tontilas A. toxeatus A. tennatus \N A. tenuts l, Fic. 38: Cladogram of the relationships between species of Acarnus. Each number on the cladogram indicates an evolutionary change of the corresponding character (Table 6) from a relatively plesiomorphic to a relatively apomorphic state. tortilis, which is further evidence in support of a possible combination of the two species (cf. above, and Vacelet et al. 1976). Acarnus toxeatus is known from a single locality only (tropical South Atlantic Ocean). Acarnus group IIA species should be referred to as the fortilis species group. Group IIB species are found predominantly in the northern hemisphere. Acarnus souriei has a disjunct zoogeography, with the separation of three populations: Caribbean, Mediterranean- West African, and central Western Indian Ocean. Van Soest (1984, p. 64) suggests that the Caribbean and Mediterranean-West African populations are clearly conspecific, although he notes that the Mediterranean specimens have larger styles and amphitylotes than the tropical specimens. The Indian Ocean population is recorded as having a lower size range of cladotylote megasclere than the Atlantic region populations (54-187, 70-236 um respectively), but this is probably of minor taxonomic significance. Isochelae microscleres are relatively homogeneous in size throughout the entire geographical range of this species. Van Soest (1984) also supports a possible combination of A. radovani and A. souriei on the basis that spicule sizes for both species correspond closely. Populations of A. souriei which are geographically closest to A. radovani (viz. Caribbean and West African specimens) have significantly smaller amphitylotes (119-357, 350-473 wm _ long respectively), and in that respect A. radovani is most similar to Mediterranean specimens of A. souriei (which have amphitylotes 280-408 »m long). It is possible that the variability is taxonomically insignificant, and that the two species are conspecific, but for reasons discussed 98 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM HA varmatus; Ye aconuies @ scores \asopsent; DArorestua; PAvletsotyiore; ME asourtal; A sradovani: we Atener; V A .ctttnaces; a Adanomingius, Athtelel Fig 39; Zoogeagraphy of Acarnus species. Conspecificity is assumed from the literature. Refer to text for sources of information. earlier their specific separation is maintained here. Other species in Group IIB, A. bicladotylotus and A. tener are known only from the Japan region, Group IIB species should be referred to as the souriei species group in preference ta subgenus Acanthacarnus, as the latter term implies a greater degree of taxonomic distance than recognized here. Group [II is represented by one endemic species, A. erithacus from the Pacific Coast of North America, and two other species with more widespread distributions. Acarnus innominatus is widely separated with three discontinuous populations: Carribean-Gulf of Mexico, temperate South Atlantic-Indian Ocean, and Indo- Pacific. There is a relatively homogeneous distribution of morphological characteristics throughout the range of this species, although the specimen from the Arafura Sea region is more similar to the Caribbean population than to the South African specimens in spicule sizes. More detailed studies on encrusting sponge faunas throughout the Indian Ocean region may show that this species has a more extensive distribution than is presently known. Acarnus thielei has a relatively contiguous distribution across the western Indian Ocean to the Indo-Pacific, but there seems to be two populations within that range. Indian Ocean specimens have small isochelae (8-10 xm long), whereas isochelae of the Indo-Pacific specimens are larger (18-25 ym long) (see also Lévi 1958), Acarnus innominatus is most representative of Group III species, and that group should be known as the innominatus species group. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS 1 would like to thank Dr L.R.G. Cannon, Dr F_W.E. Rowe, Dr C.C. Lu, and Miss S.M. Stone, of the Queensland Museum, Australian Museum, Museum of Victoria, and British Museum (Natural History), respectively, for providing access to their collections. I am grateful to Dr R.W.M. Van Soest far his comments on the manuscript. LITERATURE CITED ALCOLApO, P,, 1976, Lista. de nuevos Texistras de Poriferos para Cuba. Acad. Sci. Cuba, Ser. Oceanol. 361: 1-11, Arnot, W., 1927. Kalk- und Kieselschwamme yon Curacao, Bijdr. Dierk, Anisterdam, 25; 133-58, 3 pls., 18 figs. AYLING, A,L., Srone, $., and Smith, B.J., 1982, Catalogue of types of sponge species from southern Australia described by Arthur Dendy. Rep, Narional Mus. Victoria 1; 97-109. Bakus, G.J,, 1966, Marine poeciloscleridan sponges of the San Juan Archipelago, Washington. Jour. Zool. London. 149: 415-531, 24 ligs, ACARNUS FROM AUSTRALIA 99 Boury-ESNAULT, N., 1971. Spongiaires de la zone rocheuse de Banyuls-sur-mer. I]-Systématique. Vie Milieu, 22(2), Sér.B: 287-350, 8 pls. 1973. Campagne de la Calypso au large des cdtes Atlantiques de Il’Amerique du Sud (1961-1962). I. 29 Spongiaries. Ann. Inst. Oceanogr., Paris. 49 (Suppl.): 263-95, 49 figs., 3 pls. BoWERBANK, J.S., 1864. ‘A Monograph of the British Spongiadae, Vol. 1.’ (Ray Society: London). 290 pp., 37 pls. 1866. ‘A Monograph of the British Spongiadae, Vol. 2.’ (Ray Society: London). 388 pp. 1874. ‘A Monograph of the British Spongiadae, Vol. 3.’ (Ray Society: London). 360 pp. 1882. ‘A Monograph of the British Spongiadae, Vol. 4,’ (Ray Society: London). 250 pp, 17 pls. Bruce, A.J., 1976. Discias mvitae sp. nov. anew sponge associate from Kenya (Decapoda, Natantia, Disciadidae). Crustaceana 31(2): 119-30. BurTon, M., 1959. Sponges, Scient. Rep. John Murray Exped., 10(5): 151-281, 41 figs. CarTeR, G.T., and RINEHART, K.L. Jr., 1978. Acarnidines, novel antiviral and antimicrobial compounds from the sponge Acarnus erithacus (de Laubenfels). Jour. Am. Chem. Soc. 100(13): 4302- 4. CarTER, H.J., 1871. On two undescribed sponges and two Esperiadae from the West Indies; also on the nomenclature of the Calcisponge Clathrina, Gray. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (ser.4). 7: 268-83, 1 pl. Denby, A., 1896. Catalogue of non-calcareous sponges collected by J. Bracebridge Wilson in the neighbourhood of Port Phillip Heads. Part 2. Proc. R. Soc. Vict. 2(8): 14-51. 1905. Report on the sponges collected by Prof. Herdman at Ceylon in 1902. Rep. Ceylon Pearl Oyster Fish, Gulf of Manaar. 3 (Suppl. 18): 57-246, 16 pls. 1916. Report on the non-calcareous sponges collected by Mr James Hornell at Okhamandal in Kattiawar in 1905-1906. Rep. Government of Baroda on the Marine Zool. of Okhamandal, (ser. 2). 17: 96-146, 4 pls. 1922. Report on the Sigmatotetraxonida collected by H.M.S. ‘Sealark’ in the Indian Ocean. Trans. Linn. Soc. London, Zool. 18: 1-164, 18 pls. DESQUEYROUX-FAUNDEZ, R., 1981. Révision de la collection d’éponges d’Amboine (Moluques, Indonésie) constituée par Bedot et Pictet et conservée au Muséum d’histoire naturelle de Genéve. Rev. Suisse Zool, 88(3): 723-64, 132 figs. DickINsON, M.G., 1945. Sponges of the Gulf of California. Univ. S. Calif. publs, Alan Hancock Pac. Exped. 11(1): 1-252, 97 pls. Gray, J.E., 1867. Notes on the arrangement of sponges, with description of some new genera. Proc. Zool. Soc. London. 1867: 492-558, 2 pls. HECHTEL, G., 1965. A Systematic study of the Demospongiae of Port Royal, Jamaica. Bull. Peabody Mus. nat. Hist. 20: 1-103, 8 pls, 15 figs. HENTSCHEL, E., 1912. Kiesel- und Hornschwaémme der Aru- und Kei-Inseln. Abh. Senckenb. Naturf. Ges. 34: 294-448, 9 pls. HOFKNECHT, G., 1978. Description and key to the intertidal sponges of the Puerto Penasco area in the Gulf of California. Jour. Ariz. Nev. Acad. Sci. 13(2): 51-6. Hooper, J.N.A., 1984. Sigmaxinella soelae and Desmacella ithystela, two new desmacellid sponges (Porifera, Axinellida, Desmacellidae) from the Northwest Shelf of Western Australia, with a revision of the Family Desmacellidae. Northern Territory Mus. Arts. Sci. Monog. Ser. 2: 1-58, 18 figs. HosHino, T., 1981. Shallow-water Demosponges of Western Japan, I, Il. Jour. Sci. Hiroshima Univ., Ser. B (Div.1 Zool.) 29 (1-2): 47-205, 11 pls, 86 figs, 207-76, 7 pls., 38 figs. KELLER, C., 1889. Die Spongienfauna des rothen Meeres. Z. wiss. Zool. 48: 311-406, 5 pls. KIESCHNICK, O., 1896. Silicispongiae von Ternate nach den Sammlungen von Herrn Prof. Dr. W. Kukenthal. Zool. Anz. 19: 526-34. 1900. Kieselschwamme von Amboina. Jn: Semon, R. ‘Zoologische Forschungsreisen in Australien und dem Malayischen Archipel ... ausgefuhrt in den Jahren 1891-1893.’ 5. Denskschr. med. natw. Ges. Jena. 8: 545-582, 1 pl. LAUBENFELS, M.W. De, 1927. The red sponges of Monterey Peninsula, California. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. Ser. 9. 19: 258-66. 1930. The sponges of California. Standford Univ. Bull. 5(98): 24-9. 1932. The marine and freshwater sponges of California. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. Washington. 81(4): 1-140, 79 figs. 1936. A discussion of the sponge fauna of the Dry Tortugas in particular, and the West Indies in general, with material for a revision of the families and orders of the Porifera. Papers Tortugas Lab, 30: 1-225, 22 pls. Levi, C., 1952. Spongiaries de la céte du Sénégal. Bull. Inst. frangais Afrique noire. 14: 34-59, 20 figs. 1958. Resultats scientifiques des campagnes de la ‘Calypso’. Fasc. II]. Spongiaries de Mer Rouge. Ann. Inst. Océan. Monaco, 34: 3-46, 37 figs. 1959. Resultats scientifiques des campagnes de la ‘Calypso’. Fasc. IV. (5). Golfe de Guinée. Spongiaries. Ann. Inst. Océan. Monaco. 37: 115- 41, 2 pls., 31 figs. 1963. Spongiaries d’Afrique du Sud. (1) Poecilosclérides. Trans. R. Soc. S. Africa. 37(1): 1- 72, 10 pls, 75 figs. 1973. Systématique de la classe des Demospongiarias (Démosponges). Jn: Grassé, P.P. (Ed.). ‘Traité de Zoologie.’ 3: 577-631. (Masson et Cie: Paris). RANDALL, J.E. and HARTMAN, W.D., 1968. Sponge- feeding fishes of the West Indies. Mar. Biol. 1(3): 216-25. Riptey, S.O., 1884. Spongiida. Jn: ‘Reports on the Zoological collections made in the Indo-Pacific Ocean during the voyage of H.M.S. ‘‘Alert”’ 1881- 100 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 1882’. (British Museum (Natural History), London, 366-484, 582-630, 7 pls. RIDLEY, S.O., and DENDy, A., 1887. Report on the Monaxonida collected by H.M.S. ‘Challenger’ during the years 1873-1876. Rep. Sci. res. Voy. “Challenger’’, Zool. 20: 1-275, 51 pls. RUETZLER, K., 1965. Systematik und Okologie der Poriferen au _ Litoral-Schattengebieten der Nordadria. Z. Morph. Okol. Tiere. 55: 1-82, 41 figs. SarA, M., 1960. Poriferi del litorale dell’isola d’Ischia e loro ripartizions per ambienti. Pubb/. Staz. Zool. Napoli, 31: 421-72, 2 pls., 11 figs. ScHwas, D.W. and SHorg, R.E., 1971. Fine structure and composition of a siliceous sponge spicule. Biol. Bull. mar. biol. Lab. Woods Hole. 140: 125-36, 5 pls. SHorE, R.E., 1972. Axial filaments of siliceous sponge spicules, its organic components and synthesis. Biol. Bull. mar. biol. Lab. Woods Hole. 143(3): 689-98, 5 pls., 2 figs. Soest, R.W.M. VAN, 1984. Marine sponges from Curacao and other Caribbean localities. Part III. Poecilosclerida. Stud. Fauna Curacao Caribb. Isl. 66(199): 1-167, 10 pls., 58 figs. TANITA, S., 1963. Report on the non-calcareous sponges in the Museum of the Biological Institute of the Tohoku University. Part II. Sci. Rep. Tohoku Univ., Ser. 4. 29(2): 121-30, 1 pl., 5 figs. THIELE, J., 1903. Kieselschwamme von Ternate, II. Abhandl. Senckenb. Naturf. Ges. 25: 933-68. 1 pl. THOMAS, P.A., 1970. Studies on Indian Sponges — VI. Two new records of siliceous sponges (Poecilosclerida : Tedaniidae) from the Indian region. Jour. mar. biol. Ass. India. 12(1-2): 43-50, 4 figs. 1973. Marine Demospongiae of Mahe Island in the Seychelles Bank (Indian Ocean). Ann. Mus. roy. Afr. Centr. (ser.8 Sci. Zool.) 203: 1-96, 8 pls. TOPSENT, E., 1892. Diagnoses d’Eponges nouvelles de la Méditerranée et plus particuliérment de Banyuls. Arch. Zool. exp. gén. (Sér. 2). Notes et Revue. 10: XVii-XXX. 1892b. Contribution a l’étude des spongiaries de V’Atlantique Nord. Rés. camp. Sci. Albert Jer Monaco. 2: 1-165, 11 pls. 1894. Une réforme dans la classification des Halichondrina. Mem. Soc. Zool. France. 7: 5-26. 1897. Spongiares de la baie d’Amboine (Voyage de MM M. Bedot et C. Pictet dans |’archipel Malais). Rey. Suisse Zool. 4: 421-87, 4 pls. 1904. Spongiares des Acores. Rés. Camp. Sci. Albert ler Monaco, 25: 1-263, 18 pls. 1925. Etude des spongiaires du Golfe de Naples. Arch. Zool. exp. gén. 63: 623-725, 8 pls., 27 figs. 1928. Spongiaires de |’ Atlantique et de la Méditerranée provenant des croisiéres du Prince Albert Ier de Monaco. Rés. Camp. Sci. Albert Ier Monaco. 74: 1-376, 11 pls. 1929. Phénoménes de styloprothese chez des Poecilosclérines. Arch. Zool. exp. gén., Notes et Revue. 68: 19-32, 14 figs. 1934. Etude d’éponges littorales du Golfe de Gabés. Bull. Stat. Aquiculture et Péche, Castiglione. 1932: 71-102. TopsenT, E. and OLtvier, M., 1943. Eponges observées dans les parages de Monaco (fin). Bull. Inst. Océanog. Monaco. (854): 1-12. VACELET, J., 1960. Eponges de la Méditerranée nord- occidentale récoltées par le ‘President Théodore- Tissier’ (1958). Rev. Trav. Inst. Péches Marit, 24: 257-72, 5 figs. 1961. Spongiaries (démosponges) de la région de Bonifacio (Corse). Rev. Trav. Sta. Mar. Endoume, Bull. 22(36): 21-45, 4 figs. VACELET, J., VASSEUR, P. and Levi, C., 1976. Spongiaries de la pente externe des récifs coralliens de Tuléar (sud-oest de Madagascar). Mem. Mus. Nat. Hist. nat., n.s., A. Zool, 99: 1-116, 10 pls, 78 figs. WIEDENMAYER, F., 1977. ‘Shallow-water sponges of the Western Bahamas.’ (Birkhauser, Basel: Stiittgart). 287 pp., 43 pls. 101 ACARNUS FROM AUSTRALIA -suondafoid aoejins pastes snosawinu suymoys So8Z WIN uautoads JO SOBPANS JOWI}XA o/aly] SHUIDIE ‘OF “DIA ; a ei. 102 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM ww OSs Fic. 41; Acarnus thielei; exterior surface of specimen NTM Z876, showing raised longitudinal surface ridges. 42 50 mm Fic. 42. Acarnus thielei; interior surface of specimen NTM Z876, showing relatively smooth, porous surface. ACARNUS FROM AUSTRALIA 103 Fic 43. Acarnus thielei; photomicrograph of perpendicular section through choanosome of specimen NTM Z876. Fic. 44. Acarnus innominatus; encrusting specimen NTM Z2234 in situ on dead coral substrate. 104 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Fic. 45. Acarnus tortilis; encrusting specimen QM GL1538. Fic, 46. Acarnus ternatus; exterior surface of lamellate specimen QM GL2773. ACARNUS FROM AUSTRALIA 105 Fic 48. Acarnus ternatus; photomicrograph of cross-section through choanosome (specimen QM GL715), showing isodictyal reticulation of spiculo-spongin fibres lightly echinated by cladotylotes, and the cavernous architecture. MEMOIRS OF THE (QUEENSLAND MUSEUM BRISBANE © Queensland Museum PO Box 3300, South Brisbane 4101, Australia Phone 06 7 3840 7555 Fax 06 7 3846 1226 Email qmlib@qm.qld.gov.au Website www.qm.qld.gov.au National Library of Australia card number ISSN 0079-8835 NOTE Papers published in this volume and in all previous volumes of the Afemoirs of the Queensland Museum maybe teproduced for scientific research, individual study or other educational purposes. Properly acknowledged quotations may be made but queries regarding the republication of any papers should be addressed to the Editor in Chief. Copies of the journal can be purchased from the Queensland Museum Shop. A Guide to Authors is displayed at the Queensland Museum web site A Queensland Government Project Typeset at the Queensland Museum Mem. Qd Mus. 25(1): 107—133.[1987] CRASPEDOSOMID MILLIPEDES DISCOVERED IN AUSTRALIA: REGINATERREUMA, NEOCAMBRISOMA AND PETERJOHNSIA, NEW GENERA (MYRIAPODA: DIPLOPODA: CRASPEDOSOMIDA) JEAN-PAUL MAURIES Muséum National d’Histoire Naturelle de Paris ABSTRACT The order Craspedosomida has been discovered in Australia (Great Dividing Range) and three new genera are described. Both Reginaterreuma (from NE Queensland) and Neocambrisoma (from NE New South Wales) belong to the suborder Chordeumidea (known also in New Zealand and New Guinea) and the latter is the type genus of a new family. Peterjohnsia, also the type genus of a new family, was collected in the Bellenden Ker Range (NE Queensland) and is the first representative of the suborder Craspedosomoidea to be found in the southern Hemisphere. RESUME Pour la premiére fois, l’ordre des Craspedosomides est signalé en Australie (Great Dividing Range) par trois genres nouveaux. Reginaterreuma (du N.E. du Queensland) et Neocambrisoma (du N.E. des Nouvelles Galles du Sud), ce dernier générotype d’une famille nouvelle, appartiennent au sous-ordre des Chordeumidea (connu de Nouvelle-Zélande et de Nouvelle-Guinée). Peterjohnsia, également générotype d’une nouvelle famille, a été récolté dans les montagnes du Bellenden Ker (N.E. du Queensland); c’est le premier représentant du sous-ordre des Craspedosomoidea dans l’Hémisphére Sud. INTRODUCTION Abundantly represented in all the temperate regions of the Northern Hemisphere, the order Craspedosomida (= Chordeumida auctorum) is rare south of the equator. Till now, it had only been reported in Chili (Eudigona and Apodigona), New Zealand (Schedotrigona) and Indonesia and New Guinea (families Heterochordeumidae and Metopidiothricidae). Unknown in Africa and Madagascar, it was considered absent from Australia until Jeekel (1981) collected some specimens in New South Wales and Tasmania in 1980. Material deposited in the Queensland Museum (QM) contains Craspedosomids collected in 1970 by H. Williams in SE Queensland (Mt Glorious), and in 1975 by R. Monroe and V. Davies north of Cairns (NE Queensland). In 1980, at about the same time as Jeekel, R. Raven also collected specimens in the Coffs Harbour area (New South Wales) and a year later, Peter M. Johns of Christchurch, investigating soil fauna in the Bellenden Ker Range (NE Queensland), collected more abundant material. The whole of this 107 material (except for Jeekel’s, which has been treated by Golovatch (in press)) will be examined here. Three new genera have been observed, two belonging to the suborder Chordeumidea and the third to the Craspedosomidea. Some material has been deposited in the Muséum National d’ Histoire Naturelle de Paris (MNHN). Suborder CHORDEUMIDEA The existence of the suborder Chordeumidea (with the eighth pair of legs reduced and ninth gonopods), as distinct from Craspedosomidea (with the eighth pair of legs gonopods) (regrouping all the other Craspedosomids) is not acknowledged by contemporary authors. It is true that it is no longer possible to oppose Chordeumidea and Craspedosomidea in a Manichean fashion. The mode of sperm transfer and the respective role of the copulatory legs is not known in the base majority of cases and, concerning the relative degree of complexity of the eighth and ninth pairs of legs of males, examples of intermediate structures are numerous, even in the fauna of France, the country where this hypothesis of 108 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Craspedosomid dualism originated (Brolemann 1935). I shall maintain this division here however, even if it has lost the dualistic character it originally possessed, since when only taken as a working hypothesis 1 emphasizes, in an obvious way, the homogeneity of the category constituted by the European Chordeumidae, the Asian Diplomaragnidae, the Indo-Australian Heterochordeumidae and Metopidiothricidae, and the American Conotylidae (among others). [ find it hard to deny this homogeneity by reducing it to convergence, for it is based on a set of gonopodal characters, thus making it less vulnerable on this count than if it had been founded on aspects of external morphology. The number of representatives of the Chordeumidea already known in the Indo- Australian zone, on the one hand by the genus Schedotrigona (New Zealand), and on the other by the genera Heterochordeuma, Sumatreurna, Metopidiothrix and Malavothrix (New Guinea and Indonesia), has been increased by three new genera, two of which are described below (Reginaterreuma ot NE Queensland and Neocambrisoma of New South Wales), The third, Australeuma (from Tasmania) is described by Golovatch (in press), Furthermore, this author has noted the preserice of the genus Schedotrigona in Tasmania. These findings, which [ill in a large geographical gap, seem to establish a link between the forms already mentioned above, and so they are grouped together in the same superfamily Heterochordeumoidea. This new arrangement, that appears further in this text, marks an important change with respect to the system presented by Mauriés. 1978, Thus, the family Schedorrigonidae was placed in a distinct superfamily of the Diplomaragnoidea, with the family Diplomaragnidae. The aim of this work is to review current knowledge about this superfamily as well as to describe new findings. Superfamily HETEROCHORDEUMOIDEA (Pocock, 1894) DIAGNOSIS Chordeumidea (eighth pair: reduced peltogonopods; ninth pair: differentiated coxo- prefemer and voluminous remains of telopodite) with tenth pair modified to store sperm and produce spermatophores (broad sternite, transformed tracheal sacs, reduced telopodites), The other superfamilies of Chordeumidea can be broken down into two groups: one containing those in which the tenth pair of legs in males is not modified (Diplomaragnoidea, Conotyloidea, Acrochordoidea) and the other in which not only the tenth pair, bul also the eleventh and seventh pairs of legs in males are modified (Chordeumoidea). Key TO HETEROCHORDEUMOIDA FAMILIES (Based on male sexual characters) J. Tenth pair of legs, with reduced telopodites but with nearly unmodified sternites. and CORED as totebeporeededetedeor sie togehoserdeteber sedetete svete bes Weterochnrdanniitse (Povock, 1894). Tenth pair of legs, with highly ihigisieg wonites and stermites .........2.6. ccc seeeeeee eee 2 No flagella on either the eighth or ninth pair ROUTH Ae Metopidiothricidae (Attems, 1907). One pair of flagella on the caudal side of eighth pair of legs... Neocambrisomidae nov. One pair of flagella af the base of ninth pair Of lees (oral Side) ........2; ccc cece cep eta sesateatate a Sitesi aan obleale Sehedotrigonidae Mauriés, 1978. ty Fam. HeTEROCHORDEUMIDAE (Pocock, 1894) Our most recent information concerning this family is due to Hoffman (1963), who revised the types. The two genera Heterachordeuma Pocock, 1894 and Sumatreuma Hoffman, 1963 have very simple gonopodal structures. This aspect makes them undoubtedly the most archaic of all the Chordeumoidea, and even the placement of this family in the superfamily can be seriously questioned, since the tenth pair of legs in the male are far less specialized than in the following families. Fam. METOPIDIOTHRICIDAE (Attems, 1907) Known for six species separated into two poorly defined genera, Meropidiothrix Attems, 1907 and Malayothrix Verhoeff, 1929. This family had previously been found in Java, Sumatra, New Guinea, the Bismarck Archipelago {see bibliography in Mauriés, 1978) and Vietnam (Golovatch, pers, comm,). The new Australian genus described below obviously belongs to this family. Reginaterreuma n.g. DIAGNosiIS Chordeumidea (eighth pair peltogonopods, ninth pair gonopods), Heterochordeumoidea (tenth pair paragonopods), Metopidiothricidae (no flagella on eighth or ninth pairs), differing from the other genera mainly in that its peltogonopods CRASPEDOSOMID MILLIPEDES IN AUSTRALIA 109 (eighth pair of male) are reduced to a small unpaired sternal shield. On the gonopods (ninth pair), the coxal differentiations are at last bifid. Adults have 32 rings, preadults 30. Of interest is the frequency (undoubtedly due to the favourable collecting time) of spermatophores both in males (on the tenth pair of legs) and in females. These spermatophores seem to have been made by coagulation in sacs attached to the tracheal tracts of the male tenth pair of legs. The walls of these sacs are membranous, but certain parts are sclerotized, which gives to each species a characteristic shape of sphermatophore. TYPE SPECIES Reginaterreuma monroei n.sp. ETYMOLOGY Reginaterra, Latin for ‘Queensland’, and the suffix ‘ewma’, which has no particular meaning, but is frequently used in the suborder for the sake of uniformity with the oldest name Chordeuma. Reginaterreuma monroei n.sp. MATERIAL EXAMINED Ho .otype: Australia, NE. Queensland, Mount Finlay (15°50°S/145°13’E), Nov.29-Dec.4, 1975, R. Monroe and V. Davies, 1¢ (QM S.1460) PARATYPE: Same data as holotype, 1? (QM S.1461). OTHER MATERIAL: Same area as types, Shiptons Flat (15°48’S/145°15’E), Nov.16-21, 1975, R. Monroe and V. Davies, 1¢ 12 1 juvenile (QM S.1462). Same area, ‘12 miles Scrub’, litter (15°50°S/145°19’E), 14 12 juvenile (MNHN DB.33). DESCRIPTION Overall colour light brown, rather evenly speckled, ventrally lighter. Head: convex head capsule, covered with short, fine setae; prominent mandibular stipes. Gnathochilarium: mentum and promentum. Antennae with slightly clavate antennomeres, 0.8 mm long on the ¢ holotype (0.02+ 0.10+ 0.24+ 0.16+ 0.18+ 0.12+ 0.02 mm.); the length of antennal ‘club’ (distal part, straight and clavate, of antenna, from the Sth antennomere on) is 6.5 times their width. Eyes with few ocelli (9-13) arranged in five or six rows of 1-3 ocelli forming a small anteroposteriorly elongated, pigmented patch. Collum in half circle, with 3+3 thick macrosetae arranged in a circular arc, equidistant from each other on either side, the innermost being located midway between the middle one and the middorsal groove. Midbody rings: narrow middorsal groove; metatergal laterodorsal shoulders only slightly developed but very distinct, the posterior profile revealing two indentations inserted between the macrosetae; the latter (3+3) are long and thick, the outermost being longer than the middle one which is longer than the innermost; they are placed quite laterally, and each is equidistant from other on either side; but the distance between the innermost and the middorsal groove is three times that between it and the middle macrosetae; the three form a 160° angle. Epiproct with a pair of dorsal macrosetae; the caudal side is almost straight and bears the usual pair of spinnerets; lateral posterior edge with two setae on each side. Legs are slightly longer than the vertical diameter of the body (0.70 mm in the male holotype); 54 pairs in adults. MALE SEXUAL CHARACTERS: Convex head. 44 pairs of legs posterior to the transformed legs. Nothing particular about first to seventh pairs (neither gibbosities nor processes) except that they are a bit sturdier than the other legs. Eight pair (peltogonopods, Fig. 1) reduced to a simple unpaired shield of coxosternal origin; telopodites tiny stumps, no flagella. Ninth pair (gonopods, Figs 1-2) like those characteristic of most Heterochordeumoidea, having a voluminous telopodite forming an incrassate oval, carried by a simple stalk (prefemur). They can be distinguished by the part TABLE 1. Reginaterreuma monroei: Measurements (mm), number of rings (N) and ocelli. Vertical N Length diameter Mt. Finlay ¢ holotype 7 Mt. Finlay ° paratype 32 8 Shiptons Flat 7 32 75 Shiptons Flat ? 32 8.5 12 mile Scrub ¢ 32 9 12 mile Scrub ° 32 8.5 12 mile Scrub 2}. 5.7 Antenna length Collum width Ocelli 11(1.2.3.3.2) 11(1.2.2.3.2.1) 12(1.2.3.2.3.1) 10(1.1.2.2.3.1) 13(1.2.3.3.2.2) 10(1.1.2.3.2.1) 9(1.2.3.2.1) 110 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Fics 1-4. Reginaterreuma monroein.g., n.sp., holotype: 1. eighth pair (peltogonopods, in foreground) and ninth pair (gonopods), oral view; 2. isolated 9th left leg, oral view; 3. tenth pair, oral view, with spermatophore in place; 4. caudal view of the same. CRASPEDOSOMID MILLIPEDES IN AUSTRALIA i that is of coxal origin, which here is divided into two processes of unequal length; the anterior one (K) is long, with its extremity curving distad, and a posterior one (k) clearly much shorter. Tenth pair (paragonopods, Figs 3-4) spindly four-jointed telopodites (T 10), bent between the first and second article and again between the third and fourth; the coxosternum forms mediad, a pair of horns fused at the base and diverging distally, as long as the first telopodite article. The tenth pair of legs are especially interesting because, on the caudal side, can be found a pair of ample and deep membranous sacs (sp), probably of tracheal 0,1 mm origin and having walls supported by a vague framework of thick sclerotized material. These pockets undoubtedly serve as a sperm receptacle and also produce a pair of spermatophores, each made of an agglomeration of coagulable substances and spermatids or spermatozoids. Eleventh pair : no coxal glands nor any other special trait. FEMALE SEXUAL CHARACTERS: The spermatophores mentioned above have also been found in female genital tracts. They have kept the shape they acquired in the receptacles on tenth pair of legs of the male (compare Figs 3 and 6). In the Fics 5-7. Reginaterreuma monroei n.g., 1.sp., ~ paratype: 5, base of second pair, vulvae, and spermatophores seen within the right receptacle; 6. isolated spermatophore, removed from its receptacle (mesal view); 7. the same external lateral view. 112 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM females, they have been observed placed posteriorly to the vulvae, on a level with the posterior edge of the fourth ring. Instead of being in a dilatation of the oviduct wall, they appear to be in a cul-de-sac opening between the sternite of second pair of legs and the vulvae (Fig. 5). The latter are characterized mainly by the internal valves being fused sagitally into a single posterior median unpaired plate. ETYMOLOGY This species is named after one of the collectors. Reginaterreuma daviesae n.sp. MATERIAL EXAMINED Ho .otyPe: Australia, NE. Queensland, Mount Bartle Frere, NW. Centre Peak Ridge, rainforest (sieved litter), alt. 1400-1500 m., Oct. 7 and 8, 1981, Berlese No. 358, 12 (QM 8.1464). PARATYPES: QM 8.1465, 2%, same data as holotype. QM §.1466, 1¢, 22, same locality, Nov. 7 and 8, 1981. DESCRIPTION Overall colour brown, with lines of whitish spots: one laterodorsal pair of lines (on the prozonite at the macrosetae level0 and one lateroventral pair. Especially the head but sometimes also the collum, epiproct and paraprocts are yellow-orange. Species larger than the precedent one. Metatergal shoulders as in R. monroei but with macrosetae almost in a row. The latter are equidistant from each other and distance between the innermost and the middorsal groove is 2.6 times that between the setae. MALE SEXUAL CHARACTERS: Third to seventh pairs of legs with telopodites barely thicker than the other legs, as in R. monroei, but here coxal processes are found, pronounced on fifth and sixth, insignificant on seventh pairs. Eighth pair (peltogonopods, Fig. 9) shorter and narrower than in R. monroei with no trace of telopodital stumps, but with a wider base. The extremity, moderately bifid and bearing several short setae, is enlarged subdistad by an anterior transversal crest (a). Ninth pair (gonopods, Fig. 8) chiefly distinguished by the shape of the distal part of the large coxal process (K). Here, the bend followed by a seminal (?) groove, is ornamented on the exterior (therefore distad) by a languet (g). The small coxal process (k) has a mushroom-shaped extremity. Tenth pair (paragonopods, Figs 10-11) as in R. monroei but with a very elongated prefemur and the stumpy telopodal remains. Spermatophore receptacles much shorter than in R. monroei. Eleventh-thirteenth pairs of legs with ventral extensions on coxites, slight on eleventh pair, fairly long and wide on twelfth, fairly long and narrow on thirteenth. FEMALE SEXUAL CHARACTERS: Vulvae (Fig. 13) fairly similar to those in R. monroei but with a broader unpaired median posterior plate formed by the fusion of the internal valves of each vulva. Here the coxites of the second pair of legs have slight dorsointernal extensions. Fig. 14 shows a spermatophore taken from the genital tract of a female : it differs from those observed in R. monroei in its general shape and the smaller surface of the granular zone where the sexual cells seem to be concentrated (compare with Fig.3 and 6). ETYMOLOGY Species cordially dedicated to Valerie Davies, past Curator of Arachnids at the Queensland Museum. Reginaterreuma unicolor n.sp. MATERIAL EXAMINED Ho otype: Australia, NE. Queensland, Bellenden Ker Range, Westgid Creek (North Branch), alt. 100 m., Berlese No. 351 (sieved litter), Nov. 1, 1981, 17 (QM S.1467) PARATYPES: Same data as holotype, 1¢ 2° 34j. (QM S.1468), 12 1° paratypes (MNHN DB 33). Same locality, same data, 12j., 1° (QM S.1470), Berlese No. 353. TABLE 2. Reginaterreuma daviesae: Measurements (mm), number of rings (N) and ocelli. | <= bc wean ccar™. Dk la cicse ca kh canilke a agate N Length sais Width Ocelli iameter ? holotype 32 8 1 1.2 18(1.2.3.4.4.4) @ paratype 32 9 0.8 | 18(1.2.3.4.4.4) ? paratype 32 10 1.2 1,4 19(2.3.4.5.5) 2 paratype 32 10.5 1.2 1.4 22(1.2.3.3.4.4.5) 2 paratype 32 10.5 1 1:2 19(1.2.3.4.4.5) ° paratype 32 11.5 1.1 1.4 19(1.2.3.4.5.4) CRASPEDOSOMID MILLIPEDES IN AUSTRALIA 113 Fias 8-10. Reginaterreuma daviesae n.g., n.sp., 7 holotype: 8. isolated ninth left leg, oral view; 9. eighth pair, caudal view; 10. tenth pair, oral view (telopodites and sternite). 114 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM OTHER MATERIAL: Same area, Bellenden Ker Range, Cableway Base Station, alt. 100 m., Oct. 17-24, 1981, 27 2) (QM S.1471). Same locality, Berlese No. 306, 14 2j. (QM S,1472). Same area, Hilltop 5.5 km north of Mount Lewis, alt. 1200 m., Berlese No. 299, Sept. 13, 1981, G. Monteith and D, Cook, 12 (QM 8.1473). DESCRIPTION A more or less mottled brownish color all over, often with lighter laterodorsal and lateroventral spots as in R. daviesae, but here the head, epiprocts and paraprocts are brown. The two young females collected (Berlese No. 306) have 15 rings 16 legpairs and 3(1,2) ocelli, MALE SEXUAL CHARACTERS: First-seventh pairs of legs have no modifications, not even in the coxites. Eight pair (peltogonopods, Fig. 15) platelike, very similar to those of R. daviesae : anterior concavity bordered distad by two short divergent arms (a = homologous to the transversal crest of R. monroei); the extremity forms two elongated parasagittal lobes that fit in between the prefemurs of the ninth pair (gonopods). Q),] 0 Sea Fias 11-12, Reginaterreuma daviesae o.g., n.sp., ‘ holotype: 11. tenth pair with spermatophore (right side) in its place in sac, oral view; 12. spermatophore removed from sac on the tenth pair, seen from internal side. CRASPEDOSOMID MILLIPEDES IN AUSTRALIA 15 ¢ OQ. mm O,] Fics 13-14, Reginaterreuma daviesae n.g., n.sp., 2 paratype: 13, base of second pair and yulyae, caudal view; 14. spermatophore removed from extravulvar receptacle, seen from internal side. TABLE 3. Reginaterreuma unicolor: Measurements (mm), number of rings (N) and ocelli, N Loc. tip. * holotype 32 10 * paratype 32 75 + paratype 32 7 * paratype 32 9 paratype 32 10.3 * paratype 32 9 +]. paratype 30 7 ij. paratype 30 7 Berl. 353 4). paratype 30 5.5 Vertical diameter 0.80 1.10 17(1.2.3.4.4.3) 0.80 1.10 16(1.2.3.4.3,3) 0.70 0.95 14(1.2.3.4.3.1) 1 1.30 17(1.2.3.3.4.4) 1 1.30 17(1.2.3.4.4.3) 0.80 1.10 17(1.2.3.4,4.3) 0.70 0.95 14(1.2.3.4.4) 0.75 1 14(1,2.3.4.4) 0.70 0.85 12(1.2.3.3.2.1) Ninth pair (gonopods, Fig. 16): distal segment of the telopodite longer than in R. monroei. The coxal process (K) bears an accessory branch (k’) on its posterior side. Tenth pair (paragonopods, Figs 17-18) with telopodites reduced to a slender prefemur (which is slightly clavate distad) bearing a vestigial bud on its extremity. Coxal horns of slight length. No spermatophore has been observed in this species. Eleventh pair: coxites without coxal sacs and with a distal projection covered with a tuft of long, thick hairs. The coxites of the more posterior legs have large, straight, unprotruding distal edges. PRE-ADULT MALE CHARACTERS: Figs 19-21 represent the eighth, ninth and tenth pairs of legs of the only preadult male collected. He has 30 rings and 48 leg pairs. The eighth pair is practically reduced to sternites; on the ninth, the coxites show no differentiation; on the tenth, the future adult paramedian horns appear like small internal coxal laminae (k). 116 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Fics 15-18. Reginaterreuma unicolor n.g., n.sp., * holotype: 15. isolated eighth pair, oral view; 16. ninth right leg, oral view; 17. 10th pair and spermatophore, caudal view; 18. tenth pair, oral view. CRASPEDOSOMID MILLIPEDES IN AUSTRALIA 117 FEMALE SEXUAL CHARACTERS: Vulvae (Fig. 22) closely resemble those of the other species; but the sagittal welding of the internal valves is less obvious and the median posterior plate is narrower than that of R. daviesae, although the coxites of the second pair are similar to those of the latter species. Reginaterreuma major n.sp. MATERIAL EXAMINED Ho ortype: Australia, NE. Queensland, Bellenden Ker Range, summit, TV Station, alt. 1560 m., Oct. 23-31, 1981. 1¢ (QM S.1474). PARATYPES: Same data as holotype, 27 102 (QM §.1475), 1¢ 12 (MNHN, DB 33). Same locality, Fics 19-22, Reginaterreuma unicolor n.g., n.sp., preadult ¢ and ¢ paratype: 19. ninth pair of preadult 7; 20. eighth pair of the same; 21. tenth pair of the same; 22. base of second pair, vulvae (oral view) and right receptacle of a female paratype. 118 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM rainforest, sieved litter, Nov. 1-7, 1981, Berlese No. 338, 224 22 1j. (QM S.1476). Same loc., same date, Berlese No. 335 (QM S.1477) 12. Same loc., same date, rainforest, stick brushings, Berlese No. 342, 12 (QM S.1478). DESCRIPTION As shown by the measurements (Table 4) this species is the largest of the four. Both its habitus and colouration are similar to those of the others. It is brownish, darker than the other species, with clearly distinct whitish lateroventral and laterodorsal stripes; the head is orange-yellow, like that of R. daviesae, but the epiproct is brown and the paraproct white. The position of macrosetae and the shape of the metatergal shoulders are like those of daviesae. MALE SEXUAL CHARACTERS: Third-seventh pairs are a bit sturdier than the other leg pairs. Eighth pair (peltogonopods, Fig. 23), resemble those of monroei, but are different in that they have a transverse ridge located just above the middle oral side (a). This ridge is also found in R. daviesae and R. unicolor, but its position and shape are different. Ninth pairs (gonopods, Fig. 23) almost identical to those of monroei. There is only a difference in the shape of the short posterior coxal branch (k), whose distal half narrows sharply. Tenth pair (paragonopods, Figs 24-25) with four-segmented weak telopodites, the first segment of which is longer than the other three. Slender paramedian coxosternal horns. Wide spermatophore receptacle sacs like those in R. daviesae. Eleventh-thirteenth pairs as in R. unicolor. FEMALE SEXUAL CHARACTERS: In their general appearance, the vulvae (Fig. 26) are very similar to those in unicolor, but here there is not visible trace of the sagittal welding of the unpaired plate (formed by the union of both internal valves). Worth noting is the existence, under the cul-de-sac formed by the receptacle, of a glandular formation (g) that seems to be connected to the tracheal sacs of the second pair of legs by means of a sinuous groove on the oral side. Fig. 27 shows the spermatophore taken from the left side (exactly the same one that is seen in Fig. 26; here it is presented medially. Fam. NEOCAMBRISOMIDAE nov. DIAGNOSIS Chordeumidea (eighth pair : peltogonopods, ninth pair gonopods), Heterochordeumoidea (tenth pair paragonopods) characterized by the presence of a pair of long flagella set on the caudal side of the base of the peltogonopods. TyYPE-GENUS Neocambrisoma n.g. KEY TO GENERA Eighth pair (peltogonopods) marked mediad by a thick unpaired process. Metazonites with smooth tegument ...............eeeeeee Neocambrisoma n.g. Eighth pair (peltogonopods) mediad lacking an unpaired process. Metazonites with rough teguments ..... Australeuma Golovatch (in press). Neocambrisoma n.g. DIAGNOSIS Heterochordeumoidea, Neocambrisomidae with the eighth pair of legs (peltogonopods) having TABLE 4. Reginaterreuma major: Measurements (mm), number of rings (N) and ocelli. Vertical . N Length Aintibter Width Ocelli ————__ — — * holotype 32 13 0.9 1.3 17(1.2.3.4.4.3) @ paratype 32 11 0.8 - 16(1.2.2.3.4.4) * paratype 32 9.5 0.8 - 19(1.2.3.4.5.4) ¢ paratype 32 11 1 1,25 19(1.2.3.4.5.4) 2 paratype 32 14 1.1 1.5 19(1.2.3.4.5.4) 2 paratype 32 13.5 1.2 - 17(1.2.3.4.4.3) ° paratype 32 10.5 1.1 ~ 18(1.2.3.4.4.4) ? paratype 32 1] 1.2 - 18(1.2.3.4.4.4) ? paratype 32 ? 1.1 - 15(1.2.3.3.3.3) 2 paratype 32 13 1.1 - 19(1.2.3.4.5.4) 2 paratype 32 13.5 1.1 - 18(1.2.3.4.4.4) ? paratype 32 12 1.1 1.5 17(1.2.3.4.3.2.2) 2 paratype 32 14 1.2 - 17(1.2.3.4.4.3) ° paratype 32 11 1.2 - 18(1,.2.3.4.4.4) CRASPEDOSOMID MILLIPEDES \N AUSTRALIA 119 Fics 23-25. Reginaterreuma major n.g., n.sp., ¢ holotype: 23, eighth and ninth pairs, oral view; 24. tenth pair, oral view: 25. tenth pair, with right spermatophore, caudal view. 120 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM sturdy flagella and a pronounced unpaired median projection. The ninth pair of legs (gonopods) with coxal process forming a rectangular lamina. The 10th pair with telopodites that are extended but have only two to four segments (stumps in Australeuma). Smooth metazonites, with 3+3 thick macrosetae. 32 rings in both sexes. TYPE-SPECIES Neocambrisoma raveni n.sp. ETYMOLOGY Neocambria, Latin for New Wales, and the Greek latinized suffix soma : body. Neocambrisoma raveni n.sp. MATERIAL EXAMINED Hovotype: Australia, New South Wales, Coffs Harbour, Bruxner Forest Park, Nov. 12, 1980, R.J. Raven, 1 ¢ (QM S.1479). PARATYPES: Same data as holotype, 3¢ 1¢j. 82 1 j. (QM 8.1480); 1¢ 12 1¢j. (MNHN DB 33). DESCRIPTION Colour: dark brown middorsal stripe between two lighter, narrow laterodorsal stripes, brown on the metazonites, whitish on the prozonites. The ventral part of the flanks is light brown on the prozonites, whitish on the metazonites. Legs are 0,1 mn Fics 26-27. Reginaterreuma major n.g., n.sp., 2 paratype: 26. base of second pair, vulvae (oral view) and right receptacle with spermatophore; 27. spermatophore removed from receptacle, mesal view. CRASPEDOSOMID MILLIPEDES IN AUSTRALIA light brown, growing darker distad. Epiproct is entirely dark brown (paraprocts are lighter). Head capsule and cheeks are light brown, clypeolabrum is whitish, with a yellow patch between the antennae. Convex head capsule, densely covered with short, fine setae; prominent mandibular stipes; trident labrum; gnathochilarium (Fig. 36) with trapezoidal mentum separated from the stipes by a small triangular area. Antennae whose antennomeres, especially the most distal ones, are slightly clavate and measure 1.2 mm on the male holotype (0.05 + 0.18 + 0.30 + 0.20 + 0.27 + 0.17 + 0.13 mm) and 1.4 mm on the largest female. The length of the antennal ‘club’ is 5.5 times its width. Eyes: few ocelli (14-17 in adults), arranged in an anteroposteriorly extended pigmented field, in six or seven (rarely eight) transversal rows of one to four ocelli (see above table). Collum in a half circle with rounded angles; the 3+3 macrosetae are equidistant from each other on each side and the innermost is located exactly between the middle one and the middorsal groove. Midbody rings: narow, distinct middorsal groove; metatergal shoulders in a laterodorsal position, nearly forming keels and bearing three long*macrosetae (0.3 mm on the male holotype), that are thick and curved slightly backwards. They are placed in a transverse line on the posterior rings but form an open angle (about 150°) on the midbody ones; on each side, they are nearly equidistant from each other and the distance separating them is half that between the innermost and the middorsal groove. 121 Epiproct as in Reginaterreuma. The length of the legs equals the width of the body (1.1 mm in the ¢ holotype); the adult has 54 pairs (the thirtieth ring is hemiapodous, i.e. has only one pair of legs). ADULT MALE SEXUAL CHARACTERS: Sixth and seventh pairs thicker than the others pairs. Deformed tarsus and prefemur (Fig. 28). Eighth pair (peltogonopods, Figs 29-30) reduced to a sternite projected by a large unpaired median process surrounded by two vestigal telopodites (T8), but noteworthy mainly for the existence of a pair of sturdy flagella (F) on the caudal side of its sternal band. Among millipedes, flagella, similar in structure and also located on the caudal side of the eighth pair, are frequent in Iulids and Blaniulids, and exist in Cambalids, certain Craspedosomids and, in Chordeumids only in the genus Lankasoma. Ninth pair (gonopods, Fig. 3) characteristic of those found in many Chordeumidea, in particular because their telopodite (T9) forms an incrassate, elongated mass attached to a simple prefemoral stem (pf). The coxal process (K) appears as a simple subrectangular lamina with its internal edge slightly thickened and without any trace of a groove or furrow as in Reginaterreuma. Tenth pair (paragonopods, Fig. 32) with reduced, three-segmented telopodites (T10), each flanked on its oral side by a slightly shorter falciform process (f); two enormous sacs (sp) are invaginated in the sternite (wide rectangular band); these sacs are surrounded and supported by tracheal tracts, and as in Reginaterreuma, they TABLE 5. Neocambrisoma raveni: Measurements (mm), number of rings (N) and ocelli. N Length Sasi Width Ocelli ¢ holotype 32 12 0.85 1.1 17(1.2.3.3.3.2.2.1) * paratype 32 13.5 0.80 - 15(1.3.3.2.3.3) ? paratype 32 J iss 0.80 - 14(2.2.2.3.3.2) * paratype 32 10.5 0.90 - 15(1.2.3.3.3.3) + paratype 32 10.8 0.80 = 17(1.3.3.3.3.4) 4j, paratype 30 9.5 0.75 - 12(1.2.2.2.2.3) *j. paratype 30 9 0.75 0.95 12(1,2.3.2.2.2) 2 paratype 32 11 0.90 1.20 16(1.2.3.3.3.2.2) > paratype 32 11.5 0.95 1.40 16(1.2.3.3.3.2.2) 2 paratype 32 11 J - 15(1.2.3.3.3.2.1) ° paratype 32 11.7 0.80 - 15(1.2.3.3.3.2.1) > paratype 32 11.7 0.80 - 14(2,3.3.3,3) 2? paratype 32 10.8 0.90 - 16(1.2.1.3.3.3.3) { paratype 32 9.7 0.75 - 15(1,.2,2.2.3.3.2) 2 paratype 32 11.5 0.70 - 15(1.2.3.3.3.3) > paratype 32 10.5 0.95 - 15(1.2,3.3.3,3) :j. paratype 30 8 0.70 - 13(1.2.2.2.3.3) | poomil® 122 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Fics 28-32. Neocambrisoma raveni n.g., n.sp., ¢ holotype: 28. telopodite and coxite of 7th pair; 29. 8th pair, oral view; 30. same, caudal view; 31. ninth right leg, oral view; 32. tenth pair, oral view. CRASPEDOSOMID MILLIPEDES IN AUSTRALIA 123 obviously play a part in sperm storage prior Lo spermatophore production. Pre-ADuLT MALE SpxuAL CHARACTERS! The young males with 30 rings have 48 leg pairs (38 pairs posterior to the paragonopods). They therefore have 3 apodous rings (including the epiproct) and one hemiapodous ring. Eighth pair (Fig. 34) reduced to a low crescent- shaped band on which can be found buds of coxal Origin (f) that will grow into the adult's flagella. Telopodite traces (t) can be recognized by the pigmentary spots, cach with a tuft of setae. Ninth pair (Pig. 33) already showing adult structure, except that the last segment of the lelopodite, is less voluminous and che prefemur is shorter and sturdier. The coxite is split longitudinally along the caudal side. Tenth pair (Fig. 35) with an unmodified sternite, coxites without coxal glands and telopodites reduced to six segments, the three most distal being clearly regressive. Female SeXUAL CHARACTERS: Fig. 37 shows the yvulvae, which have no special characteristics. Extra-vulvar structures similar to those found in Regikaterreuma females. have not been observed here. EryMoLocy Species cordially dedicated to its. collector, the Curator of Arachnology at the Queensland Museum, Robert J, Raven, Neocambrisoma sp, MaTERIAL EXAMINED Australia, SE. Queensland, Mount Glorious; litter, Oct. 28, 1970, H. Williams, | 2 juy. (QM); same area, Nov. 18, 1970, H.W., | * (QM). REMARKS In all probability a new species, that will described when the adult male is discovered. Fam, SCHEPOTRIGONIDAF Mauriés, 1978 This monogeneric family was previously known only in New Zealand (cf, Mauriés, 1978), A new species Schedatrigona tasmanica Golovatch (in press) has been discovered by Jeekel in Tasmania. Suborder CRASPEDOSOMIDEA The Craspedosomidea are known in the temperate and certain subtropical zones of the Northern Hemisphere, but have nor been previously recorded in the Southern Hemisphere. The closest records to Australia.are from southern India (Pygmeosoma) and Japan (Macrochaeteuma). It was therefore a great surprise for the author to discover a Craspedosomid in material collected from the mountains south of Cairns (Bellenden Ker Range, Bartle Frere) by Professor Peter M. Johns. It seems confined to this area and is without doubt anew genus, Peferjohnsia, very warmly dedicated to its discoverer. This new genus is easily placed in the superfamily Cleidogonoidea (a large group of both Palearctic and Nearctic families) whose diagnosis and contents are still far from fixed and agreed on by the specialists (see Shear 1979; Hoffman 1979; Mauriés 1982; Mauriés & Geoffroy 1983), In light of these difficulties and on the basis, taken arbitrarily, of Shear’s diagnosis of the superfamily (1979) and those of Mauriés for the family (1981), a new family was created for the new genus Peterjohnsiu. Superfamily CLEIDOGONOIDEA (Cook, 1896) DIAGNOSIS Eighth pair of legs of the male (gonopods), forming a block that is generally more or less transversely divided into two parts: an anterior part (sternite and angiocoxile) and a posterior part (colpocoxite and telopadite); the telopodite is always regressive (consisting of no more than a short stem or flagellum or small shield, or fused with the calpocoxite, The ninth pair of legs of the male (paragonopods) regressive usually simple. Gnathochilarium : mentum and promentum. Adults have 26-32 rings, A list of famihes accompaniéd by their diagnoses were given by Mauriés (1982). These diagnoses are based essentially on gonopodal structures (eighth pair of legs of the male) and mainly on the relative development of three essential parts « a) telopodite, b) colpocoxite, c) afigiocoxite + sternite, and on the telopodite’s shape, position and degree of autonomy. The aim of the succint key below, which uses these characteristics, is to place this new family in relation ta the others: Key 10 CLEIDOQONOIDEA FAMILIES 1. Eighth pairs of legs of the male: telopadite more or less fused with the colpocoxite making it difficult or impossible to distinguish................. tyevk sso. Families Anthogonidae, Cleidogonidae, Rhiscosomididae, Tingupidae, Trichopetalidae. Fighth pair: lelopodite forming a flagellum, short stem, small plate or stump ..... paresiopaverootshepend v 2. Fighth pair : telopodite forming a flagellum or short stem, set laterally but inside the gonopodal 124 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Fics 33-37. Neocambrisoma raveni n.g., n.sp., preadult * and 2, paratypes: 33. ninth pair of preadult male, caudal view; 34. eighth pair of the same; 35. tenth pair of the same; 36. gnathochilarium of a ° paratype; 37. base of second pair and vulvae of the same CRASPEDOSOMID MILLIPEDES IN AUSTRALIA 125 block between the anterior and posterior parts and therefore often hiddett 2.2.4. 20 Beedees decker a Pan oi es aie Families Brachychaeteumidae, Macrochaeteumidae, ?Niponiosomidae, Eighth pair : telopodite a short stem, small shield or stump set outside the gonopodial block and PH ETEL ORS VAST Eas Mitan de een uekey'e Mechta tay oo 3 3. Eighth pair : telopodite forming a short stem.. Sear Families Branneriidae, Chamaesomidae, Kashmireumidae. Eighth pair : telopodite forming a stump or small subrectangular shield, bearing several setae distad eieet'n bo'v's tevieats a Family Peterjohnsiidae nov., for the single genus Peterjohnsia. Peterjohnsia n.g. DIAGNOSIS Eighth pair of legs of the male (gonopods) with telopodites quite distinct from the colpocoxites, forming a subrectangular lamella not as wide as it is long, setigerous distad; colpocoxites forming elongated laminae clearly separated from each other by a large unpaired median process of the sternite. Ninth pair of legs of the male (paragonopods) with sternites forming a wide concave rectangular plate anteriorly, bearing telopodites similar to those on the gonopods. 30 rings in males, 32 in females. Rough teguments. Small soil forms (maximum length 6 mm). TYPE-SPECIES Peterjohnsia basimontana n.sp. Peterjohnsia basimontana n.sp. MATERIAL EXAMINED Hotorype: Australia, NE. Queensland, Bellenden Ker Range, Cableway base, alt. 100 m., Oct. 17-24, 1981, 17 (QM 8.1481). PARATYPE: Same data as holotype, 77 27j 9° and j. (QM 8.1482); 24 22 (MNHN, DA 213). OTHER MATERIAL: Same area, Bellenden Ker Range, 1 km. south of Cable Tower 6, Oct. 17-24, 1981, alt. 500 m., Berlese No. 310, 12 1j. (QM 8.1483); same locality, same date, Berlese No. 314, 17 19 (QM 8.1484); Berlese No. 317 124j. 12 12 (QM S.1485); Berlese No. 319, 3: 1j. (QM 8.1486); Berlese No. 320, 12j. 2°}. (QM S.1487); same area, 1/2 km. south of Cable Tower 7, alt. 500 m., Nov, 3-5, 1981, 1¢ 1° (QM S.1488). DESCRIPTION Overall colour brownish, more or less speckled, except for a white fusiform middorsal stripe that is fairly wide but narrows progressively anteriorly and posteriorly. It should be noted that the length of certain individuals (values in parentheses in the Table 6) is exaggerated because of poor fixation. The number of rings (32) and of leg pairs (54) indicate that adult females have two apodous rings (including the epiproct) and one hemiapodous. Males, like preadult females, have 48 leg pairs, of which three are apodous (including the epiproct) TABLE 6. Peterjohnsia basimontana: Measurements (mm), number of rings (N), leg pairs (Ip) and ocelli. a es eS a a a cs | N Ip Length Phat Width Ocelli Pg ¢ holotype 30 48 3 0.30 0.34 10(1.2.3.3.1) + paratype 30 48 4.6 0.33 0.37 10(1.2.3,.3.1) * paratype 30 48 4 0.25 0.28 10(1.2.4.3) ¢ paratype 30 48 3 0.29 0.34 9(1.2.3.3) ¢ paratype 30 48 3.7 0.30 0.34 ? ¢ paratype 30 48 3.6 0.36 pr eae * paratype 30 48 3 0.36 F Dye ¢ paratype 30 48 4.6 0.36 0.40 11(1.2.3.3.2) aj. (A-1) 27 40 2.25 0.25 0.28 8(1.2.3.2) 43. (A-1) 27 40 2.90 0,30 0.34 9(1.2.3.3.2) 2 paratype 32 54 (6.5) 0.46 0.52 11(1.2.3.3.2) 2 paratype 32 54 4.8 0.40 0.45 11(1.2.3.3.2) 2 paratype 32 54 (7.1) 0.45 0.51 11(1.2.3.3.2) 2 paratype 32 54 5.7 0.40 0.45 11(1.2.3.3.2) 2 paratype 32 54 (7.1) 0.46 0.52 12(1.2.3.3.3) 2 paratype 32 54 (6.1) 0.38 0.43 11(1.2.3.3.2) 2 paratype 32 54 4.6 0.44 0.50 11(1.2.3.3.2) 2 paratype 32 54 (7.3) 0.46 0.52 12(1.2.3.3.3) ?j. (A-1) 30 48 3.4 0.35 0.40 10(1.2.3.3.1) 9j. (A-2) 27 40 (4.4) 0.31 0.35 8(1.2.3.2) 2). (A-3) 23 32 3 0.25 0.28 7(1.2.3.1) ee 126 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Fics 38-41. Peterjohnsia basimontana n.g., n.sp., 2 paratype: 38. oral view of the left half of the midbody ring; 39. dorsal view of the same; 40. vulvae, caudal view; 41. the same, distal view. CRASPEDOSOMID MILLIPEDES IN AUSTRALIA 127 — ae 0,1 mun aE i OS ee eee se . SS Fics 42-45. Peterjohnsia basimontana n.g., n.sp., ¢ holotype: 42. eighth pair (gonopods), lateral view; 43. the same, oral view; 44. same, caudal view; 45. isolated ninth pair (paragonopods), caudal view. 12g MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM and one hemiapodous. Young female witl) 27 rings, at stage A(adult)-2, like preadult males (at stage A-1), have 40 leg pairs, apodous rings (including the epiproct) and on hemiapodous. t was able to observe eight pairs of podous buds on this young female, which clearly indicates that it belongs to the stage preceding the preadult one (A- 2). The only young female with 23 rings had 32 leg pairs (and 8 pairs of podous buds!) and therefore 4 apodous rings (including the epiproet) and one hemiapodous ring, thus putting her at the A-3 stage. Short head capsule, with convex hairy face. Short, sturdy antennae (their length is equal to the width of an average metazonite): the length of the antennal club is 3 to 3.5 times longer than its Width. The eyes are made up of a small number of pigmented ocelli (9-12 in adults) arranged in a lorigitudinally elongated oval patch, Gnathochilarium with divided mentum (triangular promentum; trapezoidal mentum); external palpus of the stipes is elongated (its length is 2.5 times its width) and is oblique and bears five spinnerets; the internal palpus is sturdy and enlarged distad, not yuile as long as wide, with 8-10 spinnerets in its apical region. !2-combed mandibles. Midbody rings : The surface of the metatergites is rough and granular. This aspect is not caused by small scales as in Chamaesoma, Xystrosoma or Tingupa, but is due to tiny hemispherical or truncated protuberances vaguely lined in ten or so transversal rows (Fig. 39). Each row contains about 30 granules on each side of the middorsal groove, Here and there, about every three to five granules is inserted a minute seta of the same length as the granules, The 3+3 macrosetae are long and thick (their length reaches 2/5 the width of the metazonites); the two outermost stick far out to the side while the innermost is a bit nearer to the middle one than to the middorsal groove. The metatergal shoulder is poorly developed and located midway up the flanks (Fig. 38)- Epiproct common, with a dorsal macroseta and two setue on either side. Short legs, length less than the prozonite diameter. Mart Sexual CHARACTERS; Nothing special about the legs located before and after the gono- and paragonopods; no coxal glands on 10th and 11th pairs. Eighth pair (gonopods, Figs 42-44) formed on either side and behind of a long median stalk sprouting from the oral transversal sternal band. This stalk gets progressively larger and forms, subdistad, a laterodistal angle on each side (s) and middistad, a club-like structure (S). Angiocoxites (A) set posteriorly, not fused sagittally, growing progressively thinner from the base to the summit and becoming bifid halfway up : a short branch (a)in the caudal position and a long one (b) further forward; the latter’s anterior profile is denticulated (¢), Colpocoxites (K) forming two plates separated both by the sternal projection and the angiocoxites; their distal profile is regularly rounded, their oral side scattered with several small setae, their caudal side marked by a heavy subdistal transversal crest bearing two thick setae and extended on the internal distal side by a small leaf (k) whose edge, when viewed laterally (Fig. 42), appears to be partially cut into spines. Finally the telopodites look exteriorly like subrectangular plates with rounded distal edges and three or four long and sturdy setae. Ninth pair (paragonopods, Fig. 45) reduced to a large subtrapezoidal sternite flanked by stumps (telopodites, T9) like those on the gonopod. Female SEXUAL-‘CHARACTERS: The vulvae (Figs 40-4]) are not fused sagittally by their internal valves. These are much shorter than the external ones, Which are marked by voluminous refringent protuberances, Low opercule, bordered by 4-5 long setae, Peterjohnsia summa n.sp. MATE3IAL EXAMINED Hotoryre: Australia, NE. Queensland, Bellenden Ker Range, summit TV station, litter, Berlese No, 336, all. 1560 m, Now. 1-7, 1981, 17 (QM S, 1489). PARATYPES: Same data as holotype, 5? and Jy (QM 5.1490), Same locality, same date, Berlese No. 337, 3¢ 2° (QM §.1491); Same locality, same date, Berlese No. 338, 17 3% (QM §.1492); Same locality, same date, Berlese No. 335, 14 (QM S.1493); Same locality, same date, Pyrethrum, on rainforest foliage, 12 (5.1494); Same locality, Get, 25-31, 1981, 24), 72 62 62). (QM 8.1495) and 27 3- 1-3. (MNHN, DA 213), OTHER MATERIAL; Same area, Mout Bartle Frere, NW Center Peak Ridge, alt. 1400-1500 m., Berlese No. 358, Oct, 1-8, 1981, bo 75 (QM 8.1496); Mount Bartle Frere, South Peak summit, alt. 1620 m., Berlese No. 369 (rain forest, sieved litter), Nov. 6-8, L981, 32 9. (OM §.1496), l+ (MNHN, DA 213); Bellenden Ker Range, Cable Tower 3, alt. 1054 m,, Noy. 25-31, 1981, 1! 1. 1j, (QM S, 1498). DESCRIPTION Identical to the preceding species both in habitus and colour as well as in the relative dimensions of antennae, the gnathochilarium, the shape of the metatergal shoulders, the superficial texture of the teguments and the position of the macrosetae. CRASPEDOSOMID MILLIPEDES IN AUSTRALIA Even the dimensions (slightly larger here) and the number of ocelli are comparable, as shown in Table 7. MALE SEXUAL CHARACTERS: Quite similar to those of the type-species, they differ from it only in certain minute details and in two more important aspects (Figs 46-49): 1. There is no trace of any separation at the base of the telopodites of the eighth pair (gonopods); 2. There is a third anterior branch (c), shorter 129 than the two others, bearing spinules apically. These spinules are also found in the type-species but are not carried on a differentiated branch (compare Figs 42 and 47a). FEMALE SEXUAL CHARACTERS: When Figs 40 and 50 (oral view) and 41 and 51 (distal view) are compared, no significant difference between the two species is obvious, except for the absence of protuberances in P. summa, and perhaps in the distribution of setae. TABLE 7. Peterjohnsia summa: Measurements (mm), number of rings (N), leg pairs (Ip) and ocelli. Vertical ; Length { N | Ip | Length . Width Ocelli diameter antenna BKR, Berl. 336 ¢ holotype 30 | 48 4.3 0.38 0.52 0.40 10(1.2.3.3.1) é paratype 30 | 48 4.2 0.38 - - 9(1.2.3.3) ¢ paratype 30 | 48 4.2 0.40 7 - 10(1.2.3.3.1) ¢ paratype 30 | 48 4.2 0.41 - - 10(1.2.3.3.1) ¢ paratype 30 | 48 4.3 0.40 ~ - 10(1.2.3.3.1) é paratype 30 | 48 4.1 0.42 - - 10(1.2.3.3.1) ? paratype 32 | 54 32 0.53 - - 11(1.2.3.3.2) 2 paratype 32 | 54 5 0.48 - - 11(1.2.3.3.2) 2 paratype 32 | 54 4.6 0.48 ~ - 11(1.2.3.3.2) BKR, Berl. 338 4 paratype 10(1.2.3.3.1) 2 paratype ‘ ; 11(1.2.3.3.2) 2 paratype 32 | 54 4.8 - 0.61 - 13(1.2.3.3.3.1) 2 paratype 32 | 54 4.7 - 0.59 - 10(1.2.3.3.1) BKR, Oct. 25-31 ¢ paratype 30 | 48 5 0.40 - 0.50 8/9(1.2.2.2/3.1) é paratype 30 | 48 4.4 0.40 - - 10(1.2.3.3.1) ¢ paratype 30 | 48 4.8 0.42 - - 10(1.2.3.3.1) ¢ paratype 30 | 48 4.8 0.40 - - 10(1.2.3.3.1) ¢ paratype 30 | 48 4.7 0.38 - = 10(1.2.3.3.1) ¢ paratype 30 | 48 5 - 0.55 - 9(1.2.3.3) é paratype 30 | 48 4.4 - 0.55 - 10(1.2.3.2.1.1) 2 paratype 32 | 54 (7.3) 0.50 - - 12(1.2.3.4.2) 2 paratype 32 | 54 6.1 0.50 - - 11(1.2.3.3.2) 2 paratype 32 | 54 4.8 0.46 - ~ 10(1.2.3.3.1) 2 paratype 32 | 54 5.8 0.52 - - 11(1.2.3.3.2) 2 paratype 32 | 54 5.9 0.51 - ~ 11(1.2.3.3.2) ° paratype 32 | 54 4.9 0.50 - - 11(1.2.3.3.2) 2 paratype 32 | 54 5 0.53 - - 11(1.2.3.3.2) 2 paratype 32 | 54 5.3 0.45 - - 11(1.2.3.3.2) ?j. (A-1) paratype | 30 | 48 4.2 - 0.51 - 10(1.2.3.3.1) ?j. (A-1) paratype | 30 | 48 3.8 0.42 - - 10(1.2.3.3.1) 2j. (A-1) paratype | 30 | 48 4,3 - 0.51 - 9(1.2.3.2.1) 2j. (A-1) paratype | 30 | 48 4.9 0.43 - - 12(1.2.3.4.2) ?j. (A-2) paratype | 27 | 40 3.7 0.32 - - 8(1.2.3.2) | = ule Bartle Frere é 30 | 48 4.4 0.40 0,55 - 9(1.2.3.2.1) g 32 | 54 4.9 0.50 - - 11(1.2.3.3.2) 3 32 | 54 4.9 0.51 - - 10(1.2.3.3.1) g 32 | 54 5.1 0.52 - - 11(1.2.3.3.2) g 32 | 54 4.9 0.48 - - 10(1.2.3.3.1) 2 32 | 54 5 0.50 - - 9(1.2.3.3) 32 | 54 4.9 0.52 - - 10(1.2.3.3.1) 32 | 54 4.8 0.50 - - 9(1.2.2.2.2) 130 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Fics 46-49. Peterjohnsia summa n.g., n.sp., * holotype: 46, caudal-ventral view (in black, telopodites of gonopods), of eighth pair (gonopods) and 9th pair (paragonopods); 47. isolated eighth pair, lateral view, 47a. detail of extremity of angiocoxite, lateral view; 48. isolated eighth pair, caudal view, 49. the same, oral view. CRASPEDOSOMID MILLIPEDES IN AUSTRALIA 131 Peterjohnsia ludovicensis n.sp. MATERIAL EXAMINED Ho.otyPe: Australia, NE, Queensland, Hilltop 5.5 km north of Mount Lewis, alt. 1200 m., Berlese No. 297 (rainforest, sieved litter), Sept. 13, 1981, G, Monteith and D. Cook, 1¢ (QM 8.1499). PARATYPES: Same area, 5.5 km north of Mount Lewis, via Julatten, alt. 1100 m., Berlese No. 276 (rainforest, sieved litter), Sept. 8, 1981, G. Monteith & D. Cook, | # 15 (QM 8.1500). DESCRIPTION Identical in external morphological characteristics to other species. No significant difference is indicated by the measurements and number of ocelli, as can be seen in Table 8. MALE SEXUAL CHARACTERS: The following differences can be observed 1. the foliated part K (anterior) of the colpocoxite is lower than the posterior branch (k) and therefore not visible in the caudal view (Fig. 53); 2. the angiocoxite (A) is bifid as in basimontana, but here, there is no trace of any spines on the TABLE 8. Peterjohnsia ludovicensis: Measurements (mm), number of rings (N), leg pairs (Ip) and ocelli, |e | * holotype 30 4.25 + paratype 30 48 4.20 ? paratype 32 54 §.50 Vertical . Length A 0.35 0.33 0.40 0,53 0.46 0.58 31 Fics 50-51. Peterjohnsia summa n.g., n.sp., = paratype: $0. vulvae, caudal view; 51. the same, distal view. 132 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Fics 52-56. Peterjohnsia ludovicensis n.g., n.sp., ¢ holotype, § paratype: 52. eighth pair ¢ (gonopods), lateral view; 53. the same, caudal view; 54. the same, oral view (slightly oblique); 55. ninth pair (paragonopods); 56. base of second left leg and left vulva, caudal view. CRASPEDOSOMID MILLIPEDES IN AUSTRALIA 133 anterior part (‘c’ in figs. 42 and 47a) and the long, slender posterior branch (a) is, in this case, the same length as the oral branch (b), which here is shorter and sturdier than in the other species; 3. on the ninth pair (paragonopods, Fig. 55), the telopodites are located in a less lateral position. FEMALE SEXUAL CHARACTERS: Fig. 56 reveals no important difference from the two other species; vulvar pilosity is even more sparse than in P. summa, as here there is only a single distal seta on each side of the vulva (one per valve). ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I especially wish to thank Professor Peter M. Johns (Christchurch), who collected a great deal of the material studied in this article and who graciously told me it had been deposited in the Queenland Museum. Also many thanks to my colleague Valerie Davies, former Curator of Arachnids at the Queensland Museum, who arranged for all the Craspedosomids in her care to be sent to me for examination. I would like to pay tribute to the great spirit of co-operation shown by my colleague S. Golovatch (Moscow), who kindly kept me up to date in great detail, on his work concerning other Australian Craspedosomids. I am grateful to Michéle Bertoncini (M.N.H.M. Paris) for the numerous drawings that illustrate this article, and also particularly for her significant and competent contribution, to Anne Cooper (M.N.H.N. Paris) who translated this paper from French to English. LITERATURE CITED BROLEMANN, H.W., 1935. ‘Faune de France 29. Myriapodes Diplopedes (Chilognathes 1)’ (Lechevalier: Paris). 369 pp. GOoLovATCH, S.I., in press. The first Chordeumatida (Diplopoda) from Tasmania, with comments on the origin of trans-specific disjunctions. HOFFMAN, R.L., 1963. Notes on the structure and classifiation of the Diplopod family Heterochordeumatidae. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (13)6: 129-35. 1979. Classification of the Diplopoda. Mus. Hist. Nat., Geneve: 1-238. JEEKEL, C.A.W., 1981. Australia Expedition 1980; legit C.A.W. Jeekel and A.M. Jeekel-Rijvers. List of collecting stations, together with general notes on the distribution of Millipeds in eastern Australia and Tasmania. Versi. Techn. Geg., 30 (Inst. v. Taxon. Zo6l., Amsterdam) : 1-59. Mauriés, J.P., 1978. Le genre néo-zélandais Schedotrigona Silvestri, 1903: révision et place dans une nouvelle classification des Craspedosomides (Myriapoda, Diplopoda, Craspedosomida. Bull. Mus. natn. Hist. nat. 3eme sér., 510, Zool. 351: 43- 66. 1982. Une famille nouvelle et deux genres nouveaux de Cleidogonoidae, avec notes sur la classification de la superfamille (Diplopoda, Craspedosomida). Steenstrupia 8(6): 165-76. Mauriés, J.P. and GeorFrroy, J.J., 1983. Découverte, dans les Causses Majeurs, d’une remarquable espéce cavenicole du genre Opisthocheiron Ribaut, 1913 (Diplopoda, Craspedosomida, Opisthocheiridae). Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. Toulouse, 118(1982): 141-140. SHEAR, W.A., 1979. Diplopoda from the Nepal Himalayas. Chordeumida with comments on the Asian chordeumid fauna. Senck. biol. 60(1-2): 115- 30. MEMOIRS OF THE (QUEENSLAND MUSEUM BRISBANE © Queensland Museum PO Box 3300, South Brisbane 4101, Australia Phone 06 7 3840 7555 Fax 06 7 3846 1226 Email qmlib@qm.qld.gov.au Website www.qm.qld.gov.au National Library of Australia card number ISSN 0079-8835 NOTE Papers published in this volume and in all previous volumes of the Afemoirs of the Queensland Museum maybe teproduced for scientific research, individual study or other educational purposes. Properly acknowledged quotations may be made but queries regarding the republication of any papers should be addressed to the Editor in Chief. Copies of the journal can be purchased from the Queensland Museum Shop. A Guide to Authors is displayed at the Queensland Museum web site A Queensland Government Project Typeset at the Queensland Museum Mem. Od Mus. 25(1): 135—140.[1987] REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN ZUPHIINAE 2, COLASIDIA MONTEITHI SP. NOV. FROM NORTH QUEENSLAND, FIRST RECORD OF THE TRIBE LELEUPIDIINI IN AUSTRALIA (INSECTA; COLEOPTERA: CARABIDAB). Martin BAEHR Zoologische Staatssammlung Minchhausenstr. 21 D 8000 Minchen 60, West Germany ABSTRACT Colasidia monteithi sp, nov. is an inhabitant of lowland rainforest of northern Queensland. It is (he first representative of the tribe Leleupidiini of the subfamily Zuphiinae recorded from Australia, Colasidia montefthi is apotypic within the genus Co/asidia and is presumably derived from more plesiotypic ancestors similar to species still living in New Guinea. The high degree of apomorphy, and the present distribution, indicate thal the ancestor of Colasidia monteithi was an ancient invader into Australia, INTRODUCTION Zuphiinae is a small but, especially in the Australian aréa, quite diverse group within the truncatipennian Carabidae, In Australia 12 species have been found. The genus Planetes is included here in the Zuphiinae although its systematic status is still controversial (see Jedlicka 1963; Habu 1967; Reichardt 1967; Darlington 1968). Genera known from Australia are Zuphium Latreille, Parazuphium Jeannel, Acrogenys Macleay, Pseudaptinus Castelnau, and Plunetes Macleay. Since all species were described between 1862 and 1890, and because most of the diagnoses are unsatisfactory, only few species can be determined with certainty, A revision of the Australian Zuphiinae was started by Baehr (1984). The tribe Leleupidiini was discovered only recently, but constitutes a rather extensive group (Basilewsky 1951, 1953, 1954, 1967) of smal! and oddly shaped beetles, Although, originally recorded from tropical Africa, mainly from the high mountains of East Africa, species were later described from Asia (Basilewsky 1954; Landin 1955), Since then, Leleupidiini also became known from Madagascar (Basilewsky 1967), and Darlington (1971) extended their geographical range to New Guinea, where two species are now known. Very little is known about the habits of species of Leleupidiini, all discoveries having been made in the course of extraction or washing of soil and litter samples. All species seem to be rather rare. The three recorded species of the Asiatic-New Guinea genus Colasidia, for example, are known from single females only. Presumably the species are secretive arid perhaps burrow in loose soil and litter. To my knowledge there are no indications of myrmecophilous habits in any species, but some w ue morphological attributes, e.g. the moniliform antennae, and the peculiar, enlarged, and glandular terminal segment of the labial palpi, could suggest such habits. The discovery of a new species of the genus Colasidia by G.B, Monteith now extends the geographical distribution of the Leleupidiini to Australia. Type material is Jodged at the Queensland Museum (QM). KEY TO THE AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEAN GENERA OF ZUPHIINAE The diagnostic features of the Leleupidiini (for description of the tribe see Basilewsky 1951) can be vathered from the following key, which comprises all genera of Zuphiinae so far recorded from Australia and New Guinea. 1. First antennal segment short and thick, shorter than second and third segments together. Antennae moniliform, short, extending only to middle of pronoium, Head very long, eyes small, temples at Jeast three times as long ag eyes. Last segment of Jabial palpi extraordinarily large, square, asymmetrically fixed to second segment. Tribe Leleupidiini....... senus Colasidia Basilewsky First antennal segment as long as, or longer than second and third segments together. Head shorter, temples at most three times as long as eyes. Last segment of Jabial palpi smaller, if extraordinarily large, then not square, nor asymmetrically fixed to second SECMET 0.000.520 5 OLS eeese Ge aides 136 2. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Striac of elytra duplicate, thus elytra with 19 Narrow ridges, Basal border of elytra entire. Basal three segments of ¢ anterior tarsus asyinmetrically widened, biseriately squamose. Squamosity oblique, in medio- distal direction. Tribe Planetini ................- atevsuttltiaseneees .. genus Planeies Macleay Striae of elves not be cniatch Basal border of elytra not entire, ¢ anterior tarsus slightly widened, symmetrical. Squamosity of tarsus straight, biseriate or uniseriate only al inner SARE OF LALSUE vyascspeveersceveentedconscetsiaetbrae 3 Antennae short, moniliform, not attaining base of pronotum. First segment as long as second and third segments together. Head behind eyes wide, square, back of head straight, hardly narrowed. Eyes large. Last segment of maxillary palpi very large, enlarged to tip. Elytra parallel, apex roundish cut off, somewhat drawn in to middle. Elytra each with 6 fine ridges. Tribe Patriziini ....... spans -Beteieeh eblne genus Agastus Schmidt-Gébel' Antennae longer, not moniliform, extending beyond base of elytra. Last segment of maxillary palpi normal, only slightly enlarged to tip. Apex of elytra not rounded, nor drawn in }o middle. Elytra at most with one ridge at seventh interval. Tribe Zuphiini (sense BEVERY oon Bo Sates te junio ote wap selene dayeqtoslel- ete > 4 First antennal segment only as long as second and third segments together or slightly longer. Pronotum with several marginal setae in anterior half. Elytra with a row of § to 10 erect setae at third, fifth, and seventh intervals. Seventh interval carinate or at least considerably more raised than the other intervals, Flightless, elytra fused together..... oiabathe ors satarad .. genus Acrogenys Macleay” First antennal segment considerably longer than second and third segments together. Pronotum with one marginal seta in anterior half. Elytra without conspicuous erect setae at third, fifth, and seventh intervals, All intervals similarly shaped, mostly rather Sle presses. Generally winged, elytra free............0-2.2.. 5 ‘A species of the genus 4gastus, Hitherto only recorded from southeast Asia and from Africa, has been recently found in New Guinea (Baehr 1985). Members of that genus are likely to be discovered in northern Australia, *dcrogenys australis Blackburn 1890 is a species of the genus Psevdaptinus Castelnau. Length of first antennal segment less than 1.5 x second and third segments together. Posterior margin of head strongly rounded. Width of ‘neck’ at least 0.5 x width of head including eyes. Elytra rather convex with considerably raised intervals. ...,.,...-;--.:-0++ $444 pon ted be faad genus Pseudaptinus Castelnau Length of first antennal segment nearly 2 = second and third segments together. Posterior margin of head rather truncate. Width of ‘neck’ less than 0.5 x width of head including eyes, Elytra depressed, intervals flat, at most very feebly raised. ........... SokeRenepeefes depend 6 Larger, length over 7.5 mm. Elytra with distinct intervals. First antennal segment with one long tactile seta Near tip.....s...seescsg essen seve BOnus Zuphium (sensu stricto) Latreille Smaller, length less than 7 mm. Intervals hardly perceptible. First antennal segment with several long tactile setae 0.00.2... e ce. ., genus Parazuphium Jeannel. PUPP ee eereeeey Colasidia Basilewsky Colasidia Basilewsky, 1954, p. 215, fig. 1. Darlington, 1971, p, 332. Type species: Co/asidia malayica Basilewsky, 1954. DIAGNOSIS Genus of the tribe Leleupidiini Basilewsky of the subfamily Zuphiinae. Ani-like, small zuphiine beetles with fairly small eyes. Tooth of mentum long, nearly as long as lateral lobes, tip rounded or feebly notched, Last segment of labial palpi very large, square, just about two times longer than wide. Punctures of dorsal surface very coarse. Wings in all known species atrophied. tm KRY TO THE KNOWN SPECIES Eyes larger, roundish, length of eyes about one third of length of temples behind eyes. Head wider across eves than across temples. Hind part of head strongly rounded (New Guinea)..... 0.00.4. C. papua Darlington, 1971 Eyes smaller, oblique, length of eyes less than one third of length of temples. Head widest at a distance behind eyes ...........cscceeeee eves fond Posterior border of temples feebly rounded off, Posterior part of head nearly straight. Head decidedly trapezoidal, wider than pronotum. Posterior angles of pronotum blunt, just slightly projecting (Singapore)..... benpeasredtbsdtyery C. malayica Basilewsky, 1954 A NEW COLASIDIA 137 Posterior border of temples decidedly rounded off. Thus, posterior part of head rounded. Head not strikingly trapezoidal, narrower than pronotum. Posterior angles of pronotum acute and projecting. Sides in front of posterior angles strongly curved........... 3 3. Elytra short and wide, very convex, less than 1.5 x as long as wide, more than 2 x wider than pronotum. Pronotum short, nearly as wide as long (0.95 x). Head short, nearly as wide as pronotum. Ratio length of head (labrum to anterior border of ‘neck’) to width of head less than 1.75 (New Guinea)........... Seder tapert stooge C. madang Darlington, 1971 Elytra rather elongate, more than 1.5 x as long as wide, only 1.75 x as wide as pronotum, Pronotum conspicuously narrower than long (0.85 x). Head elongate, distinctly narrower than pronotum (0.8 x). Ratio length of head to width of head more than 2 (Australia, North Queensland) ........0seeeeeeee wridibtderiachbetessrerton eset C. monteithi sp. nov. Colasidia monteithi sp. nov. MATERIAL EXAMINED HoLotyPeE: QM _ T.9181, presumably (sex not confirmed by dissection). Australia, North Queensland, 2 km WNW of Cape Tribulation (16°05’S, 145°28’E). 23.ix.-7.x.1982, G. Monteith, D. Yeates & G. Thompson. DESCRIPTION Measurements: Overall length: 5.18 mm, length to apex of elytra: 4.47 mm, maximum width: 1.32 mm. Colour: Head and pronotum reddish-brown, elytra blackish. Labrum, antennae, mouthparts, and legs yellow. Lower surface dark reddish, first abdominal segments brownish, last three abdominal segments dark brown to black. Microsculpture: Upper surface rather sparsely, but very coarsely and rather regularly, punctate, sparsely hirsute, with long, yellow hairs. Pilosity partly inclined, partly erect. No microsculpture visible between the punctures. Also lower surface and legs wholly punctate and hirsute. Head: Very elongate (more than twice as long as maximum width). Head steadily tapering from posterior border to front. Eyes small, very oblique, temples behind eyes about 5 x longer than diameter of eye, rounded off behind. ‘Neck’ one third of width of head. Frontal furrows long, not reaching anterior border of eyes. Frons and vertex convex. A straight ridge from median border of eye to base of antenna. Above base of antenna a N a aol , ed zy —- ~< os a ~->>-2-~¢~ ss + eg ee 6-2 ee een Se en aap Tees Ne ~ x ee ee 8 eA A KY SS oe / | 7\ \ iF Fic. |: Colasidia monteithi sp. nov. Habitus. Scale = 1 mm, triangular prominence. Anterior supraorbital seta at anterior border of eye, posterior seta far away from eye near posterior border of temples. Clypeus not divided from frons, clypeus smooth, with two long setae and several short bristles along anterior border. Labrum rather large, anterior border feebly notched, side parts widened, thus, basal parts of mandibles concealed. Labrum six-setose, sides with several additional short bristles. Mandibles short, inner border straight, apex suddenly hook-like curved. Mentum with a long and stout, entire tooth which is only slightly shorter than lateral lobes, bisetose. Epilobes distinctly separated, longer than lobes, tip somewhat curved inwards. Glossa corneous, apex truncate, bisetose. Paraglossae membranaceous, much longer than glossa, distally strongly curved inwards. Terminal segment of labial palpi very large, square, about twice as long as wide, entire 138 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM surface with long and dense pilosity, ventrally with a long glandular cleft. Penultimate segment with some bristles. Base of maxillae laterally protruding, with some long hairs. Galea sparsely hirsute. Basal part of lacinia wide, corneous, lateral border bristled, distal part narrower and only weakly corneous. Median border of lacinia not dissected. Maxillary palpus fairly small, pointed, last segment sparsely pilose. Antennae short, moniliform, extending to apical third of pronotum. Basal segment 0.8 x as long as second and third segments together. Segments 4-10 shorter than wide. Basal segment with a long tactile seta and several short bristles, remaining segments with an apical row of long setae and with a double, very dense pilosity, mixed from long and erect, and short and depressed hairs, respectively. Pronotum: Distinctly shorter and wider than head (ratio width of head/width of pronotum: 0.79), and clearly longer than wide (ratio width of pronotum/length: 0.83), heart-shaped, Sides strongly curved to the rounded anterior angles, widest in front of first third. Sides concave in front of the pointed and prominent posterior angles, these slightly advanced from base. Base straight. Sides bordered, without lateral groove, apex and base not bordered. Basal grooves indistinct due to the coarse punctures. Median line complete, but fairly indistinct, Pronotum convex, coarsely punctate, with sparse, erect pilosity. One lateral seta each a short distance in front of first third and at the protruding posterior angles. Elytra: Broadly oval and strongly convex, about 1.5 x longer than wide, less than twice as wide as 2 Fic. 2: Colasidia monteithi sp. nov. Lower side of head. Scale = | mm. pronotum (ratio width of elytra/width of pronotum: 1.76), widest in last third. Shoulders rounded off, apex transversely cut off, somewhat drawn in to middle, bordered. Beyond apical border with a narrow, membraneous band. Striae distinguished only by the very coarse, but fairly regular punctures. No basal pore visible. Pilosity fairly sparse, but elongate, obliquely erect. Border along ninth stria basally with a row of about six, behind middle with one or two, and near apex with about six umbilicous pores and very long setae. Also lateral border of elytra pilose. No elytral pores recognizable. Elytra fused together, hind wings reduced. Lower surface: Wholly hirsute, with exception of proepisterna (only anteriorly hirsute) and of anterior parts of first abdominal sternites. Sternites with a long seta on each side, last sternite with one seta each side (2). Metepisternum quadrate. Legs: Fairly elongate, especially posterior tarsus. Whole legs densely hirsute, lower parts of all tarsal segments pilose. Clawy smooth. 4 aedeagus: Not known. Immature stages: Unknown. DISTRIBUTION Only known from Cape Tribulation at the base of Cape York Peninsula, northern Queensland. HABITS The unique specimen of Colasidia monteithi was discovered by use of Berlese-extraction of leaf litter. According to G.B. Monteith’s information the collecting area is one of the wettest in Australia and has still a very luxurant rain forest flora. Apart from this information, virtually nothing is known about the habits of this beetle, as is the case in all other species of the genus. The circumstances of discovery, the small eyes, short antennae, and the ‘stream-lined’ body shape all point to a habit of living in leaf litter or loose soil. Striking pecularities are the very large, glandular terminal segments of the labial palpi, which are reminiscent of the antennal clubs of Paussinae. Perhaps, they can be regarded as an indication of a myrmecophilous habit. DISCUSSION Colasida monteithi is distinguished from the three other species of the genus by its very narrow body shape, especially by the exceptionally elongate and narrow head and by the small and oblique eyes, The narrow head — in comparison to the pronotum — and the coarsely punctate A NEW COLASIDIA upper surface are shared by C. monteithi and both species from New Guinea, C. papua and C. madang, which indeed seem to be the nearest relatives of C. monteithi. Additional diagnostic differences between these species and C. monteithi are given in the key. If large eyes and the rounded, less widened back of the head are interpreted as plesiomorphic character states, then C. papua seems to constitute the most primitive species of the genus. Reduction of eyes and elongation, or widening of the back of head can be interpreted as adaptations to a secretive life in soil or litter or in the upper soil strata proper, and they must be regarded as apomorphic character states. Reduction of eyes is most striking in C. malayica and C. monteithi, whereas C. madang is intermediate between these species and C. papua. The same is true concerning the deformation of the head and the extreme widening and development of its angular hind edges in C. malayica, and the extreme elongation of the head in C. monteithi. In these characters C. GW 8 “ge Ay af 3 139 madang is also intermediate. From this viewpoint C. malayica and C. monteithi constitute the most apotypic species. C. malayica, however, seems still more divergent morphologically than C. monteithi. At the same time the geographical ranges of these two species are located at the limits of the known range of the species within the genus. With regard to distribution, C. malayica is the most isolated of the species. It is likely that the centre of origin of the genus Colasidia was in New Guinea, where the most plesiotypic species live. From there the apotypic species spread to the north (Malaysia) and to the south (North Queensland). This view is opposite to that of Darlington’s (1971), according to whom the (presumably winged) ancestors of the New Guinean species came from the Oriental area. With regard to the distribution of the whole tribe Leleupidiini, I must agree that the ancestors of the genus Colasidia originated in the Oriental Region. The recent distribution of the species, however, points to a secondary migratrion from Fic. 3: Distribution of the species of the genus Colasidia: HM = C. malayica Basilewsky, A= C. madang Darlington, * = C. papua Darlington, @ = C. monteithi sp. nov. Co = Cooktown, Ca = Cairns, TO = Townsville. Co 140 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM New Guinea back to the north and, on the other hand, to a migration further south to northern Australia. In any case my view of the distribution pattern of the genus could be changed substantially if, for example, further species should be discovered in Southeast Asia or in the Indonesian Islands. Because of their secretive habits and their obvious rarity this will require special and careful searching. Regarding Australian zoogeography it must be stressed that the single Australian species represents an apotypic form within the genus Colasidia. The presence of related species in New Guinea suggests that the ancestor of Colasidia monteithi immigrated to Australia from the north via Cape York Peninsula. This has been suggested before for other rainforest species (Darlington 1961). Since all recent species of Colasidia are flightless it may be supposed that immigration could only take place step by step at short distances over land. Hence immigration into Australia was only possible at times when the water gaps between New Guinea and North Queensland were considerable narrower, and when rain forests in North Queensland covered much larger areas and were contiguous. This high degree of apomorphy in several morphological characters and the distribution at the base of Cape York Peninsula clearly demonstrates that C. monteithi is not a recent immigrant from New Guinea, but that it represents a fairly old member of the soil living fauna of the rain forests of North Queensland. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I want to express my warmest thanks to Dr G.B. Monteith (Queensland Museum, Brisbane) for offering the unique specimen of Colasidia monteithi for examination and description. I also heartily thank Dr A.F. Newton, Jr. (Cambridge, Mass.) for sending on loan the type of Colasidia papua. LITERATURE CITED BAEHR, M., 1984. Revision der australischen Zuphiinae 1. Die Gattung Acrogenys Macleay (Insecta, Coleoptera, Carabidae). Spixina 7: 115-34. 1985. Description of a new species, Agastus hirsutus, with first record of the genus from New Guinea (Coleoptera : Carabidae : Zuphiinae). Jnt. J. Ent. 27: 224-8. BASILEWSKY, P., 1951. Leleupidia luvubuana, nov. gen. et nov. sp. (Col. Carabidae). Rev. Zool. Bot. Afr. 44: 175-9. 1953. Révision des Leleupidiini (Col. Carabidae, Zuphiinae). Rev. Zool. Bot. Afr. 47: 263-81. 1954. Un genre nouveau de Leleupidiini de la presqu’ile de Malacca (Col. Carabidae, Zuphiinae). Rey. fr. Ent. 21: 213-16. 1967. Description des deux Carabides de Madagascar, représentants des groupes encoure inconneus dans la région malgache. Bull. Soc. ent. Fr. 72: 248-52. DARLINGTON, P.J. Jr., 1961. Australian Carabid beetles V. Transition of wet forest faunas from New Guinea to Tasmania. Psyche, 68: 1-24. 1968. The Carabid beetles of New Guinea III. Harpalinae continued. Perigonini to Pseudomorphini. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 137(1): 1-253. 1971. The Carabid beetles of New Guinea IV. General considerations, analysis and history of the fauna, taxonomic supplement. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 142(2): 129-337. Hasu, A., 1967. Carabidae, Truncatipennes group (Insecta : Coleoptera). Fauna Japonica: 1-388. JEDLICKA, A., 1963. Monographie der Truncatipennen aus Ostasien. Lebiinae-Odacanthinae-Brachyninae (Coleoptera, Carabidae). Ent. Abh. Mus. Tierk. 28: 269-579. LANDIN, B.-O., 1955. Entomological results from the Swedish expedition 1934 to Burma and British India. Coleoptera: Carabidae. Ark. Zool. (2)8: 399-472. REICHARDT, H., 1967. A monographic revision of the American Galeritini (Coleoptera, Carabidae). Arq. Zoo. Sao Paulo 15: 1-176. Mem. Qd Mus. 25(1): 141—150.[1987] THE GENUS NEOLAXTA MACKERRAS (DICTYOPTERA : BLATTARIA : BLABERIDAE) Louis M. RoTH Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University, Cambridge, MA, 02138, U.S.A. (Correspondence: 81 Brush Hill Road, Sherborn, MA, 01770, U.S.A.). ABSTRACT Three species of the Australian genus Neo/axta are described, two of which, namely mackerrasae and triangulifera, are new. The generic description is modified, and a key is given to distinguish both sexes of the species. Neolaxta is very close to Laxta and can only be separated from it by spines on the anteroventral margin of the front, or all femurs; this character may be poorly developed or absent in the female, o INTRODUCTION The Australian cockroach genus Neolaxta was based on a single species. In this paper I describe 2 new species and modify Mackerras’s diagnosis of the genus. The following Museums and their curators lent me specimens: ANIC — Australian National Insect Collection, CSIRO, Canberra, A.C.T., Australia; Dr D,C.F. Rentz and Mr John Balderson; MCZH — Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University, Cambridge, MA, U.S.A.; UQLA — Department of Entomology, University of Queensland, St. Lucia, Queensland, Australia; Miss M. Schneider, through Dr G.B. Monteith; QM — Queensland Museum, Brisbane, Australia; Dr G.B. Monteith, Genus Neolaxta Mackerras Neolaxta Mackerras, 1968, p. 143; type species by monotypy, Neolaxta monteithi Mackerras, 1968, pp. 143-6. Diacnosis (from Mackerras) Sexes dissimilar, males with long wings, females apterous. Head concealed beneath pronotum; face tuberculate. Anterior and lateral margins of pronotum angularly raised; pronotum of males and all terga of nymphs and females tuberculate, giving the nymphs and females a hard knobbly feeling. Legs short and slender; anteroventral margins of fore femora with several large spines proximally, followed by a row of fine spinules distally, other femoral margins unarmed; tarsi short and bare, pulvilli large, arolia rather small, claws symmetrical. Terga and sterna of male fairly 141 smooth; T10 short, rounded; cerci blunt, short, but projecting well beyond T10. Terga of females and nymphs bearing 2-3 rows of large pale tubercles and numerous smaller dark ones; T10 of similar shape to that of male, but cerci very short, stout, not projecting as far as T10. S9 of male asymmetrical, with very short slender styles. Sterna of female smooth medially, minutely tuberculate laterally, S7 large, smoothly rounded, bare in centre and tuberculate laterally. The genus is distinguished from Laxta by the angularly up- turned edges of the pronotum, the regularly arranged very large pale tubercles on the dorsum, the possession of large spines on the anteroventral margin of the fore femur and densely tuberculate face, and the irregular development of the branches of CuA in the male. The two new species of Neo/axta do not have many of the above characters which are best used for specific determination of monteithi. Males of the new taxa do not have a tuberculate face, and the anterior and lateral edges of their pronota are not angularly turned upwards (in some species of Laxta the head, at least in part, may be tuberculate, and the large tubercles on the dorsum may be regularly arranged). The antero- and posteroventral margins of the mid and hind femora may have a few small spines, similar to those on the front femur. The new species of Neolaxta are similar to species of Laxta, except for the presence of large spines on the ventral margin of the front femur (Fig. 3D), or all femora, and this is the only character to separate these genera. However, the femoral spines may be very small and reduced in numbers, or lacking in some 142 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM females and nymphs, and these individuals can be easily mistaken for species of Laxta. The genitalia (male and female) are similar in both genera. The distance between the eyes may be greater or less than the length of the first antennal segment; this can be shown by calculating an eye antennal index (EAI) which is the interocular distance (measured near the top of the head, where the eyes are closest together) divided by the length of the first antennal segment. Males of Neolaxta are very rarely seen free- living in the field and most are collected at light, occasionally in considerable numbers (Monteith, personal communication). KEY TO ADULTS OF NEOLAXTA 1. Males (winged) ..............cceseeeceeee enone eens 2 Females (apterous)..........-...¢.eeeecedeevev ones 4 2. Pronotum with anterior and lateral margins strongly incrassated and raised (Fig. 2A). Anteroventral margins of mid and hind femora unarmed .........cccceeeee eens monteithi Pronotum with anterior and lateral margins not thickened or raised (Figs. 3A, 4A). Anteroventral margins of mid and hind femora with 1-6 small spines (similar to those on the front femur)...............:cceeeeeeeeeee ee 3 3. Hind margin of supraanal plate broadly rounded (Fig. 1E). Anteroventral margin of front femur usually with 12-26 (rarely 4-8) small spines, those with large numbers occupying practically the full length of the margin (Fig. 3D). Pronotal punctations not half-moon-shaped .,............068 mackerrasae Hind margin of supraanal plate with a median triangular projection (Fig. 1H). Anteroventral margin of front femur with 2-4 widely spaced spines. Pronotal punctations partly pigmented, half-moon-shaped (Fig. 4A) ...... saasernferge gen aapepesnttes ceaepeet seVeles triangulifera 4. Pronotum with anterior and lateral margins strongly incrassated and raised (Fig. 2C). Head densely tuberculate (Fig. 2D)............. Pronotum with anterior and lateral margins not thickened or raised (Figs. 31, 4C). Head not tuberculate (Fig. 4D).........:cseeeeeee enone 5 5. Hind margin of supraanal plate trilobate (Fig. 4C). Abdominal tergites not granulate, tubercles few in number and widely spaced along the hind margins of the segments (Fig. ACY asterendntalshabensesiniteteahove ss triangulifera Hind margin of supraanal plate weakly convex (Fig. 31). Abdominal tergites granulate, and with tubercles arranged in 2 or 3 rows (Fig. BL): cog vache tsdegeveparsiese dngeaenpvara’es mackerrasae Neolaxta monteithi Mackerras (Figs 1A-D; 2A-E) Neolaxta monteithi Mackerras, 1968, pp. 143-6, figs 1- 4, pl. 1, figs 1-6 (male and female). MATERIAL EXAMINED HoLotyPe: male, Tooloom, New South Wales, 30,xii.1966, G.B. Monteith, QM T.6621. ParRATYPEs: 1%, originally from Tooloom, New South Wales, ex C.S.1.R.O., colony no. 244, Canberra, A.C.T., in the QM. Same locality and colony data, 32, 1%, 30.xii.1966, G.B. Monteith, in ANIC, OTHER MATERIAL: QUEENSLAND, UQLA: Bald Mtn. area, 3000-4000’, via Emu Vale, 12, 27-31.i1.1972, 1?, 26-30.i1.1973, G.B. Monteith, 1% (genitalia on slide no. 6), 26-30.i.1973, B. Cantrell; Boldery Park, Cooyar, 124, 18, 24.x.1975, Monteith and Lambkin; Cooyar, Maidenwell Road, 29, 12.1.1975, G.B. and S.R. Monteith; Saddletree Ck., Bunya Mts., 14 (terminalia on slide no. 5), 24.x.1975, Monteith and Lambkin; Levers Plateau, via Rathdowney, 37, 31.x.1976, G.B. Monteith; Lawes, 17, 2.iii.1954, V.R. Catchpoole. ANIC: Bunya Mts., 14, 12, 17-18.ix.1966, G. Monteith and B. Cantrell; Emu Ck., under log, 12, 27.?.1967,S.V. Mark; Nanango, 12, 4.v.1964, G, Monteith. NEw SOUTH Wa es, ANIC: Unumgar State Forest, via Kyogle, 12, 14 nymph, 11.iv.1966, T. Weir; C.S.L.R.O. colony 244, ex Tooloom, N,S.W., 7°, 6¢ and 5° nymphs, 30.xii.1966, G.B. Monteith. QUESTIONABLE LOCALITY, ANIC: 15 miles E. of Busselton, Western Australia, 2°, 1.xi.1967, G. McCutcheon (with following label: ‘Data probably wrong; M.J. Mackerras cannot recollect specimens from this locality — J. Balderson, 21.xii.1969’). DESCRIPTION MALE: Distance between eyes greater than the length of the first antennal segment (EAI =1.2- 1.7). Head with frons, vertex, and genae rough (rugulose and tuberculate) (Fig. 2B). Pronotum subelliptical, anterior and lateral margins thickened and raised (Fig. 2A), dorsal surface rugulose, with sparse large tubercles, ventral surface rugulose with a fine ridge on either side of the hood where the edge is turned upwards. Abdominal tergites smooth, all posterolateral angles rounded. Supraanal plate convex (Fig. 1B), hind margin thickened, not reaching hind margin or subgenital plate. Subgenital plate weakly asymmetrical, right and left sides slightly concave, distal region curved upwards, styles short, slender, inserted on the lateral margins (Fig. 1C). Anteroventral margin of front femur with 1-9 ROTH: NEOLAXTA 143 Fic. 1: Neolaxta spp. from Queensland. A-D. N. monteithi Mackerras: A. Female from Bald Mt. area, supraanal plate. B-D. Male from Saddletree Ck., Bunya Mts., suprannal plate and paraprocts, subgenital plate and styles, and genital phallomeres, respectively, E-G. N. mackerrasae, n. sp,, male paratype from Mt. Fisher: E. Supraanal plate and paraprocts; F. Subgenital plate and styles; G. Genital phallomeres. H-J. N. triangulifera, n. sp., male paratype from 3.0 km west of Cape Tribulation: H. Supraanal plate and paraprocts; I. Subgenital plate and styles; J. Genital phallomeres. Male supraanal plates are ventral views; subgenital plates, and genital phallomeres are dorsal. The phallomeres are shown in their normal position (L1 and L2 = sclerites of the left phallomere; L2vm = medial sclerite or L2 ventromedial; R2 = sclerite of the right phallomere). All drawn from slide preparations. Small scale refers to the supraanal and subgenital plates, large bar to the genital phallomeres. 144 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Fic. 2: Neolaxta monteithi Mackerras, from Tooloom, New South Wales. A, B, Male holotype, pronotum and head (frontal), respectively. C-E. Female paratype, pronotum, head (frontal), and abdomen (plus metanotum and part of mesonotum), respectively. ROTH: NEOLAXTA 145 short robust spines on basal half, followed by some spaced spinules distad, margins of mid and hind femora unarmed. Genitalia as in Fig. 1D; L2d separated from L2vm; R2 with a subapical incision. Colouration: Head mostly dark brown, ocelliform spots pale, margin of clypeus yellow, labrum light brown with yellow margin, genae reddish brown. Antennae with 2-3 pale segments near the apex. Pronotum with thickened raised anterior and lateral margins amber, surface tubercles reddish, medial region dark reddish brown. Lateral zones dark brown, anteriorly with a yellowish spot on either side of the midline. Tegmina and hind wings dark brown except for the clear anal area of the wings. Measurements (mm): Body length, 18.0-24.0; pronotum length x width, 4.8-5.8 x 7.1-8.9; tegmen length, 20.0-25.7; interocular distance, 1.0-1.1; length of first antennal segment, 0.6-0.8. FEMALE: Interocular distance about 2 or more times the length of the first antennal segment (EAI = 1.9-2.5) (Fig. 2D). Head entirely densely tuberculate, the tubercles on the vertex somewhat sparser (Fig. 2D). Entire dorsal surface of thorax and abdomen densely covered with granules, and large apically rounded tubercles, the latter on the abdomen arranged transversely in 2 rows (except for a single row on T1) (Fig. 2E). Pronotum more or less semicircular, with produced posterolateral corners, anterior and lateral margins incrassated and upturned (Fig. 2C), ventral surface of upturned region granulate, a slender ridge on each side of the hood as in the male. Abdominal tergites with lateral angles blunt, not produced, their sides only slightly overlapping the sternites (Fig. 2E). Supraanal plate with lateral margins concave to accommodate the short cerci which do not reach the convex hind margin of the plate (Figs 1A, 2E). Abdominal sternites with lateral regions pitted and granulate. Anteroventral margin of front femur with 4-10 spines on the basal half, these less distinct than in the male. Colouration. Head dark brown. Labrum and lower half of clypeus yellowish. Pronotum dark reddish brown with a pale spot anteriorly on each side of the midline. Abdominal tergites similar to base colour of the pronotum. Coxae, femora, and tibiae brown, trochanters, knee spots, and tarsi yellowish. Measurements (mm): Body length, 16.7-22.7; pronotum length x width, 5.0-6.5 x 9.0-11.6; interocular distance, 1.5-1.6; length of first antennal segment, 0.6-0.8. REMARKS The raised and thickened margins of the pronotum in both sexes make this species distinctive. The females may vary considerably in size; one of the smaller females (pronotum length x width, 5.5 x 9.0) was unequivocally an adult because it had an ootheca in its uterus. An ootheca removed from one of the larger females contained 24 partly developed embryos. Mackerras (1968) reported that one female produced 28 young, and they require about a year to mature. Dr G.B. Monteith (personal communication) states that N. monteithi ‘is always found under stones and bits of wood lying on the ground; it tends to rest on the ground rather than on the object’. Neolaxta mackerrasae n.sp. (Figs 1E-G; 3A-I) MATERIAL EXAMINED Ho.otyPe: male, Kirrama St. For., 32 km NW of Cardwell, Qld., 800 m, flight intercept trap, rain forest, 23.vi.-8,viii.1982, S. and J. Peck, SBP 46; in ANIC. PARATYPES: QUEENSLAND. ANIC: Danbulla, 1°, 30.vi.1951, F.J. Gray; near Cairns, 22 (dried out of spirit), Aug, 1966, H.M. Cameron; Moses Ck., 4km N by E of Mt. Finnigan, nr. Cooktown, 15.478 145.17E, 124, 14.x.1980, 1°, 15.x.1980, 24 nymphs, 14-16.x.1980, T.A. Weir and R.A. Barrett; Lake Barrine, 1¢, 15.vii.1933, H.A. Gray. The following were collected in a flight intercept trap, rain forest, by S. and J. Peck: Same data as holotype, 52; Lacey’s Creek, 10 km SE of El Arish, 40 m, 62, 23.vi.-5.viii.1982, SBP 47; Rosina Creek, 14 km SE of Millaa Millaa, 720 m, 54, 24.vi.- 2.viii. 1982. The following were collected by J. Balderson: Davies Ck., 20 km E by S of Mareeba, 17.02S 145.37E, 32, 12 nymph, 19.xi,1981; Palmerston Nat. Park, 24km E by N of Ravenshoe, 17.358 145.43E, 12, 14.xi.1981; Mt. Haig, 21 km NE by N of Atherton, 12, 17.xi.1981. The following were collected by I.F.B. Common and M.S. Upton: Mt, Edith, 18 mls NE of Atherton, 3400 ft, 22, 17.ii1.1964; Mt. Lewis, 8 mls NW of Mt. Molloy, 3200 ft, 19, 18.iv.1964. MCZH: Millaa Millaa, Atherton Tab., 2500 ft, 12 nymph, April 1932, Darlington, Australia Harvard Exp.; Kuranda, 12. QM: Rex Lookout via Mossman, rain forest, 1%, 13.x.1980, G.B. Monteith. The following were collected by G.B. Monteith and D.K. Yeates: Majors Mt., 7 km SE of Ravenshoe, 1000-1100 m, 1°, 4.v.1983; Mt. Demi, 7 km SW of Mossman, 900-1000 m, 1%, 26.iv.1983. The following were collected by Earthwatch/Qld. Mus.: Mt. Bartle-Frere, Sth. Peak Summit, 1620 m, 1° (genitalia on slide no. 15), 1¢ nymph, 6-8.xi.1981, NW/Centre Peak ridge, 1400-1500 m, 3%, 1¢ nymph, 7-8.xi.1981; Bellenden Ker Range, Summit TV Stn,, 1560 m, 1°, I- 7.xi.1981, 4% km S of Cable Tower No. 7, 500 m, 2¢, 42,14 and2® nymphs, 17-24.x.1981, 12, 25-31.x.1981, Cableway Base Stn., 100 m, 14, 1° nymph, 17- 146 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM ROTH: NEOLAXTA 147 24.x.1981, Cable Tower 3, 1054 m, ls nymph, 17- 24.x.1981, lf and 0! nymph, 25-31.%.198L. The following were collected by Monteith, Yeates. and Thompson, using pyrethruin Knockdown; Mt, Edith, Lamb Range, 1000 m, 1s, 12,8,1982; Emerald Ck, Lamb Runge, 950m, 2¥, 11.%.1982; 3.0 km west of Cape Tribulation (site 6), 500m, RF, 14, 20.ix.-7.x.1982, Ls nymph, 2.x.1982; 4.5 km west of Cape Tribulation (site 9), 760 m, 12, 29.14.1982, The following were collected by G. Monteith and D. Cook; Bakers Blue Mi., 17 km west of Mr. Molloy, 1100m, RF, Ly nymph, 12.ix.1981; Mr. Lewis summit via Julatien, 1200 m, 18, 12 nymph, 9.ix. 1981; Mt. Finnigan via Helenvale, 760-1000 m, 7%, 1? nymph, 20-27,vii.1974; Bloomfield Road via Helenvale, above ABRS site 4, rain forest, 300-460 m, 1¢, 20-27, vii,1974: Thornton Peak via Daintree, 7(K)- 1000 m, rain forest, 1° nymph, 22.ix,1981. The following were collected by Monteith, Yeates, and Cook, some alter pyrethrum knockdown: Mt, Finnigan, 37 km S of Cookiown, 850-1100 m, 2", 3 and 1° nymphs, 19- 22.iv.1982; Black Mts., 17 km ESE of Julatten, 800-1000 m, lt, 19 oymph, 29-30.iv,1982, 42, 27° nymphs, 4.iv.1982; Mt. Fisher, 1050-1100 m, 7 km SW of Millaa Millaa, 1% (terminalia on slide no. 14), 2¢, 42, 1s nymplt, 27-29.iv.1982; Windsor Tbld., NNW of ML. Carbine, 1050m, 2%, 14 and 27 nymphs, 15-18.iv, 1982, 35 knit NNW of Mt. Carbine, 1080 m, 2", 14 nymph, 15-e.iv.]982, 1? and 1: nymphs, 25-26.iv.1982. UQLA: The following were collected by B, Cantrell; Palmerston Nuat.. Pk., via Innisfail, 1°, 23.iv,1968; 8 miles east of Wallaman Falls, Ingham, |, 3.1.1973; Mt. Lewis via Julatten, 3500 [t,, 25, 12 nymph. 8.xi,1966, 1°, 28.xii,1966; Millaa Millaa Falls via Millaa Millia, Je, IWHT1.41,1966, The following were collected by G. Monteith: Belldenden Ker, 1), 7.viii.1966; Cooper Creek. 18 miles N of Daintree River, |°, 21-22.wi. 1969; Henrietta Ck., Palmerston Nal, Pk., 1° nymph, 29. xii, 1964; Paluma Dam, 2», 30-3) -xii.1964 (labelled Laxty sp., by M.J. Mackerras); Lake Eacham, [° nymph, 21 .xii.)964; N. Old (exact locality illegible), 1 fyinph, 27, Xji, 1964, DESeRIPTION Mate: Interocular distance less than the length of che first antennal segment (FAL =0).5-0.9) (Fig. 3C), Head with vertex and frontoclypeal region depressed, essentially smooth, gengae nor tuberculate (Fig, 3C), Pronotum with anterior and lateral margins not incrassated or strongly upturned, sparsely tuberculate, surface punctate (not granulate) (Fig. 3A), ventral surface practically smooth, without ridges on either side of the hood. Abdominal tergites and sternites smooth, Supraanal plate broadly rounded (Fig. 1E), nol quite reaching the hind margin of the subgenital plate. Subgenital plate weakly asymmetrical, hind margin rounded, lateral margins not distinctly indented (Figs. 1F, 3B), Ventral margins of lemora armed With spines as follows: Front femur, anterior margin, 4-26 (often occupying the entire length of the margin, Fig. 3D), posterior margin, 0; Mid femur, anterior margin, 1-4, posterior, 0 (rarely 1); Hind femur, anterior margin, usually 2, sometimes 1 or 3, rarely 4, hind margin 0, sometimes 1. Genitalia as in Figs. 1G, 3E-H; L2d separated from L2vm; R2 with a subapical incision, Colouration: Dark brown. Head with labrum brown, lower part of clypeus whitish, rest of face brownish black, Antennae brown with 2-4 white segments near the tip. Pronotuni with anterior region pale, lateral zones reddish brown, medial hood and posterior region blackish brown, rarely reddish brown. Tegmina dark brown; wings infuscated. Abdominal tergites and sternites, and legs brown, subgenital plate reddish brown with yellowish spots along the right and left margins. Cerci pale dorsally and ventrally. Measurements (mm): Body length, 13.5-16.5; pronotum length »™ width, 4.1-5,1 * 6,0-8.1; tegmen length, 15.1-19,5; interocular distance, 0.3-0.7; length of first antennal segment, 0.5-0.9. FemALe: Interocular distance about the same or slightly less than the length of the first antennal segment (EAI=0.7-1.1), Head with vertex granulate, [rons and genae rugulose. Dorsal surface of thorax and abdomen with large spaced tubercles, and dense granules; tubercles on abdominal tergites essentially arranged in 2 rows (Fig. 31); lateral borders of the abdominal tergites not widely overlapping the edges of the sternites. Supraanal plate with sides parallel, hind margin weakly convex, nol indented medially (Fig. 31). Lateral regions of abdominal sternites not distinctly granulate, practically smooth. Anteroventral margin of front femur with 1-13 very small spines, often difficult to see (sometimes lacking spines), hind margin unarmed; mid and hind femora unarmed. Fic. 3: Nealaxta mioekerrasae, n. sp., from Queensland. A-H. Males, variant from ML, Spurgeon: A. Pronotunt; B. Subpenital plate and styles (ventral); C. Head (frontal), D, Front femur showing the spines: on the acileroventral margin} E-G, Genital phallomeres Lt, L2vmand L2d, and R2, respectively; H. Genital phallomere L2vm and L2d. [. Pemale paratype from Mt- Fisher, 7 kim west of Millaa Millaa, habitus (dict on the left half wasremnoyed), Figs, B-H are chirin preparations. 143 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Colouration: Reddish and reddish brown, shiny: specimens are encrusted with dirt and have to be cleaned to reveal color and texture (Fig. 31). Head reddish brown, clypeus and labrum yellowish. Disk of pronotum dark, shading to lighter red at the lateral borders, and with a pair of yellow spots on the anterior margin (Fig, 31), Meso- and metanotum and abdominal tergites red with indications of a pair of broad dark longitudinal stripes on the right and left halves of the segments, Undersurface of thoracic segments reddish with yellow areas near the body margin, the pronotum showing the pair of yellow anterior spots that are visible from the dorsal surface, Abdominal sternites and legs red to reddish brown. Cerei dorsally and ventrally reddish or yellowish. Measurements (mm): Body length, 17.0-21.0; pronotum length « width, 4.7-6.4 « &,7-11,4; interocular distance, 0.7-0.8; length of first antennal segment, 0,7-1.0. NympH: Both sexes resemble the adult female: except that the surface granules are less distinct, and the base color is lighter so that the longitudinal bands are more obvious. Spines on the anteroventral margin of the front femur are often lacking, VARIANT; Male specimens from Mt, Spurgeon differ in being larger on the average, and much lighter in colour. Spikes on ventral margins of the femora as follows: Front, anterior, 8-24, posterior, 0; Mid; anterior, 0-3, posterior, 0 (rarely 1); Hind, anterior, 0-1 (rarely 2), hind, 0. Measurements (mim): Body length, 16.5-18,2; pronotum length x width, 4.8-5.2 =~ 7.7-8.3; tegmen length, 18.7-22.0; interocular distance, 0,3-0,5, length of first antennal segment, 0.8-0,9; EAI=0,3-0.6.. Material examined: Queensland, MCZH: Mt. Spurgeon, 3500-4000 ft... 1? (wing on slide no. 216), 1¢ (terminalia on slide no. 89), 17 (terminalia on slide no. 90), 5°, 26.vii.1932, 12, 28.vii.1932, Darlington, Australia Harvard Exped, ETYMOLOGY The species is named after the late Dr M. Josephine Mackerras. REMARKS The number of spines on the anteroventral margin of the front femur varies greatly in both sexes. Males never Jack them completely and have as few as 4-8 in specimens from Mt, Fisher, and Ingham, whereas the numbers vary from 12-26 in other localities, In fernales the spines are reduced in size and number and are difficult to see. Females and nymphs may lack the spines completely which explains why Mackerras labelled 2 fernales Laxta sp. These specimens and others with ‘Lanta-type” femora are similar to females of Nenlaxta mackerrasae from the same or nearby lacalities and I therefore consider them to be this species, However, it is possible that there is a species of Laxta whose females have the same color pattern as N. macKkerrasae. Neolaxta triangulifera n.sp (Figs LH-J; 4A-D) MAteRiaAL EXAMINED Hovotype; male, N.B. Qld., Nrh. Bell Peak, 20 ko §. Cairns, 900-1000 m, 15-16,ix.1981, G, Monteith and D. Cook, QM T-9561. PARATYPES? QUEENSLAND: OM> Mt. Fisher, 7 kin SW Millaa Millaa, N, Qld., QM. Berlesute No. 409, rainforest, 1100 m, sieved litter, 17.348 (45.34, 19, 27.iv, 1982, Monteith, Yeates, and Cook; Bellenden Ker Range, 'okm §, Cable Tower No. 7, 500 m, | * nymph, 25-431.4.1981, Earthwatch/Old. Museum, The following were collected by Monteith, Yeates and Thompson: 3.0 km W of Cape Tribulation (site 6), 500 m, RF, 17 (terminalia on slide no. 16), in baited fly trap, 20,1x,- 7.x.1982; NE Qld, Bell Peak North, 10 km E Gordonvale, 850-1000 m, 1+ (genitalia on slide no. 17), 13.x,1982, ANIC: The Crater Nat. Park, ESE of Herherton, Gld,, in leaf liter, 22 nymphs, 25,1,1972, J.G. Brooks; 22 km $8 of Athurton, Longlands Gap Rd., leafmould, cain forest, 1* nymph, Uxi. 1969, 1.0), Brooks, DESCRIPTION Mace: Region between the ocelli distinctly concavely excavated, eyes bulging, close together, the interocular distance less than the length of the first antennal segment (EAI=0.4) (Fig. 4B). Pronotum subelliptical, margins not thickened, weakly upturned, surface punctate (not granulate), with only 4 small tubercles on the elevated hood portion, the two anterior ones closer together than the posterior pair; the punctations are pits each containing a minute seta (Fig. 4A). Supraanal plate transyerse, hind margin produced medially as a small triangular lobe (Fig. 1H). Subgenital plate weakly asymmetrical, right side oblique, hind margin rounded, weakly reflexed dorsad (Fig. 11), Ventral margins of the femora armed as follows: Front femur, anterior margin, 2-4, posterior margin, 0; Mid femur, front, 4-6, hind 1-2; Hind femur, front, 3-4, posterior, 1-2. Genitalia as in Fig. 1J; L2d attached to apex of L2vm; R2 without a subapical incision - Colouration: Light brown. Region between eyes and ocelli dark brown, rest of face yellowish, Pronotum with hood and mid posterior region ROTH: NEOLAXTA 149 somewhat darker than the lateral and anterior parts; punctations partly pigmented, half-moon- shaped. Tegmina light brown, hyaline. Abdominal tergites, sternites, and legs, light brown. (The male paratype is lighter in color than the holotype). Measurements (mm): Body length, 14.0-14.8; pronotum length x width, 5.0 x 7.6-8.5; tegmen length, 17.0-17.5; interocular distance, 0.2; length of first antennal segment, 0.5. FEMALE: Very flat, covered with a thin layer of dirt which has to be removed to see color and surface texture. Head smooth, vertex flat, interocular space about the same as the length of the first antennal segment (EAI=0.9-1.0) (Fig. 4D). Pronotum (Fig. 4C) with anteromedial margin weakly indented, tubercles very sparse, a few restricted to the hood and along the hind margin, remaining surface practically non- granulate, some small dark specks (each indicating the position of a minute seta) may be slightly raised above the surface. Abdominal tergites with small, widely spaced tubercles along their hind margins, remaining surfaces non-granulate, lateral margins widely overlapping the edges of the sternites. Hind margin of supraanal plate undulate, the right and left sides deeply concave forming 3 lobes (a medial and 2 lateral) (Fig. 4C). Front leg with minute dark granules on the anterior face of the coxa, and ventral surfaces of the trochanter and femur, some of the granules also occurring on the lower anterior Fic. 4: Neolaxta triangulifera, n. sp., from Queensland. A. Male holotype from Nth. Bell Peak, pronotum. B. Male paratype from 3 km west of Cape Tribulation, head (frontal). C, D. Female paratype from Mt. Fisher, 7 km southwest of Millaa Millaa, habitus, and head (frontal), respectively. 150 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM surface of the femur. Spines on the ventral margins of the femora are as follows: Front femur, anterior margin, 0-1, hind margin, 0; Mid femur, anterior, 0-4, posterior, 0-2; Hind femur, anterior 0-3, posterior, 0-2. Colouration: Light brown. Head with a dark brown spot on the frons and between the eyes, the latter divided by the Y-shaped suture. Dorsal surface brown, with lighter broad lateral zones. Pronotum with dark specks, each spot indicating the site of a minute seta. Abdominal sternites light brown, speckled with small brown spots. Cerci dark brown with yellow apices. Measurements (mm). Body length, 14.6-17.0; pronotum length x width, 4.3-5.4 x 9.0-10.2; interocular distance, 0.8-0.9; length of first antennal segment, 0.9-1.0. Nympu: Both sexes resemble the adult female, but lack the minute dark granules on the front coxa, trochanter, and femur. Spines on the ventral margins of the femora are lacking. ETYMOLOGY The specific name refers to the median triangular lobe on the hind margin of the supraanal plate. REMARKS As in mackerrasae, the small number and size of the spines on the ventral margins of the femora, or their complete absence, makes it difficult to place the females and nymphs in Neolaxta. However, the shape of the supraanal plate (both sexes) is unique for the species and makes it easily identifiable. Neolaxta sp. A. MATERIAL EXAMINED QUEENSLAND. ANIC: Bluff Ra. near Biggenden, foothills under leaf mould, 12 (possibly a nymph), 16.viii.1971, H. Frauca. DESCRIPTION FEMALE. Similar to triangulifera, but differs as follows: Supraanal plate shorter, the hind margin between the rounded posterior corners weakly scalloped, lacking a distinct medial triangular lobe. Pro-, meso-, and metanotum with a longitudinal row of upright tubercles on each side of the midline; in addition, the pronotum has groups of tubercles on the outer borders of the cucullus. The tubercles along the hind margins of the abdominal tergites are upright and each segment has a median tubercle forming a longitudinal line that is a continuation of the medial double row of thoracic tubercles. The spines on the anteroventral margin of the front femur are only slightly more robust than the hairs on the mid and hind femora, and they are not characteristic for the genus. The ventral surface of the trochanter and femur of the front leg lack granules. Colouration: The surface is covered with debris which has to be removed to reveal color and texture. Light brown. Head with frons and vertex dark brown. Pronotum with 4 dark spots on the lateral parts of the hood where groups of tubercles are located. A dark brown median line, delineated by upright tubercles, starts at about the center of the pronotum and continues the length of the meso- and metanotum. Measurements (mm): Body length, 13.2; pronotum length x width, 4.5 x 8.0; interocular distance, 1.0; length of first antennal segment, 0.8. REMARKS Although this specimen appears to be distinct from the more northern ftriangulifera, 1 feel it should not be named until the male is found. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I thank the museums and curators, mentioned earlier, who kindly lent me specimens. I am grateful to the American Philosophical Society (Penrose Fund), and the Australian Biological Resources Study (ABRS), for partial support. LITERATURE CITED MACKERRAS, M.J., 1968. Neolaxta monteithi, gen. et sp. n., from eastern Australia (Blattodea : Blaberidae). Jour. Aust. Entomol. Soc. 7: 143-6. Mem. Od Mus, 25(1): 151—167.[1987} THE GENUS TRYONICUS SHAW FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW CALEDONIA (DICTYOPTERA ; BLATTARIA : BLATTIDAE : TRYONICINAB). Louis M, ROTH Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University, Cambridge, MA, 02138, U.S.A. (Correspondence: 81 Brush Hill Road, Sherborn, MA, 01770, U.S.A.). ABSTRACT The genus Trvonicus, which was previously known from one species, 7. parvus (Tepper), in southeastern Australia is revised. Two new species, T. monteithi and T, mackerrasue are described from north Queensland, The genus is newly recognized from New Caledonia by the transfer of three species of Siylopyga ta Trvonicus, viz. T. angusia Chopard, T. rufescens Chopard, and T. vicina Chopard, Tryvnicus is redefined, its subfamily position is discussed, and a key is presented to both sexes of the six included species. INTRODUCTION The material on which this paper is based was loaned to me by the following museums and curators: ANIC — Australian National Insect Collection, CSIRO, Canberra, A,C.T., Australia, Dr D.C.F. Rentz and Mr John Balderson; MCZH — Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University, Cambridge, MA, U.S.A.; Dr A,F. Newton; MHNB — Naturhistorisches Museum, Basel, Switzerland; Dr C, Baroni Urbani; QMBA — Queensland Museum, Brisbane, Australia; Dr G.B. Monteith; UQLA — University of Queensland, St. Lucia, Brisbane, Australia; Miss M. Schneider through Dr G.B, Monteith. Genus Tryonicus Shaw Tryonicus Shaw, 1925, p. 202; McKittrick and Mackerras, 1965, p. 224: Mackerras, 1968, p. 556, Type-species: Tryanicus monianus Shaw [synonym of Tryonieus parvus (Tepper)], by monolypy, Princis, 1966, p. 559, REMARKS Species of Tryonicus are found, at reasonable altitudes, on ihe ground under stones and bits of wood in wet rain forest. They are never found under bark or above ground on dead trees or logs like most other rainforest cockroaches (Monteith, pers. comm.). AFFINITIES McKittrick and Mackerras (1965) established the Tryonicinae and placed it between the Lamproblattinae and Blattinae in the Blattidae. However, Princis. (1966, p. 404) did not accept the Lamproblattinae or Tryonicinae, and synonymized both with Blattinae. Shaw (1925, p. 202) had earlier suggested that the genus be placed in the Blatfa group of the Blattinae. MeKittrick and Mackerras. (1965, p. 227) compared the spermathecae of Lamproblatia albipalpus (Lamproblattinae), Blarta orientalis (Blattinae), and Eurycotis —_floridana (Polyzosteriinae). According to them, the spermatheca of Tryonicus parvus (= moniunus) is forked and one branch bears a round sclerotized, terminal expansion, whereas the other is wholly membranous, but is thicker than the common duct (Fig. 2L), When sclerotizations occur in spermathecae of the other species, supposedly they are elongate rather than round. Unfortunately these comparisons are based only on one species representing each of the subfamilhes, Tryonicus mackerrasae 0. sp, and 7. monteithi n. sp. have unbranched spermathecae whose sclerotized reservoirs are elongate and straight (Fig. 6B, J), or elliptical or round (Figs. 3H, 1, 6C, E, H). Tryonicus sp. 1 has a forked spermatheca but the small branch is about the same width as the common duct (Fig. 7E, G). The most unusual spermatheca occurs in Tryonicus angusta which has a reservoir that terminates in a sphere at one end and a club-shaped extension at the other (Fig. 8G). Although the spermathecae are variable, I believe that the other characters given by Mackerras (1968, pp. 513, 556) warrant retaining the subfamily Tryonicinae. 151 152 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM The oothecuc of the Lamproblartinae differ markedly from those of the Blattinae and Polyzosteriinae, both of which have similar egg, cases. A comparison of the oothecae of species of Tryonicus with those of related subfamilies might aid in placing the genus more unequivocally (Roth 1968, p. 87). Mackerras (1968, p. 560) unsuccessfully tried to rear 7. parvus but never obtained oothecae. I have seen one pinned female of T. menteithi which had started to make an ootheca, but not enough had been formed in the genital chamber to indicate the final shape of the keel, and nature of the lareral walls. However, the fragment suggested that the shape of the keel and wails are different fram those of the Blattinae and Polyzosteriinae; the walls of the fragment contained masses of calcium oxalate crystals, which is characteristic of all Blattidae. Shaw (1925, p. 191) stated (hat the ootheca is not longitudinally fluted, T. mackerrasae, T. monteithi, and T. sp. | are more closely related to each other (TI modified, and similiarity in left male genital phallomere), than they are to either 7 parvus and T. angusta. Male genitalia of 7. rufescens and T. vicina were not available for comparison, The male genilalia and female spermathecae of the new Australian taxa are variable suggesting that these species are in a state of Mux, DIAGNOSIS Eves reduced, distance between them greater than that between antennal sockets, ocellar spots absent. Last maxillary palpal segment enlarged (Figs 2F, 3E, 4G). Male tegmina reduced in length, either narrow lateral pads (P1_ 1A), or broad (normal width) with overlapping hind margins (P1. 1C, E), or completely absent (Fig, 8A); wings vestigial, much smailer than and hidden under the tegmina (Figs 2A, 44), or absent (Fig. 8A). Female completely apterous (P1. 1B), or with small lateral tegmina and hind wings absent (Pl. 1D, F). Ventral margins of femora armed as follows; Front femur: anterior margin with a few slender setae on basal half followed by a row of very small piliform setae, terminating in 1 or 2 large distal spines, posterior margin with O-1 spines plus | distal.. or completely unarmed; Mid femur: anterior margin, 0 plus | distal, or completely unarmed, posterior margin unarmed or, 0-2 plus 1 distal; Hind femur: anterior margin, 0 plus | distal, posterior margin, usually 1-3 (0 or 4-6 tare), plus | distal, or with 2 spines without a distal; geniculate spine on mid and hind femora, absent from front femur, Pulvilli small and apical, or not clearly present on all segments, oF completely absent; arolia absent (Mackerras stated that arolia are ‘small or absent’, but I have nat seen this structure on any specimens; in her description of T. parvus, on which the generic description was based, she stated that arolia are absent, as was pointed out by Shaw); tarsal claws long, symmetrical, simple. First abdominal tergite (*) with (PJ, IC), or without a medial specialization; female abdominal tergites unspecialized. Male subgenital plate symmetrical or practically so, stvles similar, small, cylindrical, widely separated (Fig. 2D). Spermatheca with a long convoluted duct, the terminal region forked (Figs 2L, 7E, G), or unbranched, the enlarged reservoir straight (Fig. 6B), or with an elliptical (Fig. 6C) or round enlargement (Fig, 3H), or with both an elliptical or round swelling (Fig. 8G). Basivalvulae of female genitalia fused with the spermathecal plate forming a single strong sclerite surrounding the spermathecal opening (Fig. 6A). Male genital phallomere L2v may be intraspecifically yariable (Fig. ‘SA-D), Proventriculus as in Fig. 6G. Key To Species OF TRYONICL/S* PE ALES 0 yy eee ony a Danie Pemeineaine ale deal steele Joab aielen 7 2. Tegmina present.......000....... Jon tataan TE Tegmina absent (New Caledonia),,,..cngista 3, ‘Tegmina reduced io widely separated, narrow lateral pads which extend only to about the hind margin of the mesonotum or metanotum. Hind wings present (vestigial) or absent.,.,, 4 Tegmina reduced in length reaching to about hind margin of T2, or middle of T3, their widths normal with hind margins overlapping at midline(PI. 1C, E). First abdominal tergite with a median specialization .........0eseeenene 5 4, Tegmina short reaching to about hind margin of mesonotum. Hind wings absent .........., 6 ‘Tegmina longer, extending slighily beyond hind margin of metanotum (PI. 1, A). Hind wings very narrow (Fig, 2A), hidden under legmina. First abdominal tergite unspecialized, (Australia) ........).....5. parvus 5, Small (pronotum length x width, 2.0-2.6 x 2,8-3,1; tegmen length, 2.2-3.0), Yellowish brown, palps pale. Hind margin of supraanal *The male of Trvonieus sp, } keys our to couplet 5 (see remarks under thal species) ROTH: TRYONICUS 153 plate concavely excavated (Fig. 3G). (AUStralia) vi.) c:csccccceseecseceueeen mackerrasae Larger (pronotum length = width, 3.2-4.3 x 4.0-5.5; tegmen length, 3.1-4.5). Blackish or dark brown (tegmina may have a metallic sheen), palps dark. Hind margin of supraanal plate convexly rounded (Fig, 4D), or with a weak medial indentation (Fig. 4B). (Australia) 2.0... ....ceceeeeeee ee pp eateue monteithi 6, Tegmina with anterior (outer) margin straight, posterior (inner) border convex, apex truncate. (New Caledonia)............ rufescens Tegmina narrower, tapering to an acute or subacute apex, (New Caledonia) .,...... vicina 7. Tegmina and wings absent (P1. 1,B).......-. 8 Tegmina reduced to small lateral pads (P1. 1,D,F), wings absent ..................0002eece eee 9 8. Hind margin of T7 sinuous (Fig. 2B). (Australia) .......0.02cccceceeccneespeceeney parvus Hind margin of T7 straight (Fig. 8A). (New Caledonia)... .eccse:eccesereeerecceeereneere angusta 9. Tegmina very narrow, tapering to an acute or subacute apex. (New Caledonia) ........ vicina Tegmina slightly wider, apically truncate or SUDICUNCALE,: .oeserrersereensepeeceseeguseeseseyes 10 10. Blackish or blackish brown; head, antennae, and palps dark brown. Pronotum length x width, 3.0-4.0 x 3.9-4.9; tegmen length x width, 1.0-2.0 X 1,2-1.7. (Australia) ........: Vne'te ee's shinnis 4a/e'dy's gle plspinig e'e's's geipe'g ee'ye'elde monteithi Il. Reddish brown; head blackish brown, antennae and palps pale yellowish. Pronotum length x width, 2.6 * 4.0; tegmen length x width, 1.7 * 0.8. (New Caledonia)............. Yellowish brown; head not darker than rest of body; palps pale, antennae slightly darker. Pronotum length * width, 2,0-2.3 * 2,9-3,3; tegmen length x width, 0.7-1,0 « 0.8-0.9. (Australia) ,.0......2.,-cs2ceceeeee eee mackerrasae DistRIBUTION Of the three species of Tryonicus known from Australia, 7. parvus is the most southern and was previously known from eastern New South Wales, and Lamington National Park in southeastern Queensland near the New South Wales border (Mackerras 1968). New records extend the range 800 km north to Eungella, central Queensland, T. mackerrasae, T. monteithi and T_ sp. | occur in mountains of the wet tropical zone of north Queensland. 7. mackerrasae is most widespread, extending from the Kirrama Range north to Cape Tribulation. The other two have smaller ranges within the same zone and all three are sympatric in the mountains behind Mossman (Fig. 1). Before Tryonicus was recognized from New Caledonia, Dr G.B. Monteith wrote me (June 7, 1984) that ‘The reason I went to New Caledonia (an old Gondwana plate fragment with many ancient biogeographic links with Australia) was to investigate the summit faunas of some of its mountains, One of the montane relicts I suspected ) Es @ mackerrasae f co monteithi / oe\ @ parvus .' ] o Spel e\ \ XY My lay KE { Lj “) Sy \ 4 \ | } \ 4 ' ao! | | \ ! in ee Hi cla? - were eo eee . —) 5 | | - / | | . / ; i i =/ t | . ‘ J L x ros, afl eS / \ ss S ; Se oe J \ | . i ( ~~ St eet’ Ney, Soe 4 e io iu Fic. 1: Distribution of species of Tryanicus in Australia. 154 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM might be there was Tryonicus and | was delighted to confirm this’. There are many examples of links between primitive elements of the Australian flora and fauna and that of New Caledonia (e.g. Holloway 1979; Monteith 1980). The new Caledonia species all occur above 600 m altitude. T. angusta is widespread over the northern two- thirds of the island, but 7. rufescens and T. vicina are still known only from their type localities at Mt Ignambi and Mt Humboldt, respectively at the north and south ends of the island. Tryonicus parvus (Tepper) (Figs 2A-L, Plate 1A, B) Peripluneta parva Tepper, 1895, p. 162 (female). Blatta purva (Tepper), Kirby, 1910, p. 564. Platyzosteria parva (Tepper), Shelford, 1910, p. 7 (as doubtful species). Cutilia parva (Tepper), Shaw, 1925, p. 191. Melanozosteria parva (Tepper), Princis, 1966, p. 576. Tryonicus parvus (Tepper), Mackerras, 1968, p. 557, figs 50-57, 58, 98, 99, 103 (male and female). Tryanicus montanus Shaw, 1925, p. 202, figs 24-26; Fic,.2: Trvonicus parvus (Tepper). A-G, Male: A, Thorax (right tegmen removed to show small hind wing); B, Left genital phallomere; C, Supraanal plate; D, Subgenital plate; E, Seventh abdominal tergite; F, Maxillary palpal segments 4 and 5; G, Genital phallomere L3; H, Nymph, seventh abdominal tergite. I-L, Females: I-K, Supraanal plates; L, Terminal portion of spermatheca. Localities: A-E, H, Bald Mt. area, Qld.; F, Gibraltar Range, via Glenn Innes, N-S.W.; G, Lamington National Park, Qld.; L, Barrington House, N.S.W.; J, Eungella Nat. Park, Qld.; K, L, Nalional Park, McPherson Range, Qld. ROTH: TRYONICUS 155 McKittrick and Mackerras, 1965, p. 224, figs 2, 9a, 9b, 10; Mackerras, 1968, p. 557; Princis, 1966, p. 559, MATERIAL EXAMINED The holotype was not examined; it isa °, from Sydney, N.S.W. and is in the South Australian Museum. QUEENSLAND. QMBA: National Park, Q., Macpherson Ra., ¢ holotype of Tryonicus montanus Shaw (no. 0/2872); (labelled montana), xii.1918, (additional data from Shaw, 1925, p. 203: Lamington Plateau, 3000 ft, 1917-1918); National Park, Lamington, Q., 22% paratypes of Tryonicus montanus Shaw (genitalia of one mounted between coverslips by M.J. Mackerras), 3000 ft., 1.1917, H. Tryon; same locality and elevation, 12 paratype of 7. montanus, 1.iii.1921, A.J. Turner. UQLA;: Eungella Nat, Pk., via Mackay, N.Q., 1° (slide 10), 5.viii.1968, B. Cantrell; Conondale, sites 12-13, 1%, 29.xi.1974, G.B. Monteith; Lamington Nat. Pk., S.E. Qld., Nothofagus forest, 3800 ft, 14 (slide 8), 1 nymph, 30.i1.1965, G. Monteith; Bald Mt. area, via Emu Vale, SE. Qld., 3-4000 ft., 17-22.v.1969, 14 (slide 12), B. Cantrell, 27, 1 nymph, G.B. Monteith; no data, 12 (genitalia mounted between coverslips by M.J. Mackerras). MCZH: Nat. Park, Q., McPherson Rge., 3-4000 ft., 12, March 1932, Darlington. ANIC: Lamington N.P., |2 (genitalia between coverslips on pin), | nymph (ex colony 212, 1.v.1965 (both det. as parvus by Mackerras). New SoutH WALES. UQLA: Barrington House, via Salisbury, 12 (slide 9), 26-28.xii.1965, T. Weir. The following were collected by G. Monteith: Carrai Plateau, via Kempsey, 1 4, 3-5.i.1967; Gibraltar Range, via Glen Innes, rain forest, 34, 27-29.xii.1972; Night Cap Track, Whian Whian S.F., via Dunoon, | nymph, 25,xi.1972. (12 retained at MCZ). ANIC: Ebor, 1% (genitalia between coverslips on pin), 21,iii.1954, E,F. Riek (det. as parvus by Mackerras). DESCRIPTION Mackerras (1968, p. 557) gave a complete description of parvus. The following should distinguish this species from the new taxa. MALE. Tegmina greatly reduced to narrow, widely separated lateral pads extending slightly beyond hind margin of metanotum; wings much smaller, narrow, elongated, completely hidden under tegmina (Figs 2A, Pl. 1A). First abdominal tergite unspecialized. Hind margin of seventh abdominal tergite sinuous (Fig. 2E). Supraanal plate transverse, hind margin almost straight (Fig. 2C), or weakly convex. Interstylar margin of subgential plate convex (Fig. 2D). Left genital phallomere as in Fig. 2B. Anteroventral margin of front femur with 2 distal spines, posterior margin with 1 distal; Mid femur, anteroventral margin, O plus 1 distal, posteroventral, 0-2 plus 1 distal; Hind femur, anteroventral with 0 plus | distal, posteroventral, usually 2 or 3 (rarely 0, or 4-6) spines plus | distal. Pulvilli small, apical. Mainly black, shining. Antennae with a few pale segments in the middle third. FEMALE. Apterous (Pl. 1B). Supraanal plate trigonal, apex rounded (Fig. 2K), or weakly (21) or more distinctly indented (Fig. 2J). Spermathecal reservoir round, bulbous, arising from the long convoluted duct preapically, the region beyond the insertion wider than the long duct (Fig. 2L). MEASUREMENTS (mm) (¢ in parentheses). Body length, 12.0-14.0 (11.0-16.7); pronotum length x width, 3.2-3.8 x 4.7-5.8 (3.2-3.7 x 4.8-5,3); tegmen length x width, 2.7-3.5 x 1,2-1.7. NymPuH. Resembles adult female but hind margin of seventh abdominal tergite is more deeply sinuous (Fig. 2H). Tryonicus mackerrasae, n, sp. (Figs 3A-I, Plate 1, C, D) Tryonicus n. sp. A and B, Mackerras, 1968, p. 561. (female). MATERIAL EXAMINED Ho.LotyPe; ¢, Kiramma State Forest, via Cardwell, N. Qld., 17-18.viii.1966, G. Monteith (labelled Tryonicus sp. nov., by Mackerras); in the QMBA (T.9526). PaRATYPES: Queensland. UQLA: Crater Lake Nat. Park, via Ravenshoe, N.Q., 1% (slide 7), 1¢ (slide 13), 2¢, 12 (slide 14), 12 (slide 15), 3%, 9.viii.1968, B. Cantrell (1é and 1% retained in MCZ); Millaa Millaa Falls, via Millaa Millaa, N.Q., 1¢, 10-11.xii.1966, B. Cantrell; same data as holotype, 12 (slide 17); Mt, Edith, 2 ml. N. of Tinaroo Dam, N.Q., 3500 ft., 12, 2.vi.1972, G.B. Monteith. QMBA: Bellenden Ker, Cableway Tower No. 3, 1000 m, Pyrethrum/trees, 19, 25.ix.1981, G. Monteith; Bellenden Ker Range, N.Q., Cable Tower No. 3, 1054 m, 12 (slide 39), 25-31.x.1981, Earthwatch/Qld Mus.; Mt. Fisher, 7 km SW Millaa Millaa, N.Q., Kjellberg Rd., 1000 m, 17 (slide 32), 4¢, 12, 1% (slide 33), 3.v.1983, G.B. Monteith and D.K. Yeates; The Bluff, 11 km W. of Mossman, N,E. Qld., 800-1300 m, 12 (slide 24), 2.xi.1983, Monteith, Yeates, and Thompson; 4.5 km W. of Cape Tribulation (site 9), 760 m, Pyrethrum knockdown, R.F., 12, 29,ix.1982, Monteith, Yeates, and Thompson; Mt, Demi, 7 km S.W. of Mossman, N.E. Qld., 1100 m, 12 (slide 29), 29.x,1983, D.K. Yeates and G.I. Thompson; 21 km S. of Atherton, N.E. Qld., 1040-1100 m, Pyrethrum knockdown in R.F., 12, 5.xi,1983, D.K. Yeates and G.I. Thompson. ANIC: ‘Dunbulla’ (= Danbulla), 22, 30.vi.1951, J.F. Gay (sp. A of Mackerras). DESCRIPTION MALE. Tegmina reduced in length reaching to about hind margin of T2, or middle of T3, normal in width, hind margins overlapping; hind wings much smaller, folded, curved, apices directed 156 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 3mm | ‘ Imm 3mm MR asenas. eo ‘ 3mm ay 2mm | 2mm ail . 4 * PLATE 1. Tryonicus spp., habitus of males (upper row) and females (lower row). A, B, 7. parvus (Tepper) (A from Gibraltar Range, via Glenn Innes, N.S.W.; B, from Conondale, Qld); C, D, T. mackerrasae, n. sp., male holotype and female paratype (both from Kirrama State Forest, Qld); E, F, T. monteithi, n. sp., male holotype (Bellenden Ker Range, Qld), and female paratype (Bartle Frere, NW Centre Peak). Arrow in Fig. C indicates position of gland on T1. ROTH; TRYONICUS 157 toward midline of abdomen where their tips almost touch setal specialization on T! (Figs 3A, PI. LC). First abdominal tergite with dense setal tuft directed dorsally or dorsoposteriorly located in anteromedial fossa (Figs 3A, Pl. 1C), and partly hidden under metanotum. Hind margin of T7 straight, Supraanal plate transverse, lateral margins oblique, corners rounded, hind margin shallowly concave medially (Fig, 3C). Subgenital plate short, extending slightly beyond hind margin of supraanal plate, interstylar margin truncate or practically so (Fig. 3D). Front femur: 0.5mm anteroventral margin with row of slender setae on basal half followed by row of very small piliform setae, terminaling in 1 distal spine, posteroventral margin with single distal spine; Mid femur: anteroventtal margin with | distal, posteroventral margin unarmed, or sometimes with 2 small spines, | distal spine present; Hind femur: anteroventral margin with 1 distal spine, posteroventral margin with 1 or usually 2 spines, plus 1 distal; genicular spine on mid and hind femurs. Arolia and pulvilli absent. Left genital phallomere as in Fig. 3B, 0.5mm Fic. 3: Trvonicus mackerrasae 0. sp. A-E, Males: A, Holotype, thorax (right tezgmen removed to show hind wing}: B-D, Paratype from Mt. Demi, 7 km SW of Mossman, Qld.: B, Left genital phallomere; C, Supraanal plate; D, Subgenital plate; E, Holotype, maxillary palpal segments 4 and 5. FI, Female paratypes: F, Thorax (MI, Edith, Qld.); G, H, Supraanal plate and terminal pan of spermatheca (Mv. Fisher, 7 km SW of Millaa Millaa, Old); 1, Terminal part of spermatheca (Kitrama State Forest, Qld.). 158 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Coloration. Head reddish brown, palps and basal part of clypeus yellowish, labrum brownish yellow. Antennae light brown, without pale segments, Pronotum brown, lateral regions more broadly pale than anterior or posterior zones, Tegmina, abdominal tergites, and cerci, brownish, darker than paler legs and abdominal sternites. FEMALE. Tegmina widely separated, small lateral pads, posterior margins convex, apices trunctae reaching (and a continuation of) hind margin of mesonotum, or sometimes slightly beyond (Figs 3F, Pl. 1, D); hind wings absent. Supraanal plate transverse, hind margin usually with a shallow mesal invagination (Fig. 3G), or sometimes narrowly truncate. Genital sclerites typical of the genus. Spermatheca unbranched with a round or elliptical reservoir at apex (Fig. 3H, I). MEASUREMENTS (mim) (* in parentheses). Body length, 6.0-9.2 (6.3-8.4); pronotum length x width, 2.0-2.6 x 2.8-3.1 (2.0-2.3 x 2.9-3.3); tegmen length x width, 2.2-3.0 x 1.7-2.3 (0.7- 1.0 x 0.8-0.9). REMARKS Mackerras (1968, p. 561) claimed to have 2 new species of Tryonicus which she did not name. Species A was represented by 2 small yellowish females taken at ‘Dunbulla’, Qld. (actually Danbulla), and have small lobiform tegmina. Species B was represented by a male and female which were small, yellowish brown, with pale yellow legs and palps, collected in Kirrama State Forest. These latter two specimens are the holotype and a paratype of the present species which I am dedicating to Dr Mackerras. According to her, the female is apterous, but it has small tegmina (PI. 1D); she may have erred because the hind margins of the tegmina appear to be a continuation of the hind margin of the mesonotum. I have examined the specimens of her sp. A and they are both mackerrasae. Tryonicus monteithi n. sp. (Figs 4A-G, 5A-D, 6A-I, Plate 1E, F) MATERIAL EXAMINED Ho.otyre: *, Bellenden Ker Range, N.Q., Summit TV Stn., 1560 m, 29,iv.-2.v,1983, G,B, Monteith and D.K. Yeates; in the QMBA (T.9540). PaRATYPES: Queensland. UQLA: Mt. Edith, 2 miles N. of Tinaroo Dam, N.Q., 14, 1% (slide 16), 2.vi.1972, G.B. Monteith. QMBA: Mt. Bellenden Ker, Centre Peak Summit, 1500 m, 12% (slide 26), 1° (slide 30), 12 (slide 34), 10-12.iv.1979, G.B. Monteith; The Bluff, 11 km W. of Mossman, 1300 m, 1¥ (slide 27), 2.xi.1983, Monteith, Yeates, and Thompson; same locality as holotype, 1°, 28.x.1983, Monteith, Yeates and Thompson, 17 (deposited in MCZ), 14 (slide 36) 24 (R.F., pitfall trap), 29.iv.-2.v.1983, G.B. Monteith and D.K. Yeates, 17 (R.F., pitfall trap), Apr.-Oct. 1982, S. Montague. The following were collected by Earthwatch/Qld. Mus.: same data as holotype, 1% (slide 25), 25-31.x.1981; Mt. Bartle- Frere, N.W. Centre Peak ridge, 1400-1500 m, 24, 1%, 7-8.xi.1981; Mt, Bartle-Frere, Sth. Peak summit, 1620 m, 2% (one deposited in MCZ), 6-8.xi.1981; Bellenden Ker Range, Cable Tower 3, 1054 m, pitfall trap in rain forest, 1@ (slide 35), 14 (slide 37), 1.xi.1981. The following were collected by G.B. Monteith and D. Cook: Bartle Frere, N.W. Centre Peak, 1400-1500 m, 1 # (slide 22), 1%, 1% (slide 23), 24.ix.1981; Nth. Bell Peak, 20 km S. Cairns, 900-1000 m, 14, 15-16.ix.1981, DESCRIPTION Mace. Tegmina reduced in length, reaching almost to hind margin of T2 or middle of T3, width normal, hind margins overlapping along midline of abdomen (PI. 1E); hind wings further reduced, curved, apices directed toward median specialization on T1 (Fig. 4A). First abdominal specialization a tuft of setae in an anteromedial fossa or depression. Supraanal plate convexly rounded (Fig. 4D), sometimes with a weak indication of a broad medial indentation (Fig. 4B). Interstylar margin weakly convex (Fig. 4E, F), or subtruncate (Fig. 4C). Front femur: anteroventral margin with long slender setae on basal half, followed by row of short piliform setae, and 1 or rarely 2 distal spines, posterior margin with | distal spine; Mid femur: anteroventral margin with 1 distal, posteroventral with 1 or 2 spines plus 1 distal; Hind femur: anteroventral margin with 1 distal, posteroventral with 1, 2, or rarely 3 spines plus 1 distal; genicular spine on mid and hind femurs. Arolia and pulvilli absent. Terminal portion of L2v sclerite of left genital phallomere variable (Fig. 5A-D). Coloration. Head black. Antennae may have some pale distal segments. Labrum reddish brown, basal half of clypeus yellowish, maxillary palps dark brown. Pronotum and tegmina black or brownish black very narrow lateral edges of former, and anterior margins of latter may be reddish brown, and the tegmina may have a Fic. 4: Tryonicus monteithi n. sp., male paratypes from Queensland. A, Thorax (left tegmen removed to show reduced hind wing); B-F, Supraanal plate (with cerci) and subgenital plate (with styles); G, Segments 4 and 5 of maxillary palps. Localities: A, Mt. Bartle Frere; B and C, Bartle Frere, NW to Centre Peak; D and E, Bellenden Ker Range, Cable Tower 3; F and G, Bellenden Ker Range, Summit TV station. ROTH: TRYONICUS 159 160) MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Fic. 5: Tryonicus monteithi n. sp., male paratypes from Queensland, left genital phallomeres. Localities: A-C, Bellenden Ker Range, Summit TY station (A), Cable Tower 3 (B and C); D, Bartle Frere, NW to Centre Peak. All to same scale. ROTH: TRYONICUS 161 0.5mm 0.5mm Fic. 6: Tryonicus monteithi n. sp., female paratypes from Queensland. A, Genitalia (a = spermathecal opening; b = basivalvula and spermathecal plate; c = spermatheca); B, C, Spermathecae. D, E, Supraanal plate and spermatheca, respectively; F-H, Supraanal plate, proventriculus (flattened), and spermatheca, respectively; 1, J, Supraanal plate and spermatheca, respectively. Localities: A, Bellenden Ker Range, Summit TV station; B, Bartle Frere, NW Centre Peak; C, Mt. Bellenden Ker Centre Peak; D and E, Mt. Bellenden Ker Centre Peak summit; F-H, Mt. Edith, 2 miles north of Tinaroo Dam; | and J, The Bluff, 11 km west of Mossman. 162 MEMOIRS OF THE QUBENSLAND MUSEUM metallic sheen, Abdominal tergites dark brown, Abdominal sternites and legs reddish brown, the former somewhat darker. Cerci dark brown (similar to abdominal tergites), or reddish brown (much lighter than tergites). Some specimens are dark reddish brown rather than blackish, FemMaALe. Tegmina lateral pads usually extending slightly beyond (PI. 1, F), but sometimes level with hind margin of mesonotum. Hind margin of supraanal plate usually convexly rounded (Fig, 6A, D, F), sometimes with a weak concave indentation (Fig. 61). Genitalia as in Fig. 6A. Spermatheca unbranched, terminal reservoir uniformly elongated (Fig. 6B, J), or with an elliptical or round distal swelling (Fig. 6C, E, H). Proventriculus as in Fig. 6G. Coloration dark brown or blackish brown. MEASUREMENTS (mm) (+ in parentheses). Body (ength, 11.0-13.7 (10.3-13.5); pronotum lengih * width, 3.2-4.3 x 4.0-5.5 (3.0-4.0 x 3,9-4.9); tezgmen length » width, 3.1-4.5 x 2.5-3.5 (1.0- 2.0 ~ |,2-1,7). RUMARKS Generally this is a larger and darker species than mackerrasae. Although the two taxa look quite different (size and color), many of the morphological characters are similar indicating a close relationship, Of particular interest ig the apparent polymorphism in the shape of the female spermatheca whose terminal reservoir varies from a straight tube more or less uniform in widtli, 10 one that has an elliptical or round distal swelling, the latter qwo forms occurring in mackerrasae. After preparing the first spermathecal slides I thought that the round terminal bulb in mackerrasae, and the straight lube in onteithi were good characters to differentiate the females of these taxa, especially in some specimens whose size was not clearly distinctive. However, additional preparations showed that the extent of spermathecal variation makes ihe use of this character doubtful; however, | have seen no mackerrasde spermathecae with @ uniformly straight reservoir, unless [ have misidentified some of the small females of monteithi. The taxonomic significance of spermatheval variation is unknown, Variability in the L2v of the male left genital phallomere also suggests that the species is in a fluid state. Tryonicus sp. | (Fig. 7A-G) MATERIAL EXAMINED Oucensland, OMBA; Mt. Demi, 7 km SW Mossman, 900-1000 m, 1? {slide 28), 26.0v.41983, Monteith and Yeates; Mt. Lewis road, via Julatten, rain forest, 14 (slide 31), 12.x.1980, G.B. Monteith; Devil's Thumb area, 10 kn NW Mossman, 1000-1180.m, 1 © (slide 35), 9-10.%,1982, Monteith, Yeates, and Thompson. UQLA: Mt. Lewis, via Julatten, 3500 ft.. 1+ (slide 11), 4.v,1970, G.B. Monteith. The aboye specimens look like miniature rnopitelthi (particularly color), but [ cannot place them unequivocally in that species, DESCRIPTION Mare. First abdominal (tergite modified. Tegmina and wings as in monteithi. Hind margin of supraanal plate with a medial invagination (Fig. 7A) (usually rounded in monteithi). Subgenital plate as in Fig. 7B. L2v of left genital phallomere with a spine-like sclerotization; L2d with numerous small spines along the lateral posterior margin (Fig. 7C). Shining black (metallic), or dark brown; maxillary palps dark. FEMALR. Tegmina as in monteithi. Hind margin of supraanal plate with a small shallow medial invagination (Fig. 7D, F), Spermatheca with terminal reservoir elongated, straight, without a bulbous swelling, inserted preapically, the small branch beyond the insertion about the same width a8 the common duct (Fig. 7E, G). MEASUREMENTS (mm) (+ in parentheses). Body length, 8.4-9.6 (8.5-10.3); pronotum length * width, 3.0 * 3.6-3.7 (2.6-3.1 * 3.5-3.9); legmen length x width, 2.9-3.3 * 2.3-2.46 (1.214 x 0.9-1.2). REMARKS These specimens are somewhat small for monfeitht and large for mackerrasae. Color is similar to monteithi (especially the dark palps and the metallic male), The male's left genital phallomere differs somewhat from those of the other 2 taxa, but this structure may be variable (at least in monteithi). The terminal portion of the female's spermatheca is elongated without a bulbous swelling, as in some enonteithi, but it has a small branch beyond the point of insertion of the reservoir. 7Trronicus parvus also has a branched spermatheca, but the large reservoir is round and bulbous, and the small branch is wider than the convoluted duct. The male af Tryonicus sp. 1 keys out to couplet 5. In size and shape of hind margin of supraanal plate it is close to mackerrasae, but its coloration is similar to that of monteithi. The L2d and L2v of the male’s left genital phallomere (Fig. 7C) dilfers somewhat from the two new species, but the L2v of monieithi may be variable (Fig. 5). The ROTH: TRYONICUS 163 size of the female is intermediate between mackerrasae and monteithi (couplets 10 and 11). Its spermathcea, unlike these two species, has a small branch beyond the insertion of the elongated distal reservoir (Fig. 7E, G), whose non-bulbous shape resembles that of some specimens of monteithi (Fig. 6B, J). 0.5mm 2.5mm Whether these specimens are variants of monteithi and mackerrasae, or are a distinct taxon, requires a study of additional material. A male from Mt. Demi (same locality as the sp. 1 male Demi) appears from Mt. to be mackerrasae. typical 0.5mm Fic. 7: Tryonicus sp. 1. A-C, Male (Mt. Lewis Road, via Julatten, Qld.): A, Supraanal plate; B, Subgenital plate; C, Left genital phallomere. D-G, Females: D and E, Supraanal plate and terminal portion of spermatheca (Mt. Lewis, Qld.); F and G, The same (Devils Thumb area, 10 km NW of Mossman, Qld.). 164 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Tryonicus angusta (Chopard) n. comb. (Fig. 8A-H) Siylopyga anzusia Chopard, 1924, p. 332, figs 63, 64 (male and female). Neostylopyga angusta (Chopard) Princis, 1966: 540. MATERIAL EXAMINED SYNTYPE: «¢, Forest of Mont lgnambi, New Caledonia, 8.vii.1911, Dr. S.farasin] and Dr, Rfoux); in the Basel Museum. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL: New Caledonia. QMBA: All specimens were collected by G. Monteith and D. Cook: Table Unio, 700-1000 m, 2¢ (1 with slide 41), 10,v, 1984; Mt.. Rembai, 650 m, 17, 700-900 m, 2+, i nymph, 9.v.1984; Mandjélia, above Pouébo, 600-750 m, 1°, 11- 13.v.1984; Mt. Do Summit, 1000 m, 1.7, 2» (1 with slide 42), 20.v.1984; Mt- Mou Summit, 1200 m, 1° (slide 43; spermatheca lost in preparation but similar to the one on slide 42), 20.v.1984. DESCRIPTION Mate. Dorsal surface of thorax with few, scattered, minute punctations. Pronotum strongly convex, with a shallow, median, longitudinal sulcus on posterior half. Tegmina and wings absent. First abdominal tergite unspecialized. Hind margin of T7 straight (Fig. 8A). Supraanal plate transverse, apex of hind margin rounded (Fig. 8A), shallowly concave (Fig. 8C, F), or truncate (Fig. 8E). Subgenital plate not extending beyond hind margin of supraanal plate, interstylar margin weakly convex (Fig. 8B). Front femur: anteroyentral margin with 1 or 2 distal spines, posterior margin without spines; mid femur: anteroventral margin without spines or with | distal, posterior margin without spines; hind femur: anteroventral margin with 1 distal, posteroventral with 2 spines, none distal, Pulvilli Fic. 8: Trvonicus angusta (Chopard) from New Caledonia. A, Male [rom Table Unio, habitus. B-F, Males: B-D, from Table Unio, subgenital plate, supraanal plate, and left genital phallomere, respectively; E, F, Supraanal plaies from Mandjélia, and Mt. Do, respectively. G, H, Female from Mt. Do, spermatheca and supraanal plate respectively. ROTH: TRYONICUS 165 appear !o be absent from most of the tarsal segments, but in some specimens they are recognizable on the fourth segment, and sometimes the third as well, Left genital phallomere as in Fig. 8D. Coloration. Black or reddish brown, usually shiny. Head black, clypeus yellow. Antennae and legs reddish brown, palps brown, FEMALE, Habitus similar to male. Supraanal plate transverse, trigonal, hind margin with (Fig. 8H) or without.a shallow medial indentation. Legs similar to males with following differences in femoral armament: mid femur: posteroventral margin without or with 1 spine; hind femur: posterovenral margin with 0-2 spines. Spermatheca with a slender duct leading into a sclerotized enlarged reservoir which is very dark Imm and spherical at one end and somewhat lighter and club-shaped on the other (Fig. 8G). MEASUREMENTS (mm) (2 in parentheses). Body length, 10.6-13.5 (11.0-14.2); pronotum length = width, 3,4-4,0 % 4,1-4,8 (3,5-4.0 4,3-4.8). Nympu, A male nymph (11.5 mm) resembles the adult but its supraanal plate is more strongly trigonal with the lateral margins somewhat undulate, Body color dark brown, legs yellowish brown. REMARKS This is the only species of 7ryonicus in which the males lack tegmina. T. angusta is close to parvus (absence of male tergal gland, and similarities in left male genital phallomere). The spermathecae of the two species are strikingly different. Fic, 9A, B, Trvonicus rufescens (Chopard), female syntype, thorax and fegmina, and supraanal plate, respectively. C, D, Tryonicus vicina (Chopard), female holotype, thorax and legmina, and supraanal plate, respectively. 166 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Tryonicus rufescens (Chopard) n. comb. (Fig. 9A, B) Stylopyga rufescens Chopard, 1924, p. 333, figs 65-67 (male and female). Neostylopyga rufescens (Chopard), Princis, 1966, p. 540. MATERIAL EXAMINED SYNTYPE: ?, Ignambi, New Caledonia, vii.1911, Drs. S[arasin] R[oux]; in the Basel Museum. DESCRIPTION FEMALE. Tegmina with anterior border straight, posterior border convex, apex subtruncate, reaching to hind margin of mesonotum; hind margin of metanotum practically straight (Fig. 9A). Supraanal plate transverse, trigonal, apex weakly indented (Fig. 9B). The only female I have seen has the front and mid legs missing, and damaged hind legs. The anterior and posterior ventral margins of the hind femurs have 4 or 5 large spines and 1 terminal spine; the left leg has only 4 non-pubescent tarsi and the metatarsus has 2 rows of spines along the entire ventral margin. Coloration. Reddish brown. Head dark brown, antennae, clypeus, and palps yellowish. Legs reddish. MEASUREMENTS (mm). Length, 9.3; pronotum length x width, 2.6 x 4.0; tegmen length x width, 1.7 x 0.8. MALE. I have not seen the male of this species. From Chopard’s description, the tegmina apparently are similar to those of the female (i.e. squamiform). The supraanal plate is triangular, with hind margin subtruncate. Subgenital plate with posterior margin convex, styles rather long, close together, subacute. Tryonicus vicina (Chopard) n. comb. (Fig. 9C, D). Stylopyga vicina Chopard, 1924, p. 334, figs 68, 69 (male and female). Neostylopyga vicina (Chopard), Princis, 1966, p. 540. MATERIAL EXAMINED Ho.otyPe: °, Summit of Mont Humboldt, New Caledonia, 1600 m, 18.viii.1911 (not Nov., as indicated); in the Basel Museum. DESCRIPTION FEMALE. Antennae pubescent. Tegmina very narrow, inner margin straight, tapering to a subacute apex, reaching to hind margin of mesonotum; wings absent; hind margin of metanotum concave (Fig. 9C). Supraanal plate transverse, hind margin broadly rounded, not idented medially (Fig. 9D). Pulvilli and arolia absent; tarsi pubescent. Front femur: anteroventral margin with 2 large proximal spines followed by a row of piliform setae, plus 2 terminal or distal spines; posteroventral margin with | distal spine. Mid femur: anteroventral margin with 2 spines on distal half, plus 1 terminal spine, posterior margin with 3 spines on distal half plus 1 terminal. Hind femur: anteroventral margin with 3 distal and no terminal spines; posterior margin with 2 distal and 1 terminal spine. Coloration. Reddish brown. Head similar to pronotal disk. Pronotum with anterior and most of lateral borders lighter than the disk region. Antennae, palps and legs light brown. MEASUREMENTS (mm). Length, 9.0; pronotum length x width, 2.5 x 3.6; tegmen length x width, 1.6 x 0.7. REMARKS According to Chopard, the male (which I have not seen) has tegmina and the concave hind margin of the metanotum, similar to the female. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I thank the individuals mentioned earlier who kindly loaned me specimens from their respective museums. I am grateful to the American Philosophical Society, and the Bureau of Flora and Fauna, Australian Biological Resources Study, for partial support. LITERATURE CITED CuHoparD, L., 1924. Blattidae de la Nouvelle-Calédonie et des Iles Loyalty. /m Sarasin, F. and Roux, J., Nova Caledonia. Recherches scientifiques en Nouvelle-Calédonie et aux Iles Loyalty. A. Zoologie 3: 301-36. Ho.ioway, J.D., 1979. A survey of the Lepidoptera, biogeography and ecology of New Caledonia. Ser. Entomol. 15, 588 pp., (W. Junk: The Hague). KirsBy, W.F., 1910. A synonymic catalogue of Orthoptera. Vol. 3. British Museum (Nat. Hist.), London. MACKERRAS, M.J., 1965. Australian Blattidae (Blattodea). I. General remarks and revision of the genus Polyzosteria Burmeister. Aust. J. Zool. 13: 841-82. 1968. Australian Blattidae (Blattodea). IX. Revision of Polyzosteriinae tribe Methanini, Tryonicinae, and Blattinae. Aust. J. Zool. 16: 511-75. Mckittrick, F.A. and MAcKERRAS, M.J., 1965. Phyletic relationships within the Blattidae. Ann. Entomol. Soc. Amer, 58: 224-30. MontTEITH, G.B., 1980. Relationships of the genera of Chinamyersiinae, with description of a relict species from mountains of north Queensland (Hemiptera : Heteroptera : Aradidae). Pac. Insects 21: 275-285. ROTH: TRYONICUS 167 PrIncis, K., 1966. Orthopterorum Catalogue (Ed. M. Beier), Pt. 8. Blattariae, subordo Blattoidea, Family Blattidae, Nocticolidae. W. Junk, s’-Gravenhage. RoTH, L.M., 1968. Oothecae of the Blattaria. Ann. Entomol. Soc. Amer. 61: 83-111. SHAw, A.E., 1925. New genera and species (mostly Australasian) of Blattidae, with notes and some remarks on Tepper’s types. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. W. 50: 171-213. SHELFORD, R.W.C., 1910. Genera Insectorum. Blattinae. Vol. 109. (M.P. Wytsman: Brussels). TEPPER, J.G.O., 1895. Notes on Victorian and other Blattariae and descriptions of new species. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 19: 146-66. MEMOIRS OF THE (QUEENSLAND MUSEUM BRISBANE © Queensland Museum PO Box 3300, South Brisbane 4101, Australia Phone 06 7 3840 7555 Fax 06 7 3846 1226 Email qmlib@qm.qld.gov.au Website www.qm.qld.gov.au National Library of Australia card number ISSN 0079-8835 NOTE Papers published in this volume and in all previous volumes of the Afemoirs of the Queensland Museum maybe teproduced for scientific research, individual study or other educational purposes. Properly acknowledged quotations may be made but queries regarding the republication of any papers should be addressed to the Editor in Chief. Copies of the journal can be purchased from the Queensland Museum Shop. A Guide to Authors is displayed at the Queensland Museum web site A Queensland Government Project Typeset at the Queensland Museum Mem, Od Mus, 25(1): 169—176.[1987] THREE NEW POL YRHACHIS SEXSPINOSA-GROUP SPECIES FROM THE PHILIPPINES (HYMENOPTERA : FORMICIDAE) RupOaLF J. Kouour Queensland Museum ABSTRACT Eight species of the Polyrhachis sexspinasa species-group are recorded from the Philippines. Three (P. exotica, P. ignota and P. scabra) are described as new and two (P. qureovestita Donisthorpe and P. ca/vpso Forel), previously described from elsewhere, are recorded from the Philippine Islands for the first time. A key to all species of the group known to occur in the Philippines is provided. INTRODUCTION The Polyrhachis sexpinosa species-group was revised recently by Bolton (1975), He recognised twelve species, two of which, P. magnifica Menozzi and P: osiris Bolton, are apparently endemic to the Philippines, and gave full reference citations, which are not repeated here, My studies on the systematics of Indo-Australian Polyrhachis have resulted in the recognition of three new species from Mindanao. They are described here as P. exolica n.sp., P. scabra o.sp. and P. ignota n.sp. The first two were originally received from a private collection, without data, but certainly originating from somewhere in the Philippines probably Mindanao. Their presence there was later confirmed by specimens received from the Bernice P. Bishop Museum, Hawaii, through the kindness of Dr Gordon Nishida. The occurrences of P. aureovestila Donisthorpe, P. calypso Forel and P. sexspinosa (Latr.) were also verified from this material, and the third new species (P. ignota) was discovered, This brings to eight the number of P. sexspinosa-group species found in the Philippines. The illustrations were drawn using a Zeiss (Oberkochen) SR Stereomicroscope and camera lucida. Those of the new species and of P. osiris depict holotypes. The conventions of measurements and indices used in this paper are identical to those of Bolton (1973, 1975), The following abbreviations are used for institutions and depositories: ANIC = Australian National Insect Collection, CSIRO, Canberra; BMNH = British Museum (Natural History), London; BPBM = Bernice P. Bishop Museum, Honolulu; USNM = National Museum of Natural History, Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C.;QM = Queensland Museum, Brisbane; RIK = R-J. Kohout, Brisbane (private collection). Key 10 P. SEXSPINOSA-GROUP SPECIES. RECORDED FROM PHILIPPINES (BASED ON WORKER CASTE) 1. First gastral tergite covered with fine, rather dense pubescence, which is arranged in a characteristic midline pattern (Fig. 12) ...... 2 First gastral tergite smooth and shining; pubescence almost completely absent from dorsal surface of the gaster (Fig. 9)............, Fas eenpes et Sebnt mesa had. P. exotica, sp. nov. 2. Petiolar spines relatively long, elevated, recurved and hook-like (Figs 18,19)... pacdetotedsbonepacdetedete sesseneees P. Calypso Forel Petiolar spines relatively short, scarcely elevated, not developed into rectirved hooks. 3. Head strongly contracted behind eyes, the occipital margin narrow, neck-like; antennal scapes relatively long (SI>190),......... aids 4 Head not strongly contracted behind eyes, ihe occipital margin broad; antennal scapes relatively short (S1<190), (Fig. 16)....sc0eeenee abba satvabedated sas .P. agureovesiila Donist, 4. Antennal scapes with numerous short erect Fates LP aes-S,. 17) egret stharcvetavsercetaesaneeeee 45 Antennal. scapes without erect hairs, or with only a few inconspicuous solitary short hair present. (Figs 6, 13, 14)....ccccccecceneeeenene een 6 Occipital margin with lateral angular prominences, which are visible in full face view (Fig. 17) ...........0. P. sexspinosa (Latr.) Occipital margin without lateral angular eK short and collar-like (Fig, 5) .- oso hodehedenepergededomsnend .. P. asiris Bolton 6. Batensiir stir fis of middle and. hind tibiae with moderately long erect hairs ............-. 7 wa 169 (70 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Extensor surfaces of middle and hind tibiae without erect hairs..... P. mazgnifica Menozzi 7, Pronotal dorsum strongly convex in profile (Fig. T).sccccccceseneeees napdet P. ignota, sp. nov. Pronotal dorsum only moderately convex in profile (Fig. 8) .......... wo P. scabra, sp. nov. Polyrhachis aureovestita Donisthorpe, 1937 (Fig. 16) MATERIAL EXAMINED MINDANAG: Zamboanga del Sur, Lemesahan, 600 m, 7.ix.1958, light trap, H.E. Milliron, BPBM coll. (1 worker); Agusan, S. Francisco, 10 km SE, 13.xi.1959, L, Quate & C. Yoshimoto, BPBM coll. (1 alate fernale). DIMENSIONS Worker cited first: TL 14.76, 16.07; HL 3.53, 3.63; HW 2,32, 2.42; Cl 66, 67; SL 4.38, 4.33; SI 189, 179; PW 2.02, 2.37; MTL 5.34, 5,34. REMARKS Both specimens closely match the holotype of P, aureoyestita. They represent the first records of this species from the Philippines. Polyrhachis calypso Forel, 1911 (Figs 18, 19) MATERIAL EXAMINED SuLu: Tawitawi, Tarakan, Farm. distr., 11-ii.1957, Yoshio Kondo, BPBM coil. (1 worker). DIMENSIONS TL 10.28; HL 2.40; HW 1.50; CI 62; SL 3.03; S1 202; PW 1.25; MTL 3.58, REMARKS Not previously recorded from the Philippines. In spite of some minor differences, including the slightly narrower head and the reduced pilosity, the single worker closely matches the syntypes and other available material of P. calypso from Borneo, Sumatra and Java. Polyrhachis exotica, sp. nov. (Figs 9, 11, 15) MATERIAL EXAMINED MinpaNnag: Misamis Oriental, Mt. Riburgol, 10-11. April 1960, H-M. Torrevillas, BPBM coll. (Hojotype, 2 paratype workers); Mt. Kibungol, 20 km SE of Gingoog, 700-800 m, 9.-18.iv.1960, H.M. Turrevillas, BPBM call. (3 paratype workers); Mt. Empagatao, 9.-18. April 1961, H.M. Torrevillas, BPBM coll. (1 paratype worker, 2 paratype dealate females); Hindangon, 20 km S of Gingoog, 600-700 m, 20,-24.iy.1960, H. Tarrevillas, BPBM coll. (2 paratype workers); Minalwang, 1050 m, 24.iii-4.Jyv.1961, W. Torrevillas, BPBM coll. (1 paratype worker); MINDANAO, no further data, ex C. Danes coll. (3 paratype workers, | paratype dealate female). TyPE Deposition: Holotype and most paratypes (6 workers and 2 females) in BPBM; 3 paratypes (2 workers, ! female) in RIK; 1 paratype worker each in ANIC, BMNH, USNM and OM (with kind consent of Bernice P. Bishop Museum). DESCRIPTION WORKER Dimensions (holotype cited first): TL 14.46, 13,31-14.66; HL 3.43, 3.17-3.43: HW 2.22; 2,07- 2.22; CI 65, 64-66; SL 4.48, 4.28-4.59; SI 202, 201-207, PW 2.06, 1.96-2.17; MTL 6.05, 5,74- 6.10 (13 measured). Mandibles with 4 distinct teeth. Clypeus with a median longitudinal carina; convex in profile. Sides of head in front of eyes feebly convex, nearly straight; narrowed behind eyes with occipital margin narrow and without lateral angular prominences, Antennal carinae well elevated, sinuate; the furrow between them 2 x as wide in front than behind. Antennal scapes long, extending beyond the occipital margin by at least half their Jength. Eyes conyex, but not as prominent as in some species of the group. Median ocellus present, though rather obscure in some specimens. Pronotum in profile very strongly convex, dome-like. Pronotal spines long, projecting laterally and strongly curved forward. Mesonotal dorsum in profile straight; propodeal dorsum shallowly concave, declivity abrupt. Mesopleural process produced to form an acute ventral angle, Propodeal spines very strong, long, elevated from their bases, divergent and recurved. Petiole with dorsum sloping anteriorly, spines scarcely elevated and curved to the base of paster, which is short and broadly ovate; first tergite covering almost half of the gastral dorsum, Mandibles relatively smooth and shining at the masticatory border; punctate-opaque laterally, with numerous piliferous pits at their bases. Sculpturation a fine reticulate punctation on clypeus, front and sides of head; increasing posteriorly to coarsely punctate on vertex and at the occipital border. Mesosoma and petiole fairly coarsely and closely punctate; sides of mesonotum and propodeum foveolate-punctate, Dorsum of gaster shining, with only very fine microscopic punctations, All surfaces of the body and appendanges, except the tips of spines and dorsum of the first gasiral segment, with numerous yellow or off- white long erect undulate hairs. These are longest and most dense on the mesosomal dorsum and NEW POLYRHACHIS SPECIES 71 only slightly shorter on the head, petiole, gaster and legs. Appressed, somewhat radiating, bright golden pubescence abundant all over the body, except the mandibles, legs, apices of pronotal, propodea! and petiolar spines, and most of gasier (where it is much diluted, and virtually absent from dorsal aspect of the first tergite), Head and body black or very dark reddish brown; mandibles at the masticatory border, apical portions of antennal segments, subpetiolar process and legs reddish brown, the femora always a shade lighter. Gaster black with deep red reflections. FEMALE Dimensions: TL 16.08-16.63; HL 3.73-3.88; HW 2.47-2.57; Cl 65-67; SL 4,74-4.99; SI 190- 196; PW 2,37-2.47; MTL 6.20-6.35 (3 measured). Females differ from workers in the usual characters identifying full sexuality — three ocelli, complete mesosomal structure and wings. The sculpturation, pilosity and colour patterning is identical, but development of the spines is different. The pronotal spines are short and stout, projecting laterally and bent only weakly forward. The propodeal spines are directed posteriorly, projecting horizontally, with their tips curved slightly inwards. The petiolar spines are closely similar to those of the workers, but slightly shorter. MALE AND IMMATURE STAGES Unknown, REMARKS This species is a very distinct member of the P. sexspinuso-group. It possesses all the combined characters of the group except that the gaster is smooth and shining, in contrast to those of other species, where it is characteristically pubescent. This character together with the exceptionally produced pronotal dorsum render exotica immediately identifiable, and readily separable from any other member of the sexspirnsa-group Polyrhachis ignota sp, nov. (Figs 7, 10, 13) MATERIAL EXAMINED MINDANAO: Zamboanga del Sur, Lemesahan, 600 m, 7.-8.ix,1958, H.E. Milliron, BPBM coll. (Holotype, 2 pariutype workers), Typv Deposition: Holotype and | paratype in BPBM; | paratype in RIK. DeEscRIPTION WORKER Dimensions (holotype cited first); TL 14,36, 13.26-14.97; HL 3.48, 3.17-3.43; HW 2.07, 1.86- 2.07; CI 59, 59-60; SL 4.54, 4.43-4.48; ST 219, 216-238; PW 1.81, 1.66-1.81; MTL 6.20, 5.90- 6.20 (3 measured). Mandibles with 5 teeth. Clypeus carinate, sinuate in profile (convex aboye and concave below), Sides of head in front of eves only feebly convex, almost straight; strongly narrowed behind eyes. Occipital margin narrow, collar-like, without lateral angular prominences. Antennal carinae elevated, sinuate. Antennal scapes extending beyond occipital border by nearly half their length. Eyes convex. Pronotum strongly convex, distinctly swollen (though not to such a degree as in P. exotica); pronotal spines stout, projecting lateraly, only slightly curved forward. Mesonotal dorsum in profile feebly convex, propodeum shallowly concave, declivity abrupt. Metanotal groove replaced by a minutely raised ridge. Mesopleural process represented as a non-acute simple lobe. Propadeal spines elevated at their bases, divergent and recurved, Petiole relatively low in front; its dorsum shallowly concave in profile, sloping anteriorly, and with a weak median longitudinal ridge similar to that in P, osiris. Apices of petiolar spines scarcely elevated, the spines short. Gaster, when contracted, short, broadly ovate. Mandibles smooth and shining at the masticatory border, densely punctate at their bases, intervening surfaces with graded sculpturation. Clypeus and front of head finely reticulate-punctate:, sculpluration increasing posteriorly in intensity and density, so that the dorsal face and lateral branches of occiput are somewhat coarsely rugose. Mesosomal dorsum with weak rugosity, decreasing posteriorly in intensity and density. Gaster very finely reticulate- punctate, ‘ ; ; White or yellowish erect hairs present in variable density all over the body and appendages, but absent from the antennal scapes. Relatively long, suberect, somewhat radiating rich golden pubescence variously developed; most dense on head and mesosomal dorsum, rather diluted on lateral portions of mesosoma (the specimens might be somewhat worn), Gastral pubescence ranging from yellow on anterodorsal aspect of first tergite to silvery white elsewhere, arranged in a characteristic midline pattern. Body and appendanges black, SEXUALS AND IMMATURE STAGES Unknown. REMARKS This is the third FP. sexspinesa-group species from Philippines which lacks hairs on the antennal 172 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM 3mm Fics 1-2: Lateral view (antennae and legs omitted); 1 — P. osiris; 2 — magnifica. Fics 3-4: Dorsal view of mesosoma and petiole (pilosity omitted); 3 — P. osiris; 4 — magnifica. Fics 5-6: Head in full face view (right antennae and cephalic pilosity omitted); 5 — P. osiris; 6 — magnifica. Fics 7-9: Lateral view (antennae and legs omitted); 7 — P. ignota; 8 — scabra; 9 — exotica. Fics 10-11: Dorsal view of mesosoma and petiole; 10 — P. ignota (tip of the right spine on holotype broken off); 11 — exotica. Fic. 12: Dorsal view of mesosoma, petiole and gaster of P. scabra. NEW POLYRHACHIS SPECIES ~4 ww 174 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Fics 13-17: Head in full face view (right antenna and cephalic pilosity omitted); 13 — P. ignota; 14 — scabra; 15 — exotica; 16 — aureovestita; 17 — sexspinosa. Fics 18-19: Petiole of P, calypso; 18 — lateral; 19 — anterior. scapes (the others are P. magnifica and P. scabra). P. ignota differs from magnifica in having erect hairs present on the extensor surfaces of the middle and hind tibiae and in the structure of the pronotal spines. In P. ignota these are quite short, and only weakly curved, while in P. magnifica they are long and strongly curved forward. P. ignota differs from P. scabra in having a strongly produced pronotal dorsum, which is only moderately convex in seabra. Polyrhachis magnifica Menozzi, 1925 (Figs 2, 4, 6) MATERIAL EXAMINED NEGROS: Talay, Valencia, 8.1.1961, H.M. Torrevillas; Luzon: Camarines Sur, Mt. Iriga, 500-600 m, 4.- 17.May 1962, H.M. Torrevillas; Camarines Sur, Mt. Isarog, 750-850 m, 20 km E of Naga, 4.-11.April 1963, H.M. Torrevillas (all BPBM coll.); Luzon, no further data, ex C. Danes coll. REMARKS This species was adequately described by Menozzi, and redescribed by Bolton (1975). The pubescence of specimens from Mt. Isarog tends to be more silvery than in the other populations where it is consistently brightly golden. Polyrhachis osiris Bolton, 1975 (Figs 1, 3, 5) REMARKS I have been able to examine the holotype through the kindness of Barry Bolton. Apart from P. exotica, this is the only endemic Philippine species of the group with erect hairs on the antennal scapes. NEW POLYRAACHIS SPECIES LTS Polyrhachis scabra, sp. noy. (Figs 8, 12, 14) MarveRIAL EXAMINED MINDANAG: Agusan, 10 km SE S. Francisco, 12.Nov.i959, Quate & Yoshimoto, BPBM coll. (Holotype, 2 paratype workers); Misamis Oriental, Mt. Empagatao, 9.-18.April 1961, H.M-. Torrevillas, BPBM coll. (3 paratype workers), Agusan, Esperanza, 4.- 11.xi.1959, C.M, Yoshimoto, BPBM coll, (1 paratype worker); Zamboanga del Sur, 11 km NW of Milbuk, 390 m, 5.vili.1958, H.E. Milliron, BPBM coll. (1 paratype worker); Surigao, L. Matmit, 23.xi,-1.xii.1959, CH, Yoshimoto, BPBM coll. (1 paratype worker); Misamis Or,, Balason, 1.iv.1960, H. Torrevillas, BPBM coll. (1 pseudogyne); MinDANAO, no further data, ex C. Danes coll. (2 paratype workers, 1 paratype dealate female). Type Deposition: Holotype and 5 paralypes (4 workers and ! pseudogyne) in BPBM; 3 paratypes (2 workers, | dealate female) in RIK, 1 paratype worker each in ANIC, BMNH, USNM and QM (with kind consent of Bernice P. Bishop Museum). DESCRIPTION WORKER Dimensions (holotype cited first, pseudogyne last): TL 14.81, 13,56-15,06, 16.48; HL 3.43, 3.22-3.58, 3.93; HW 2.02, 1.86-2.12, 2.37; CL59, 58-61, 60; SL 4.74, 4.38-4.89, 5.14; SI 235, 227- 237, 217; PW 1.66, 1,56-1.81, 2.02. MTL 6,25, §.85-6.35, 6,80 (12 measured). Mandibles with five teeth. Clypeus carinate, sinuate in profile (convex above, concave below). Sides of head in front of eyes almost straight, strongly contracted behind eyes, with narrow occipital margin, lacking lateral angular prominences. Antennal carinae rising sharply, sinuate, Antennal scapes long, éxtending beyond the occipital margin by about half their length. yes convex. Pronotum in profile moderately convex; pronotal spines long, slender, projecting laterally and curved forward. Mesonotal dorsum straight in profile, propodeal dorsum shallowly concave. declivity abrupt. Metanotal groove replaced by a minute ridge. Mesopleural process represented as a dentiform lobe with acute ventral angle. Propodeal spines long, elevated at their bases, diverging and recurved. Petiole with dorsum sloping anteriorly: spines scarcely elevated, short. Mandibles punctate-opaque with numerous piliferous pits. Sculpturation consists of very fine Punctation an clypeus, front and sides of head, increasing posteriorly to densely, but shallowly punctate, Dorsum of mesosoma densely, but shallowly punctate, sculptural intensity increasing laterally to coarsely punctate, Gaster very finely reticulate-punctale. All body surfaces except antennal scapes with rather diluted, moderately long, undulate, silvery white hairs, These are longest on mesosomal dorsum and shortest on lateral portions of mesosoma, and on the gastral dorsum, Silvery white, somewhat radiating, appressed pubescence abundani over entire body, including gastral dorsum, where it forms the midline pattern characteristic of most members of the group. Body black with the appendanges dark reddish brown. The single pseudogyne (in the terminology of Wheeler, 1910) represents a worker-like form with transversely enlarged mesonotum, which is convex in profile. The sculpturation and pilosity are essentially as in the worker. FEMALE Dimensions: TL. 15.51; HL 3.63; HW 2.17; Cl 60; SL 4,69; SI 216; PW 2.02; MTL 5,80 (1 measured). The female differs from the worker in the usual sexual characters, including the reduction in length of pronotal and propodeal spines. The sculpturation and pilosity similar to that in worker. MALE AND IMMATURE STAGES Unknown. REMARKS This species stands close to P, magnifica and bears a superficial resemblance to the silvery pubescent population of that species from Mt. Isarog, Luzon [sland. The main distinguishing features additional io that given in the key, are the longer antennal scapes of scabra, along with its more dense sculpturation and a more gracile build, Polyrhachis sexspinosa (Latreille), 1802 (Fig. 17) MATERIAL EXAMINED Minoanao: Zamboanga del Sur, Lemesahan, 600 m, 7.ix.1958, light trap, H-E. Milliron, BPBM coll. (3 workers in poor condition). DIMENSIONS TL 12.41-13,00; HL 2.97-3.17; HW 1.86-1.94; Cl 61-63; SL 3.78-3.93; ST 203-206; PW 1.56- 1.76; MTL 4.74-4.99 (3 measured). REMARKS Recorded previously from the Philippines by various authors (Smith 1858, 1859, 1863; Mayr i867; Viehmeyer 1916; Stitz 1923; Emery 1925; Donisthorpe 1943; Baltazar 1966). The three specimens before me differ from those of typical 176 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM New Guinean populations of P. sexspinosa (as defined by Bolton, 1975) in having the sculpturation of the head and body more reduced and almost completely masked by a rich yellowish pubescence. In spite of these differences, and in view of the general similarity between these specimens, and the absence of additional material, I feel obliged to consider them as representatives of P. sexspinosa (Latreille). ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS 1 am very grateful to Mr Barry Bolton of Department of Entomology, British Museum (Natural History), London, for his support and invaluable comments received during the course of this study and for acting as a referee of this paper. To Dr Robert W. Taylor of ANIC, CSIRO, Canberra for his part in guiding my first steps in studying Polyrhachis while working under his supervision, To Mr Edward C. Dahms of Queensland Museum, Brisbane I owe thanks for the time he has given in reading and correcting the grammatical part of the manuscript. Finally I would like to extend my thanks to Dr Gordon Nishida of the Bernice P, Bishop Museum, Honolulu, to Dr Cl. Besuchet of Museum D’Histoire Naturelle, Geneva and to Prof. Dr Maria M. Principi, Universita Degli Studi Di Bologna, for loans of types and other material used in this study. LITERATURE CITED BALTAzAR, C.R., 1966. A Catalogue of Philippine Hymenoptera. Pacific Insects Mon. 8, 488 pp. Bo.tTon, B., 1973. The ant genus Polyrhachis in the Ethiopian Region. Bull. Br. Mus, nat. Hist. (Ent.) 28(5); 283-369, 63 figs. 1975. The sexspinosa-group of the ant genus Polyrhachis F. Smith. (Hym. Formicidae), J. nt. (B) 44(1): 1-14, 14 figs. DonistHorPE, H.StT,J.K., 1943. The Ants (Hym., Formicidae) of Waigeu Island, North Dutch New Guinea. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (11)10; 433-75. Emery, C., 1925. Hymenoptera. Fam. Formicidae. Subfam. Formicinae, in Wytsman Genera Insectorum, fase. 183: 302 pp., 4 pls. Foret, A., 1911. Fourmis nouvelles ou interessantes. Bull. Soc. vaud. Sci. nat. 47: 331-400. LaTREILLE, P.A., 1802. ‘Histoire naturelle des fourmis’ . (L*imprimerie de Crapelet: Paris) 445 pp., 12 pls. Mayr, G.L., 1867. Adnotationes in Monographiam Formicidarum Indo-Neerlandicarum. Tijdschr. Ent. 10: 1-85, 2 pls. Menozzi, C., 1925. Nuove formiche delle isole Filippine e di Singapore. Afti Soc. Nat. Mat. (6)4: 92-103. SMITH, F., 1858. ‘Catalogue of Hymenopterous Insects in the Collection of the British Museum, Part 6, Formicidae’. 216 pp., 14 pl. 1859. Catalogue of Hymenopterous Insects collected by Mr A.R, Wallace at the Islands of Aru and Key. J. Linn. Soc, (Zool) 3: 132-78. 1863. Catalogue of Hymenopterous Insects collected by Mr A.R, Wallace in the Islands of Mysol, Ceram, Waigiou, Bouru and Timor. J. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) 7: 5-48, Stitz, H., 1923. Ameisen von den Philippinen, den malayischen und ozeanischen Inseln, Sher. Ges. natur}, Freunde Berl., 1923: 110-36. VIEHMEYER, H., 1916. Ameisen von den Philippinen und anderer Herkunft (Hym.). Enc. Mitt, 5: 283-91, 2 figs, WHEELER, W.M., I910. ‘Ants. Their Structure, Development and Behaviour’. (Columbia University Press: New York) 663 pp, 286 figs. Mem. Od Mus. 25(1): 177=192.[1987] STUDY OF A LOWER CRETACEOUS ACTINOPTERYGIAN (CLASS PISCES) COOYOO AUSTRALIS FROM QUEENSLAND, AUSTRALIA TEMPE LEES and ALAN BARTHOLOMAI Queensland Museum ABSTRACT The Lower Cretaceous actinopterygian fish Yiphactinus australis Woodward, 1894 is redescribed from new material. Comparisons of this taxon with other ichthyodectid genera, Xiphactinus, Ichthyodectes, Cladocyclus and Gillicus, shows it is sufficiently distinct to warrant recognition in a separate genus, Cooyoo gen. nov.. In addition C. australis is shown to be more closely related to Ichthyodectes than Xiphactinus, INTRODUCTION Woodward (1894) described an isolated partial teleost skull from Lower Cretaceous marine sediments of Queensland and identified it as the new species, Portheus australis. Portheus was later shown by Hay (1897) to be a junior synonym of Xiphactinus, a conclusion followed by most subsequent workers, Since Woodward's (1894) description, no further work has been carried out on this species. During this time, the Queensland Museum has acquired a number of excellent specimens of this fish, including an almost complete skeleton, several well preserved skulls and a neurocranium, as well as numerous pieces of vertebrae, partial crania, jaws and skeletal fragments. The material, collected from marine sediments of the Hughenden, Richmond and Boulia areas of Central Queensland, forms the basis for the current revision and allows for a more complete description and identification of the species. Detailed comparison is made with four ichthyodectid genera: Xiphactinus Leidy. 1870, Ichthyodectes Cope, 1870, Cladocyelus Agassiz, 1841 and Gillicus Hay, 1898. This indicates that the Queensland species requires separate generic status. Relationships with the Ichthyodectidae have been discussed by several workers, namely Bardack (1965), Bardack and Sprinkle (1969), Cavender (1966), Nelson (1973), Taverne (1973, 1974) and, most recently, Patterson and Rosen (1977). The classification of Ichthyodectiformes proposed by Patterson and Rosen (1977) will be followed: O. ICHTHYODECTIFORMES Bardack and Sprinkle, 1969 S,O. ALLOTHRISSOPOIDE! Patterson and Rosen, 1977 F, Allothrissopidae Patterson and Rosen, 1977 Genus A/lothrissops Nybelin, 1964 S.O. ICHTHYODECTOIDE! Romer, 1966 F. Ichthyodectidae Crook, 1892 Ichthyadectes Cope, 1870, Xiphactinus Leidy, 1870, Gillicus Hay, 1898, Cladocyelus Agassiz, 1841, Eubiodectes Hay, 1903, Proportheus Jaekel, 1909, Chriocentrites Hackel, 1849, Thrissops Agassiz, 1833, Spathodactylus Pictet, 1858, Cooyoo gen. nov. F. Saurodontidae Cope, 1871 Saurodon Hays, 1930, Saurocephalus Harlan 1824 SPECIMEN DESIGNATIONS QMF — Queensland Museum specimen, GSQ — Geological Survey of Queensland specimen. 177 178 ABBREVIATIONS IN FIGURES Terminology follows Bardack (1965) Ang. angular Boc. basioccipital bpt. pr. basipterygoid process Bsc basisclerotic Bsp. basisphenoid Dent. dentary Ect. ectopterygoid eff. ps. a. foramen for efferent pseudobranchial artery Epo epiotic Eth. ethmoid Exo, exoccipital f.m. foramen magnum Fr. frontals Hym. hyomandibular hym. f. hyomandibular fossa inf. f. infundibular fossa Int. intercalar lat. head v. —_ lateral head vein lat. temp. f. lateral temporal fossa Max. maxillary Mes. mesopterygoid Mpt metapterygoid Op. operculum Pal. palatine Par parietal Pas. parasphenoid Pmx. premaxillary Pop preoperculum Pro. prootic pro. br prootic bridge ptm. f post-temporal fossa Pto. pterotic Qu. quadrate Ra. retroarticular Sclr. sclerotic se. f Subepiotic fossa Soc. supraoccipital Sph. sphenotic IX foramen for glossopharyngeal nerve »4 foramen for vagus nerve Fic. 1: Localities from which Cooyoo australis specimens have been collected. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Superorder TELEOSTEI Order ICHTHYODECTIFORMES Bardack and Sprinkle, 1969 Suborder ICHTHYODECTOIDEI Romer, 1966 Family ICHTHYODECTIDAE Crook, 1892 Genus Cooyoo gen. nov. DIAGNOSIS Medium-sized ichthyodectid teleost (single complete individual 1.1 m). Supraoccipital crest rises above the dorsal surface of the neurocranium at a mean angle of 15°, significantly lower than in both Xiphactinus (30°) and Ichthyodectes (39°). Fused parietals unornamented. Frontals possess raised, medially concave ridges originating at anterior base of parietal hump, diverging to form part of dorsolateral margin of brain case; anteriorly, the ridges converge to complete an oval-shaped ring bounding anterodorsal surface of neurocranium; between the ridges, frontals are smooth and rise to a peak at midline; frontals also exhibit laterally directed, triangular-shaped shelf. No ridges have been observed on the frontals of Xiphactinus; in Ichthyodectes ridges are present, but are medially convex. — —. a 140 142 144 146 148 150 152 Towns Fossil fish 12 4 localities Cretaceous marind sediments Bo = Q 100 200 300 400 14 J [a ee a ea Scale : Kilometers 24 4 QUEENSLAND ian ee COOYOO AUSTRALIS FROM QUEENSLAND 179 Sphenotics project laterally tapering to truncated points; sphenotics directed lateroventrally in Xiphactinus and anteroventrally in Ichihyodectes, Large, ventrally directed hyomandibular fossa lies obliquely across lateral surface of neurocranium, spanning the sphenotic, prootic, pterotic and intercalar; its posterior portion is obscured by a wing of pterotic. Hyomandibular fossa is orientated horizontally in both Xiphactinus and Ichthyodectes. Located directly below the hyomandibular fossa is large, rhomboidal,. subtemporal fossa, posteroventral margin of which is formed by slanted, prootic- intercalar bridge. Above hyomandibular fossa on pterolic is a depression forming the lateral temporal fossa; dorsal margin of this fossa rises from midpoint of hyomandibular fossa, extending upward in an are ending on frontals. Teeth are medium to small (mean height 4 mm); size range within a jaw is low. In Xiphactinus the teeth are large (1-4 cm) and variable in size. In Ppa. Ichthyodectes the teeth have a mean height of 8 mm and show little size variation. Premaxillary basically rectangular, elongated dorsoventrally; its dental margin is curved and bears six alveoli. Xiphactinus has an ovate premaxillary with a straight dental border; 5-6 alveoli are present, In Jchthyodectes the premaxillary is rhomboidal or ellipsoidal in profile with a mean number of 6,6. alveoli, RANGE All material with detailed locality information has been collected from either the Toolebuc Formation or Allaru Mudstone, both of which are Lower Cretaceous (Albian) age (Day et a/., 1983), not as suggested by Bardack (1965) Upper Cretaceous. ETYMOLOGY The name means fish in the Pooroga language spoken by the Jarambali Aborigines who lived in the Upper Flinders, Hughenden and Dutton River districts (Curr and Curr 1887). ~ Sph. ——— lat..temp.t. — ym, f. stm.t- pro.br. inf. Fic. 2: Coovoo australis. Lateral aspect of neurocranium from specimen QMF 12325. 180 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Cooyoo australis (Woodward, 1894) Portheus australis Woodward, 1894, pp. 444-7, pl. 10; Longman, 1913, pp. 95-4; Wade, 1930, p. 143; David, 1950, p. 499; Hills, 1958, p. 99. Xiphactinus australis (Woodward, 1894); Bardack, 1965, p. 34; Hill, Playford and Wood, 1968, pl, K-XI] (1); Long, 1982, p. 71. MATERIAL Holotype, GSQ2445 Portion of upper and lower jaw, Clutha Station, near Hughenden, 5 km from Home station on Gidgery Creek. Fm,: Allaru Mudstone. Age: Lower Cretaceous, Albian, Referred specimens all of Albian age: QMF354, partial skull, Hughenden, near Flinders River; QMF1016, skull, six miles northeast of Richmond; QM F2581, vertebrae and ribs, ‘Lydia Downs’, Nelia; QMF6346, skull and vertebrae, “Laura Downs’, Julia Creek, at M-R. 465493 Julia Creek 1:125,000. Allaru Mustone; QMF9466, skull, Stuart Creek, Mughenden; QMF9468, skull, Dinga Ding Station, near McKinlay, Allaru Mudstone; QMF9469, skull, ‘Boree Park’, near Richmond; QMF9471, vertebrae, ‘Dinga Ding Station’, near McKinlay, Allaru Mudstone; QMF9472, skull, *Dinga Ding Station’, near McKinlay, Allaru Mudstone; OMF 12325, neurocranium, ‘Warra Station’, near Richmond, Toolebuc Formation; QMF12327, skull, fin ahd vertebrae, Pelican Bore, Stewart Creek, ‘Dunraven Station’, near Hughenden, Toolebuc Formation; QMF12710, pariial skull, ‘Arrara Station’, near Hughenden North-west or Weather Paddock, Allaru Mudstone; QMFI271i, skull, Mountain Creek, ‘Redcliffe Station’, near Hughenden, Allaru Mudstone. DIAGNOSIS As for the genus. DESCRIPTION While most of the skeleton of the species is known, certain cranial elements — vomer, orbital bones, supramaxillary bones — and certain caudal elements — pectoral girdle and pelvic and caudal Tins have not, as yet, been recorded. NeuROcRANIUM (Figs 2-4): incomplete, with the vomer unknown and ethmoid and parethmoid only partially known. Basically wedge-shaped, with the base formed by stout parasphenoid and dorsal roof by ethmoid, frontals, parietals and supraoccipital. SuUPRAOCCIPITAL (Figs 2-4, 6): forms triangular- shaped crest rising from posterior margin of parietals aboye dorsal surface of neurocranium at an angle of approximately 15° (5 specimens); viewed laterally, posterior margin of crest appears concave; viewed posteriorly, supraoccipital crest forms dorsal pinnacle, crowning neurocranium, from which it extends ventrally to contribute to formation of large subepiotie fossae; at base of crest, Suprdoccipital expands laterally to join epiotics. Eprotic (Figs 2-4, 6): crests approximately a quarter height of supraoccipital crest; supraoccipital — epiotic suture runs along median side of epiotic ridge, just below its crest; epiotics also form dorsal corners of the posterior surface of neurocranium and contnbute ta formation of large subepiotic fossae and post-temporal fossae. PARIETALS (Figs 2, 3, 6): fused medially, lying anterior to supraoccipital crest; relatively small bones forming a dome at midline of dorsal neurocranial surface. They extend posteriorly around the anterior base of supraoccipital crest and carry anterior extensions of epiotic crests; dorsally, surface unornamentated. FRronrTALs (Figs 2, 3, 6): large, extending from anterior parietal margins to cover nearly a third of dorsal neurocranial surface. Each bears prominent ridge originating at anterior margin of parietals, just below dorsal midpoint of neurocranium; these gradually diverge anteriorly, curving along dorsolateral margin of frontals, roofing orbits and then reconverging anteriorly; between ridges, Scale cm Fis, 3' Cooveo australis. Dorsal aspect of nevrocranium from specimen QOMF 12325. COCYOO AUSTRALIS FROM QUEENSLAND 131 smooth frontals rise gently to form broad ridge at their common suture; each exhibits laterally directed triangular shelf, midway along dorsolateral margin; anterior margins of frontals obscured or damaged. The anterior border of the frontals is probably formed by the ethmoids and parethmoids, ETuHmoips (Fig. 6): imperfectly known; suture with trontals obscured but, anteriorly, they appear to exhibit beak-like rounded margin; at anterolateral corner of ethmoid is ventrally directed process appearing to articulate with dorsal surface of palatine head; anteroventrally, each contributes to deep lateral fossa, probably to accommodate premaxillary ligaments. PARETHMOIDS: lie ventral to ethmoids and frontals; each contributes to lateral fossa; they also form lateral wall of nasal capsule and portion of anterior margin of orbit; anteroventral surface forms large concave condyle articulating with saddle-shaped surface of palatine head. SPHENOTICS (Figs 2, 3, 6): situated at posterior venirolateral corner of frontals; posteriorly, they meet pterotics and ventrally are bound by prootics; they exhibit laterally directed projection tapering to truncated point; posteroventral portion of sphenotic forms anterolateral corner of hyomandibular fossa. HyoMANDIBULAR Fossa (Fig. 2): large, elongate, opening ventrally, running obliquely across almost entire length of otic section of neurocranium, spanting four separate bones; Fic, 4: Coayoo. australis. Posterior aspect of neurocranium from specimen QMF 12325. sphenotic and prootic form elevated anterior corner of fossa, intercalar forms lower posterior corner, While pterotic comprises bulk of fossa and laterally obscures most of its posterior portion. Prerotics (Figs 2, 3, 6): large, covering much of lateral surface of brain case; dorsally, bounded by parietal and epiotic, ventrally by prootic, posteriorly by intercalar and anteriorly, extend toe meet sphenotic ventrally and fronial dorsally; as well as containing most of hyomandibular fossa, pterotics also bear lateral temporal fossa and roof of subtemporal fossa; dorsal margin of lateral temporal fossa forms an arc running from midway along ventral margin of pterotic, forward to posteroventral corner of frontals; pterotics alsa forms at least half lateral margin of posterior surface of the neurocranium; combined with epiotic and exoccipital bones, contributes to large, posterior, post-temporal fossa. SuBTEMPORAL Fossa (Fig 2): large, well developed and rhomboidal; roof formed by the pterotic, but mostly contained by prootic and intercalar; the prootic and intercalar form bridge lying obliquely across posteroventral margin of fossa, INTERCALAR (Figs 2, 3): large, forming posteroventral neurocranial corner; bounded ventrally by exoccipital and anterodorsally by pterotic; posteriorly, meets exoccipitals; together forming foramen fur vagus and glossopharyngeal nerves and lateral head vein, Prootic (Figs 2-4): anterior to intercalar and basioccipital bones, forming most of anterodorsal portion of subtemporal fossa; covers nearly half lateral face of brain case and incorporates two foramina, one leading into prootic canal and other for hyomandibular branch of 7th nerve. BasrocciriTAL (Figs 2, 4): positioned posterior ta prootic but ventral to intercalar, forming posteroventral corner of brain case; lateral surface of basioccipital markedly concave to accommodate branch of swim bladder. Exoccipitacs (Figs 2, 4)! form most of ventral portion of posterior face of neurocranium; laterally they are barely visible, sandwiched between intercalar dorsally and basioccipitals ventrally; posteriorly, contribute to subepiotic fossa and together form foramen magnum; fused to medial ventral surface is half a vertebra. PARASPHENOID (Figs 2, 6): strong, elongate, lying ventral to basioccipital and prootic, forming base of brain case; transversely, beneath orbit it has sharply convex dorsal surface and gently convex ventral surface; beneath brain case, parasphenoid divides posteriorly into two arims, 182 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM triangular in cross section with concave lateral surfaces; arms taper posteriorly, terminating in points at posterior end of brain case; stout basipterygoid processes present, extending anterolaterally just anterior to otic section of neurocranium; anterior portion of parasphenoid not preserved and relationship with vomer cannot be ascertained; parasphenoid flexes upward at junction of otic and orbital sections of neurocranium; with mean angle of flexure approximately 149° (3 specimens). PREMAXILLARY (Fig. 6): rarely preserved, suggesting that ligamentous attachments not very strong; a relatively large, robust bone sub- rectangular in outline; oral border curved, with six alveoli, at least four bearing teeth. MAXILLARY (Fig. 6): long, fairly shallow, narrowing posteriorly; anterodorsal margin with hammer-like condyle articulating with malleolar head of palatine; anterior to condyle, maxillary shows another, smaller condyle abutting a facet formed by vomer and ethmoid; ventral edge of maxillary essentially straight, containing variable number of teeth (Table 1); teeth may occur in every alveolus or every second alveolus; Table 2 shows range in tooth size and number found; teeth not very large (mean 4 mm) and, within an individual, show only small range in height; lateral maxillary surface flat, showing little ornamentation, except just below dorsal surface maxillary where distinct groove accommodated ventral margin of supramaxillary bones; posterior end of maxillary not well preserved, but exhibits dorsal swing with ventral margin resting in groove in quadrate. SUPRAMAXILLARY: bones thin, fragile, poorly preserved; shape difficult to determine, probably comprising smaller, almost ovoid posterior bone and larger, rectangular, anterior bone, dorsal TABLE 1. Number of alveoli and tooth size observed in the maxillary of specimens of Cooyoo australis. The size of the sample limits the amount of interpretation possible, however the size of the standard deviations clearly indicates how little tooth size varies in a single specimen. | MAXILLARY Serer Alveoli No. Teeth No. No. of complete Mean Size SD Pyimen Left Right Left Right teeth measured (cm) ea a a Sr T QMF 10209 27+ 38 14+ 26 17 0.369 +0.155 (anterior (anterior damaged) damaged) QMFI1016 28 22 All teeth broken QMF6346 34 not 23 not 8 0.409 +0.05 visible visible QMF12327 34 not 17 not 10 0.45 +0.107 visible visible os _ TABLE 2. Number of alveoli and size of teeth observed in the dentary specimens of Cooyoo australis. DENTARY Sopchndn Alveoli No. Teeth No. Sizes tom) P Left Right Left Right QMF10209 Tooth row obscured by Maxillary Se | QMFI1016 20 posterior 11 11+ 0.75,0.94,0.86 most teeth broken end broken QMF6346 QMF 12372 GSQ2445 Most teeth obscured or broken Most teeth obscured or broken Most teeth broken 0.9,0,54,0.59,0.72 0.8,0.36,0.49,0.52 0.99,1.08 COOYOO AUSTRALIS FROM QUEENSLAND 183 margin of which seems to be convex. DENTARY (Fig. 6): fairly stout, deep, bearing single row of medium-sized teeth (mean 7 mm); teeth almost uniform size, except in QMF12327 Where first few teeth larger and broader than rest; dental margin rises to peak just before posterior end of bone; posterior to peak, margin plunges steeply downward to anterodorsal margin of angular; angular then flexes dorsally to articulate with quadrate; most of ventral margin of dentary straight, but flexes dorsally below angular; no internal view of dentary available. Table 2 shows ratio of mandibular length to depth; ratio difficult to measure because of poor preservation of bones and comparison with other genera should be treated with caution. HYOMANDIBULAR (Figs 5, 6): largest of hyopalatine bones; dorsally, ‘dumbell’-shaped head articulates with hyomandibular fossa; posterior hyomandibular margin forms gently curving raised rim, edging posterior margin of skull and articulating with preopercular; anterior to rim, hyomandibular markedly concave; concave portion covered by postorbitals. METAPTERYGOID (Figs 5, 6): anterior to hyomandibular: large, right-angle shaped element, bounded by quadrate posteroventrally, ectopterygoid anteroventrally and mesopterygoid anteriorly; it makes no contribution to boundary of orbit, formed by the palatine, mesopterygoid and hyomandibular. MesopTERYGOID (Figs 5, 6): comparatively small, wedged between hyomandibular and palatine, and dorsal to metapterygoid; despite small size, it forms almost half margin of orbit; at junction with hyomandibular is groove for basipterygoid process. PALATINE (Figs 5, 6): lies anterior to mesopterygoid; it possesses distinct malleolar head; dorsal surface of head peaked, articulating with ventrally grooved parethmoid; ventral palatine surface concave accommodating condyle on dorsal edge of maxilla. EctoprTerycaip (Figs 5, 6): ventral to palatine, anterior to metapterygoid and dorsal to quadrate; elongate, forming ventral margin of tly, Mpt. Scale: om Fic. $5; Cooyoo australis. External view of hyomandibular bones. Reconstructed based on specimens; QMF 1016, QMF 12327, QMF 12711. TABLE 3, Measurements of maxillary and dentary length and depths observed in specimens of Cooyoo australis. Speci Maxillary Dentary sida Length (cm) Depth (cm) Length (cm) Depth (cm) QMEF 10209 6.2 posterior 3.18 (approx) condyle obscured [ c= - QMF 1016 8.46 1.34 5.5 3,75 - QMF6346 8.54 1.98 5.34 (7) 4,3.(2) obscured QMF 12327 9.56 1.87 6.71 (?) 4(?) (approx) obscured —i_ | Maxillary length measured from posterior margin of premaxillary to last alveolus. Maxillary depth measured at posterior condyle. Dentary length of alveolar border. Dentary depth measured al coronoid process 184 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM hyomandibular apparatus; anteriorly, it has interdigitating suture with palatine; posterior margin and its relationship with hyomandibular difficult to determine as usually broken and distorted. Quaprate (Figs 5, 6): articulates with ventral margins of ectopterygoid, metapterygoid and hyomandibular; triangular, with ventral apex forming articulating head for the jaws; posterior margin of the maxilla lies in groove on this condyle and angular portion of lower jaw articulate with it. SYMPLEcTic: small, splinter-like lying near posterior margin of quadrate. CIRCUMORBITALS: not preserved in most specimens and, at best, only partially preserved; fragmentary evidence indicates probably six circumorbital plates - dermosphenotic, twa supraorbitals, lacrymal, infraorbital and a large postorbital which, when preserved, mask much of hyopalatine bones, Fr, lat. temp. £. Sph. Selr, Eth. Tent. ScLerotic (Fig. 6): bones, frequently preserved; most specimens exhibit two sclerotic bones ringing eye; basal sclerotic also frequently preserved, found at bottom of eye capsule; basal sclerotic fairly thick, heavy bone exhibiting delicately spined margin and _ posteriorly positioned, keyhole-shaped indentation. PreopercuLtar (Fig, 6): elongate dorso- ventrally with an expanded ventral base bearing 13 sensory canal openings; dorsal margin appears obliquely truncated, with highest point occurring anteriorly, OPERCULAR (Fig. 6): large, flat, abutting against posterior margin of preopercular and having a semicircular posterior margin. Pectoral girdle and fins poorly represented. They are known only from one piece of cleithrum, a fragmentary pectoral fin and a fragmentary pelvic fin, CLEITHRUM: robust, L-shaped. PECTORAL Fin: exhibits nine fin rays. These are Pto. Mpt Hym. Pop. Op. Qu. Fic. 6; Cooyoo australis. Partial reconstruction of head. Based on specimens; QMF 1016, QMF 12325, QMF 12327, QMF 12711. COOYOO AUSTRALIS FROM QUEENSLAND 185 both broad and thick, especially the most posterior tay which is almost twice the width of the others, Petvic Fin: is poorly preserved, exhibiting 7 broad fin rays. A complete vertebral column and caudal skeleron has yet to be collected. It is particularly unfortunate that no tail has yet been found. The most complete skeleton possesses 65 vertebrae. VERTEBRAE (Fig. 6): exhibit Jaterally a longitudinal ridge separating two deep, longitudinal grooves. This character is not apparent in the first few vertebrae which are laterally smooth; grooves also occur on the dorsal; ventral surfaces of the vertebrae receiving the heads of neural and haemal arches. Fic 7: Cooyoo australis — Holotype — GSQ 2445 Portion of upper and lower jaw. Scale bar = 2cm. REMARKS Specimens of Cooyoo australis examined in this study show little variation in the morphology of bones constructing the skull, The bone shape and relative proportions appeared to remain essentially constant regardless of the overall size of the individual. The vertebrae (QMF6139 from Station Creek, Afton Downs, Queensland) assigned questionably by Woodward (1894) to Cladacyclus sweeti (2) are obviously ichthyodectiform but are not considered diagnostic to a generic level. PALAEQECOLOGY Cooyoo australis has only been collected from sediments which are regarded as the deposits of a shallow marine environment (Day ef a/. 1983), It is found in association with marine vertebrates such as ichthyosaurs, plesiosaurs, other actinopterygians and sharks, and marine invertebrates such as ammonites, belemnites, and crustaceans, Also occurring in the deposits are the remains of terrestrial vertebrates such as dinosaurs and occasional terrestrial plants and insects which indicate proximity to the shore line. Cooyoo australis is one of the fish most commonly collected from these sediments, This suggests that it was quite an abundant member of the ichthyofauna. Its streamlined body, powerful fins and numerous sharp teeth indicate that, like other ichthyodectiforms, it was predacious. COMPARISONS AND GENERIC DESIGNATION Nine genera were previously recognized as Forming the family Ichthyodectidae (Patterson and Rosen 1977). These are IJchthyodectes, Niphactinus, Gillicus, Eubiodectes, Proportheus, Chirocentrites, Thrissops, Spathodactylus and Cladacyelus. Gf these, Spathodactylus is known only from a single poorly preserved specimen; Chirocentrites is possibly Xiphactinus; similarly Propoartheus may be synonymous with Cladocyclus; Thrissops may be synonymous with Gillicus, and Eubiodectes equivalent to Ichthyodectes (Patterson and Rosen 1977), Because of these uncertainties, and because it is not possible to examine any of this material, Ceeyoo will only be compared with the four accepted and fairly well known, figured and described genera, namely Xiphactinus, Cladocvelus, Gillicus, and Ichthyodectes. Comparisons will only be made at the generic level as the characters which have been used to separate species within a genus are minor. Most species are 186 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Fic 8: Cooyoo australis — QMF 6346. Most complete specimen collected to date. Scale bar = 20cm. Fic 9: Cooyoo australis — QMF 12325 — An almost perfect neurocranium. A. Lateral view. B. dorsal view. C. posterior view. Scale bar = Icm. Fic 10: Cooyoo australis — QMF 12327 — Skull with portion of the pectoral girdle. Scale bar = 2cm. a COOYOO AUSTRALIS FROM QUEENSLAND distinguished only on geographic grounds. For example, Bardack (1965) writes ‘The four species Xiphactinus audax, X. mantelli, X. gaultinus and X. australis, tentatively retained in this revision, are distinguished primarily for reasons of geographic distribution rather than _ for morphologic differences.’. Comparisons made herein are based on the figures and descriptions given by Stewart (1900) and Bardack (1965) for Xiphactinus, Ichthyodectes and Gillicus, and by Patterson and Rosen (1977) for Cladocyclus. Although these comparisons strive to be as rigorous as possible, they are limited by the fact that only rarely are entire fish preserved or even representatives of all skeletal elements collected. For example, in the case of Cooyoo, almost no caudal skeletal elements have been collected and no comparisons of the tail skeletons are possible. 187 An additional bias is that certain skeletal elements are so fragile that they are rarely preserved while the more robust predominate in the fossil material. Despite these difficulties it is considered that the material available is sufficient to define accurately the relationship of Cooyoo to other ichthyo- dectids. Of the four most probable genera into which Cooyoo may have been placed, Gillicus and Cladocyclus, are obviously distinct. Main differences between Gillicus and Cooyoo are: (1) Gillicus possesses minute teeth less than 1mm high while in Cooyoo the teeth are relatively more robust with a mean height of 4mm; (2) Gillicus has a curved dental border, while the dental border in Cooyoo is straight; (3) the premaxillary of Gillicus contains 10-17 alveoli, considerably more than the 6 observed in Cooyoo; (4) in Gillicus, the TABLE 4. Summary of major similarities (S) and differences (D) between Cooyoo, Xiphactinus and Ichthyodectes. Feature Xiphactinus Cooyoo Ichthyodectes Angle of rise of Supraoccipital Crest D D D 30 degrees 15 degrees 39 degrees + Proportional Height of Epiotic crests D S S a Parietals Ornament D S S Shape S S D Frontals Ridges D D D Flange D D D ee re ee eee | BO ——— Ethmoid shape D S S en Sphenotic shape D D D Hyomandibular fossa orientation D D D Subtemporal fossa orientation D D D Lateral temporal fossa, size and shape D D D Basisphenoid Flexure D S S 160 149 149 Cross-sectional shape iS) S D Division D D D Premaxillary Shape D D D Number of alveoli D S S Maxillary Teeth size D D D Number of alveoli S S D 188 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Fic 11; Coeyeo australis — QMF 12327 — Portion of vertebral column. Scale bar = 2cm. Fic 12: Cooyoo australis — QMF 12711 — Skull (right side) clearly showing the hyomandibular fossa. Scale bar = 2cm, Fic. 13: Cooyoo australis — Skull (right side). This specimen exhibits the basiclerotic plate, typical of ichthyodectiformes. Scale bar = 2cm. CONVO AUSTRALIS TROM QUEENSLAND rae parasphenodid angles sharply upward beneath the midpoint of the otic section of the neutocranium. In Coeyoo this flexure is very slight. In addition, the parasphenoid of Gillicus is quadrilateral in cross-section, while in Cooypoo it is triangular; (5) the lateral temporal fossa of Gillicvs extends onto the sphenotic and is much smaller than the one Observed in Cooyoo which extends onto the frontals; (6) in Ceeyee the hyomandibular fossa is tilted upward anterodorsally, opposite to that observed in Gillicus which tilts up posterodorsally; (7) in Cooyoo the hyomandibular fossa opens ventrally with most of the posterior portion being obscured by the pterotic; in Gillicus the fossa opens laterally and is not obscured at all; (&)in Gillicus, the subtemporal fossa is ovate in shape and proportionally smaller than the diamond shaped fossa found in Coovao) (9) in Coopoo, the fromtals bear strong curved ridges; comparable ridges are very weak in Gillicus; (10) in Gillicus, the ethmoid is club shaped, while in Cooyoo it ends in a rounded beak; and (11) in Gillicus, (he sphenotics are forward directed hooks, while in Cooyoo they are simple, trunvated points. Matin differences between Cooyoa and Cladocyclus are; (1) the parietals of Cladocvclus extend further forward down the midline of the neurocranium than those of Cooyoo; (2) the frontals of Cladocyelus do not, as in Coayou, eahibit curved ridges or a laterally extended shelf; (3) the ethmoids are broader and more rounded in Cledocyclus than in Cooyoo; (4) the sphenotics of Cladoeyelus exhibit a posteriorly directed hook not seen in Cooyoo; (5) Cladacvelus exhibits an *L'- shaped preopercular which tapers dorsally ending in a truncated point quite distinct from the broad, blunt, dorsal margin found in Cooyee; (6) in Cladocyelus the premaxillaries appear to be proportionally shorter antero-posteriorly than those of Cowyvoa; (7) the pterotics in Cladocpelius show an undulating suture with the frontals; in Covyoo, this suture is straight; in addition, the pterotics of Cladocyelus do not appear to ehscure the posterior portion of the hyomandibular fossa; (8) the epiotic crests of Cladoeyelus are much smaller than those in Cooyeo, where the epiatic crests extend almost lo (he posterior margin of the supraoccipital crest; in Cladecyclus, the epiotics seem to be only half the antero-posterior length of the supraoccipital crest, Of the other two genera, Niphactinas and Ichihyodecies, the following comparison reveals that Cooyoo shows affinities with both genera bur is sufficiently distinct from each to warrai separale veneric status, Comparison of Coaroo with Xiphactinus reveals (he following significani differences: (1) the suprao¢cimtal crest in ¥ipkactinus and Cooyoo commences on the parietals and exhibits a gradual rise from the dorsal surface of the neurocranium, The two genera differ significantly in the mean angle of flexure of this rise, In Xiphactinus, the mean angle of flexure is 30°. In Cooyoo, the angle is significantly less, the mean being only 15° (5 specimens), (2) the relative height of the epiatic crests compared to that of the supraoccipita! cresc differs between Niphactinus and Cooyao; in Xiphacrinus, the epiotic crest is approximately one-third the height of the supraoccipital crest; in Coosoo, the relative height of the epiotic crest is only approximately one-quarter the heighr of the supraoceipital crest. (3) the fused parietals of Niphactinys exhibit ‘An clongate cluster of small knobs...” (Bardack 1965, p.37) but the punetals in Coopoo are unornamented, The construction of the parietals in Viphactinus and Cooyoo is similar. In both, the parietals extend posteriorly some distance on either side of the supraoccipital crests, In Coapoo, the parielals also form the anterior portion of the 2epiotic crests. (4) the frontals in Xiphuctinus are quite distinct from those in Coeyoa; in Xiphactinus, the dorsal surface of the frontal exhibits a broad shelf extending laterally above the orbit; the frontals of Cooyoo dorsally exhibit distinct ridges commencing al the base of the parietaly and curving anterolaterally to form the dorsolateral margin of the frontals above the orbit. (5) the ethmoids have been obscured or damaged in all Known specimens of Cooyoo; thus, only a general comparison is possible with those of Alphactinus, it seems that the ethmoids in Cooyao Lerminate anteriorly in a ‘beak’ gontrasting with the rounded anterior margin in Yiphactinus. (6) the sphenotics in Coeyeo and Xiphectinus are similarin shape; however, in aohactinus, they are orientated lateroventrally, while in Coopou they are directed laterally. (7) the hyomandibular fossa also differs significantly in the amount thar this fossa is obscured by the pterotics; in Niphactinus, the fossa appears to open laterally, with the pterotic only forming the roof of the fossa and apparently not obscuring the opening of the fossaj in Coayoo, the opening of the hyomandibular fossa faces ventrally; viewed laterally, the hyomandibular fossa is almost totally obscured; additionally, the [ossa.18 NOt, asin Xiphucines, honzimtal; i slopes 149) obliquely from dorsal to ventral anteropesceriorly across the lateral surface of the neuroeranium in Cooyoo, (8) in Niphactinus, the subternporal fossa is quite large and rectangular, approximately two- thirds the length of the hyomandibular fossa in size, and is located below the middle of the hyomandibular fossa; the prootic-interealar bridge forms the ventral margin of the fossa; the size of the fossa in Coeveo is comparable to that found in Xiphactinus; however, its rhomboidal shape gives it a distinctly different orientation to that in Niphactinus, in Caoyoo, the prootic-intercalar bridge forms the posterior ventral edge of the fossa and consequently, lies at an angle to the horizontal, tilting up posteriorly; this is quite distinet from the horizontal orientation of this bridge in Xiphactinus. (9) in Xiphactinus, the lateral temporal fossa is confined to the pterotic and is formed as a depression just above the hyomandibular fossa; the dorsal rim of this depression rises gently from approximately the midpoint of the hyomandibular fossa ro end just before the midpoint of the suture between the pteratic and the frontals. Posterior to the poine above the hyomandibular fossa where this edge begins to slope upward, the rim [exes downward and then up again so that the preroric forms a wing just above the middle of jhe hyomandibular fossa. The lateral temporal fossa in Cuoyeo is very strongly developed, the roof of the fossa extending forward from the base of the plerotic up onto the frontals. The wing, formed by the pterotic above the hyomandibular fossa, completely obscures the posterior half of the fossa. (10) the parasphenoid differs between Cooyoo atid Niphactinus in two main ways. Firstly, the amount of flexure exhibited between the otic and orbital sections of the bone is different, with Niphactinus exhibiting a mean flexure of 160°, considerably more than the mean of 149° in Cooyoo, Secondly, the relative position of the division of the basisphenoid differs between Xiphactinus and Cooyoo; in Xiphactinus, this division occurs below the posterior énd of the prootic, while in Cooyoo, it is below the anterior end of the prootic. (11) the premaxillary is only present in 4 single specimen of Cooyoo, suggesting its attachment to the maxillary was weak; the premaxillary is roughly rectangular with a curved alveolar border bearing 6 alveoli and at least 4 teeth. In Xiphactinus, the premaxillary is ovate, with a straight dental margin bearing 5-6 alveoli. usually containing 2 teeth (Bardack 1965); itis reported as MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM being firmly artached to the maxillary (Bardack 1965), (12) the size of the maxillary teeth and the aqumber of alveoli differs between the genera. [In Niphactinus, the teeth are large and variable in size, |-4em, while the average number of alveoli is 32; the teeth of Covoyvoo are much snmualler, having a mean size of 4mm, usually with little variation in size; the number of alveoli, 34, is similar to Xiphactinus. (13) comparison of the hyomandibular apparatus reveals a number of differences, namely; in Aiphactinus, (he mesupterygoid forms about one-third of the margin of the orbit, compared to Cooyoo in whieh uw forns approximately one half the margin of the orbit; in Xiphactinus, the dorsal margin of the ectoplerygoid, adjoining the metaptervgoid, is Straight and on the same line as the dorsal margin of the quadrate; in Coovoo, this margin curves gently upward posteriorly, suddenly dropping down where the ectopterygoid meets the quadrate; and in Xiphactinus, the palatine head exhibits laterally directed flanges, which are absent in Cooyoo, (14) the dorsal margin of the preopercular in Cooyoo and Xiphaciinus differ in being blunt in Cnoayoo and stepped in XNiphactinus, Comparison of Covyoo with Ichihvodectles reveals the following significant differences. (1) the supraoccipital crest rises much more sharply above the surface of the neurocranium in Ichihyodectes (mean angle of flexure 39°) than in Cooyoo where the mean angle of flexure is only 15° (2) the fused parietals in JeAthvodectes do not exhibit the posierior extensions which form the bases of the epiotic crests in Cooyeo (3) the frontal ridges in Ichthyodectes are less distinct, being somewhat flattened and curye the opposite way to those in Covvan, (4) the sphenotics in /ekthyodecres are anteroventrally directed with a sub-triangular shape, laterally, quite distinet from the truncated point in Cooyvoo, (5) the posterior end of the hyomandibular fossa in (ehthyodeectes is partially obscured by a wing of the pterotic; the fossa opens laterally and is onentated parallel to the horizontal. This is quite diflerent from the almost totally obscured, ventrally opening, obliquely orientated fossa in Cooyea, (6) the subtemporal fossa in Ich/hpodecien, compared to Coayao, is proportionately smaller, approximately one-third rhe length of the COOYOO AUSTRALIS FROM QUEENSLAND 19) hyomandibular fossa; it is different in shape, being basically ovate in Jehthyodectes and rhomboidal in Coovoo; and it differs in the orientation of the prootic bridge, which is horizontal and bounds only the posterior half of the veniral margin of the fossa in Ichrhyodectes, in Coovoo, it is slanted, forming the posteroventral corner of the fossa. (7) the lateral temporal fossae are not us strongly developed in Jchifyodecies as that in Cooyaa, (8) the parasphenoids in Cooyoo and Ichthyodectes ditfer in the relative position of the division which, in Jchthyodectes, occurs below the middle of the prootic, whereas in Cooyoo, it divides below the anterior end of the prootic; also, in /ehthyodectes the ventral surface is flat, while in Cooyvoo it is curved, (9) the maxillary teerh in Jehthyodectes (mean size of Smm) are larger than those in Coovoo (mean size 4 mm) while the average number of alveoli in /ehthvodectes (mean number 48) is higher, compared with the 34 in Cooven, (10) the preoperculars in Ichthyodectes and Coayoo differ in the nature of their dorsal margins; in Cooyoo, the margin is blunt, while in Ichthyodectes it narrows to a Sharp point. (11) the number of fin rays in the pectoral fin in Tchthvedectes and Coeyoo is different. Ichthyodecies possesses 11 fin rays while Coovoo possesses 9. DISCUSSION The ichthyodectform genera Ichthyadectes, Gillicus, Cladocyelus and Xiphactinus represenc a group of closely related Mesozoic fish (Batdack 1965; Patterson and Rosen 1977; Bardack and Sprinkle 1969). Cooyoo australis is clearly closely related to this group, A comparison of its various characteristics shows a closer relationship to Jehthyodectes than any other ichthyodectiform genus including XvypAaelinus, the genus in which it was originally placed. However it is also shown that Cooyoo differs sufficiently from both Niphactinus and Ichthyoedectes, to justify its removal to a separate genus. The most important features separating Cooyoo from both XipAactinus and lehthyodectes are: 1) The angle of rise of the supraoccipital crest: 2) The shape of the frontals, 3} The form of the sphenatic; 4) Size, shape and = orientation of hyomandibular; 3) Shape of the premaxillary; and 6} Size of the maxillary teeth. The significance of these differences is emphasised when the characters which have been she used to diagnose other ichthyodectiform genera are examined. Characters used include dentition, degree of flexure of the parasphenoid, form of maxillary and dentary bones, form of the palatine head and presence or absence of ornament on the parietals (Bardack 1965). The character differences listed wbove are thus considered sufficient to support the placement of this species into a new genus. The material of Coo)0o australis examined in this study showed little morphological variation between specimens, This is in contrast to the findings of Patterson and Rosen (1977) who observed significant variation between specimens of Cladocyefus, Patterson and Rosen (1977) felt unable to determine whether these differences were sexual, specific or generic *... because of the inadequacy of our sample, and because of absence of comparable information for other ichthyodectiform ‘‘genera”’." (Patterson and Rosen 1977). The fact that no significant morphological variation was observed among specimens of Cooyoo ausrralis suggests that the variations observed by Patterson and Rosen (1977) in Cladocyelus are not due to sexual dimorphism but probably represent at least specific differences. The problems of assessing the significance of morphological variation is compounded in most cases by paucity of material. This is probably the main reason that no attempt has yet been made to rank the importance of morphological differences observed within the ichthyodectiform group. The need for such a study is emphasised by the fact that most ichthvodectiform genera are monotypic. Additionally jn the few genera in which more than one species is recognised, the species are based on geological or geographic distribution (Bardack 1965; Patterson and Rosen 1977). Allowing for the factors mentioned above it is concluded that while ir has been shown that Cooyoo australis shares more characters with Icthyodecies than Niphactinus, it has also been demonstrated that Coovoae ausiralis possesses sufficient morphological distinctiveness from both these genera to warrant the placement of it into an iidependent gemus. LITERATURE CITED Aviassiz, Li, I834.43. Recherches sur les paissons fossiles: 5 vols. with Acias (Neuchatel), BaArback, D., 1965. Anatomy and evolution of the chirocentrid fishes. Pateant. Contrib. Liniv. Kansas, Vernrebrata 1, 1-88, Bakback, D, and Sprinkle, G,. 1969, Morphology and relationships of suurocephalid fishes. Jieldiana Geol. 16: 27-340, 192 CAVENDER, T.M., 1966. The caudal skeleton of the Cretaceous teleosts Xiphactinus, Ichthyodectes and Gillicus and its bearing on their relationship with Chirocentrus. Occas. Papers Mus. Zool., Univ. Michigan 650: 1-15. Cope, E.D., 1870. On the Saurodontidae Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 11; 529-38. Curr, M AND Curr, E.M., 1887. Upper Flinders, Hughenden, Dutton River Etc. /n Curr, E.M., ‘The Australian Race’, Vol. I, pp.460-61. (Melbourne: John Ferres), Daviv, T.W.E., 1950. ‘Geology of the Commonwealth of Australia’. (Edward Arnold, London), Vol. 2: 499, Day, R.W., WHITAKER, W.G., Murray, C.G., WILSON, 1.H., AND Grimes, K.G., 1983. Queensland Geology. Geol. Surv. Od Publ. 383: 133-48. Hay, O.P., 1898. Observations on the genus of fossil fishes called by Professor Cope Portheus, by Dr Leidy Xiphactinus. Zool. Bull. (Boston) 2: 25-54. Hitt, D., PLAYFoRD, G. aND Woops, J.T., 1968. Cretaceous Fossils of Queensland (Queensland Palaeontographical Society, Brisbane) pl.K XII (1). Hitts, E.S., 1958. A brief review of Australian fossil vertebrates. Westol, T.E. (Ed.) /n ‘Studies on Fossil Vertebrates’. (Althone Press; Univ, London) pp. 86-107. Leipy, J., 1870. Remarks on some ichthyodorulites and on certain fossil Mammalia. Pia. Acad. Nat. Sci. 21; 12-3. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Lona, J.A,, 1982. The history of fishes on the Australian continent. /n Rich, P.V., and Thompson, E.M. (Eds.), ‘The Fossil Vertebrate Record of Australia’ (Monash Univ. Offset Printing Unit: Victoria) pp. 53-86. LonomMaNn, H.A., 1913, Notes on Portheus australis. Mem. Od Mus. 2: 94-5, Netson, G.J,, 1973. Notes on the structure and relationships of certain Cretaceous and Eocene teleostean fishes. Amer. Mus. Novit. 2524: 1-31. PATTERSON, C., and Rosen, D.E., 1977. Review of Ichthyodectiform and other Mesozoic fishes and the theory and practice of classifying fossils. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 158; 81-172. Stewart, A., 1900. Teleosts of the Upper Cretaceous. Kansas Univ., Geol. Survey 6: 257-403. TAVERNE, L., 1973. Les affinities systématiques des téléostéens fossiles de Vordre des Ichthyodectiformes. Bull, Inst. R. Sci. Nat. Belg. 49; Sci. Terre. 6: 1-11. 1974. Deuxiéme note sur la position systématique des téléostéens fossiles de Vordre des Ichthyodectiformes. Bull. Soc. Belge. Geol. Paleont., Hydrol. 83(1): 49-53. Wapbe, R.T., 1930. The fossil fishes of the Australian Mesozoic rocks, J, R. Soc. N.S. WW. 64: 115-47. Woopwarp, A.S., 1884. On some fish remains of the genera Portheus and Cladocyclus from the Rolling Downs Formation (Lower Cretaceous) of Queensland, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 6(14): 444-7. Mem. Od Mus, 25(1): 193—200.[1987] LOWER CARBONIFEROUS PALAEONISCOIDS (PISCES : ACTINOPTERYGII) FROM QUEENSLAND Susan TURNER Queensland Museum and JOHN ALBERT LONG Department of Geology, University of Western Australia, Nedlands WA 6009 ABSTRACT Incomplete remains of Lower Carboniferous palaconiscoid fishes from the Star of Hope Formation, northern Queensland, are described and figured, but due to absence of diagnostic features must be assigned to the suborder Palaeconiscoidei, family indeterminate. Lower Carbonilerous palaeoniscoid remains from the Narmen Range, ceritral Queensland, are figured for the first time; such microfossils could provide biostratigraphic information. Queensland records of Carboniferous palaconiscoid fishes are discussed and compared with those from the Mansfield fauna of Victoria. INTRODUCTION Robert Etheridge jnr (in Jack and Etheridge 1892, pp. 136, 296) mentioned a headless palaeoniscoid fish from the Star of Hope Formation which he regarded as a possible new species of the genus Palaeoniscus, and named it after the collector W.H. Rands. There is some uncertainty regarding the identification of GSQ L1522 as being the same specimen to which Etheridge referred, as he did not refer to a specimen number. We are confident that the specimen seen by Etheridge and by A.S, Woodward was actually GSQ L1522, in the absence of other articulated remains of palaeoniscoids from the same district. Turner (1982, p. 601) and Long and Turner (1984, p, 242) both refer to the name given by Etheridge to his material as momen nudum, and therefore we refrain from useage of this name in this work to avoid future confusion. In this paper we describe two specimens of palaeoniscoid fishes from the Star of Hope Formation and attempt to summarize the status of other Carboniferous palaeoniscoids from other parts of Australia. SYSTEMATIC DESCRIPTION Family ACTINOPTERYGII Order PALAEONISCIFORMES Suborder PALAFONISCOIDE! Palaeoniscoid Family and Genus indet. A. (Pl. 1A, Fig. 1) MATERIAL EXAMINED Specimen GSQ L1522 from the Suttor River, 4 miles WSW of Mt McConnell, near Lornesleigh Station, Charters Towers district, north Queensland, Lower Carboniferous; Star of Hope Formation (‘Star Beds"); impression of part of body only from behind to pectoral region to the posterior of the trunk including most of the caudal fin, excluding the extremities of the dorsal and ventral hypochordal lobes. Squamation intact in places. DESCRIPTION The specimen (PI. 1A, Fig. 1) is a small palaeoniscoid fish having a slender caudal peduncle. There are approximately 15-16 scale rows from the anterior extent of the ventral hypochordal lobe of the caudal fin to the posterior extent of the dorsal fin, There are about 13 scales in the posterior most scale rows and up to 18 at the level of the dorsal fin. On average typical rhomboid body scales are 1.5 mm long by J.0 mm wide. Nine dorsal fulcral scales are visible from the caudal inversion scale row to the dorsal fin, although we infer that eleven would have been present because of the spacing posterior to the dorsal fin rays. The dors] fulcral scales are ovoid in shape becoming more triangular posteriorly, merging evenly with the elongate caudal fulcral ridge scales. The first, inferred, dorsal fulcra] scale abuts two rows, as do the fifth, sixth and eight dorsal fuleral scales. The ninth dorsal fulcral scale at the position of the caudal inversion abuts two to three scale rows. There are disrupted ventral fulcral scales seen between the caudal fin and the tenth scale raw (from posterior), indicating that the ventral midline of the caudal peduncle bore fuleral scales which were presumably slightly longer than the dorsal fulcral scales. The dorsal fuleral scales have a faint ormament of posteriorly directed ridges whereas the fulcral scales on the 193 194 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM mah A) at ty TST Ri, \ < x Th \ NK \ SS AL no) 6 oO 18 t X. minor fer) . = P. stocki_, ,! Fr at ole P. minutus 7 oO Mis £ L. aethiopicus “m9 og a | ° A 14 nies o* OLp. minor 12 & oO. proeses 213 of the Black-necked Stork or Australian Jabiru, Ephippiorhynchus (Xenorhynchus) asiaticus, with which he compared it. QM F5515 and F5516 resemble the tibiotarsi of Phoenicopteridae and differ from those of Ciconiidae, in distal view, by being decidely broader anteriorly than they are posteriorly, by having a very prominant ligamental attachment at the base of the supratendinal bridge, and a very deeply excavated anterior surface between the two condyles. QM F5515 and F5516 differ from the tibiotarsi of other Phoenicopteridae by being larger than those of the largest extant species Phoenicopterus ruber (Table 5); and in that the internal condyle projects decidedly farther distally than the external (Fig. 4). Qualitative characters that may distinguish Xenorhynchopsis from other genera are rather questionable: in X. tibialis the distal end appears deeper relative to width; the shaft flares less at the distal end; the ligamental groove on the lateral side of the shaft is located relatively nearer the anterior border. It appears to differ from Leakeyornis in that the ligamental prominence on the distal end id X. tibialis x P. copei \ re* . ‘ . . _ rar * P. ruber o” | s » P. ruber QO me Vv N v _ @—P. jamesi P. chilensis o— P. andinus 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Width of distal end (mm) Fic. 6. Comparison of distal tibiotarsal measurements of extant and extinct species of flamingo. 214 of the supratendinal bridge is not subdued, and the supratendinal canal is broader. Direct comparison with Phoeniconotius is not possible, as that genus is known only from a tarsometatarsus and phalanges. We hereby designate QM F5515 as the lectotype of Xenorhynchopsis tibialis and refer QM F5516 to X. tibialis. ADDITIONAL REFERRED MATERIAL Humerus: UCMP 56324, left distal fragment, Cooper Creek, site 8, UCMP V-5860, South Australia, Malkuni Fauna, Katipiri Sands; collected as float from a river channel in the western fork of Cooper Creek about one-half mile south of Kittipirra, Quaternary. In shape, this humerus differs from that of the extant genera of flamingoes in having a relatively deeper brachial depression; a relatively shorter ventral supracondylar tubercle that is concave palmarly, not flat; and perhaps a more inflated distal end. More complete material is needed to accurately estimate the degree of inflation, however. The humerus differs from that of Leakeyornis in that the internal condyle does not MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM extend further distally relative to the external condyle than in modern genera; the condyles appear to be relatively more inflated, and the distal end is deeper relative to its width (Tables 3, 4 & 11). Phoenicopterus ruber Citation: Linnaeus, 1758. Syst. Nat. ed. 10, 1: 139. REFERRED MATERIAL Tarsometatarsus: QM F5518, right distal fragment, Wurdulumankula, South Australia, age uncertain. De Vis (1905) referred this tarsometatarsus to Xenorhynchopsis minor, as a species of stork smaller than his X. tibialis. QM F5518 is similar in shape to the tarsometatarsi of Phoenicopteridae in the position of the trochlea for digit II being more ventral than in Ciconiidae. QM F5518 is decidedly more mediolaterally compressed than in Phoenicoparrus, and thus more like this element in Phoeniconais and Phoenicopterus. QM F5518 is similar in size and shape to small tarsometatarsi of P. ruber; it does appear to differ slightly from our sample of P. ruber, however, in having a 12 * P. eyrensis + H. croizeti . 11 —* x P. ruber pa ats ee * iA P. neyeShenana ee / => ee’ E ve P. ruber Q P. copei = > v ® P. jamesi t. Sg 6 “Fossil P. ruber Oo 9° P. minor ° = Vv v, oad ry ° 9 : / < \ O \ ‘5 P. chilensis a ° £ 8 fe) . P. andinus A 3 : | 5 > L. aethiopicus ~~ A bed A w 7 ¥ « O. proeses oO” 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Width of distal end (mm) Fic. 7. Comparison of distal tarsometatarsal measurements of extant and extinct species of flamingo. FOSSIL FLAMINGOES relatively shallower trochlea IV, although there is definitely some wear on the bone that might have overemphasized this. P. copei is similar in size to P. ruber (Tables 8, 10 and 12), but according to Shufeldt (1892) has longer wings, legs and toes, and a coracoid with a narrower dorsal end. These are characters that are not available for comparison in the Pliocene and Quaternary material of Australian flamingoes. For the present, because of its size we provisionally refer QM F5518 to P. ruber. Femur: QMF 7013 left, proximal fragment, probably from northeastern South Australia. This femur was found in the de Vis collection in the Queensland Museum with no information as to its origin. It is not one of the few missing specimens that were described by de Vis. Its 215 preservation is compatible with that of fossil material from northeastern South Australia. In shape and size, QMF 7013 is similar to the femur of a large Phoenicopterus ruber, to which species we tentatively refer it. It differs from Leakeyornis in having a flat anterior shaft surface near the proximal end and a posterior expansion of the trochanter. Tibiotarsus: UCMP 60562, left distal fragment, Stirton Quarry, Lake Kanunka, Site 1, UCMP V- 5772, South Australia, Tirari Formation, Pliocene. This tibiotarsus was found at the base of an escarpment on the northeast side of the northern part of the bluffs immediately to the west of Lake Kanunka. It differs slightly in shape from that of P. ruber in that the tendinal canal is decidedly deeper and broader, and the tendinal TABLE 3. Measurements in mm of the humeri of Australian Quaternary flamingoes. X. tibialis X. minor UCMP 56324 rf UCMP 56360 rf UCMP 56882 rf Width of distal end @22 @19 Length of external condyle 15.2 11.6 9.8 Depth of external condyle 15.8 11.8 10.5 Depth of internal condyle 9.1 5.9 Depth at attachment of M. pronator brevis 12.7 >8.6 7.8 TABLE 4. Measurements in mm of the humeri of modern flamingoes. P. ruber # P. ruber § P. chilensis P. andinus P. minor a: Xx 25 23 23.5 22 19 - ; range 23-26 — 23-24 _ 18-21 Width of distal end A B 1 3 1 3 sd 0.8 — 0.5 _ 1.4 x 14 12 14 11 10 range 12-15 — 14-15 — 9-11 Length of external condyle i B 1 3 1 3 sd 1.0 = 0.3 — 0.5 + x 15 13 14 13 11 range 13-16 a 12-15 a 10-12 Depth of external condyle i B 1 3 1 3 sd 0.7 — 1.0 — 0.8 | : __| x 9 9 9 8 7 . range 8-10 _— 9-10 — 6-8 Depth of internal condyle FA 3 1 3 1 3 sd 0.7 _ 0.3 — 0.7 ——! ——_} x 10 10 9 —- 8 Depth at attachment of range 9-11 — 9-9 = = M. pronator brevis n 1] 1 3 — 1 sd 0.5 — 0.2 _— — 216 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM TABLE 5. Measurements in mm of the femora of Australian Quaternary flamingoes. Depth of head Width of proximal end Width of distal end Depth of trochanter | P. ruber | O. proeses | QM F7013 rf | QM F5519 rf > 18.6 @13.6 ca @15.1 cs >9.1 @10.1 @6.2 groove on the lateral side of the external condyle is displaced farther anteriorly than in any of the modern genera. It differs from the tibiotarsus of Leakeyornis in having a very prominent ligamental attachment on the distal end of the tendinal bridge and in having a deeply incised tendinal canal. In size, UCMP 60562 agrees with Phoenicopterus ruber, to which we provisionally refer it. Tarsometatarsus: UCMP 60583, right distal fragment, Lake Kanunka, Site 1, UCMP V-5772, South Australia, Tirari Formation, Pliocene. TABLE 6. Measurements in mm of the femora of modern flamingoes. P. ruber é P. ruber 2 P. chilensis P. andinus P. minor joe eee x 23 21 20 20 17 ' : range 20-24 — 18-22 19-20 15-18 Width of proximal end 4 B 1 6 3 5 sd 1.0 a 1.2 0.7 1.0 =| Ss 2 { x 26 24 23 22 18 F : range 24-27 — 23-24 — 17-20 Width of distal end i 13 1 3 1 3 sd 0.8 — 0.4 — 1.3 x 18 17 17 15 13 range 17-20 _ 16-17 _ 12-14 Depth of trochanter h B 1 3 1 3 sd 0.9 a 0.5 — 0.5 --—_———_——<$— x 10 9 10 9 7 range 9-11 _— 8-10 8-10 6-8 Depth of head i B 1 6 3 5 sd 0.4 — 0.7 0.6 0.5 [i oe eee et) ee ee 2 eS ee eS eee | TABLE 7. Measurements in mm of the tibiotarsi of Australian Quaternary flamingoes. X. tibialis P. ruber X. minor O. proeses QM F5515 It | QM F5516 rf | UCMP 60562 rf | QM F5517 ht |] UCMP 94688 rf | UCMP 56887 rf saibt las a eal ee Wadth of distal |) 25 19%. 18.6 13.5 >14.9 10.9 end ew ara >22.3 19.3 15.9 internal condyle Depth of external 21.8 >23.8 16.3 >11.8 condyle Anterior length of internal 8.8 6.9 @7.7 5.8 condyle CS aS eee Anterior length of external 11:5 @9.2 9.0 6.5 condyle FOSSIL FLAMINGOES 217 Miller (1963) described and figured this tarsometatarsus, similar in size and shape to a large tarsometatarsus of Phoenicopterus ruber, to which species he referred it. We tentatively agree with this referral. Xenorhynchopsis minor Citation: de Vis, 1905. Ann. Qd Mus. 6: 10, pl. 1, U, fig. 1. HoLotyPe: QM F5517, distal end of a right tibiotarsus, Unduwampa, South Australia, Quaternary. De Vis described QM F5517 as the holotype of a small species of stork in his genus Xenorhynchopsis. In size and shape the holotype is similar to Phoeniconaias minor, except that the shaft is somewhat stouter in Xenorhynchopsis minor. In X. minor the external condyle is deeper relative to distal end width, the internal condyle is relatively shorter, and there is a greater difference in the lengths of the internal and external condyles when they are viewed anteriorly than in P. minor. The tibiotarsus of X. minor is larger than that in Leakeyornis aethiopicus (Tables 7 & 11), and it differs in having a very large distal opening of the tendinal canal, but it is very similar in all other characters. Like in Xenorhynchopsis tibialis, the condyles of X. minor are deeper relative to width, and thus Xenorhynchopsis differs from the living genera and Leakeyornis. Both X. tibialis and X. minor flare only slightly distally, apparently not as much as in the living genera, and both have very large distal openings of the tendinal canal; neither have a deeply notched distal border of the internal condyle, thus differing from the species in modern genera. Phoenicopterus stocki (Miller 1944) from the Pliocene of North America and P. minutus (Howard 1955) from the Pleistocene of North America are both about the same size as X. minor TABLE 8. Measurements in mm of the tibiotarsi of modern flamingoes. P. ruber 4 | P.ruber® | P. chilensis | P. andinus | P. jamesi | P. minor x 17 16 15 15 16 13 2 . range 16-18 — 14-17 14-16 — 12-14 Width of distal end A B 1 6 3 1 6 sd 0.6 — 1.0 0.7 = 0.8 x 20 18 16 16 16.5 15 Depth of internal range 19-20 — 15-17 15-18 — 14-15 condyle n 13 1 6 3 1 6 sd 0.6 — 0.6 Ll = 0.5 x 19 18 16 16 16 14 Depth of external range 19-20 — 15-17 15-17 = 13-15 condyle n 13 1 6 3 1 6 sd 0.6 —_ 0.8 1.2 — 0.6 L — ares | x 10 9 8 8 7.5 7 Anterior length of range au ™ ed i. cs a8 : \eodael n 13 1 3 ] 1 4 internal condyle 4 3 1 6 3 1 6 sd 0.6 - 0.6 1.1 — 0.5 x 19 18 16 16 16 14 Depth of external range 19-20 — 15-17 15-17 _ 13-15 condyle n 13 1 6 3 1 6 sd 0.6 = 0.8 1.2 _— 0.6 x 10 9 8 8 7.5 7 Anterior length of range 9-11 = 8-9 _— —_ 6-8 internal condyle n 13 1 3 ] 1 4 sd 0.5 _ 0.6 — a 0.4 = it = 1 x 11 10 9 9 9 8 Anterior length of range 10-12 _ 8-9 — — 8-9 external condyle n 13 1 4 1 1 4 sd 0.5 — 0.3 _ _— 0.4 218 (Tables 7, 8 & 12), and both appear also to have deep condyles, with P. stocki being deepest (Howard 1955). P. minutus has a relatively shorter internal condyle, evidently a relatively higher intercondylar tubercle (Howard 1955), a notch on the distal border of the internal condyle that is well behind the centre of the condyle, not near its centre, and the shaft flares more broadly at the distal end. X. minor appears to differ from both P. stocki and P, minutus in having a relatively MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM broad intercondylar notch, as in living flamingoes, rather than a narrow one. REFERRED MATERIAL Tibiotarsus: UCMP 94688, left distal fragment, Cooper Creek, Site 4, UCMP Y-5380, South Australia, Malkuni Fauna, Katipiri Sands, Quaternary. Collected from a sandbar in the main channel of Cooper Creek. This tibiotarsus is similar in size to those of TABLE 9. Measurements in mm of the tarsometatarsi of Australian Quaternary flamingoes. P. ruber QM F5518rf | UCMP 60583 rf Width of shaft at proximal end of distal foramen 14.2 Width of distal end O. proeses SAM P13650 rf —- QM F5512 ht UCMP 60561 rf 8.6 Internal depth of | trochles II External depth of trochlea II 1A Anterior width of trochlea II @4.2 4.7 Posterior width of trochlea I] Internal depth of trochlea II 3.1 6.9 Anterior width of trochlea IT 9.1 >6.4 47 5.2 Posterior width of trochlea II Internal depth of trochlea ILI 3.1 a ee in External depth of 92 trochlea ITT 10.7 ata sel OU oT Anterior width of trochlea ITI >4.8 Posterior length of Internal depth of trochlea IV | a | trochlea If] Posterior width of trochlea TV 3.8 3.2 FOSSIL FLAMINGOES 219 TABLE 10. Measurements in mm of the tarsometatarsi of modern flamingoes. P. ruber ¢ | P. ruber? | P. chilensis | P. andinus | P. jamesi | P. minor i a . Xx 15 13 15 11 14 12 WIG RE SDEEEME Neraciges |) GLActT a 14-15 = at M1-13 proximal end of distal foramen a 12 : 3 : | 3 sd 0.8 — 0.1 — — 0.7 4 ol er Pc i, ai oe. pk x 21 18 18 17 18 15 ‘ i range 19-22 _ 16-20 16-18 _ 14-16 Width of distal end ‘ 12 1 6 3 1 5 sd 0.6 _ 1.1 0.8 = 0.8 x 8 7 7 os — 7 Internal depth of range 7-10 — 7-8 _— — a trochlea II n 12 1 5 — _— 1 sd 0.5 _ 0.4 — _— — x 9 7.5 8 7 7 6 External depth of range 8-10 a 7-9 6-8 — 6-8 trochlea II n 12 1 5 3 1 6 sd 0.8 = 0.6 0.9 — 0.5 OW a a ee oe Xx es 7 6 7 7 5 Anterior width of range 6-8 -- 4-7 _ — 4-6 trochlea II n 12 1 6 1 1 4 sd 0.4 — 0.9 — — 0.8 ———————— — x 5 — 5 Bi) 5 4 Posterior width of range 5-6 — 4-5 4-5 _ 3-5 trochlea II n 12 _ 4 3 1 5 sd 0.3 os 0.3 0.3 — 0.4 es eee | ee x 11 10 9 9 9 8 Internal depth of range 10-11 — 8-10 8-11 — 8-9 trochlea III n 11 1 5 3 1 5 sd 0.5 — 0.4 1.3 _ 0.4 x 11 10 9 9 9 8 External depth of range 10-12 — 8-10 8-10 = 8-10 trochlea III n 12 1 =} 3 1 5 sd 0.5 — 0.5 0.8 _— 0.5 amd NS ES a ee | re OUR [has dd (er | x 8 8 7 7 7 6 Anterior width of range 8-9 — 5-8 — a 6-7 trochlea III n 12 1 5 1 1 3 sd 0.4 = 12, _ _ 0.5 ee ea Be le ee | ee ee x 12 10 10 10 11 ee Posterior length of | range 11-13 _ 9-11 — — 9-10 trochlea III n 12 1 3 1 1 3 sd 0.5 a 1.1 _— = 0.9 —————— = ——— x 10 9.5 8 8 8 7 Internal depth of range 9-11 a 8-9 7-8 — 7-8 trochlea IV n 12 1 5 3 1 5 sd 0.5 — 0.3 0.6 _— 0.3 EE ——————————EE_——_ EEE Ry 6 5 5 5 5 4 Posterior width of range 5-7 _ 5-6 4-5 —_ 4-4 trochlea IV n 12 1 a 3 1 6 sd 0.3 = 0.4 0.3 a 0.1 220 Phoenicopterus minor. It is very heavily weathered, and we only tentatively refer it to Xenorhynchopsis minor on the basis of size. Humerus: UCMP 56360, left distal fragment, Cooper Creek, site 14, UCMP V-5866, South Australia, Malkuni Fauna, Katipiri Sands. Collected from the northern side of the channel at a prominent west bend, where bones were found MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM in place or as float derived from a sand-filled channel cut into red-green mottled arenaceous clays and overlain disconformably by a grey- brown argillaceous sandstone and dune sands. On UCMP 56360 and the humeri of Phoenicopterus the dorsal supracondylar process is not as prominent as it is in Phoeniconaias and Phoenicoparrus. UCMP 56360 differs from the TABLE 11. Measurements in mm of the humeri, femora, tibiotarsi and tarsometatarsi of Tertiary flamingoes of the World from Rich and Walker (1983). L. aethiopicus H. croizeti P. eyrensis | P.novaehollandiae | P. floridanus _ range n | range n n=l] n=1 n=1 HUMERUS Width of distal end 16-18 “h: Length of external 9-10.5 8 condyle Depth of external 9-10.5 8 condyle FEMUR Width of distal end 15-18.5 3 — 1 TIBIOTARSUS Width of distalend | 11-12 3 15.9 1 16.5 Depth of internal 12-14 3 11.5 1 condyle Depth of external sonevle @14 3 18.5 1 Anterior length of 6-7 > 8.5 1 internal condyle Anterior length of 7-8 2 10.1 1 external condyle TARSOMETATARSUS Width of distal end | 11-15 7 16-20 2 @24.4 17.6 External depth of trochlea II a 3 9.2 B.4 yo aca IB 4 | 4.5 1 8.7 6.6 trochlea II Internal depth of trochlea III 7-8 5 10.5 1 11.2 9.8 External depth of trochlea III 7-9 9 11.0 1 11.6 10.0 Anterior width of trochlea III 5-6 4 | 7-9 2 11.5 7.8 Posterior length of trochlea III ae 4 10.9 @10 Internal depth of trochlea IV OFF ? 9.7 Posterior width of icachie TY 3.5-5 7 | 6.0 1 5.6 FOSSIL FLAMINGOES humerus of Leakevornis in having: only a small area of the brachial depression that is deep: the internal condyle not extending much beyond the external condyle; and the condyles inflated as in living flamingoes. Miller (1963) referred UCMP 56360 to Pheenicopterus ruber, because it is similar in size and shape to the humerus of UCMVZ 140923, labelled as a male of Phoenicopterus ruber ruber. The tarsometatarsal length of UCMVZ 140923 is 253 mm, which is within the range for males of Phoenicoprerus ruber chilensis, and of females of P. r. ruber and P, r. roseus, but is too small for males of P. r. ruber and P..r. roseus as indicated in Blake (1977) and Cramp (1977), Our other measurements alsa suggest that UCMVZ 140923 has been mislabelled and misidentified and should be referred to P. chilensis rather than to P. ruber. We tentatively refer UCMP 56360 to Xenorhyncopsis minor, in part because it is slightly smaller than our sample of P. chilensis (including UCMVZ 140923), substantially smaller than our sample of P, ruber, and slightly larger than our sample of Phoeniconaias minor. Humerus; UCMP 56882, left distal fragment, Lake Kanunka, Site 1, UCMP V-5772, South Australia, Tirari Formation, Pliocene. Miller (1963) referred this humerus to Phoeniconaias gracilis, but noted that in size it was similar to Phoernicondias minor. Mainly because of its size we tentatively refer it to Xenorhynchopsis minor. = 3 Ocyplanus proeses Citation: de Vis, 1905. Ann. Od Mus. 6: 8-9, pl. 1, fig. Sb. New Synonymy: Ibis (2) canditus de Vis, 1905. Ann, Od Mus, 6: 10-11, pl. I, tig. 2. Phoeniconaias gracilis Miller, 1963. Condar 65: 294-6, fig. 4. HoOLotyPeE OF OCYPLANUS PROESES Tarsometatarsus: QM F5512, left distal fragment, northeastern South Austalia, age uncertain. Although the distal end is solidly fused, the shaft has a surface texture that suggests a juvenile bird. De Vis did not specify where QM F5512 was found when he named it as a new genus and species of wader, Charadrii (= Limicolae). Without any explanations Ocyplanus proeses was included with the gulls, Laridae, by Lambrecht (1933), Brodkorb (1967) and Fisher (1983), and with the rails, Rallidae, by Condon (1975). When compared with QMF 5512 and the tarsometatarsi of waders and flamingoes, those of gulls and rails differ in that from a medial view the medial part of the trochlea lor digit I] is more rounded. We agree with de Vis that QM F5512 is similar in size to the tarsometatarsus of a stone-curlew, Burhinus magnirostris, but QM F5512 and the tarsometatarsi of flamingoes differ from stone curlews in having a more gradual expansion of the distal end, and also in that the trochlea for digit II does not extend as far distally relative to that TABLE 12. Measurements in mm of the tibiotarsi and tarsomeratarsi of North American Quaternary flamingoes from Shufeldt (1884), Miller (1944), Howard (1955) and Rich and Walker (1983). Tibiotarsus Width of distal end Tarsometatarsus Width of distal end External depth of trochlea Il Anterior width of trochlea II Internal depth of trochlea II! External depth of trochlea 1H Anterior width of trochlea 11 Posterior length of trochlea IL] Internal depth. of trochlea 1V Posterior width of trochlea LV * [6,0 in Howard (1955). P, minutus P. stoeki P. copei n=1 n=l nh=2 Depth of external condyle . Anterior length of interior condyle , |__Ater i al ai Ta | Cee a | @13 17 "16,2 20 222 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM for digit II]. In these respects QM F5512 and the tarsometatarsi of flamingoes resemble those of some other waders with long, slender legs such as lapwings, Vanellus, Charadriidae; avocets and stilts, | Recurvirostra, Himantopus and Cladorhynchus, Recurvirostridae; curlews and godwits, Numenius and Limosa, Scolopacidae; and pratincoles, Sti/tia, Glareolidae; but their trochleae for digit Il extend even less distally than those in QM F5512 and flamingoes (Fig. 5). QM F5512, the holotype of Ocyplanus proeses, conforms to the diagnosis by Miller (1963) for Phoeniconaias gracilis (see below) and is similar in size and shape to the holotype. It differs from the tarsometatarsi of Phoenicoparrus and Phoenicopterus in being more mediolaterally compressed when viewed distally, thus resembling the tarsometatarsus of the living Phoeniconaias. HOoLortype oF /BIs (?) CONDITUS Femur: QM F5519, left, Wurdulumankula, South Australia, age uncertain. De Vis (1905) made this femur the holotype of a mew species of ibis, Threskiornithidae (= Ibididae). He compared the femur with that of the Straw-necked Ibis, Threskiornis (Carphibis) spinicollis, and noted that the shaft of QM F5519 was relatively stout compared with the length of the femur. In this respect QM F5519 is similar to the femora of Phoenicopteridae, as it is also in other respects, including the sharply curved line in the popliteal area mentioned by de Vis. The femur differs from that of all living genera of flamingoes in that the anterior intermuscular line is straight over much of its length except near the proximal end where it is highly concave, curving medially to touch the trochanter; the anterior face of the shaft near the proximal end is deeply excavated and lacks a pneumatic foramen (Lambrecht 1933); the ligamental pit at the base of the fibular condyle, when viewed posteriorly, is relatively deeper, and a distinct ridge lies just proximal to that; proximal to the prominent ridge is a deep channel that runs onto the shaft (modern flamingoes lack the well defined channel, and the ridge is only hinted at). In size, QM F5519 is smaller than the femora of Phoeniconaias minor and is from a bird similar in size to QM F5512; we, therefore, refer QM F5519 to Ocyplanus proeses. HOLOTYPE OF PHOENICONAIS GRACILIS Tarsometatarsus: SAM P13650, left distal fragment, Lake Kanunka, Site 1, UCMP V-5772 South Australia, Tirari Formation, Pliocene. Miller (1963) described this tarsometatarsus as the holotype of a new species of flamingo with a tarsometatarsus smaller and more slender than that of Phoeniconaias minor, the smallest extant species of flamingo. He suggested that the fossil resembled most the African Phoeniconaias, because it had a trochlea II that was relatively shallow and less rounded than in other living genera. This seems variable within our samples of living genera. The tarsometatarsus’ of Phoeniconaias is however, like the Australian fossil, more mediolaterally compressed than those in the species of Phoenicoparrus and Phoenicopterus. P. gracilis differs from Leakeyornis in that trochlea IV is narrower posteriorly and deeply incised laterally, and in distal view, the tarsometatarsus is more compressed mediolaterally. Phoeniconotius has much shallower trochleae relative to their width and a less compressed distal end. We agree with Miller’s diagnosis, which equally applies to the holotype of Ocyplanus proeses, a name that has priority and to which we refer SAM P13650, the holotype of Phoeniconaias gracilis. ADDITIONAL REFERRED MATERIAL Tibiotarsus: UCMP 56887, right distal fragment, Lake Kanunka, Site 1, UCMP V-5772, South Australia, Tirari Formation, Pliocene. Miller (1963) referred this tibiotarsus to Phoeniconaias gracilis, because it is smaller than that of P. minor, which it resembles in shape. It further differs from all of the extant flamingoes we examined in that: the ligamental groove on the external shaft surface near the distal end lies close to the anterior border of the shaft and does not course diagonally across that surface; and the distal end is not flattened distally, but both internal and external condyles slope proximally and posteriorly, although this is certainly overemphasized by postdepositional wear. It differs from the tibiotarsus of Xenorhynchopsis tibialis in flaring more broady distally, in having less prominent ligamental protuberences on the anterior surface, and in having the ligamental groove on the lateral face of the external condyle located more anteriorly. It differs from the tibiotarsus UCMP 60562, that we tentatively refer to Phoenicopterus ruber, in having a decidedly deeper tendinal canal on the anterior surface and relatively higher ligamental prominences. It differs from the tibiotarsus of Xenorhynchopsis minor in that the condyles, viewed from the side, have a more pronounced slope proximoposteriorly. We refer UCMP 56887 to Ocyplanus proeses. FOSSIL FLAMINGOES 223 Tarsometatarsus: UCMP 60561, right distal fragment, Lake Kanunka, Stirton Quarry, Site 1, UCMP V-5772 South Australia. Found as float, Pliocene or Quaternary. Miller (1963) referred this tarsometatarsus to Phoeniconaias gracilis. It is slightly smaller than the smallest individual in our P. minor sample and poorly preserved. We tentatively refer UCMP 60561 to Ocyplanus proeses. Phoenicopteridae, indet. Sternum: UCMP 69588, anterior fragment, locality uncertain, South Australia. Sternum: UCMP 128455, anterior fragment of a juvenile, Manku, Kallakoopah Creek, UCMP V- 76056, South Australia, Quaternary. Both UCMP 69588 and 128455 are fragments of the manubrial end of the sternum. The manubrial spine is preserved complete in 69588. UCMP 128455 appears to be a juvenile, based on the porous appearance of the bone surface and its small size. On the ventral side the angle of lateral spread posteriorly between the coracoidal sulci is greater than in Phoenicopterus ruber, P. chilensis and Phoeniconaias minor, but the vertical depth of the coracoidal sulci is in the adult UMCP 69588 similar to P. ruber, and in the juvenile and worn UCMP 128455 less than in P. ruber. These characters might be diagnostic when more complete fossil sterna become available, but at this stage we can assign UCMP 69588 and UCMP 128455 only to indeterminate Phoenicopteridae. DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSIONS Modern genera of flamingo differ in the shapes of the mandibles and in the presence (Phoenicopterus and Phoeniconaias) or absence (Phoenicoparrus) of a hind toe (Salvadori 1895). Unfortunately Phoenicopterus and Phoeniconaias lack a hallux scar on the tarsometatarsus to indicate that they have a hind toe. Phoeniconotius is the only genus of flamingo known to have a hallux scar (Miller 1963; Rich and Walker 1983). Lambrecht (1933) noted that Ocyplanus did not have a hallux scar. Brodkorb and Mourer-Chauvire (in press) believe that the post-cranial bones of flamingoes are of limited diagnostic value. As indicated above in the descriptions of the fossils, we, as did de Vis (1905) and Miller (1963), found some differences in shape, that may be generic, but more complete fossil material is needed to substantiate their significance. The only Pliocene and Quaternary material of Australian flamingoes available to de Vis included seven, to Miller six, and to us 18 bones. The limited evidence available suggests that sometime during this time period there were at least four species of flamingo, in what may be three different genera, and that they were restricted to the Lake Eyre Basin of northeastern South Australia. The range in size and at certain stratigraphic levels the number of sympatric genera and species of the Pliocene and Quaternary flamingoes of Australia is greater than has been recorded elsewhere in time and space. Xenorhynchopsis tibialis appears to have been larger than any known flamingo except for Phoeniconotius eyrensis of the Australian Miocene, and Ocyplanus proeses appears to have been smaller than any known flamingo except for Leakeyornis aethiopicus of the African Miocene. Xenorhynchopsis minor appears to have been similar in size to Phoeniconaias minor, the Lesser Flamingo, and smallest of the five species of modern flamingoes; whereas Phoenicopterus ruber, the Greater Flamingo, is the largest of the modern flamingoes. Xenorhynchopsis differs from other genera of flamingoes mainly in having a tibiotarsus with a relatively deep distal end, which flares little, especially on the lateral side. Australian fossil flamingoes assigned to Phoenicopterus ruber are the size of this living species, but some elements demonstrate a few differences from this species and other known genera of flamingo. We, therefore, retain some of the Australian fossils in this genus for convenience only. It should be noted however, that we suspect that at least UCMP 60562 from Lake Kanunka may merit description as a new taxon when more diagnostic material is available. In Ocyplanus proeses, we include Ibis (?) conditus and Phoeniconaias gracilis. Although the tarsometatarsi of O. proeses are qualitatively indistinguishable from those of Phoeniconaias minor, the referred femur and tibiotarsus differ markedly. Thus, because O. proeses does not conveniently fit into any known genus of flamingoes we have retained the de Vis name, which has priority. It has not been feasible to date radiometrically the sites that have yielded flamingo bones, some of which were found as ‘float’ on erosion surfaces in creek beds. It appears that four species are known from the Cooper Creek localities (Table 1), three from Lake Kanunka, and one specimen from Kallakoopa Creek. The Cooper Creek localities 224 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM may include sites of various ages within the Pleistocene. The six Kanunka fossils, however, probably represent contemporaneous Pliocene forms, suggesting that at least three species inhabited this area, which must have had permanent saline lakes in the Pliocene, and missing Xenorhynchopsis tibialis may represent a species restricted to the Pleistocene that frequently crops out along Lower Cooper Creek. The smallest flamingo, Ocyplanus proeses, occurs in both places but is restricted to only one Cooper Creek locale, Wurdulumankula, the age of which is uncertain. It has not been found anywhere together with Xenorhynchopsis tibialis, and could be restricted to the Pliocene. X. minor is long ranged, from Pliocene into the Quartenary. How the Australian flamingoes are related to those elsewhere in the world cannot be determined until more complete material of fossil forms is available. It does seem clear that there were several kinds of flamingoes in Australia during the Pliocene and Quaternary (Rich and van Tets 1982) and, as happened in North America, increased aridity accompanied by the disappearance of reasonably permanent shallow lakes, and of feeding and breeding grounds, resulted during the Quaternary in major extinctions. In North America flamingoes survived in the Caribbean Basin, whereas the antipodean flamingoes left no survivors, even though Australia had hosted during the last 3-4 million years one of the most, if not the most, diverse flamingo faunas. Better dating of the sites containing flamingoes in Australia could provide significant data for timing of extinctions and reconstruction of changing palaeoenvironments. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS We are indebted to our families who were patient with us as we worked on this and related papers. We are grateful to the curators of the collections that provided the material that is compared in this study: Alan Bartholomai (QM), Walter Boles (AM), W.A. Clemens (UCMP), Pippa Haarhoff (SAfM), Brett Hendy (SAfM), Ned Johnson (UCMVZ), Wayne Longmore (AM & QM), Shane Parker (SAM), Neville Pledge (SAM) and Mary Wade (QM). Frank Knight drew the map and figures. Thanks are due to the Australian Museum, Australian Research Grants Committee, the Danks Trust, the Ingram Trust, the Monash University Special Research Fund, the National Geographic Society, the National Science Foundation (BMS 7200102), and Utah Mining for grants in support of various aspects of this and related studies. John Calaby and Richard Tedford provided many helpful comments on the manuscript and Neville Pledge helped in manuscript editing. LITERATURE CITED Buake, E.R., 1977. ‘Manual of Neotropical Birds’. Vol. 1. (Univ. of Chicago Press: Chicago). 674 pp. Bow er, J.M., 1982. Aridity in the late Tertiary and Quaternary of Australia. /n: ‘Evolution of the Flora and Fauna of Arid Australia’. (Eds Barker, W.R. and Greenslade, P.J.M.). pp. 35-45. (Peacock Publ., Frewville: South Australia). Bropxors, P., 1967. Catalogue of fossil birds Part 3. Bull. Florida State Mus. 11(3): 99-220. Bropxkors, P., and MouRER-CHAUVIRE, C. (in press). The fossil flamingoes of Early Man sites of Olduvai Gorge (Tanzania). Ostrich. Brown, L.H., URBAN, E.K. and Newman, K., 1982. ‘The Birds of Africa’. Vol. 1. (Academic Press: London) 521 pp. ConbOon, H.T., 1975. ‘Checklist of the Birds of Australia. Pt. 1. Non-passerines’. (Roy. Australasian Ornith. Union: Melbourne) 311 pp. Cramp, S. (Ed.), 1977. ‘Handbook of the Birds of Europe the Middle East and North Africa’. Vol. 1. (Oxford Univ. Press: Oxford). 722 pp. DE Vis, C.W., 1905. A contribution to the extinct avifauna of Australia, Ann. Od Mus. 6: 3-25. FISCHER, K., 1983. Mdé6wenreste (Laridae, Charadriiformes, Aves) aus dem Mitteloligozanen phosphoritknollenhorizont des Weisselsterbeckens bei Leipzig (DDR). Mitt. zool. Mus. Berlin, Bd. 59 Suppl.: Ann. Orn, 7:151-5. Grecory, J.W., 1906. ‘The Dead Heart of Australia’. (John Murray: London) 384 pp. Howarp, H., 1955. Fossil birds from Manix Lake, California. Geol. Surv. Prof. Pap. 264-3: 199-205. LAMBRECHT, K., 1933, ‘Handbuch der Palaeornithologie’. (Gebriider Borntraeger: Berlin) 1024 pp. Miter, A.H., 1963. The fossil flamingoes of Australia. Condor. 65(4): 289-99, MILLER, L.H., 1944. A Pliocene flamingo from Mexico. Wilson Bull. 56(2): 77-82. Rich, P.V., and VAN TETS, G.F., 1982. Fossil birds of Australia and New Guinea: Their biogeographic, phylogenetic, and biostratigraphic input. Jn: ‘The Fossil Vertebrate Record of Australasia’. (Eds Rich, P.V. and Thompson, E.M.). pp. 235-384, (Monash Univ. Offset Printing Unit: Clayton). Ricu, P.V. and WALKER, C.A., 1983. A new genus of Miocene flamingo from East Africa. Ostrich, 54: 95-104. Rich, T.H., ARCHER, M., PLANE, M., FLANNERY, T., PLepGe, N,, HAND, S., and RicH, P., 1982. Australian Tertiary mammal localities. /n: ‘The Fossil Vertebrate Record of Australasia’. (Eds Rich, P.V. and Thompson, E.M.). pp. 525-72. (Monash Univ. Offset Printing Unit: Clayton), FOSSIL FLAMINGOES 225 SALVADORI, T., 1895. Catalogue of birds in the British | STIRTON, R.A., TEDFORD, R.H., and WOODBURNE, Museum (Natural History) 27: 8. M.O., 1968. Australian Tertiary deposits containing SHUFELDT, R.W., 1892. A study of the fossil avifauna terrestrial mammals. Univ. Calif. Pub. Geol. Sci. of the Equus beds of the Oregon Desert. Journ. 77: 1-30. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 9: 410-411. MEMOIRS OF THE (QUEENSLAND MUSEUM BRISBANE © Queensland Museum PO Box 3300, South Brisbane 4101, Australia Phone 06 7 3840 7555 Fax 06 7 3846 1226 Email qmlib@qm.qld.gov.au Website www.qm.qld.gov.au National Library of Australia card number ISSN 0079-8835 NOTE Papers published in this volume and in all previous volumes of the Afemoirs of the Queensland Museum maybe teproduced for scientific research, individual study or other educational purposes. Properly acknowledged quotations may be made but queries regarding the republication of any papers should be addressed to the Editor in Chief. Copies of the journal can be purchased from the Queensland Museum Shop. A Guide to Authors is displayed at the Queensland Museum web site A Queensland Government Project Typeset at the Queensland Museum Mem, Od Mus, 25(1): 227—231.[1987] A NEW SPECIES AND NEW RECORDS OF PORTUNUS (DECAPODA : PORTUNIDAE) FROM NORTHERN AUSTRALIA P.J.F. DAVIE Queensland Museum ABSTRACT Portunus rufiarcus is described as new. It differs from its closest relatives, P. pubescens and P, convexus, by its characteristic colouring, 4 continuous mesogastric ridge, and a distinctive first male pleopod, P. pulchricristatus and P. tuberculosus are recorded from Australia for the first time. INTRODUCTION Extensive shallow water trawling by the Queensland Fisheries Service (Q.F.S.) has been conducted in recent years. Amongst a variety of interesting material that has come to the Museum are three species of Portunus, Measurements given are of carapace widths including the last anterolateral spine. Synonomies cover the most important references but are not necessarily complete. Portunus pulehricristatus (Gordon, 1931) (Fig. 1) Neptunus (Hellenus) spinipes Alcock, 1899: 31, 39. non Neptunus (Amphitrite) spinipes Miers, 1886 Neptunus (Hellenus) pulchricristatus Gordon, 1931: 534, figs 8, 10a. Portunus pulchricristatus: Stephenson and Rees, 1967: 35. Stephenson, 1972a (record only), Stephenson 1972b (check-listing). MATERIAL EXAMINED QM W9913, 1 © (23.3 mm), trawled off N, Queensland, 15°46.6'S, 145°42.1°E, 10.9.1979, 48.6 m, Q.F.S. QM W9916, L * (25.5 mm), trawled off N. Qld, 16°O8’S, 145°37°E, 11.9.1979, 43.2 m, Q.F.S, QM W9919, 1 * (29,3 mm), trawled off N. Qld, 17°09.8'S, 146°23.5°E, 10.10.1979, 50.4 m, Q.F.S, REMARKS The specimens generally agree with the description of Gordon (1931), although length breadth ratios are slightly smaller (1.93 — 2.06 compared with 2.3 — 2.6), Nevertheless the last anterolateral spines are prominent, a feature which helps distinguish this species from P. spinipes, The other anterolateral teeth are slightly more defined than was figured by Gordon (1931) but they are not acute as in P. spinipes. Both of the above discrepancies could be accounted for by the slightly smaller size of the present specimens. The first male pleopod agrees closely with the figures of both Gordon (1931) and Stephenson and Rees (1967, fig. 7). DISTRIBUTION Muscat; Madras; Andamans; Gulf of Martaban and Arakan Coast, Burma; Malaysian area; Philippines and China (Stephenson 1972b). Now from north Queensland, Australia. Portunus tuberculosus (A. Milne Edwards, 1861) Neptunus tuberculasus A. Milne Edwards, 1861: 333-4, pl. 31 (fig. 5). Neptunus (Amphitrite) tuberculosus; Miers, 1886: 176, Neptunus (Hellenus) tberculosus: Alcock, 1899: 42-3. Portunus tuberculosus: Stephenson and Campbell, 1959, p. 89 (in key). Crosnier, 1962; 69-71, figs 97-8, 124- 7, Stephenson and Rees, 1967: 52, fig. 18, pl. 6B, Heath, 1971. Stephenson 1972a (record only), Stephenson 1972b (checklist). MATERIAL EXAMINED QM W12869, | / (24,3 mm), trawled ‘Red Spot Bycatch’ Stn 2, E. of Hinchinbrook Is,, 18°26°S, 146°25,4'E, 17,7,1985, Q.F.S. OM W9917, I 2 (23.1 mm), trawled north Queensland, 17°08.7'S, 146°15.2°E, 43.2 m, 17.10.1979, Q.F.S. QM W2098, 1 © (29.8:mm), Arnhem Bay, N.T., 10 fms, sand and mud bottom, V. Wells. REMARKS Agrees in all details with description given by Stephenson and Rees (1967). DISTRIBUTION Tanzania; Madagascar, Persian Gulf; Ceylon; China; Philippines; Palau Is. and Hawaii (Stephenson 1972b), Now from northern Australia. 227 28 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Fic. 1: Portunus pulchricristatus (Gordon, 1931). Scale = Portunus rufiarcus sp. nov. (Figs 2a-d, 3) MATERIAL EXAMINED HovotyPe: | 7 QM W12625 (27.1 mm), Bathurst Bay, FNQ. Beam-trawled, | m, over seagrass beds, C. Jones (Q.F.S.). DESCRIPTION Front: Four flat rounded lobes, equally protruberant and projecting well ahead of inner angles of orbit. Laterals only slightly broader at base than medians. Anterolateral teeth: First, large triangular and blunt, projecting straight forward; the second to eighth of similar shape although gradually diminishing in size; the ninth about the same length as the first but sharply pointed and projecting forward. Carapace: Moderately broad (breadth 1.58 times length), the anterolateral teeth form a curve whose centre lies at about the level of the cardiac groove. Postero-lateral angles rounded. Surface distinctly finely granulated particularly anterior to the epibranchial and mesogastric grooves, 5mm. becoming microscopic to almost smooth towards the posterior margin. Some sparse, small hairs across the anterior half, slightly longer on the borders of the anterolateral teeth. Paired branchial and metagastric ridges, but a continuous straight mesogastric ridge. Chelipeds: Robust, pubescent, microscopically granulated, Posterodistal border of arm smooth; anterior border with three spines, the proximal spine the smallest, the median and distal spines subequal in length. Carpus with two carinae on outer face, the inferior one ending in a spine, the superior one blunt; and a carina on upper surface which also ends bluntly. Inside upper distal edge near hand articulation, with usual long spine. Outer upper distal edge without spine but carina bluntly pointed. Hand with three conspicuous carinae dorsally, the inner two ending in spines. Strong forwardly directed spine at point of upper articulation with carpus. Outer and inner faces both with median carinae ending bluntly. Dactyl with three carinae; fingers serrated; proximal tooth of right dactyl ‘molar-like’ and directed backwards. PORTUNUS FROM NORTHERN AUSTRALIA 229 a b nf Imm c [ Fic. 2: Portunus rufiarcus sp. nov.: a — carapace; b — third maxilliped; c — male abdomen; d — left first male pleopod, whole view, and enlargement of sternal face of tip. Fifth leg: Posterior surface with fine fringing hairs, no spines or spinules. Dactyl ends in small spine. Third Maxilliped: Anteroexternal angle of merus not produced laterally but is square cut (Fig. 2b). Male Abdomen: Gradually tapering, ultimate segment 1.7 times as long as broad at base, and only slightly shorter than length of penultimate (Fig. 2c). First Male Pleopod: Long and thin, central section straight; recurved towards apex; gradually tapering to a slightly truncated tip. Abdominal surface of tip smooth, sternal face with sparse short bristles (Fig. 2d). Colour: After approximately 6 months in alcohol the crab is generally a creamy yellow with a uniform narrow arc of orange/red finishing at about the level of the penultimate anterolateral teeth. Two patches of the same colour but paler on either side of the mid-line, centred over the mesogastric ridge. Fresh specimens have a much deeper red arc than preserved specimens. Behind this the colour is a rich red-brown becoming more orange until the epibranchial ridges. Behind these the carapace is yellow except for where the anterior colour extends back centrally for a short distance. The ambulatory legs are yellow, matching the posterior carapace colour. The chelipeds are a similar red to that behind the dark anterior arc. REMARKS Portunus rufiarcus is clearly most closely related to P. pubescens and P. convexus however both of 230 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM these have the mesogastric ridge broken. It differs from P. convexus in other respects by: the shorter last anterolateral spines; the different shape of the frontal teeth (c.f. Fig. 60 in Crosnier, 1962); the merus of the third maxilliped having the anteroexternal angle more squarely cut (c.f. Fig. 69 in Crosnier, 1962); and in missing the characteristic posterolateral brown spots of that species. It resembles P. convexus particularly in the sinuous form of the first male pleopod, and in this respect both species differ from P. pubescens which has a smoothly curved male pelopod. It also differs from P. pubescens in the shape of the frontal teeth. ETYMOLOGY The species’ name alludes to the distinctive colouring, and is from the latin words rufus meaning red, and arcus meaning an arc or bow. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I thank Messrs Clive Jones and Kurt Derbyshire of Queensland Fisheries Service (Northern Branch) Fic. 3. Portunus rufiarcus sp. nov. Scale = 5mm. for sending study material and a colour slide of the fresh specimen of P. rufiarcus. Mr John Short assisted in initial sorting and in reading the first draft. Gary Cranitch and John Short took the photographs. Mrs Woodgate typed _ the manuscript. LITERATURE CITED ALcock, A., 1899. Materials for a carcinological fauna of India, No. 4: The Brachyura Cyclometopa. Pt. 2. A revision of the Cyclometopa with an account of the families Portunidae, Cancridae, and Corystidae. J. Asiat. Soc. Bengal. 68(2): 1-104. CROSNIER, A., 1962. Crustacés Décapodes Portunidae. Faune de Madagascar 16: 1-154, 13 pls. Gorpon, I., 1931. Brachyura from the coasts of China. J. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) 37: 525-58. HEATH, J.R., 1971. Crabs of Dar es Salaam: Part 1, Family Portunidae. Tanzania Notes and Records 72: 1-17. Miers, E.J., 1886. The Brachyura collected by H.M.S. Challenger. Report of the scientific results of the voyage of H.M.S. Challenger 17(2): i-l1, 1-362, 29 pls. ow PORTUNUS FROM NORTHERN AUSTRALIA 231 MILNE-Epwarpbs, A., 1861. Etudes zoologiques sur les : Portunidae). Bull. R. Soc. N.Z. 10: 1-64. crustacés récents de la famille de Portuniens. Arch. STEPHENSON, W. and CAMPBELL, B., 1959. The Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris 10: 309-421, pls 28-38. Australian portunids (Crustacea : Portunidae), 3: STEPHENSON, W., 1972a. Portunid crabs from the Indo- The genus Portunus. Aust. J. mar Freshwat. Res. West Pacific and Western America in the Zoological 11(1): 73-122, 5 pls. Museum, Copenhagen (Decapoda, Brachyura, STEPHENSON, W. and REES, May, 1967. Some portunid Portunidae). Steenstrupia 2(9): 127-56, 8 figs. crabs from the Pacific and Indian Oceans in the 1972b. An annotated check list and key to the Indo- collections of the Smithsonian Institution. Proc. West Pacific swimming crabs (Crustacea : Decapoda U.S. Nat. Mus. 120(3556): 1-114, 9 pls. MEMOIRS OF THE (QUEENSLAND MUSEUM BRISBANE © Queensland Museum PO Box 3300, South Brisbane 4101, Australia Phone 06 7 3840 7555 Fax 06 7 3846 1226 Email qmlib@qm.qld.gov.au Website www.qm.qld.gov.au National Library of Australia card number ISSN 0079-8835 NOTE Papers published in this volume and in all previous volumes of the Afemoirs of the Queensland Museum maybe teproduced for scientific research, individual study or other educational purposes. Properly acknowledged quotations may be made but queries regarding the republication of any papers should be addressed to the Editor in Chief. Copies of the journal can be purchased from the Queensland Museum Shop. A Guide to Authors is displayed at the Queensland Museum web site A Queensland Government Project Typeset at the Queensland Museum Mem, Qd Mus. 25(1): 233—237.[1987] A NEW BARRED RIVER FROG (MYOBATRACHIDAE: MIXOPH YES) C.J. CORBEN Queensland Department of Forestry, 80 Meiers Road, Indooroopilly, Q, 4068, and G.J. INGRAM Queensland Museum, P.O. Box 300, South Brisbane, Q, 4101, ABSTRACT Mixaphyes fleayi sp. nov. has been confused with both M. balbus and M. fascialatus, but il is readily separable from these species and the other two members of the genus. The new species is a ground-dweller in montane rainforest from Conondale Range, SE Queensland, to Richmond Range, NE New South Wales. Discovery of M. fleayi triggered new examination of the types of Mixophyes taxa about which there has been serious confusion. The status of Hy/a fenesirata de Vis is confirmed as a jumor synonym of M, fasciolaius, and probable lypes of M. ba/bus have been located in the Queensland Museum. Also, a lectotype is selected for MM. fasetolarus Giinther, 1864. INTRODUCTION Straughan (1968) recognised four species of Barred River Frogs, Mixophyes spp., from Australia: M. balbus, M. fasciolatus, M. ireratus and M. schevilli. In October 1972, we located a population of Mixophyes in Cunninghams Gap, SE Queensland. These specimens clearly differed from M. fasciolatus and M. ifteratus, the only species of Mixophyes known from there, The frogs keyed to M. fasciolatus (following Straughan, /oc. cit.) but we listed them as M. ba/bus (Ingram and Corben 1975), the species they most closely resembled. When we later collected live M. ba/bus (sensu. stricto), we realized that our population belonged to a new species. We have examined the holotypes of Mixophyes halbus Straughan and M. iteratus Straughan, a paratype of M. fasciolatus schevilli Loveridge, and a syntype of M. Jasciolaius Giinther. The species we describe here is distinct from all of the known species of Mixophyes. The following abbreviations are used: SV, snout-vent length; TL, tibial length; HW, width of head at broadest part; IN, distance between the two external nostrils; EN, distance between the external nostril and anterior border of eye; ED, diameter of eye between anterior and posterior borders. Measurements are in millimetres and ratios are expressed as percentages. Specimens examined are housed in the Queensland Museum (QM), South Australian Museum (SAM), Australian Museum (AM), and the British Museum (Natural History) (BMNH). ta Mixophyes fleayi sp. nov, MATERIAL EXAMINED HoLotyre: Adult female, QM J 26901 Ballanjui Cascades, Lamington National Park, (28°12'S, 153°05'E), SE Queensland. Collected by M. Bishop, 4 April 1976. ParAtypes: Cunninghams Gap, SEQ (J29930-1, 34101-3, 35461-5); Tambourine Mountain, SEQ (332059); Canungra Gorge National Park, SEQ (15198): near summit of Mt Superbus, near Warwick, SEQ (J30545-8); Mt Ballow, SEQ (J26469-70); Taroom Range, NE NSW (J34243-4, AM R123424); Brindle Creek, Wiangaree, NE NSW (127859); No locality data (SAM R31036), DIAGNOSIS M. fleayi (Fig, 1) can be distinguished from M/Z. schevilli and M. iteratus by the amount of webbing on the toes (half-webbed vs fully webbed); from M. balbus by the colour pattern on the flanks (promment black spotting on yellow vs immaculate apricot). Further, M. fleayi lacks a distinct, continuous, pale stripe along the upper lip, which is so characteristic of aduli M, Jasciolatus (Fig, 2). Descriprion OF HOLOTYPE SV 89, TL 55, TL/SV 62.1, HW 36, HW/SYV 40.4, HW/TL 65,1, ED 9,5, ED/HW 26,4, EN 7.0, IN 7.8, EN/IN 89.7. Dorsal aspect of snout blunt, but tapering; in profile, straight, steep, and forward sloping. Short supratympanic fold extending downwards to just past tympanum. Canthus rostralis distinct, concave. Tympanum large and oval-shaped, sloping backwards. Fingers a3 234 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM unwebbed, slightly expanded distally. Length of fingers from shortest to longest 1-2-4-3; large rounded tubercles proximally; large oval-shaped inner palmar tubercle about twice the size of the more elongated outer tubercle. Toes webbed; distal phalanges of the Ist, 2nd, and Sth toes free of web but fringed; distal two phalanges of the third, and distal three phalanges of fourth also have this condition. Length of toes fram shortest to longest L-2-3-5-4; low rounded tubercles proximally, with additional, smaller tubercles more distal on the 3rd, 4th and Sth toes; a large elongated inner metatarsal tubercle. Cloacal opening directed backwards at mid-level of the thighs, Dorsal ground colour light brown with indistinct marbling; there is also a ‘Y’ shaped dark brown patch edged black, with the ‘base’ between the eyes, and ‘arms® terminating above the groin. Lateral ground colour grey-brown grading to cream towards the venter; sides overlaid with large black spots. A dark line extends from behind the nares through the eye to behind the tympanum; a large purplish-black marking below the eye, broadening down to the upper lip; a large similarly coloured marking peaks below and in front of the nares, Flares out aod terminates on the upper lip. Creamy yellow below; palms and soles black; tips of the fingers and tubercles on the hands creamy yellow, Back of thighs grey-brown with 7-8 black cross-bands. VARIATION IN THE PARATYPES There are 23 paratypes, SV 24-82 (mean 64.7), TL 15-52 (mean 42.4), TL/SV 61-69 (mean 65.4); HW 11-34 (mean 27.7), HW/SV 39-47 (mean 43.0), HW/TL 59-72 (mean 6§.8), ED 4-10 (mean 7.8), ED/HW 25-33 (mean 28,3), EN 2-7 (mean 5.9), IN 3-8 (mean 6.8), EN/IN 72-98 (mean 85.9), Pupil vertically oriented. Vocal sacs present in males, Dorsal ground-colouring can be dark brown; the dorsal *Y' marking often is incomplete. Nuptial pads of males are dark brown; the thumb is thicker at base when compared to the female. Fic. |: Mixophves fleayi sp. nov. From Cunninghams Gap, SE Queensland (Owen Kelly) A NEW BARRED RIVER FROG 23 The throat and the underside of the thighs may be speckled with brown. ETYMOLOGY The species is named for the Australian naturalist, David Fleay. DISTRIBUTION M. fleayi is restricted to montane rainforests from the Conondale Range, SE Queensland (Ingram 1983), to the Richmond Range, NE New South Wales. M. fleayi has been found in sympatry with both M. fasciolatus and M. iteratus. It is allopatric with M, balbus — the dividing line is apparently the Clarence River, which separates the Richmond Range from the Gibralter Range. The Gibralter Range is the northernmost locality known for M. balbus (C. Corben pers. ob.). FifLp Notes M. fleayi has two distinct calls. One of these is a throaty ‘ok-ok-ok-ok-ok-ok’, typically given by solitary males calling from under leaf-litter on the wa rainforest floor. The other is a long, rasping ‘arrrmrir’, or growling call, given in chorus. Choruses are produced by males calling from exposed rocks in stream beds or from the edges of pools beside the streams. Eggs have been found under a rock about 30 cm from water and attended by an adult frog. The egg mass resembled that of Pseudophryne, but the capsules were much larger, Tadpoles resemble those of M. fasciolatus but are darker grey and more elongate, Breeding aggregations are rarely encountered but seem to be associated with late spring thunderstorms on warm nights. More often, individuals are seen hiding under leaf-litter or sitting on paths through the rainforest. At O’Reillys, Lamington Plateau, they may be found with M. fasciolatus on the short grass of the picnic grounds but they do not range far from the rainforest. IDENTIFICATION The toes are only partly webbed like those of M, balbus and M. fasciolatus, this distinguishes 2 26 M, fleayi trom M schevilli and M_ iterates, both of which have fully webbed toes, Af. /leayi is not Known to be sympatric with AV, balbus, but it is easily distinguished by the presence of black spots on yellow flanks (vs unspotted on apricot in M, albus) and its brighter yellow ventral surface (vs off-white in M. balbus). In addition, M. fleays is a more slender, longer-legged species than M. balbus, and more closely resembles M- fasciolatus in general body form. The most likely confusion is between M. fleayiand M_ fasciolatus, which are widely sympatric, The underparts of MW. fleayi are yellow (white in M, fasciolatus), the pale stripe along the upper lip is interrupted, or non-existent, below the eye (continuous in adult M. fasciolaltuy but may be interrupted in juveniles) and the upper half of the iris is silvery white or even pale blue (black with minute traces of gold in adult M- Jasciolatus but in juvenile upper half of iris is red). With practice the two are readily separated both by posture and colour. When undisturbed, Mt. Jleayi tends to hold the body in a more vertical posture with the longer legs held further away from the more slender body and head than M. Sfasetolatus. The calls most closely resemble those of M. balbus and are very different from the deep, throaty *groap’ of M. /teratas and the short ‘wark’" of M. fascielatus and M. schevilli, The *ok-ok-ok- ok’ call resembles in quality the equivalent call of M, balbus, but ditfers in its shorter duration and much slower note repetition cate (cf. Barker and Grigg 1977). NOMENCLATURE We have examined the holotypes of Mf. balbus Straughan (1968) and M. ireratts Straughan (1968) : AM R25922 and 25929 respectively, Neither is conspecific with M, fleayi, Straughan (foc, cif.) did not examine any type material of M. fascialatus sehevilli Loveridge (1933) or M. fasciolatus Giinther (1864), We have examined a paratype of the former (QM J5443), which agrees in details with the holotype. It is a member of Straughan’s taxon, M_ schevilli- The British Museum (Natural History) lent us one (BMNH 1947,2.19.89) of the two syntypes of M. fasctolatus Giinther, The specimen is typical of the taxon we call M. fasciolatus, The lips are pale and no dark markings intrude; the hindlimbs are short (TL/SV = 33.5, HWy'TL = 84.7). We select {his specimen to be the lectotype of Mixophyes fasciolatus Giather (1864). There is one other available name within the genus Mixophtes: Hyla fenestrata de Vis (I885i), MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSKUM Boulenger (1885) noted that it was a Mixophyes and was scathingly critical of de Vis for his inability to tell the difference between the genera, The type material of Ava fenestrata is presumably lost (Covacevich 1971). In the Queensland Museum, where de Vis worked, there are four old Specimens (J10418-22) of M. fasciolatus trom Tweed River — the type locality of H. ferestrara, These apparently are not types because none fits the measurements given in the type description, Further, de Vis (1885a,b) did not indicate if he had more than one example of the taxon, For these reasons, and because no date of collection has been recorded for the extant Tweed River specimens, there is no way of knowing whether or not they were seen by de Vis. Straughan (1968), in his revision of Mixuphyes, fwiled to deal with the problem of the availability of the name, AY. fenestrata. Cogger ei al, (1983) treated the name as a junior subjective synonym of M, fasefolatus. Their reasons for this action were not stated but we agree with the decision. De Vie's description of the characteristics of H. fenesirata matches the characteristics of M, Jasefolatus. He said ‘toes less than two thirds webbed’, that ‘lips pale minutely marbled with black’, and that ‘flanks white, spotted with black” (in preservative, the yellow would have bleached). Also, these characteristics together are not present in. M. helhus, M. iterutus, M. schevelli, ot our new Species (see the foregoing section on identification). There has been further confusion about some of the type material of Mixophyes. Covacevich (1971) noted problems with the type material of M, balbus and M. tteratus supposedly lodged in the Queensland Museum by Dr Jan Straughan. According to Straughan (1968), there were two paratypes of M. Merarus lodged in the Queensland Museum, Covacevich found two specimens of M. jreratis in Straughan’s collection, bur one — QM J18851 from Lynch's. Creek, Kyogle — did not agree with the given locality of ‘Tweed River, Mount Warning’, The other (now registered as QM J45796) had no accompanying data. Straughan (/oc. cit.) also said there were thirteen paratypes of Mf. balbus in the Australian and Queensland Museums. There are six in the Australian Museum {Cogger, 1979). Logically, there should be seven paratypes in the Queensland Museum. Covacevich (/or. eft.) found ten unregistered specimens in a jar labelled *New England sp, nov, Mf. balbus’, These specimens are now registered as J45785-45794. We have examined them and found that three (145785-7) A NEW BARRED RIVER FROG 237 are M. fasciolatus and the other seven (J45788- 94) are M. balbus. These seven specimens may be the missing seven paratypes and have been labelled ‘probable types’ in the collection. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS We thank Dr H. Cogger for giving us access to types in the collection of the Australian Museum and Mr A.F. Stimson for a loan from the British Museum (Natural History). Ms Jeanette Covacevich, Queensland Museum, read the manuscript. LITERATURE CITED BARKER, J. and GricG, G, 1977. ‘A field guide to Australian frogs’. (Rigby: Adelaide). BouLeNncer, G.A. 1885, Remarks on Mr. C.W. De Vis’ recent contributions to the herpetology of Australia. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5)16: 386-7. Coccer, H.G. 1979. Type specimens of reptiles and amphibians in the Australian Museum. Rec. Aust, Mus. 32: 164-210. CocGER, H.G., CAMERON, E.E. and CoGcer, H.M. 1983. ‘Zoological Catalogue of Australia’. V.1. Amphibia and Reptilia, (Australian Government Publishing Service: Canberra). CovacevicH, J. 1971, Amphibian and reptile type specimens in the Queensland Museum. Mem. Qd Mus. 16: 49-68. DE Vis, C.W. 1885a. On new species of Hyla, Proc. R. Soc. Qd 1; 128-130. 1885b. Report of the Curator to the Trustees of the Queensland Museum. pp 1-14. Jn Queensland Museum. (Report of Board of Trustees for the year 1884), Queensland Parliament Paper. 14 pp. (Acting Government Printer: Brisbane). GUNTHER, A. 1864. Third contribution to our knowledge of batrachians from Australia. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1864: 46-49, pl. 7. INGRAM, G.J. 1983. Natural History. /n Tyler, M.J. (Ed.) ‘The Gastric Brooding Frog’. (Croom Helm: Canberra). INGRAM, G.J, and CorBEN, C.J. 1975. A new species of Kyarranus (Anura Leptodactylidae) from Queensland, Australia. Mem. Qd Mus. 17: 335-9, pl. 42. LoverIDGE, A. 1933. Four new crinine frogs from Austrlia. Occ, Pap. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist, 8: 55- 60. STRAUGHAN, I.R. 1968. A taxonomic review of the genus Mixophyes (Anura : Leptodactylidae). Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S. W. 93: 52-9, pls 1 and 2 MEMOIRS OF THE (QUEENSLAND MUSEUM BRISBANE © Queensland Museum PO Box 3300, South Brisbane 4101, Australia Phone 06 7 3840 7555 Fax 06 7 3846 1226 Email qmlib@qm.qld.gov.au Website www.qm.qld.gov.au National Library of Australia card number ISSN 0079-8835 NOTE Papers published in this volume and in all previous volumes of the Afemoirs of the Queensland Museum maybe teproduced for scientific research, individual study or other educational purposes. Properly acknowledged quotations may be made but queries regarding the republication of any papers should be addressed to the Editor in Chief. Copies of the journal can be purchased from the Queensland Museum Shop. A Guide to Authors is displayed at the Queensland Museum web site A Queensland Government Project Typeset at the Queensland Museum Mem. Qd Mus. 25(1): 239—254.[1987] AVIAN TYPE SPECIMENS IN THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM GLEN J. INGRAM Queensland Museum ABSTRACT From 1862 to 1985, type specimens of 122 taxa were lodged in the collection of birds of the Queensland Museum. Most of the types were a result of the works of Charles Walter de Vis. Between 1880 and 1905, he described as new 107 forms of living birds. The majority of these were collected either in Queensland by Kendall Broadbent, or in British New Guinea at the behest of Sir William MacGregor. INTRODUCTION Ingram (1986c) has chronicled the bird collections of the Queensland Museum for the period 1862 to 1985. The history of the types, or name-bearing specimens, is very much a history of the works of Charles Walter de Vis (mé Devis). He was the Curator, and later the Director, of the museum from 1882 to 1905 (Mack 1956). During that period he described 104 species and subspecies of extant birds, as well as 46 species of fossil birds. The latter are not included in this paper. Before his appointment as Curator, de Vis had described two species and one subspecies of birds under his nom-de-plume, ‘Thickthorn’ (Ingram 1986b). There is no evidence that he brought the types of these taxa with him to the museum. With very few exceptions, de Vis’s new taxa of birds came from two sources: Kendall Broadbent, the zoological collector for the Queensland Museum from 1880 to 1893, and Sir William MacGregor, the Administrator, and later the Lieutenant Governor, of British New Guinea from 1888 to 1898. Most of the new taxa (85 in all) were described from the specimens collected at the behest of Sir William. MacGregor employed several collectors while he was in British New Guinea, but apparently from 1896 Signor A. Giulianetti was his sole collector (this can be discerned from Giulianetti’s handwriting on the labels of the specimens). British New Guinea, later Papua, is now part of Papua New Guinea (PNG). De Vis’s papers on New Guinean birds pose problems of priority. The results of his examination of MacGregor’s specimens were published in the ‘Annual Report on British New Guinea’ for the particular year. There are, however, many reprints and versions of these. The colonies of Queensland, Victoria, and New South 239 Wales, as well as Great Britain, all contributed to financing the colony of British New Guinea (Joyce 1971). Perforce, the ‘Annual Report’ by MacGregor was presented to each of the Parliaments (and sometimes both Houses) of each government. They were thus printed at different times. For purposes of priority of nomenclature, all the reports and their dates of publication had to be established, and that has been a difficult task. And there is a further complexity. De Vis did not regard parliamentary papers as publication. Several times during 1889, in the minutes of the board of trustees of the Queensland Museum, as well as in correspondence, he stressed that the ‘Annual Reports’ were not scientific publications and he emphasised the need to publish his results elsewhere. In this he was only occasionally successful. J am unsure whether I have found all the versions and reprints, but I am fairly certain I have located the earliest. In ‘Literature Cited’, these have been cross-referenced along with dates of publication. In the list that follows, the taxa are sequenced in alphabetical order of the specific or subspecific epithets. Those in bold lettering have all, or at least some, of the name-bearing specimens in the collection. If the name is in standard type-face, no name-bearing specimens have been located, either because they have been lost or were not lodged here. The data given is that on the labels of the specimens. If the data is in inverted commas, the information is taken from the paper where the type description occurs. If the data is in square brackets, the information has been added by me and is justified where necessary. Other data added is accompanied by the appropriate references. The original spelling of the names of the taxa has been kept. 240 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM In ‘Literature Cited’, all publications that contain descriptions of new taxa are accompanied by the exact date of publication where possible. [ have followed Colliver (1960) for the dates af publication for the Transactions of the Queensland Philosophical Society and the Proceedings af the Royal Saciety of Queensland: Fletcher (1896) for the early volumes of the Proceedings of the Linnaean Society of New South Wales; Ingram (1986a) for the Annals of the Queensland Museum; Mathews (1917) for the parts of Diggles’ Ornithology of Australia, and Whittell (1954) in a few difficult cases. But mostly the date of publication was available on the paper risell, Until 1911, the Queensland Museum had several nambering systems for retrieval of data. Numbers preceded by *D’, ‘P’, ‘BE’, °C’, and 'T* stood for ‘donor’, ‘purchase’, ‘exchange’, ‘collection’, and ‘transfer’ respectively. These numbers could be found in the corresponding registers. There was also a general register with numbers prefixed by ‘R*. Sometime in the 1880s, de Vis began a card index for birds as a separate system in which each specimen of a particular taxon received a unique letter (i.e., a, b, c,... aa, bb, cc, ete), In 1911, all these systems were superceded by the modern bird register, where each specimen received a unique number preceded by ‘O’. Contemporaneous with this system was the MacGregor register, which was used to register all kinds of material including ethnological items. These had a unique number preceded by °M’ or ‘MAC’. Many of MacGregor’s bird specimens had been registered there, and, unfortunately, not a few other birds of New Guinean or other origins, [t was not until the end of 1985 that all ornithological material was finally registered under the ‘O’ numbering system. In the following, 132 taxa are listed. Of these, there is evidence that the types for ten were never lodged in the museum, Of the remaining 122, no types could be located for 18 of the taxa. LIST OF THE TYPE SPECIMENS ulbicauda — Rhipidura ulbicauda de Vis, 1897, fhis, (7)3: 375, Holotype: 0.20717. De Vis had no exact locality data for this spirit specimen from Papua, PNG, Presented by Sir William MacGregor. The specimen has now been dried out from spint and placed in ihe skin collection. amabilis — Pli/onopus amabilis de Vis, |8s0. Queenslander, 7 August, p. 172. This was published under de Vis’s nom-de-plume of ‘Thickthorn’ (see Ingram 1986b). He had a male bird that was vollected in the Rockhampton district, CEQ. There is no evidence that the specimen was donated to the Queensland Museuin. animosa — Climacteris animosa de Vis, 1895. Abs. Proc. Linn. Sac. N.S.W., Sept. 25, put. Syntypes; Male ©,10289, Female, 0.10290, Male, ©.13237. Male, ©.13238. Female, 0.13239. Male, 0.14864. All from Charleville, SCQ, Noy. [1885]. Collected by K. Broadbent. The paper that was to describe this Species was withdrawn and appeared in title only (de Vis 1896). Mathews (1934), however, considered the publication of the abstract (de Vis 1895¢) to be an indication. There were originally ten specimens in the type series. Two males and two females (labelled ‘a’, *f", ‘i’ and ‘k’) are missing. North (1906), however, noted that.a female was sent in exchange to the Australian Museum. This specimen is now registered as AM 0.782 (N.W. Longmore pers..comm.). De Vis (1895c) did not give the year of collection but Broadbent was in Charleville in [885 (de Vis L885). armiti— Paecilodrvas arniti de Vis, 1894. Qd Parl. Pap., C.A, 93-1894: 101. Holotype: 0.19765 (formerly M,6866, T.51), Mt Maneaa, 5650 ft, PNG, April 1894. Collected by ‘W.E. Armit and R.E, Guise’. Presented by ‘Sir William MacGregor. atropygialis — Poephila atropygialis Digeles, 1876. Brisbane Courier, 5 Aug., p. 3. Holotype: This specimen has not been located. It was collected at Normanton, NWQ, by T.A. Gulliver, In an 1876 inventory of bird material held in the Queensland Museum, this specimen is listed. However, at that time, the birds (50 specimens) collected by Gulliver Were not held in the museum but were at Charles Coxen’s residence, along with various boxes of other skins (3 boxes in all). Jt seems that these specimens were incorporated into the museum's collection after Coxen's death (Gregory 1877). auricularis — Rhipidura auricularis de Vis, 1890. Viet. Parl. Pap., No. 21-(25)-3598; 59 Holotype: Female, 0.19746, Musgrave Range, 7000-9000 ft, PNG, Presented by Sir William MacGregor. AVIAN TYPE SPECIMENS 241 ballarae — Amytornis textilis ballarae Condon, 1969. Mem. Qd Mus., \5: 205. Holeatype: Female, 0.10692, six miles south of Mary Kathleen, near Ballara Copper Mine, NWQ, 17 Jul. 1966. Collected by *R.K. Carruthers’. Paratype: female, 0.11011, Sybella Creek, Mt Isa, NWQ, 27 Oct. 1966. Collected by R.K. Carruthers. belfordi — Melirrhaphetes belfordi de Vis, 1890. Viet. Parl. Pap., No. 21-(28)-3598: 60. Holotype: Immature female, 0.19801 (formerly M,6939), ‘Mt. Knutsford', PNG, Collected by ‘Mr. Belford’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor, bella — Charmosynopsis bella de Vis. 1901. Ann. Od Mus., 5, pl. 8. Syntypes: [Immature], 0.19531 (formerly M.6715, T_74). [Male]. O.19415 (formerly M.671L, T.74). [Male]. 0.19471 (formerly M.7168). [Female], 0.19470 (formerly M.6713, T.74). [Female], 0.19472 (formerly M.6712, 1.74). [Female], O,19473 (formerly M.6714, T.74). Collected at ‘Wharton Range?’, PNG. Presented by Sir William MacGregor, bivittata — Petroeca bivittata de Vis, 1897. This, (7)3: 376. Holotype: Female, 0.19800 (formerly M,7297), Mt Scratchley, 12200 ft, PNG, 5 Oct. 1896, Collected by ‘A, Giulianetti’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. brevicauda — Drymaedus brevicauda de Vis, 1894. Od Parl. Pup., C.A. 93-1894; 103. Holotype: 0.19840 (formerly M.6459, T.51), Mt Maneao, PNG, Collected by “‘W.E. Armit and R,E. Guise’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor, breviceps — Melithrepius breviceps de Vis, 1884. Proc. R, Soc. Gd, 1:159. This appears to be a slip of the pen for M, brevirostris, and that de Vis had no intention of introducing a new name for birds from New South Wales. M. breviceps is therefore a nomen nudum. brevirostris — Drvmaoedus brevirostris de Vis. 1897. This, (7)3: 386. Holotype: Female, 0.19753 (formerly M.7074, T.58), [Boirave], PNG, 9 Jul. 1896. Collected by ‘A. Giulianetti’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. De Vis gave no locality and none is on the original label. However, from de Vis’s (1898b) report, and from the labels on the specimens, it can be said that Giulianetti was collecting at Boirave at leas| from 7 to 24 July, 1896, brisbanensis — Cuculus brishanensis Diggles, 1876. Brisbane Courier, 5 Aug., p. 3. Although the Queensland Museum purchased ‘part’ of Digegles' collection in 1876, (here is no evidence that the holotype was amongst that collection, The specimen was collected at Norman's Creek, Brisbane, SEQ, in May 1876, by Diggles* son, brunnea — Gerygone brunnea de Vis, 1897. This, (7)3: 378, Holotype: Not located. De Vis described this taxon From a spirit specimen from Papua, PNG, Presented by Sir William MacGregor. candidior — Arses candidior Le Souet, 1897. This, (7)3: 397. Le Souef described the nest and eges of ‘Arses candidior De Vis. White-breasted Flycatcher’. De Vis, however, was not the author of this name. Ina letter to North (1903), de Vis wrote: ‘There is evidently some misconception about Arses candidior, arising doubtless from the presence of that name on the original cabinet label of A. Jorealis. Arses candidior seems to have been given by Mr. K. Broadbent to an enquirer asking him the name of the bird; hence the idea that | have named two species of the genus’. Mathews (1930) said A, candidior was a nude name, bui the name is valid. Le Souef must be regarded as the author of the name, and the eggs he described are the type specimens, These eggs. are not in the Queensland Museum collection, canescens — Merula canescens de Vis, 1894. Qd Parl. Pap., C.A. 93-1894: LOS. Syntypes: 0.19742 (formerly M.7301, 1.52). 0.19743 (formerly M,6501, 1.52), 0.19744 (formerly M,7114, T,52). All from Goodenough Island, PNG. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. caniceps — Poecilodryas eaniceps de Vis, 1897. bis, (7)3: 377. Holotype?: 0.20703. De Vis had no exact locality data for this specimen from Papua, PNG. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. De Vis gave no culmen measurement for this specimen which was in spirit. O.20703 fits all his measurements and has a damaged bill. I. however, was tied with another specimen (Q,20704) in spirit. These have been dried out and are now in the skin collection, 242 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM cantator — Pseudogerygone cantator Weatherill, 1908. Qd Nat., 1:74. Holotype: Male, 0.12396, ‘south-east Queensland’. Collected and presented by W.E. Weatherill. capensis — Sericornis magnirostris capensis Mathews, 1941. Emu, 40: 384. Holotype: Male, 0.4125, Rocky Scrub, Cape York, NEQ, 13 Jul. 1938. Collected by G. Neuhauser (‘Dr. G. Scott’). cardwelli — Aegintha temporalis cardwelli Mathews, 1942. J. R. Soc. W.A., 27: 78. Holotype: 0.15866 (formerly C.28), Cardwell, NEQ, Oct. 1888. Collected by K. Broadbent. cervinus — Acrocephalus cervinus de Vis, 1897. Ibis, (7)3: 386. Holotype: Female, O.19764 (formerly M.7076, T.58), [Boirave], PNG, 24 Jul. 1896. Collected by ‘A. Giulianetti’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. No locality was given but on 24 Jul. 1896, Giulianetti was at Boirave (see the entry for Drymaoedus brevirostris). chillagoensis — Aerodramus spodiopygius chillagoensis, Pecotich, 1982. Tower Karst Occasional Paper, 4: 56. Holotype: Female, 0.18951. Paratypes: 0.18948. Female, 0.18949, 0.18950. All specimens collected at Gordale Scar Pot Cave, Spring Tower, Chillagoe, NEQ, 29 Dec. 1981, by L. Wedgwood. citrypura — Pachycephala citrypura de Vis, 1880. Queenslander, July 31, p. 140. This name was published under de Vis’s nom-de-plume of ‘Thickthorn’. His description was taken from individuals of both sexes from. the Rockhampton district, CEQ. There is no evidence that de Vis brought these specimens with him to the Queensland Museum. colesi — Trichoglossus colesi Le Souef, 1910. Emu, 10: 204. Holotype: Male, 0.3604, Gladstone, MEQ, 8 Oct. (‘Nov.’) 1910. Collected by C. Coles. collaris — Melirrhophetes collaris, de Vis, 1894. Qd Parl. Pap., C.A. 93-1894: 103. Syntypes: Male, O.19806 (formerly M.7015, T.51), Mt Maneao, 2700 ft, PNG, 18 Mar. 1894. Male, 0.19807 (formerly M.7016, T.51), Mt Maneao, 5000 ft, PNG, 4 Apr. 1894. 0.19810 (formerly M.7019, T.51), Mt Maneao, 5000 ft, PNG, 4 Apr. 1894. Female, 0.19811 (formerly M.7020, T.51), Mt Maneao, 5000 ft, PNG, 4 Apr. 1894. All collected by ‘W.E. Armit and R.E. Guise’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. One specimen of unnoted sex from Mt Maneao, 5000 ft, is missing. concinna — Rhipidura concinna de Vis, 1892. Qd Parl. Pap., C.A. 1-1892: 94. Holotype: Male, 0.19778 (formerly M.7109), Mt Suckling, 5651 ft. (‘4350 ft’), PNG, 27 Jul. 1891. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. cuicui — Zosterops cuicui de Vis, 1897. Ibis, (7)3: 384. Syntypes: Male, O.19733 (formerly M.6861, T.58), 14 Jul. 1896 (‘9 Jul.’). Female, 0.19926 (formerly M.6862, T.58), 9 Jul. 1896 (‘16 Jul.’). Both collected at Boirave, PNG, by ‘A. Giulianetti’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. De Vis (1898b) used Zosterops kuikui for this taxon. This is also the name he wrote on the labels of the specimens. It is difficult to decide whether ‘kuikui’ is a justified emendation of ‘cuicui’. There can be little doubt that the former was de Vis’s preference. ‘KUIKUI’ was the native name of the bird as recorded by Giulianetti. In de Vis (1897b: 392), however, the editors of /bis said that the author had given them full authority to amend his manuscript. Presumably, they objected to the neo-latin letter ‘k’ and corrected it to ‘c’. cuneata — Geocichla cuneata de Vis, 1889. Proc. R. Soc. Qd, 6: 242. Lectotype: Male, O.14839. Paralectotype: female, 0.14840. Both collected at Herberton Scrubs (‘Herberton, 4500 ft’) by ‘K. Broadbent’. Lectotype selected by Ford (1983). 0.14839 is a male, not a female as stated by Ford. The second female from the original type series has not been located. devisi — Rhipidura devisi North, 1897. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 22:444. Holotype: Same as for Rhipidura albicauda de Vis. R. devisi is a replacement name for R. albicauda de Vis (1897b), which was preoccupied by the same name of North (1895). discolor — Colluricincla discolor de Vis, 1890. Vict. Parl. Pap., No. 21-(2S)-3598: 60. AVIAN TYPE SPECIMENS 243 Syntype: 0.2808, Sudest Island, PNG, 8 Oct. 1888. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. Two syntypes have not been located. 0.2808 is erroneously registered as having been purchased from Kendall Broadbent. The handwriting and data on the label are the same as for the other specimens from Sudest Island from that batch of MacGregor’s. The error has happened before. Two other specimens of MacGregor’s (O.255-6) were erroneously registered as Broadbent’s. divaga — Monarcha divaga de Vis, 1897. Ibis, (7)3: 374. Holotype: Female, 0.19796 (formerly M.6908, T.58), Boirave, PNG, 14 Jul. 1896. Collected by ‘A. Giulianetti’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. ferocyanea — Myiagra ferocyanea Ramsay, 1879, Nature, 20: 125. Syntype?: [Male], 0.20855, no data on label. N.W. Longmore (pers. comm.) notes that Ramsay sent a syntype (Australian Museum A.3834) to the Queensland Museum in 1883 as part of an exchange. The specimen (a male) was collected on Guadalcanar, Solomon Islands by Captain Brodie and J.F. Cockerell in Dec. 1878 (also see Ramsay, 1879b). An old mounted specimen, 0.20855, is most likely the syntype. W. Boles (pers. comm.) says the specimen is Myiagra ferrocyanea and is comparable to the other syntypes in the Australian Museum. Ramsay (1879b) emended the name to ferrocyanea. flavigaster — Acanthiza flavigaster Diggles, 1876. Brisbane Courier, 5 Aug., p. 3. Syntypes: These specimens have not been located. Three were collected at Normanton, NWQ, by T.A. Gulliver — the inventory of 1876 listed two skins and one duplicate (see the entry for Poephila atropygialis). Diggles also had another specimen that was collected at Norman’s Creek, Brisbane, SEQ, by his son. The fate of this specimen is also unknown. fretorum — Pachycephala fretorum de Vis, 1889. Proc. R. Soc. Qd., 6: 237. Syntype: Female, 0.14843, Kimberley, NWQ, Jul. 1884. Collected by K. Broadbent. Three syntypes were not located: a female collected at Cambridge Gulf, WA (the type status of this specimen has been questioned by Mees, 1964); and two males collected at Kimberley, NWQ. There is an old mount with no data in the collection (male, O.21567) that may be one of the missing types. fuliginosa — Oreospiza fuliginosa de Vis, 1897. Ibis, (7)3: 388. Syntypes: Female, 0.18963 (formerly M.6432), 20 Sep. 1896. Male, 0.18965 (formerly M.6434), 17 Sep. 1896. Female, 0.18968 (formerly M.6437), 28 Sep. 1896. Female ?, 0.19720 (formerly M.6429), 2 Oct. 1896. All collected at Mt Scratchley, 12200 ft, PNG, by ‘A. Giulianetti’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. fuliginosus — Circus fuliginosus Diggles, 1875. Brisbane Courier, 8 May, p. 7. There is no evidence that the type material was donated to the museum. Unlike the other Cockerell material that Diggles described, however, the holotype is not in the British Museum of Natural History (Warren, 1966; M. Walters, in /itt.). Diggles’s description was taken from a specimen collected at the Nudgee Waterholes, SEQ, on 25 Mar. 1871, by J.T. Cockerell. fusca — Acanthochoera fusca de Vis, 1897. Ibis, (7)3: 383. Syntypes: Female, 0.19754 (formerly M.6993), 2 Oct. 1896. Male, 0.19755 (formerly M.6989), 29 Sept. 1896. Female, 0.19756 (formerly M.6991), 3 Oct. 1896. Male, 0.19757 (formerly M.6990), 6 Oct. 1896. Male, 0.19759 (formerly M.6996), 28 Sep. 1896. Female, 0.19760 (formerly M.6994), 2 Oct. 1896. Male, 0.19761 (formerly M.6992), 25 Sep. 1896. All specimens were collected at Mt Scratchley, 12200 ft, PNG, by ‘A. Giulianetti’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. Three spirit specimens have not been located. goodenoviensis — Ninox goodenoviensis de Vis, 1890. Vict, Parl. Pap., No. 21-(2S8)-3598: 58. Syntypes: Male, 0.17193. Female, 0.19271. Both from Goodenough Island, PNG. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. griseiceps — Sittella griseiceps de Vis, 1894. Qd Parl. Pap., C.A. 93-1894; 102. Holotype: Male, 0.19775 (formerly M.7081, T.51), Mt Maneao, 5650 ft, PNG, Apr. 1894. Collected by ‘W.E. Armit and R.E. Guise’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. 244 griseoceps — Micraeca griseaceps de Vis, 1894. Od Parl, Pap., CA, 93-1894; 101. Holotype: Male, 0.19772 (formerly M.6904, T.51), Mt Maneao, 1400 ft, PNG, 17 Mar. 1894, Collected by ‘W.E. Armit and R.E. Guise’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor, guisei — Prilotis guisei de Vis, 1894. Qd Parl, Pap., C.A. 93-1894: 103. Syntypes: 0,19747 (formerly M.7021, T.51), Apr. 1894. Male, 0.19748 (formerly M.7004, T.51), 22 Apr. 1894. Female, 0.19749 (formerly M.7023, T.51), 23 Apr. 1894, Female, 0.19750 (formerly M.7022, T.51), 21 Apr. 1894 (°23 Apr,’). All collected at Mt Maneao, 5650 ft, by ‘W-E. Armit and R.E. Guise’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. gutturalis — Anthus gutturalis de Vis, 1894, Od Parl. Pap., C.A. 93-1894: 103. Syntypes: Male, 0.19727 (formerly T.51), 6000 ft. Female, 0.19728 (formerly M.6487, T.51), 6000 ft. Male, 0.19729 (formerly M,6488, T.51), 6000 ft. Male, 0.19730 (formerly M.6489, T.31), 6000 ft. Female, 0.19731 (formerly M.6486, T.51), 3650 It. All collected at Mt Maneao, PNG, Apr, 1894, by 'W,B. Armit and R.E, Guise’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. gutturalis — Sericornis gutturalis de Vis, 1889. Proc. R. Soc. Od, 6: 242. Syntypes: Female, 0.12131, Herberton (‘Herberton Serubs, 4500 ft’), NEQ, May 1889. Male, 0.12127 (formerly C.64), North Peak, Bellenden Ker, 5760 ft, NEQ, Jun. 1889 Both collected by K. Broadbent. halli — Pomatostomus halli Cowles, 1964, Emu, 64: 1. Holotype: Male, 0.9962, Tyrone Homestead, 3 miles E of Langlo Crossing, SCQ, 15 May 1963, Collected by P.R. Colston, Presented by the British Museum (Natural History). helenae — Parotia helence de Vis, 1897, Ibis, (7)3: 390. Syntypes: Male, 0.19684 (formerly M.6545), 3 Nov. 1896. Male, 0.19685 (formerly M.6546), 3 Noy. 1896. Male, 0. 19686 (formerly M.6547), 4 Nov. 1896. All collected at Neneba, Mt Scratechley, by ‘A. Giulianetti’. [Female], 0.20698. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. One male and one female are missing. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM hindwoudi — Meliphaga hindwoodi Longmore and Boles, 1983 Emu, 83; 59, Holotype: Male, 0.17574, Massey Creek, Clarke Range, MEQ, 7 Dec, 1894 Collected by the Mid-eastern Queensland Expedition 1978. Paratypes: female. 0.17530, 1 Dec, 1978. Male, 0.17543, 2 Dec. 1978. Female, 0.17544, 2 Dec, 1978. Male, 0.17545, 2 Dec. 1978. Male, 0.17548, 2 Dec. 1978. Male, 0.17550, 2 Dec, 1978, Male, 0,17551, 2 Dec. 1978. Female, 0.17562, 3 Dec. 1978, Male, 0.17547, 2 Dec. 1978. Female, 0.17580, 8 Dec. 1978, All collected at Massey Creek, 18 km NE Dalrymple Heights, MEQ, by the Mid-eastern Queensland Expedition 1978, The people of this expedition were N.W. Longmore, W.E. Boles, T.R. Lindsey, J.M. Shields, A. Lindsey, and G.J. Ingram. Five paralypes (O,17494, 17511, 17552, 17566-7) are now in the Australian Museum. humeralis — [bis (Fa/cinellus\ humeralis de Vis, 1898, Vict. Parl. Pap., No. 23-5027: 90. Holotype?: O,17863 (formerly M.7218), ‘Laloki River, PNG’, Presented by Sir William MacGregor. Although 0.17863 has no data, it is the only specimen in the MacGregor collection of a Glossy Ibis and it fits de Vis’s description. insignissimus — Aprosmicrus insignissimus Gould, 1874, Prac. Zool. Sac. Lond., 1874 : 500. Holotype: ©3437, near (‘a few miles north’) Dalby, SCQ. Presented by C. Coxen, This specimen can not be located. In the register there is a note that the specimen was on display in ‘Exhibition case’ and Chisholm (1922) said the mount could be seen on display. Nothing else is known of the specimen. Gould (1875, pl. 9) had an illustration of the holotype. insperata — Gerygone insperata de Vis, 1892. Qd Parl. Pap., C.A. 1-1892; 94. Holotype: 0.19777 (formerly M,7118), Mt Suckling, 6000- 7000 It, PNG, ‘Jul. 1891', Presented by Sir William MacGregor. intermedia — Climacteris leucophaea intermedia Boles and Longmore, 1983, Emu, 83: 272. Holotype: Male, O.18019 (formerly Australian Museum 0.53758), Timber Reserve 679, Clarke Range, MEQ, 6 May 1980. Collected by N.W. Longmore and W.E. Boles, Paratype: female, 0.17559, Massey AVIAN TYPE SPECIMENS 245 Creek, 18 km NE Dalrymple Heights, MEQ, 3 Dec. 1978. Collected by Mid-eastern Queensland Expedition 1978 (see Meliphaga hindwoodi), intermedia — Paradisea intermedia de Vis, 1894. Od Parl. Pap., C.A, 93-1894: 105. Syntypes: Male, 0.19460 (formerly M.6624, T.52). Male, 0.19462 (formerly M.6629, T.52). Both specimens collected at Coommassie (“Kumusi’) River, PNG, Apr. 1894 by *‘W.E, Armit and R.E. Guise’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. One male syntype has not been located, joanae — Ailuroedus melanotis joanae Mathews, 194]. Emu, 40: 384. Holotype: Male, 0.4124, Rocky Scrub, Cape York, NEQ, 23 Jun. 1938, Collected by G. Neuhauser (‘Dr. G. Scott’). katherina — Acanthiza katherina de Vis, 1905. Ann. Od Mus., 6: 43. Syntypes: Female, 0.12100, Male, 0.12101 (formerly C.64), Female, 0.12102. Male, 0.12103. All collected at Bellenden Ker, 4000 ft, NEQ, Jul. 1889 by K. Broadbent. keasti — Rhipidura fuliginosa keasti Ford, 1981, Emu, 81: 129. Holotype: Male, 0.17522, Massey Creek, [8km NE of Dalrymple Heights, MEQ, | Dee. 1978. Collected by the Mid-eastern Queensland Expedition 1978 (see Meliphaga hindwoodi). kowaldi — Todopsis. kowaldi de Vis, 1890. Vict. Parl. Pap., No. 21-(28)-3598: 59. Holotype: This male specimen from Papua. PNG, has not been located. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. De Vis (1894a) noted that the specimen was an adult and not a young bird as he had originally thought. lacrimans — Ptila/us lacrimans de Vis, 1897. Ibis, (7)3: 382. Syntypes: Female, O.19797 (formerly M.6834), 5 Oct. 1896, Female, 0.19798 (formerly M.6833), 16 Sep. 1896. Both collected at Mt Scratchley, 12200 ft, PNG, by ‘A, Giulianeiti’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor Jaeta — Alcyone laeta de Vis, 1894. Od. Parl. Pap,, C.A. 93-1894; 100, Syntypes: Q.19351 (formerly M.6362, T.51). 0.19352 (formerly M.6359, T.51). Both collected at Mt Maneao, PNG, by ‘W.E. Armit and R.E. Guise’. Presented by Sir Wilham MacGregor. laeta — Zasterops laela de Vis, 1897. Ibis, (7)3: 385. Syntypes: These two spirit specimens from Papua, PNG, have not been located. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. laetiseapa — Rhipidura laetiscapa de Vis, 1898. Vier. Par/, Pap., No. 23-5027; 83. Syntypes: Female, 0.19779 (formerly M.6836, T.68), Wharton Range, 11100 ft, Jul. 1897. Male, 0.19780 (formerly M.6837, T.68), Wharton Range, ‘11100 ft’, PNG, Jul. 1897. Both collected by ‘A. Giulianetti’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. leucypura — Gerygone albogularis leucypura de Vis, 1880. Queenslander, May 22, p. 650. This name was published under de Vis's nom-de-plume of ‘Thickthorn’, The name is based on observations, or specimens from Rockhampton, CEO. If there were specimens, there is no evidence they were donated to the Queensland Museum. longicauda — Graucalus longicauda de Vis, 1890, Vict. Parl. Pap., No. 21-(25)-3598: 59. Holotype?: [Male], 0.20437, ‘Musgrave Range, 7000-9000 ft’, PNG. De Vis's description of the holotype fits this specimen, which is labelled ‘Grauca/us longicauda de Vis’ in his hand, but with no other data. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. loralis — Poecilodryas loralis de Vis, 1897. Ibis, (7)3: 377. Syntypes: 0.20706, O,20707. De Vis had no exact locality data for these two spirit specimens from Papua, PNG. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. The specimens have been dried out and are now in the skin collection. lorealis — Arses /orealis de Vis, 1895. Abs. Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W'., Apr. 24, p.i. Syntypes: Male, 0.3697. Female, 0.3698. Both collected at Cape York, NEQ, ‘Mar. 1894’ by K. Broadbent. Mathews (1934) noted that the prepublished abstract (de Vis, 1895a) predated the intended description (de Vis: 18956). 246 lurida — Ninox boobook lurida de Vis, 1887. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. W., (2)1: 1135. Syntypes: ‘Male’ 0.14841, Maunga Creek, 8 miles from Cardwell, NEQ, 14 May 1886. ‘Male’, 0.14842, Herbert Gorge, NEQ, 11 May 1886. Both collected by K. Broadbent. De Vis (1889f) detailed ‘N. /urida n.s.’ This was not a new name, but an elevation of Ninox boobook var. lurida to the rank of species. macgregoria — Maria macgregoria Sclater and Saunders, 1897. Ibis, 7(3): 251. Syntypes: Same as for Macgregoria pulchra de Vis. This name was introduced into the literature by the editors of /bis in an editorial comment to de Vis’s (1897a) description of Macgregoria pulchra. macgregoriae — Amblyornis macgregoriae de Vis, 1890. Vict. Parl. Pap., No. 21-(2S)-3598: 60. Syntype: [Female], 0.19432, Musgrave Range, “7000-9000 ft’, PNG. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. Two females and two males from the original type series have not been located. macgregorii — Cnemophilus macgregorii de Vis, 1890. Vict. Parl. Pap., No. 21-(2S)-3598: 61. Holotype: Male, 0.19429, Mt Knutsford, ‘11000 ft’, PNG. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. maculata — Melipotes maculata de Vis, 1892. Qd Parl. Pap., C.A. 1-1892: 94. Holotype: Female, 0.19774 (formerly M.7151), Mt Suckling, ‘6000-7000 ft’, PNG, ‘Jul.’ 1891. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. maculiceps — Sarganura maculiceps de Vis, 1898. Vict. Parl. Pap., No. 23-5027: 87. Holotype: Male, 0.19841 (formerly M.6885, T.68), Wharton Range, PNG, Jul. 1897. Collected by [A. Giulianetii]. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. manayoensis — Rhipidura manayoensis de Vis, 1894, Qd Parl. Pap., C.A. 93-1894: 101. Holotype: O.19784 (formerly M.6846, T.51), Mt Maneao, PNG. Collected by ‘W.E. Armit and R.E. Guise’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM mariae — Cnemophilus mariae de Vis, 1894. Qd Parl. Pap., C.A. 93-1894: 104. Syntypes: Male, 0.19714 (formerly M.6662, T.51), 5650 ft. [Female], 0.19715 (formerly M.6661, T.51), *$000 ft’. [Female], 0.19716 (formerly M.6654, T.51), ‘5000 ft’. Male, O.19717 (formerly M.6658, T.51), ‘5000 ft’. Female, 0.19718 (formerly M.6660, T.51), ‘5000 ft’. Female, 0.19719 (formerly M.6655, T.51), 5000 ft. All collected at Mt Maneao, PNG, Apr. 1894 by ‘W.E. Armit and R.E. Guise’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. One female syntype has not been located. megilli — Acanthiza pusilla mcgilli Boles, 1983. Emu, 83: 55. Holotype: Male, O.18688, (formerly Australian Museum 0.53765), Massey Creek, Clarke Range, MEQ, (21°04’S, 148°35’E), 1 May 1980. Collected by Australian Museum party. Paratypes: male, 0.6222, Broken River, Eungella Range, MEQ, 7 Aug. 1958. Collected by S. Breeden. Male, 0.15956, Crediton, Clarke Range, MEQ, 18 Apr. 1975. Collected by D.P. Vernon. Female, 0.17529, Massey Creek, 18 km NE Dalrymple Heights, MEQ, | Dec. 1978. Collected by the Mid-eastern Queensland Expedition 1978. Female, 0.17561, Massey Creek, 18 km NE Dalrymple Heights, MEQ, 4 Dec. 1978. Collected by the Mid-eastern Queensland Expedition 1978. Female, 0.17572, Timber Reserve 679, Dalrymple Heights, MEQ, 7 Dec. 1978. Collected by the Mid-eastern Queensland Expedition 1978. Male, 0.17573, Timber Reserve 679, Dalrymple Heights, MEQ, 7 Dec. 1978. Collected by the Mid-eastern Queensland Expedition 1978 (see Meliphaga hindwoodi). Five paratypes (0.17569, 17571, 17570, and 18688) are now in the Australian Museum. According to Appendix D iii 21(a) of the 1985 edition of International Code of Zoological Nomenclature, mcgilli should be amended to macgilli. mestoni — Corymbicola mestoni de Vis, 1889. Queenslander, March 30, p. 600. Holotype: ‘Male’, 0.15313, Mt Bartle Frere (‘south peak of Bellenden-Ker, 5000 ft’), NEQ. Collected and presented by A. Meston. Meston (1889) gave the altitude as 4800 ft. Barnard, who was with Meston, said the height was a little over 3000 ft and that the date of collection was at the end of January, 1889 (Chaffer 1984). There is some doubt as to whether de Vis intended to publish this AVIAN TYPE SPECIMENS 74 description. Chisholm and Chaffer (1956), however, argued that this was his intention, mestoni — Pachycephala mestoni de Vis, 1905, Ann. Qd. Mus., 6: 44, Holotype: Feniale, 0.14849, spurs of Mt Sophia, Bellenden Ker, NEQ, Jui. 1889, Collected and presented by *A. Meston’, The label says the collector was Kendall Broadbent. This is an error. minor — Pelfops minor de Vis, 1894, Qd Parl. Pap., C.A. 93-1894; 100, Syntypes: 0.4355 and 0.19794. Both from New Guinea, 20 May 1888. De Vis had one other specimen from sea level at Mt Maneao, PNG, collected on 3 March and presenied by McGregor. No specimen with this data has been located. Burt amongst the specimens on which de Vis (1894a) based his paper is a specimen (0.19793) from Mt Maneao at 700 ft collected on 7 March 1894. His ‘specimen’ and O.19793 (formerly M.6818, T.51L) would have been received in the same lot (Transfer $1) from MacGregor. It is difficult to imagine that he would not have included it in the paper, for it is similar to O.19794 and 0.4355, Certainly the three specimens have ‘minor’ written on each label in his handwriting with ‘blainvillei’ crossed out. It is possible that 0.19793 was the specimen he had and that the data given in the paper is wrong. miranda — Dephoenositia miranda de Vis, 1897. [bis, (7)3: 380. Syntypes: Female, 0.19725 (formerly M.6923). Female, 0.19726 (formerly M6924). Both collected at Mt Scratchley, 12200 ft, PNG, 5 Oct. 1896, by ‘A, Giulianetti’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. De Vis had four specimens. One in spirit cannot be located, The other syntype is in the British Museum (Natural History) registered as BMNH 1898.10.10.3 (Warren and Harrison 1971), modesta — Acanthiza modesta de Vis, 1905, Ann. Od Mus. , 6:43. Syntypes: Male, 0.12113. Female, 0.12114. Both collected at Charleville, SWQ, Oct. 1885, by K, Broadbent. modesta — Laniprococeyx modesta Diggies, 1876. Brisbane Courjer, 5 Aug., p. 3. There-is no evidence that the holotype was part of the collection purchased from Diggles in 1876 by the = museum. The specimen was ‘shot with a boy's catapult’ at Norman’s Creek, near Captain Heath’s, Brisbane, SEQ. modesta — Paecilodryas modesta de Vis, 1894. Qd Parl. Pap., C.A. 93-1894; 101. Holotype: Female, 0.19785 (formerly: M.6868, T.51), Me Maneao, 5000 ft, PNG, 5 Apr. 1894, Collected by ‘W.E, Armit and R.E, Guise’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. montana — Cra/teroscelis montana de Vis, 1897. bis, (7)3: 387. Holotype: This specimen from Papua, PNG, which was a fledgeling stored in spirit, has not been located. It was presented by Sir William MacGregor. This name was suppressed under the plenary powers of the 1.C.2.N. (1963) for the purposes of priority but not for homonymy, after a submission by Mayr (1962). Mayr claimed the species was unidentifiable and that the type was lost. He gave no evidence to support either claim, Certainly his assertions were awry for two other of de Vis’s names also suppressed as a result of his submission (see Sericornis iyrannula and Meliornis schistacea). monticola — Murtia rronticola de Vis, 1897. This, (7)3: 387. Syntypes: Male, 0.19788 (formerly M.6448), 1 Oct. 1896 (‘16-28 Sep. 1896’). Female, 0.19789 (formerly M.6446), 28 Sep. 1896, Female, 0.19790 (formerly M.6447), 17 Sep. 1896. Female, 0.19791 (formerly M.6443), 16 Sep. 1896, [Male], 0.19792 (formerly M.6449, T.38). All collected at MI Scratchley, 12200 ft, PNG, by ‘A. Giulianetti’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. 0.19792 does not have a date of collection or an altitude but it was part of the same batch (Transfer 58) from MacGregor. One syatype, said to be in spirit, cannot be located. montium — Paramyihia moniium de Vis, 1892. Od Parl. Pap., C.A. 1-1892: 95, Holotype: Female, 0.19741 (formerly M.7298), ‘Disappointment Rock’, Mt Suckling, 6900 ft, PNG, ‘28 Jul. 1891". Presented by Sir William MacGregor, moretoni — Malures moretoni de Vis, 1892. Qd Parl,.Pup., C.A. 11-1892: 97, Holotype: Male, 0.19963 (formerly M.7119), Bartle Bay, PNG, 25 Jun. 1891 (‘15 Jun’), Presented by Sir William MacGregor. 248 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM murina — Gerygone murina de Vis, 1897. This, (7)3: 377. Syntype: Male, O.19786 (formerly M.6896), Mr Seratchley, 12200 fr, PNG, 6 Oct. 1896. Collected by ‘A. Giulianetti’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor, The other syntype, which was registered as M.6895 (female) from Mt Seratchley, 12200 fr, has not been located. nanus — Crclopsittacus nanus.de Vis, 1898. Vict. Parl, Pap., No. 23-5027: 81. Holotype: 0.19534 (formerly M.6743, T.68) ‘Wharton Range (?)', PNG. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. newtoniana — Prionodura newioniana de Vis, 1883, Prac, Linn, Soc, N.S. W,, (1)7: 562. Holotype: In 1888, the Queensland Museum was broken into and this specimen was stolen while on display (de Vis, 1889h). Jt was a young male, collected at Tully River Scrubs, NEQ, Sep. 1882, by K. Broadbent (Campbell, 1901; Broadbent, 1902). nigrifrons — Rhipidura nigrifrons de Vis, 1897. Ibis, (7)3: 374. Holotype: Male, ©.19781, (formerly M.6871), [Boirave], PNG, 24 Jul. 1896 (‘7 ful."), Collected by “A. Giulianert’, Presented by Sir William MacGregor. No locality was given but on 24 and 7 July, 1896, Giulianetti was at Boirave (see the entry for Drymaoedus brevirostris). nigripectus — Symmorphus nigripecius de Vis, 1894. Qd Parl. Pap., 93-1894: 102. Holotype: Male, ©.19842 (formerly M.7068, T.51), Mt Manezo, PNG. Collected by ‘W,E. Armit and R.E. Guise’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. nigropectus — Eulacestoma nigropectus de Vis, 1894. Od Parl. Pap. , 93-1894; 102. Holotype: Male, O,19763 (formerly M.6426, T.51), Mt Maneao, 5650 ft, PNG, 22 Apr. 1894, Collected by ‘WE. Armit and R.B. Guise’, Presented by Sir William MacGregor. nitida — Poecilodryas nitida de Vis, 1897, This, (7)3: 376. Holotype: Female, 0.19927 (formerly M.6865), Bairave, PNG, 14 Jul. 1896. Collected by ‘A. Giulianetti’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. obscura — Prilotis obscura de Vis, 1897, This, (7)3: 383. Holotype: This specimen has not been located. It was collected at Mt. Scratchley, PNG by A. Giulianetti and presented by Sir William MacGregor. De Vis noted that it was in bad condition. oreas — Rhipidura vreas de Vis, 1897. Ibis, (7)3: 375. Holotype: This spirit specimen from Papua, PNG, has not been located. Presented by Sir Wilhant MacGregor. orientalis — Nasitérna orientalis de Vis, 1898. Vici. Parl. Pap., No. 23-5027: 81. Syntype; 0.19566 (Formerly M.7165), ‘Wharton Range (7), PNG. Presented by Sir William MacGregor, The other syntype (spirit specimen from Vanapa Valley, PNG, Mar. 1897) has not been located. orientalis — Piilopus bellus orientalis de Vis, 1894. Qd Parl. Pap., C.A. 93-1894: 104. Syntypes: Male, 0.19202 (formerly T.5i1), Mt Maneao, 3450 ft, PNG, 19 Mar. 1894. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. [Male], 0.1920], inland of Port Moresby, PNG. Collected by Captain A. Musgrave. ornatus — Melirrhophetes ornatus de Vis, 1894. Qd Parl. Pap., C.A. 93-1894: 103. Syntypes: Female, 0.19812 (formerly M.6982, T.51), Mt Maneao, 3000 ft, PNG, 7 Apr. 1894. 0.19813 (formerly M,6984, T.51), Mt Maneao, '3000 ft’, PNG, 19 Mar. 1894. ‘Female’, 0.19814 (formerly M,7003,. T.51), Mt Maneao, ‘5000 It’ PNG, ‘Apr., 1894’. All collected by ‘W.E. Armit and R.E. Guise’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. pallida — Micraeca pallida de Vis, 1884. Prac. R. Soc, Od, 1: 159, Syntypes: Male, 0.14844, Female, 0.14845. Female, O, 14846. Female, 0.14847. All collected at Kimberley, NWQ, Jul, i884, by K. Broadbent. pallidipes — Zosterops pallidipes de Vis, 1890. Viet. Parl. Pap., No. 21-(28)-3598; 60, Holotype: Male, 0.19737 (formerly M.7112), Rossel Island, PNG. Presented by Sir William MacGregor, papuensis — Acanthiza papuensis de Vis, 1894. Qd Parl. Pap., C.A. 93-1894; 102. Holotype; AVIAN TYPE SPECIMENS 249 Male, O.19736 (formerly M.6438), Mt Maneao, 5650 ft, PNG, Apr. 1894. Collected by ‘W.E. Armit and R.E, Guise’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. papuensis — Merula papuensis de Vis, 1890. Vict. Parl. Pap., No. 21-(2S)-3598: 60. Syntype?: 0.19762 (formerly M.7113), ‘Mt Victoria’, PNG. Presented by Sir William MacGregor This specimen is without data but it agrees with de Vis’s description. On the label is written ‘Merula papuensis de Vis’ in his hand. If it is a syntype, there is still one subadult specimen missing. Iredale (1956, p. 4, pl. 23) apparently examined both of these syntypes. Unfortunately, his usage of the word ‘types’ was ambiguous in this work. Sometimes he meant ‘type specimens’ and sometimes he meant ‘kinds’. What he meant in his section on thrushes is uncertain. perstriata — Prilotus perstriata de Vis, 1898. Vict. Parl. Pap., No. 23-5027: 86. Holotype: Female (‘male’), 0.19948 (formerly M.6835, T.68), Wharton Range, PNG, Jul. 1897, Collected by [A. Giulianetti]. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. phasiana — Rhipidura phasiana de Vis, 1884. Proc. R. Soc, Qd, 1: 158. Holotype: 0.14848, Kimberley, NWQ, [Jul. 1884]. Collected by K. Broadbent. piperata — Ptilotus piperata de Vis, 1898. Vict. Parl. Pap., No. 23-5027: 86. Holotype: 0.19787 (formerly M.7152), Suku, Vanapa, PNG, 1897. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. prasina — Neneba prasina de Vis, 1897. Ibis, (7)3: 384. Holotype: Male, 0.19799, (formerly M.6884), Neneba, Mt Scratchley, 4000 ft, PNG, 9 Nov. 1896. Collected by ‘A. Giulianetti’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. pulechra — Macgregoria pulchra de Vis, 1897. Ibis, (7)3: 251. Syntypes: Male, 0.19724 (formerly M.6638, T.58), Mt Scratchley, 11000 ft, (‘21000 ft’), PNG, 6 Sep. 1896 (‘May 1896’). [Male], 0.19723 (formerly M.6640, T.58), Mt Scratchley, 12200 ft (‘21,000 ft’), ((May-1896’) PNG. Both collected by ‘A. Giulianetti’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. De Vis’s data was wrong: Mt Scratchley is not higher than 13000 ft and MacGregor ascended the mountain in September 1896 (MacGregor, 1898: 9). The third syntype is in the British Museum of Natural History (BMNH 1897.8.16.1). This is the specimen illustrated in de Vis (1897a, pl. 7). Warren and Harrison (1971) said there was another syntype in the BMNH but M. Walters (in /itt.) could not locate any specimen that was immediately recognizable as a second syntype. There was one old specimen, however, which had been a mount, but had no data. Sharpe (1906) listed only one specimen of M. pulchra as having been received from the Queensland Musuem. punctata — Micraeca punctata de Vis, 1894, Qd Parl. Pap., C.A. 93-1894: 101. Syntypes: Male, 0.19734 (formerly M.6903, T.51). Male, 0.19735 (formerly M.6902, T.51). Both collected at Mt Maneao, 5000 ft, PNG, Apr. 1894. Collected by ‘W.E. Armit and R.E. Guise’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. punctatus — Megalurus punctatus de Vis, 1897. Ibis, (7)3: 385. Holotype: Male, 0.19773 (formerly M.7075), Neneba, Mt Scratchley, 4000 ft, PNG, 10 Nov. 1896. Collected by ‘A. Giulianetti’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. rawnsleyi — Ptilonorhynchus rawnsleyi Diggles, 1867. Ornithology of Australia, Part XV, pl. 3. Chisholm (1965) stated that the holotype was in the Queensland Museum but had been lost. He implied that his information came from Iredale (1950), but Iredale did not mention the museum. In fact, there is no evidence the holotype was ever in that institution. The specimen was collected by H.C. Rawnsley at Witton, Brisbane, on 14 July, 1867. Rawnsley lent the specimen to John Gould who illustrated it (Gould, 1869, pl. 34). Marks (1965) cited a letter from Diggles to G. Masters in 1873 where Diggles said he thought the specimen was in the possession of Rawnsley’s widow. Ramsay (1875) wrote of the specimen but he did not indicate who owned it or where he examined it. Except for this information, nothing is known of the specimen. richardsi — Ptilopus richardsi Ramsay, 1882. Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W., (1)6: 722. Syntypes: Female, 0.20827 (formerly Australian Museum 250 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM A.11565). ©O.20828 (formerly Australian Museum A.11568). Both collected on Ugi, Solomon Islands, by A. Morton, in 1881. N.W. Longmore (pers. comm.) notes that Ramsay sent these syntypes to the Queensland Museum in 1883 as part of an exchange. robusta — Gerygone robusta de Vis, 1898. Vict. Parl. Pap., No. 23-5027: 84. Syntypes: Male, 0.19782 (formerly M.6826, T.68). Female, O.19932 (formerly A.6827, T.68). Both collected at Wharton Range, 11,100 ft, PNG, by [A. Giulianetti]. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. rosaalba — Strepera rosaalba de Vis, 1890, Vict. Parl. Pap., No. 21-(2S)-3598: 59. Holotype: Female, 0.19732 (formerly M.7156), Sudest Island, PNG, 8 Oct. 1888. Presented by Sir William McGregor. rufescens — Cracticus rufescens de Vis, 1883. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W,, (1)7: 562. Syntypes: These specimens have not been located. The syntypes were collected at Tully and Murray Scrubs, NEQ, 1882, by K. Broadbent. De Vis did not say how many specimens he had, but there were at least one male and one female. schistacea — Meliornis schistacea de Vis, 1897. Ibis, (7)3: 381. Holotype: 0.19745 (formerly M.7813). De Vis had no exact locality data for this specimen from Papua, PNG. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. The I.C.Z.N. (1963) suppressed Meliornis schistacea for the purposes of priority but not homonymy after a submission by Mayr (1962). Mayr’s submission was based on the grounds that the type was of uncertain identity and was apparently lost. Schodde (1978) pointed out that the type was in existence and that the suppression of the name was pointless. sclateriana — Amalocichla sclateriana de Vis, 1892. Qd Parl. Pap., C.A. 1-1892: 95. Holotype: 0.19795, Mt Owen Stanley, PNG, 1892. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. sibila — Colluricincla sibila de Vis, 1889. Proc. R. Soc. Qd, 5:161. Holotype: This specimen has not been located. It was collected at Herbert Vale, over the range behind Cardwell, NEQ, by K. Broadbent. Apparently two examples were seen but only one collected. sibisibina — Ptilotus sibisibina de Vis, 1897. Ibis, (7)3: 381. Syntypes: Male, O.19802 (formerly M.6974, T.58), 13 Jul. 1896. Female?, 0.19803 (formerly M.6975, T.58), 14 Jul. 1896. Female, 0.19804 (formerly M.6976, T.58), 14 Jul. 1896, Male, O.19805 (formerly M.6973, T.58), 24 Jul. 1896. All collected at Boirave, PNG, by ‘A. Giulianetti’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. sigillata — Paecilodryas sigillata de Vis, 1890. Vict. Parl. Pap., No. 21-(28)-3598: 59. Syntype: Immature, O.19752, Mt Victoria, 13000 ft, PNG. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. De Vis had one other specimen, an adult. 0.19751 matches his description but the specimen has no locality data. sigillifer — Lobospingus sigillifer de Vis, 1897. Ibis, (7)3: 389. Holotype: This spirit specimen from Papua, PNG, has not been located. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. sororcula — Pachycephala sororcula de Vis, 1897, Ibis, (7)3: 380. Holotype: ‘Male’, 0.20705. De Vis had no exact locality data for this specimen from Papua, PNG. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. This spirit specimen has been dried out and is now in the skin collection. squamata — Acanthiza squamata de Vis, 1889. Proc. R. Soc. Qd, 6: 248. Syntype: Male, 0.12075 (formerly C.63). Female, 0.12076 (formerly C.63). Both collected at Herberton, NEQ, May 1889 by K. Broadbent. The other male syntype was exchanged with G.M. Mathews and is now in the American Museum of Natural History. It is registered there as no. 600712 (M, Le Croy in litt.). strenua — Pachycephala strenua de Vis, 1898. Vict. Parl. Pap., No. 23-5027: 85. Holotype: 0.19783 (formerly M.6958, T.68), ‘Wharton Range (?)’, PNG. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. subcaudalis — Aeluroedus subcaudalis de Vis, 1897. Ibis, (7)3: 390. Holotype: This spirit specimen, which was collected at Mt Scratchley, PNG, has not been located. It was collected by A. Giulianetti and presented by Sir William MacGregor. AVIAN TYPE SPECIMENS 251 suheyanea — Poecilodryas subcyanea de Vis, 1897. This, (7)3: 377, Syntypes: 0.20699-20702. De Vis had no exact locality data for these specimens from Papua, PNG. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. These spirit specimens have been dried out and are now in the skin collection. sudestensis — Fopsaltria sudestensis de Vis, 1892. Qd Parl. Pap.,.C.A. 1-1892: 96. Holotype: This specimen, which was collected at Sudest, PNG, on 30 Jun. 1891, has not been located. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. sudestiensis — Geoeffrovus sudestiensis de Vis, 1890. Viet. Parl. Pap., No. 21-(28)-3598: 58, Holotype: This male spécinien, which was collected at Sudest Island, PNG, has not been located. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. susannae — Peradisea susannae Ramsay, 1883. Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S, W., (1)8 321. Syntype: N.W. Longmore (pers. comm.) notes thal Ramsay sent a syntype (Australian Museum A.14475) to the Queensland Museum in 1883 as part of an exchange. Lt has noi been located, The specimen (a male) was collected on the ‘Island of D’Entrecasteaux’ by ‘Mr. Rolles’. tyrannula — Sericornis tyrannula de Vis, 1905. Aan, Od Mus., 6:42. Holotype ?: 0.17905, no data on label. The holotype was supposedly collected at Charleville, SWQ, by K. Broadbent. Parker (1984) concluded that Sericarnis tyrannula was a junior synonym af Sericornis pyrrkopygius and that the type locality should be corrected to Maryland, SEQ, Parker also suggested thal 0.17905 may be the holotype, but doubt must remain. The name was suppressed for the purposes of priority but not homonymy by 1.0.Z.N., (1963) after a submission by Mayr (1962). Parker (/oc. cir.) described the suppression as regrettable. Mayr (1986) said the subsequent identification af §. /yrannula was nomenclaturally irrelevant, vicaria — Paecilodryas vicaria de Vis, 1892. Qd Parl. Pap., C.A. 1-1892: 94. Holotype: Male, 0.19776 (formerly M.7108), Mt Suckling, 6000-7000 ft, PNG, Jul, 1891, Presented by Sir William MacGregor. vinitinctus — Melithreprus vinitinclus de Vis, 1884. Proc. R. Sac. Od, 1: 159. Holotype: Male, 0.16371, Kimberley, NWQ, Jul. 1884, Collected by K, Broadbent. viridiceps — Neopsitiacus viridiceps de Vis, 1897, Ibis, (7)3: 371. Holotype: Female, 0.19551 (formerly M.6739), Mt Seratchley, 12200 ft, PNG, 5 Oci. 1896. Collected by ‘A, Giulianetti’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. viridigaster — Oreopsittacus viridigaster de Vis, 1898. Vict. Parl, Pap,, No. 23-5027: 81. Syntypes: Male, 0.19656 (formerly M.6785), 5 Oct. 1896. Female, 0.19657 (formerly M.6789), 28 Sep. 1896. Female, 0.19659 (formerly M.6787), 17 Sep. 1896, All collected at Mt Scratchley, 12200 ft, PNG, by ‘A. Giulianetti'. Male, 0.19651 (formerly M.6783, T.68). Male, 0.19652 (formerly M.6782, T.68). [Male], 0.19653 (formerly M.6781, 1.68). Female, 0.19654 (formerly M.6788, T.68). Male, 0.19655 (formerly M.6786, 7.68). Male, ©O.19709 (formerly M.6784, T,68). All collected at Wharton Range, 11 100 ft, PNG, Jul. 1897, by [A. Giulianetti], Presented by Sir William MacGregor. There are five syntypes missing: three spirit specimens from Mt Scratchley and two males from Wharton Range (one of which is immature). 0,19564 (formerly M,7212) is most likely the ‘missing’ immature male. De Vis’s date for the Mt Scratchley specimens was wrong — these were collected in 1896, not 1897. viridis — Monachella viridis de Vis, 1894, Od Parl, Pap,, C,A. 93-1894: 101. Syntypes: 0.19766 (formerly M.6823, T.51). 0.19769 (formerly M.7290, T.S1). 0.19770 (formerly M.6822, T.51), Female, 0.19771 (formerly M.6824, T.51). All collected at Mt Maneao, PNG. Collected by 'W.E. Armit and R.E. Guise’. Presented by Sir William MacGregor. walleri — Strix walleri Diggles, 1866. Ornithology in Australia, Part VIL, pl. 1, A specimen (O.11985), which has no locality data, was Originally labelled ‘Strix novaehollandiae’. On the reverse side of the label there is pencilled ‘walleri'. In the original card index system, the specimen is designated ‘a’ and therefore could be the first Grass Owl accessed, The specimen, 252 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM however, does not match either illustration in Gould (1869, pl. 1) or Diggles (1866). Diggles had examined a male and a female, both of which were in Eli Waller’s possession. Waller had shot them in the immediate neighbourhood of Brisbane, SEQ. At some stage, a specimen was sent on loan to Gould (Diggles 1875b). Other than this, nothing is known of the fate of the syntypes. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This paper could only be written after much detailed, sometimes tedious, research into Charles de Vis, Sir William MacGregor, and the collections of the Queensland Museum. Some of the results of those projects have yet to be published but, without the dedication of Mark Graham, Macquarie University, Sydney, and Wayne Longmore, Queensland Museum, those projects and this paper could not have been completed. For assistance with historical research I thank Donna Case, Lucille Crevola-Gillespie, Wayne Longmore, and the Librarians of the Parliaments of Queensland, Victoria, and New South Wales. For assistance with identification, I am grateful to Walter Boles, Australian Museum. I thank Jeanette Covacevich and Wayne Longmore for their comments on the manuscript. LITERATURE CITED BoLes, W.E, 1983. A taxonomic revision of the Brown Thornbill Acanthiza pusilla (Shaw) 1790 with description of a new subspecies. Emu 83(2): 51-8, pl. 1. (Sep. 1983). Botes, W.E. and LONGMoRE, N.W. 1983. A new subspecies of Treecreeper in the Climacteris leucophaea superspecies. Emu 83(4): 272-4, pl. 3. (Dec. 1983). BROADBENT, K. 1902, Field-notes on the birds of Bellenden-Ker, Queensland. /bis (8)2(7): 377-86. CAMPBELL, A.J. 1901. ‘Nests and eggs of Australian birds including, the geographical distribution of the species and popular observations thereon’. (The Author: Sheffield). 1102 pp, 28 pls. CHAFFER, N. 1984. ‘In quest of Bowerbirds’. (Rigby: Sydney). 108 pp. CHISHOLM, A.H. 1922. Bird seeking in Queensland. Part 2. Od Nat. 3(6): 115-24. 1965. Some Queensland ‘mystery birds’. Od Nat. 17: 87-90. CHISHOLM, A.H. and CHAFFER, N. 1956. Observations on the Golden Bower-bird, Emu 56(1); 1-39, pls 1- 5. CoLiiveR, F.S. 1960. An author index for the Proceedings of the Royal Society of Queensland 1884-1959, and the Transactions of the Queensland Philosophical Society 1859-1882. Proc, Roy. Soc. Od 71: 65-101. Conpbon, H.T. 1969. A new subspecies of the Western Grass-wren, Amytornis textilis (Dumont) in north- western Queensland. Mem. Qd Mus. 15(3): 205-6. (28 May 1969). Cow es, G.S. 1964. A new Australian babbler. Emu 64(1): 1-5, pl. 1. (Oct. 1964). De Vis, C.W. 1880a. The White-throated Gerygon. Queenslander, May 22, p. 650. (as ‘Thickthorn’). 1880b. Thickheads are very common in Queensland. Queenslander, July 31, p. 140. (as ‘Thickthorn’). 1880c. The Wonga-wonga. Queenslander, August 7, p. 172. (as ‘Thickthorn’). 1883. Description of two new birds of Queensland. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. (1)7(4): 561-563. (Apr. 1883), 1884. Notes on the fauna of the Gulf of Carpentaria. Proc. R. Soc. Qd 1: 154-160. (1884). 1885. Curator’s monthly report. Jn Queensland Museum. Brisbane Courier, November 7, p.9. 1887. On new or rare vertebrates from the Herbert River, north Queensland. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. W. (2)1 (4): 1129-37. (22 Feb. 1887). 1889a. Colluricincla sibila sp. nov. Proc. R. Soc. Od 5: 161-2. (1889). 1889b. Descriptions of two new vertebrates in Mr. Saville-Kent’s collection, Proc. R. Soc, Qd 6: 237- 9, pl. 14. (1889). 1889c. Descriptions of new birds from Herberton. Proc. R. Soc. Qd 6: 242-4, (1889). 1889d. Description of an Acanthiza from Herberton. Proc. R. Soc. Od 6: 248-9. (1889). 1889e. A new bird. Queenslander, March 30, p. 600. 1889f. Zoology of Bellenden-Ker, as ascertained by the late expedition under Mr. A. Meston. p. 20-35. In Meston, A., ‘Bellenden-Ker Range (Wooroonooran) North Queensland.’ Qd Parl. Pap. C.A, 95-1889, (Government Printer: Brisbane), 35 pp. (16 Oct. 1889). Reprinted in de Vis (1889g). 1889g. Zoology of Bellenden-Ker, as ascertained by the late expedition under Mr. A. Meston. p. 81-92. In Meston, A., ‘Report of the government scientific expedition to Bellenden-Ker Range upon the flora and fauna of that part of the colony.’ (Department of Agriculture: Brisbane). 127 pp. Reprinted from de Vis (1889f). 1889h. Annual report of the Curator to the Trustees of the Queensland Museum, p. 1-2. Jn ‘Queensland Museum’. Qd Parl. Pap. C.A. 17-1889. (Government Printer: Brisbane). 11 pp. 1890a, Appendix G, Report on birds from British New Guinea. p. 58-61. Jn ‘Annual Report on British New Guinea from 4 September, 1888, to 30 June, 1889; with map and appendieces.’ Vict. Parl. Pap. No. 21-(2S)-3598. (Government Printer: Melbourne). 68 pp, | map. (17 Jun. 1890). Reprinted in de Vis (1890b,c, 1891, 1898a). 1890b. Appendix G. Report on birds from British New Guinea. p. 57-62. /n ‘Annual Report on British New Guinea from 4 September, 1888, to 30 June, 1889; with map and appendices.’ Od Parl. Pap. C.A. 13-: 1890. (Government Printer: Brisbane). 69 pp, 1 AVIAN TYPE SPECIMENS 253 map. (24 Jun. 1890). Reprinted from de Vis (1890). 1890¢, Appendix G, Report on birds from British New Guinea. p. 105-116. 7a “British New Guinea: Report of the Administrator for the period 4 Seprember, (888, to 30 June, 1889; with a dispatch from the Secretary of State therson.' Coloriial Passessians Report Noa. 103. (Eyre and Spoltiswoode: Westminister). 132 pp, 5 maps, (12 Jul. 1890). Reprinted from de Vis (1890a), 1891. Report on birds from British New Guinea. és (6)3(9); 25-41. (Jan. 1891), Reprinted from de Vis (1889). (892a, Appendix CC, Report on the zoological gleanings of the Administration during the year 1890-1891. p, 93-98, pl. 1. i7 ‘Annual Report on British New Guinea from Ist July, 1890, to 30 June, 1891; with appendices.” Qd. Parl, Pap. C.A. \- 1892, (Government Printer: Brisbane). xxviii, 14% pp, I pl., 13 maps. (29 Mar. 1892). Reprinted in de Vis (1892b) and, in part, de Vis (1892c). 1892b, Appendix CC. Report on the zoological gleanings of the Administration during the year 1890-1891, p. 93-98, pld. Jn ‘Annual Report on British New Guinea trom | July, 1890 fo 30 June, 1891; with Appendices and maps.’ Viet. Parl. Pap, No, 58-3865. (Government Printer: Brisbane). xxvill, 149 pp, | pl, 13 maps, (12 May 1892). Reprinted from de Vis (1892a). 1892¢, Zoology of British New Guinea. Part 1. — Vertebrata. Ann. Od Mus. 2: 3-12. (May 1892). Reprinted, in part, from de Vis (1892a). 1894a. Appendix FE. Report on ornithological specimens collected i British New Guinea. p, 99- 105. Jn ‘Annual Report on British New Guinea from 1 July, 1893 to 30 Tune, 1894; with appendices.’ Od Parl. Pap, C.A. 93-1894. (Government Printer: Brisbane). xxxi, 131 pp, | pl,, 4maps. (1 Nov. 1894). Reprinted in de Vis (1894b), 1894b. Appendix EE. Report on ornithological specimens collected in British New Guinea, p. 99- 105. Jn ‘Annual Report on British New Guinea from 1 July, 1892 to 30 June, 1893; with appendixes.” Viet, Parl. Pap. No. 73-631, (Government Printer: Brisbane), xxxi, 131 pp. 1 pl., 4 maps. (1894). Reprinted from de Vis (1894a). 1895a. (1) Description of a fly-catcher, presumably new, Abs, Proc, Linn, Soc, N.S.W., April 24, p.i. (25 Apr. i895). 1895b. Description of a flycatcher, presumably new. Prac. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. (2)10(1): 171. (9 Sep. 1895), 1895c. (2) Description of a Tree Creeper presumably new. Abs, Proc, Linn. Soe. N.S. W., September 25, D1, (26 Sep. 1895). 1896, Description of a Tree Creeper presumably new, Proc. Linn. Sac. N.S. W. (2)10(4): 536. 1897a. Description of a new Bird of Paradise from British New Guinea. /bis (7)3(10): 250-42, pl. 7. (Apr. 1897). 1897b. Diagnoses of thirty-six new or little-known birds from British New Guinea, Jhis (7)3(11): 371- 92. (Jul. 1897). 1898a. Appendix W, Report on birds trom British New Guinea. p. 38-61, Jn ‘Annual Report on British New Guinea from 4 September, 1888, to 30 June, 1889; wih map and appendices, Reprinted with additional appendices.’ (Government Printer: Brisbane). xxvii, 72 pp, 1 map. (1898), Reprinted from de Vis (1890a). 1898b. Appendix AA. Report by C.W. de Vis, M.A., Curator, Queensland Museum, on birds for 1b96- 1897_ p. 81-90. Jn ‘Annual Report on British New Guinea from ! July, 1896, te 30 June, 1897; with appendices.’ Vict, Parl, Pep, No, 23-5027. (Government Printer! Melbourne). xxvi, 96 pp, 5 pls, S maps. (§ Jul. 1898). Reprinted in de Vis (1898c). 1898c. Appendix AA, Report on birds for 1896-1897. p. 81-90, Jn ‘Annual report on Briush New Guinea from 1 July, 1896 to 30 June, 1897: with appendives.' Od Parl. Pap. C.A. 6-1898, Government Printer: Brisbane. xxvi, 96pp, 7 pls, 5 maps. (26 Jul. 1898). Reprinted from de Vis (1898b). 1901. Description of a Charniasinapsis. Ann. Od Mus, §; 12-13, pl, 8, (Jan. 1901). 1905, Ornithological. 47m. Qd Mus. fi: 41-5. (Sep. 1905). DicG.es, 8, 1866. Ornithology of Australia, Part VIL, 6 pls. (The Author: Brisbane). (1866). Reprinted in Diggles (1879). 1867, Ornitholovy of Australia. Part XV, 6 pls. (The Author: Brisbane). (1867). Reprinted in Diggles (1879), 1875a. Birds of Australia. -V. Queens/ander, May 8, p. 7. 875b. Birds of Australia. -VI. Queenslander, May 22, p. 6. 1876, Some new and rare species of birds, Brishare Courier, August 5, p. 3. Reprinted in Diggles (1877). 1877. Some new and rare species of birds, Trans, Od Phil. Soc. 2; 9-12 (1877). Reprinted from Diggles {1876), 1879. ‘Companion to Gould's Handbook or, synopsis of the birds of Australia’. Vol. 1, pls 1-59. Vol. 2, pls 60-122, (Thorne and Greenwell: Brisbane). PLeTcuer, J.J. 1896. On the dates.of publication of the early volumes of the Society’s Proceedings. Prac. Linn. Soe, N.S. W’. (2)10(4): 533-6. Forn, J. 19K1. Evolution, distribution and stage of speciation in the Rhipidura fuliginose complex in Australia. Emi 81(3): 128-44. (Jun, 1981), 1983, Speciation in the Ground-thrush complex Zoothera danma in Australia. rw 83(3): 141-51 Gouro, J. 1869, ‘The Birds of Ausiralia’, Supplement. (The Authar: London). 81 pls. 1874. Letter concerning the existence of a new parrar in Queensland. Proc. Zool. Sec. Lond, 1874; 499- 300. (3 Nov. 1874). 1875. ‘The birds of New Guinea and adjacent islands, including any new species that may be discovered in Australia’. Part |, 13 pls. (The Author: London). GREGORY, AC, 1877, ‘Report of the trustees of the 254 MEMOIRS OF THE QUEENSLAND MUSEUM Queensland Museum for the year 1876'.. (Government Printer; Brisbane). 3pp. INGRAM, GJ. 1986a. Annals of the Queensland Museum: Bibliography and index of new taxa. Mert. Od Mus. 22(2): 313-8. 1986b, ‘Thickthorn’ and his birds. Sunbird 6(2): 25- 32. 1986c. Scales, feathers and fur: Vertebrate Zoology. Mem, Od Mus, 24: 151-71, 340-41. International Commission on Zoological Nomenclature. 1963. Opinion 684, Eleven dubious specific names of birds: Suppressed under the plenary powers, Bull. Zaoal. Nomencl. 20(6): 418-20. TREDALE, T. 1950. ‘Birds of Paradise and Bower Birds’. (Georgian House: Melbourne). 239 pp, 33 pls. 1956. “Birds of New Guinea’. Vol. 2, (Georgian House: Melbourne). 261 pp, 35 pls, | map. Joyer, R.B. 1971. ‘Sir Wiliam MacGregor’. (Oxford University Press: Melbourne), 484 pp, 14 pls. Le Souer, D. 1897. Descriptions of some new or little- known bird's-eggs from Queensland, [bis (7)3(11): 392-9. (Jul, 1897). 1910. Descriptions of a new Queensland Lorikect. Emu W(3): 204-205. (1 Dec, 1910). Lonomore, N.W. and BoLtes, W.E, 1983. Description and systematics of the Eungella Honeyeater Meliphaga hindwoodi, a new species of honeyeater trom central easlern Queensland, Australia, Eon %3(2): 59-65, pls 1-2. (Sep, 1983). MacGreoor, W. 1898. Appendix C. Dispatch reporting ascent of Mambare River and journey across the island. pp. 4-16. Jv ‘Annual Report on British New Guinea from {st July, 1896, to 30th June, 1897’. Od Parl. Pap. C.A. 6-1898. (Goyernment Printer: Brisbane). xxvi, 96 pp, 5 pls, 5 maps. Mack, G. 1956. The Queensland Museum. Ment, Od Mus. 13(2): 107-124, pl. 3. Marks, E.N. 1965, Notes on Diggles ‘Ornithology of Australia’, Od Nat, 17: 99-102. MATHEWS, G.M. 1917. Silvester Diggles, Ornithologist. Austral Avian Records 3(4): 98-108, pl.1. 1930. ‘Systema Ayium Australasianarum’, Part 2. pp. 427-1048. (British Ornithologists’ Union: London). 1934, Nomenclatorial notes. fis (13) 4 (3); 640-41. 194], Two new subspecies of birds collected by Dr. Scott at Cape York. Emu 40(4): 384. (1 Apr. 1941). 1942, New forms of Australian birds. J. R. Soc. WA. 27: 77-8. (12 Feb. 1942). Mayr, E. 1962. Eight dubious species of birds; Proposed use of the plenary powers to place rhese names on the Official Index. Bull. Zoo]. Nomencl. 19(1): 23- 6 1986. Acanthizidae. fn Mayr, E. and Cottrell, G.W. (Eds), ‘Check-list of Birds of the World’. Vol. 11 pp. 409-64, (Museum of Comparative Zoology: Cambridge, Massachusetts). Mees, G.F. 1964. Geographical variation and distribution of some birds from Western Australia. JR. Soc. WA, A1(3): 91-6. Meson, A, 1889. The fauna of Wooroonooran, Queenslander, December 7, p. 1080. Nortu, A.J. 1895. Preliminary descripnans of a new genus and of five oew species of central Australian birds. /bis (7)1(3); 339-42. (Jul. 1895). 1897. Jn Notes and exhibits, Proc. Linn, Soc, N.S. W. 22(3): 444. (11 Feb, 1897). 1903, ‘Nests and eggs of birds found breeding in Austraha and Tasmania’, Vol. 1, pt 3, p. 121-201, pls A2-A4. (Australian Museum: Sydney). 1906, ‘Nests and eggs of birds found breeding in Australia and Tasmania’. Vol, 2, pt 1, p. [-105, pls A.9-A.IL, B.VU, B.EX. (Australian Museum: Sydney). Parker, S.A. 1984, The identity of Sericornis tyrannule de Vis. Bin $4(2); 108-110. Precoticu, L. 1982. Speciation of the Grey Swiftlet Aerodraius spodiopygius. Tawer Karst Occasional Paper 4: 53-7, (Aug. 1982). Ramsay, E.P. 1875. Notes on the original specimen of Prilonarhynchus rawnsleyi, Prac, Zvol. Soc. Lend. 1875: 69-7), 1879a. Jn Notes. on the fauna of the Solomon Islands. Nature 20(501): 125-6, (5 Jun, 1879). [879b. Notes on the zoology of the Solomon Islands. Part 1 — Aves. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. (1)4( 1): 65-84. 1882. Notes on the zoology of the Solomon Islands, with descriptions of some new birds. — Part 3. Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S. A’. (1)6(4): 718-27. (20 Mar- 1882). 1883, Contributions to the zoology of New Guinea, Part VIL. Prac. Linn. Sac. N.S. W. (1)8 (1): 15=29. (Juri. 1883). ScHoppe, R, 1978. The identity of five type specimens of New Guinean Birds. Emmy 78(1): 1-6. ScuaTer, P.L. and SAUNDERS, H. 1897. Jn de Vis, C.W., Description of a new Bird of Paradise from British New Guinea. Jbis (7)3(10): 250-52, pl. 7. (Apr. 1897). SHARPE, R.B. 1906. Birds. p. 79-515. J ‘The history of the collections contained in the Natural History Departments of the British Museum’. Vol. 2. (British Museum: London). 782 pp. Warren, R,L.M, 1966, ‘Type-specimen of birds in the Briush Museum (Natural History)’. Vol. 1. Non- Passerines. (British Museum (Natural History): London). 320 pp, WarkREN, R.L, and Haarison, C.J.0. 197L. ‘Type- specimens of birds in the British Museum (Natural History)', Vol. 2. Passerines, (British Museum (Natural History): London). 628 pp, WEATHERILL, W.E. 1908, Description of a new Pseydogerygane fram south-cast Queensland. Od Nat. 1(3): 74-5. (30 Sep. 1908). Wuittett, H.M. 1954. ‘The literature of Australian birds: a history and a bibliography of Australian ornithology”. (Patersan Brokensha: Perth), /66 pp, 788 pp, 32pls. CONTENTS GILL, J.C.H. The diary of William Frederic Barnett in search of Leichhardt .............0:ccecescecesceeseesensecseevesesensnes 1 CANNON, L.R.G., GOEDEN, G.B. AND CAMPBELL, P. Community patjerns revealed by trawling in the inter-reef regions of the Great Barrier Reef ...............2+0+ 45 Hooper, JOHN N.A. New records of Acarnus Gray (Porifera : Demospongiae : Poecilosclerida) from Australia, Swlthir Ay SUTIEI sine CEP E MU Se rt ce sete taeda eewni va ty anaisereeuain thie ecia wee ra eneboete noe vatababeaanerrant sie 71 MaAuriés, JEAN-PAUL Craspedosomid millipedes discovered in Australia: Reginaterreuma, Neocambrisoma and Peterjohnsia, new genera (Myriapoda : Diplopoda : Craspedosomida) ................ccccereoreceececceccucencecseveuseeucs 107 BAEHR, MARTIN b Revision of the Australian Zuphiinae, 2. Colasidia monteithi sp. nov. from north Queensland, first record of the tribe Leleupidiini in Australia (Insecta : Coleoptera : Carabidae).................0c0008 135 Rortu, Louis M. The genus Neolaxta Mackerras (Dictyoptera : Blattaria : Blaberidae)...............cseeccsssccsvesssecccescceencs 14] Rortn, Louis M. The genus Tryonicus Shaw from Australia and New Caledonia (Dictyoptera : Blattaria : Blattidae : Tryomicinae) ..........s.cccsnesecsdecccretscvescssseceueuserecacrorarees 151 KonouT, RuDotr, J. Three new Polyrhachis sexspinosa — group species from the Philippines (Hymenoptera : Formicidae) ....... 169 LEES, T. AND BARTHOLOMAI, A. Study of a Lower Cretaceous actinopterygian (Class Pisces) Cooyoo australis from Ween SANG A VStAl als S eaeswhs ov letsauiravamaiinneneaas Mauuaeasaan MertGeetadvaneD are apscrtesiecntaen sign cexetten 177 TURNER, SUSAN AND LONG, JOHN ALBERT Lower carboniferous palaeoniscoids (Pisces : Actinopterygii) from Queensland ...........e.ceceesscesesscsseees 193 TURNER, SUSAN AND ROZEFELDS, ANDREW First Jurassic actinopterygian fish from Queensland..............ccscsececsucccceseccecescenceccessscvesecesceeuenes 201 Ricn, PAT V., VAN TETS, G.F., RICH, T.H.V. AND McEvEyY, A.R. The Pliocene and Quaternary flamingoes of Australia ..............ccscsceceeecerececracccncccseescececserseuensees 207 DAvIE, P.J.F. A new species and new records of Portunus (Decapoda : Portunidae) from northern Australia................ 227 CorBEN, C.J. AND INGRAM, G.J. A new barred river frog (Myobatrachidae : Mixophyes) ..........ccscsccscevcecenesceseecceceuceseecssusecscasesens 233 INGRAM, GLEN J. Avian type specimens in the Queensland Museum ............scscescecseescencetencerceceseccestersesunceunescnceas 239